Technical Bid Dindoli r3 Part 2

The direction of travel of the actuator may be reversed without first stopping the unit; this
facility being available in either the “Local” or “Remote” mode.
JAMMED VALVE PROTECTION:
In the event of jammed valve the control circuit will automatically switch off power to the
motor.
ESD (EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN):
Whenever ESD signal will be applied to actuator the controller will override existing signals
and if the actuator is in remote mode the valve will move to pre-selected shutdown position.
ANTI HAMMER PROTECTION:
Once a torque switch has operated the control circuit prevents energisation of the contractors in
the same direction until a signal in the reverse direction has been applied.
DRAWINGS:
1. Tenderer must mention the model and make of each item in the technical bid with necessary
technical details. Failing to this price bid will not be opened.
2. Contractor shall have to provide detailed drawings, detailed designing, detailed of Actuator
(make, model no, rated torque etc.), details of gear box, MOC of equipments, Drawings of
control panel etc. and same shall be got approved from SMC before execution.
TESTS AND INSPECTION:
The following drawing shall be submitted approved during detail engineering.

1. Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be provided.
The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters
should be recorded.
x Current at max. torque setting
x Torque at max. torque setting
x Test voltage and Frequency.
x Flash test voltage
x Actuator output speed or operating time.
2. In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification such as gear ratios for
both manual and automatic drive, closing direction, wiring diagram code number and , when
applicable, remote position transmitter signal range.
3. The certificates should clearly indicate the model for which testing has been done.
4.
FOLLOWING TO BE SUPPLIED/SUBMITTED AFTER THE AWRD OF

CONTRACT:
1. Each actuator shall be supplied with a start-up kit comprising any necessary special setting
tools, installation instructions, electrical wiring diagram and sufficient spare cover screws
and seals to make good site losses during the commissioning period.
Page 301
SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

2. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached
to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating:-
a) Serial number
b) External voltage values
c) Wiring diagram
d) Terminal layout.
3. MANUAL:
The system must be provided with 3 sets of operational manual along with all required
drawings for further maintenance work.
ITEM NO.7 : AIR BLOWERS FOR DIFFUSED AERATION SYSTEM
SCREW TYPE AIR BLOWER
Air blower shall be designed to perform satisfactorily under specify start up condition, max.
Differential pressure operation and relief valve setting pressure and up to trip speed. All the
compressor casing shall be air cooled type.
Air blower shall consist of the following accessories:
¾ Screw Blower with special coating screws.

¾ Lubricating system: Splash Lubrication
¾ Base support with suction filter, and reactive suction silencer integrated. There should
not be any absorptive material used in Silencer.
¾ Belt drives transmission POLY-V type.
¾ Discharge silencer.
¾ VSM Relief Valve.
¾ Check valve.
¾ Electric cabinet for auxiliary power supply.
¾ Acoustic sound enclosure with hot air extraction fan.
Gas: AIR
Spec.Weight (Kg/m3): 1.08
Capacity at discharge (m3/h): As per datasheet
Dif.Press. (mbar): As per datasheet
Inlet Press.(mbar a): 1007
Outlet Pres.(mbar a): As per design
Dif.Temp. (°C): Vendor to Specify
Inlet Ambient. (°C): 40
Outlet Temp. (°C): Vendor to Specify
Noise Level Dba: 85 ± 3%
Shaft Power (kW): Vendor to Specify
Speed (rpm): As per design requirement
Motor IEC: Vendor to Specify.
Power (kW): Vendor to Specify
Voltage (V): 415+/- 10%
Page 302

Poles: Vendor to Specify
Frequency (Hz): 50
Turn Down Ratio % ge of
full capacity at rater pressure: Vendor to Specify
Tolerance: Capacity ± 5%, Shaft Power ± 5%
Material of construction of various part of the air blower shall be as under:
Casing Cast Iron UNI-EN 1651 G250

Rotors Carbon Steel C40 EN 10083/1 with Teflon Coating
Gears UNI-EN 10084 18 NiCrMo5
Shaft Steel C40 EN 10083/1
Base Frame High Strength Steel Plate
All the necessary accessories and protections of compressor etc. are to be provided which are
helpful to smooth running of the process of the plant.
Detailed Technical Specification:
1) Screw Air Blower: The blower should be Air Cooled, low speed and highly energy
efficient. Rotor RPM should not exceed more than 2500 RPM of Bare Screw Blower. The
rotors should designed with Wide-diameter shaft to reduce the deformation caused by internal
and external loads, thereby ensuring the blower to work efficiently even in harsh condition.
The bearing should be designed considering increased life time and the seals used on conveyed
gas side and lubricating oil side should be “Wear Free”.
2) High Efficiency and High Reliability Bet Drive: The belt drive must be designed
keeping in mind auto-tensioned arrangement which helps belt to take care of elongation happen
at later stage. Poly-V Belt Drive or better than this belt drive is recommend to reduce flapping
issue.
3) Motor with Self-tensioning System: All Blowers units needs to be shipped with the
motor mounting system locked, preventing vibration and stress on bearing and belt during
handling/freight. TO achieve the correct belt tension, locking plates have to be removed when
commissioning screw Blower.
4) Noise Enclosure: The noise enclosure is designed with optimized Air passages and
sound reduction capacity. Once installed, the enclosure is completely separate from the blower
so there is no transmission of vibration moves to enclosure body. Fresh Air circulation inside
the enclosure keeps the operation temperature cool, provides greater efficiency with normal
operation. Electric Motor driven cooling fan must be located to the blower air end and
discharge silencer are which is the warmest area of enclosure to dissipate the heat from noise
enclosure. Noise enclosure must be equipped with doors and key-lockers for ease of
maintenance and allow the installation of additional units side-by-side.
5) Lubrication System: Splash Lubrication system to be used in Bowers. Should simple,

compact with minimal maintenance.
6) Inlet and Discharge Silencers :

Page 303

Inlet Silencer: The suction side silencer should be reactive in nature i.e. there should not be
any adsorptive material used. The design of silencer should be such that it should accommodate
filter inside. The filter used should be cartridge type for ease of maintenance.
Discharge Silencer: Adsorptive discharge silencer in accordance with the Directive 97/23/CE
(PED) as in line accessories, combining the most effective noise reduction with no contact
between the air and the sound absorbing material.
7) Relief Valve: VSM Relief Valve with an automatic actuator for optimum accuracy and
reliability, the emergency relief valve protect the blower and its components in case of
clogging of discharge pipelines or accidental pressure spikes in the plant / process. The valve
should be designed in such way if there is modulation pressure requirement than by adding
bypass valve in line the requirement can be meet. Also Valve should help in reduction in
starting torque by gradually opening the valve to the system.
8) Immediate Oil Level Check: The blower should have provision to check indicative oil
level on the Noise Enclosure.
9) Instrumentation: The blower must come with clogging gauge for suction filter and
discharge pressure gauge.
10) Control Panel : The blower must be supplied with control panel having below
features :
¾ Suction Pressure
¾ Discharge Pressure
¾ Oil Level Sensor
¾ Emergency Stop
¾ Start & Stop
Possibility of RS485 Modbus communication of Data
TURBO AIR BLOWER
Air blower shall be capable of operating continuously and satisfactory at all design points
mentioned in the tender without surge, vibration, hunting or excessive heating of the blower
equipment
Air blower shall consist of the following accessories:
¾ Single / Multi stage Centrifugal Turbo Blower

¾ Air Cooled Motor
¾ Base frame and fabricated acoustic enclosure supplied with noise attenuating media
¾ Pneumatically operated Blow-off Valve and integral Blow-off Valve Silencer
¾ Discharge check valve and discharge expansion joint
¾ Inlet air filters
¾ Local control panel
Gas: AIR
Capacity at discharge (m3/h) : As per datasheet
Dif.Press. (mbar) : As per datasheet
Page 304

Inlet Press.(mbar a) : 1007
Outlet Pres.(mbar a) : As per design
Dif.Temp. (°C) : Vendor to Specify
Inlet Ambient. (°C) : 40
Outlet Temp. (°C) : Vendor to Specify
Noise Level Dba : 85 ± 3%
Shaft Power (kW) : Vendor to Specify
Speed (rpm) : Vendor to Specify
Motor IEC : Vendor to Specify.
Power (kW) : Vendor to Specify
Voltage (V) : 415 ± 10%
Poles : Vendor to Specify
Frequency (Hz) : 50
Turn Down Ratio % ge of
full capacity at rater pressure : Vendor to Specify
Tolerance : Capacity ± 5%, Shaft Power ± 5%
All the necessary accessories and protections of Air Blower etc. are to be provided which are
helpful to smooth running of the process of the plant.
Detailed Technical Specification:
1.01 ENCLOSURE
A. Each blower should come with enclosure.

B. Enclosure shall be capable of attenuating noise levels emitted from the package to
eighty five(85) dBA at one (1) meter distance from the package ± three (3) dBA, free
field. Noise attenuation of the discharge piping, silencers and inlet piping (if
applicable) shall be the responsibility of the OWNER.
C. Blower shall be mounted on a sturdy steal base frame with forklift slots on each of the
four (4) sides and four (4) suitably sized eye bolts welded to the enclosure allowing the
unit to be placed on any level floor capable of taking the weight of the unit, no
foundation or fixation should be required.
D. Enclosure shall be designed for ease of inspection and maintenance of all blower
system components. Hinged or removable panels shall provide access to the blower and
the auxiliary systems. Doors shall have a welded, reinforced perimeter frame and a
welded support structure to prevent sagging or misalignment.
1.02 ELECTRICAL
A. Blower will be given 415 Volt (V), 3 Phase, 50 Hertz (Hz) power connection.
B. Blower should be compatible with External VFD.
C. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
1. VFD shall be provided in separate canopy.
2. Make of VFD – ABB / Siemens / Danfoss
3. VFD shall provide means for manual operations, data access and troubleshooting.
4. VFD shall include all features necessary for self-protection and for protection of the
connected motor.
Page 305

5. VFD shall have remote communications capabilities utilizing MODBUS protocols
or equal.
6. VFD shall be selected and sized for proper operation with the specified blower
motor.
7. All adjustments, settings and programming shall be performed by the SUPPLIER or
VFD supplier.
D. Motor
1. Blower shall be equipped with a 415 Volt (V), 3 Phase, 50 Hertz (Hz),
2. Motor shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient air temperatures up to
50°C.
3. Motor shall have an insulation rating no less than Class H , Temperature Class B.
4. Motor shall be capable of operation at the rated voltage with a variance of ± Ten
(10) percent of the nameplate frequency.
5. Motor shall be capable of continuous operation at full load and rated frequency with
a voltage variance of ± five (5) percent of the nameplate voltage
6. Motor shall be suitable for VFD operation.
1.03 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL (LCP)
A. The blower LCP shall be PLC/Microprocessor based with processor The LCP shall be
mounted in the electrical enclosure.
B. LCP shall be supplied with suitable power connection. LCP shall contain all
instruments and equipment provided as part of the blower package.
C. LCP shall have an emergency stop button so that in the event of an emergency, this
button could be used to stop the blower immediately.
D. LCP shall perform the following functions:
1. Monitor and display all temperature, pressure, and vibration data readings.
2. Shutdown blower and report conditions regarding temperature, vibration or surge
endanger the blower or drive.
3. Modulate (increase/ decrease) blower flow as commanded by the MCP.
4. Report to MCP all status indicators including:
a. Run status (On/ Off)
b. Not available (Locked out or Failed)
c. Speed (RPM)
1.04 SURFACE PREPERATION AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Machine carbon steel or iron surfaces that are not painted shall be protected by coating
with a corrosion-resistant compound.
B. Enclosures shall be prepared and powder coated on all interior and exterior surfaces
with the manufacturers standard powder coating and standard color.
1.05 FACTORY PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Performance Testing
Page 306

1. Upon completion of assembly, the blower package unit(s) shall be performance
tested. If required by the OWNER, the test shall be witnessed by a representative of
the OWNER at the expense of the OWNER or Bidder. The witnessing party shall
sign, stamp and date the test procedure and results, certifying that the assembled
systems were tested together, as a system, in the SUPPLIER’s facility.
2. Performance test should be in accordance to ASME PTC-10
3. Functional testing of entire package, instrumentation, ancillary components, and
LCP shall also be performed.
4. All test equipment shall be calibrated and certified by an independent test agency no
more than twelve (12) months prior to the test date.
5. The measurement of power consumption with the power meter shall be measured
with all of the components inside the enclosure and all doors closed as the normal
operation condition.
6. Test Report shall present computations in accordance with the appropriate section
or testing codes with performance curves showing flow, pressure and power inputs.
7. Test Report shall be submitted for approval prior to equipment shipment.
B. The following practice shall be performed to ensure and verify performance guarantees.
1. System Description: For the purposes of determining overall power consumption

(power to package) the system shall consist of a blower, motor, variable speed
drive, filters, and air cooling system to cool motor and the inverter including
external piping, wiring, instrumentation and appurtenances up the point of
connection to the OWNER’s equipment.
2. Blower unit(s) shall be capable of operating continuously at any point between the
minimum and the maximum flows without surge, vibration, idling or excessive
heating.
Test Report shall include a certified factory test performance curve showing flow and pressure
at 100%, 70% and 50% of full speed. Factory test curve shall also include curves for package
demand power.
ITEM NO.8 : SUBMERSIBLE TYPE PUMPS
The total head / capacity curve shall be continuously rising towards the shut off with the
highest at shut off. Pump shall be suitable for single as well as parallel efficient operation at any
point in between the maximum and minimum system resistances. The pump shall be designed
to handle solid size of upto 65mm. Pump shall run smooth without under noise and vibration.
The pump set shall be suitable for starting with discharge valve open and/or closed. The pump
set shall be capable of withstanding the accidental rotation in reverse direction.
Pump shall be submersible, centrifugal, vertical spindle, nonclog, wear resisting, and single
stage type. Pump casing shall be of robust construction. Liquid passages shall be finished
smooth and designed as to allow free passage of solid. The volute tongue shall be filed to a
smooth round edge. Double mechanical seals shall be provided to protect the motor from
ingress of sewage along the shaft. The preliminary and secondary seals shall be oil-lubricated
with tungsten carbide or silicon-carbide faces and they shall be equipped with and electrical
monitoring system for seal failure detection. Impeller shall be non-clog enclose type with
smooth blunt edges and large water way so as to allow free passage of the large size solid. It
Page 307

shall be free from sharp corner and projection likely to catch and hold rage and stringy
materials. The critical speed of the rotor shall be at least 30% above the operating speed. Pump
set shall have double bearings. The bearing life shall be minimum 40,000 hrs of operation.
Each pump shall be complete with a cast iron delivery connection arrangement for fixing to the
concrete floor of the suction well. The joint between the pump discharge flange and the
delivery piping shall be made by merely lowering the pump into guide rails/rope from access
level. It shall be provided with all necessary fixing for guiding the pumps during
lifting/lowering. Each pump shall be provided with a stainless steel lifting chain conforming to
BS 1663 and BS 4942. Each pump shall be providing with an automatic coupling device for
attaching the crane hook to the pump is submerged, without the need for personnel to enter the
well. This automatic coupling device shall easily and automatically couple and uncouple the
hoist hook and be complete with necessary accessories. All links and cables shall be
multi-stranded stainless steel.
The pump parameters of the submersible pump shall be as follows
The materials of construction for submersible pumps shall be as follows:
Component Material
Impeller Stainless steel : ASTM A 743 CF8M
Casing Cast Iron to IS:210 Gr FG 200 with 1.5
to 2% Nickel
Shaft Stainless Steel : BS:970 Gr 410
Guide rail pipe Stainless Steel : BS:970 Gr 304
Fasteners and Foundation Bolts Stainless Steel : BS:970 Gr 304
Material test certificates shall be furnished by the contractor
a Induction Motor (Submersible Pump)
The submersible motor shall conform to IS: 9283:1979 and the submersible cable shall
conform to clause no. 4.4 of the IS: 9283:1979. Motor shall be capable of giving rated output
without reduction in the expected life span when operated continuously under the following
supply conditions:
i Variation of supply voltage from rated motor voltage 10%
ii Variation of supply frequency from rated frequency 5%
iii Combined voltage and frequency Variation 10%
The starting current of motor shall not exceed 200% of rated full load current for
star/delta starting. Under any circumstances motors shall be suitable for full voltage star-delta
starting. Motor shall be capable of starting and acceleration the load with the applicable method
of starting, without exceeding acceptable winding temperature, when the supply voltage is in
the range 85% of the rated motor voltage to maximum permissible voltage. The locked rotor
current of the motor shall not exceed 600% of full load current (subject to tolerance as per the
applicable standard) unless otherwise specified. Motors shall be designed to withstand 120% of
rated speed for two minutes without any mechanical damage, in either direction of rotation.
The motor vibration shall be within the limit specified in applicable standard unless otherwise
Page 308

specified for the driven equipment. Except as mentioned herein, the guaranteed performances
of the motor shall be met with tolerances specified in applicable standards, IS 9283-1979.
protection against increase in stator winding temperature (15OC) bearing temperature, leakage
in stator housing and terminal box shall be provided. Minimum three number thermostats in
series are to be provided to sense the stator winding temperature. Sensors are to be provided to
detect if leakage of sewage into the oil housing is above 30% concentration. Bimetallic thermal
switch to trip the motor against increase in temperature shall be provided.
The power rating of the motor shall be larger of the following:
¾ 115 % of the maximum power input at any point on entire performance curve of the pump
at rated speed.
b Submersible Cable
The cable shall be flexible multi strand, copper rubber cable with sheath of chloroprene sealed
over its length. The size of the conductor shall be adequate for continuous use under water and
air. The half core shall be used for earthing. The control cable shall be PVC insulated PVC
sheathed, flexible, flat type and shall be adequate for continuous use under water and air. The
control cable for stator winding temperature sensor (Thermostats) 3 core X 2.5 sq.mm copper
conductor and for bimetallic thermal switch 2 core X 2.5 sq.mm copper conductor shall be
provided. The size of the conductor and length of cable should be suitably selected so that the
voltage drop at motor terminals does not exceed 3 percent of the rated voltage. Earthing of the
motors shall be done in accordance with the relevant provisions of IS: 3043:1966. for the
purpose of earthing these motors, earthing connection may be made to discharge pipe.
Any joints in the motor insulation such as at coil connection or between slot and end winding
section, shall have strength equivalent to that of the slot section of the coil. The insulation shall
be given tropical and fungicidal treatment for successful operation of the motor in hot, humid
and tropical climate. The tropical sing treatment shall be as per the applicable standard. The
stator winding shall made from high conductivity annealed copper conductor, PVC insulated
winding wires conforming to IS: 8783:1978 for wet type motors. The stator winding shall be of
high conductivity annealed copper enameled insulated wires conforming to IS: 4800(part-VII):
1970 for dry type motors.
The temperature-rise test of the motor shall be taken with the motor coupled to the suitable
pump to give the full load output the motor. When the various temperatures are stabilized, the
set is stopped and the temperature-rise of the stator winding by the resistance method shall no
exceed 350C. As the cable resistance method, due care is taken to account for the correct hot
and cold resistance of windings.
The motor shall be suitable for continuous use in fully or partially submerged condition. A built
in cooling system must allow the motor to operate continuously at its rated output regardless of
whether the electric motor is submerged or not, by providing either external or internal cooling
arrangement.
Terminal box shall be of weatherproof construction to eliminate entry of water and dust. The
terminal shall be the stud type with necessary plain washer, spring washers and check nuts.
They shall be substantially designed for the current carrying capacity and shall ensure ample
phase to phase to ground clearance.
Page 309

This item includes the pump, pump motor, SS bellow (with sleeve), pressure gauge,
necessary C.I. fitting, pipes etc. in side the pump house. Pump set and accessories shall be
fitted with delivery gate / non return valve in side the pump house.
It should be very clearly noted that duty conditions i.e. discharge and head as specified must be
achieved at the available speed of motor running at full load under specified supply condition
mentioned. No allowance / calculations shall be permitted to compute discharge / head at a
particular speed. The specified discharge and head must be available at site at actual speed of
motor / pump and not to be computed from designed parameter. No relaxation in this regard
permitted.
ITEM NO. : 9 : C.I. FITTINGS & SPECIALS
1. SCOPE
The scope includes manufacture, delivery at site, storage at site, installation, testing and
commissioning of double flanged cast iron pipe with fittings, specials including all flanged
crosses, bands, duck foot bends, flanges, nuts, bolts and gaskets for all pumping stations.
2. GENERAL:
1. The cast iron pipes shall generally conform to Class B IS: 1537 / IS: 1536 /IS: 7181/
IS-1538 (part 1) 1976 and pipe fittings shall conform to IS: 1537/ IS-1538 (part 1) 1976.
Ductile iron pipes shall conform to IS 8329 / BS 4772. All pipes and fittings shall be
flanged.
2. The material for cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of gray cast iron conforming to IS :
210, Gr FG 200 Minimum.
3. The pipes shall be of uniform bore and straight in axis. Length of the straight double
flanged pipes shall be within a tolerance of ± 3 mm. The flanges shall conform to IS
1538 Table IV & VI.
4. The flanges of the straight pipes shall be square to the axis of the pipe. The faces of the
flange shall be parallel. The bolt holes circle shall be concentric with the bore and bolt
holes equally spaced. In straight pipes the bolt holes in one flange shall be located in
line with those in other.
5. The faces of the flanges of the fittings shall be square to the directional axes. The holes
shall be located symmetrically off the center line. The intersecting axes of the tees shall
be perpendicular to each other.
6. The bolt holes on flanged pipes and fitting shall be drilled with the help of drilling jig.
The blank flanges are to be machined and drilled.
7. All nuts and bolts used for jointing the C.I. pipes and fittings shall be of cast steel or hot
dipped galvanized.
8. The approximate quantity for the pipe shall be furnished.
Page 310

9. If any fittings/ specials are not included in IS the same shall be manufactured as per site
requirement but the thickness shall not be less than the thickness specified in IS for
identical fittings or specials.
10. The rate should be inclusive of pipes, specials, fittings complete with packing sheet,
necessary size of high tensile hot deep galvanized nut bolts, washer, material (lead ,
lead wool), manila rope etc.
11. Contractor should also supply and fitting necessary C.I. fittings like blind flanges etc in
common header delivery line of spare pumps (future pumps) and All CI fittings shall be
flanged type only.
12. C.I. fittings, specials, etc. shall first be given two coats of zinc based primer after
completely cleaning of surface and then it shall be coated with three coats of coal-tar
base epoxy paint.
The quantity of C.I. pipes are tender purpose only. So during ordering of CI pipes & fittings,
contractor should have to measure the actual quantities required as per execution of the site &
prior approval should be taken from SMC.
ITEM NO. : 10 CAST IRON ADJUSTABLE DISMANTLING JOINT
1. SCOPE :
This specification covers the design requirements, features of construction, inspection,
testing, painting, delivery, installation and commissioning of Dismantling Joint including
all the accessories, tailpieces, rubber insertion, fasteners, etc.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS :
The design and manufacture of the Joint shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed. Nothing
in this specification shall relieve the vendor of this responsibility.
3. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
x Double flanged Cast Iron Adjustable Dismantling Joints shall be provided with all the
accessories, tailpieces, rubber insertion, fasteners, etc. complete
x MOC: C.I. FG 220 (MINIMUM), IS 210.
x It shall be used to create space in pipeline up to a maximum of 0 mm to 100 mm.
x It should absorb/limit vibration/expansion contraction.
x The pressure rating shall be match with all adjacent items.
x It should comply with IS-1538 (part 1) 1976.
x The all fasteners shall be of Stainless Steel 304. T
4. CLEANING:
Prior to factory inspection, all manufacturing waste such as metal chips, debris and all other
foreign material shall be removed from the interior of the joint. All mill scale, rust, oil,
grease, chalk and all other material shall be removed from the interior and exterior surfaces.
5. PAINTING:
Page 311

Dismantling Joint shall first be given two coats of zinc base primer after completely
cleaning the surface and then it shall be coated with three coats of coal tar epoxy paint. The
resulting coating shall be uniform and smooth and shall adhere perfectly to the surface.
6. DRAWINGS:
The following drawing shall be submitted approved during detail engineering.
1. Preliminary outline dimensional drawings.
2. Typical cross sectional drawing.
3. Flow v/s head loss.
7. TESTS AND INSPECTION:
1. Dismantling Joint Valves shall be offered for visual inspection and dimension check.
2. Dismantling Joint shall be tested as per relevant with latest amendments.
The hydro static testing and water tightness test shall be witnessed by the Owner.
ITEM NO .: 11 : DOUBLE ACTING KINETIC AIR VALVE WITH ISOLATION

VALVE:
SCOPE :
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of water works pattern Double acting Kinetic air
valve with required size isolation Knife valve and complete with hardware. Tail piece etc.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1) Water works pattern Kinetic Double acting air valve required for sewage application shall
have a combination of small & large orifice plate air valve with common connection to the
main lobe. The function expected of small orifice is to automatically releasing air which
may accumulate under pressure in a section of pipeline during normal working condition &
large orifice is to automatically exhausting air when a pipe is being filled with water or
automatically ventilating a pipe when it is being emptied of water. It should be suitable for
continuous use of at pressure rating mentioned within the temp. of 450 C. It should be
flanged ended machined and drilled according to IS 1538 & IS 6416.
2) Thickness of body shall be as per manufacturer standard.
3) The clearance between the floats and guide shall not exceed 3 mm per side.
4) The cover for large orifice chamber shall be sufficient thickness so as to withstand the full
operating thrust in working condition. The float for high-pressure orifice and low pressure
shall be as per data sheet.
Air valve shall be offered for testing at manufacturer’s work and the detail drawing for the
same shall have got approved prior to manufacturing.
ITEM NO.: 12 : CHLORINATION SYSTEM
Chlorinator :
Required no. : As per Design Requirement
Capacity : As per design
Type : Vaccume Type Solution Feed
Electric Power : 415V ± 10% 3 phase 50 c/s.
Page 312

General Description:
Chlorinator shall be vaccume operated sonically regulated type system consist of a vaccum
regulator, flow meter with rate valve and injector.
Each Chlorinator should consist of:
¾ Remote Vaccume regulator

¾ Injector Assembly
¾ Differential pressure regulator
¾ Chlorine Pressure Gauge
¾ Vaccume Gauge
¾ Water Pressure Gauge
¾ Chlorine flow-meter (rota meter)
¾ Motorised Chlorine rate control valve
¾ Inter connecting withdrawable type pipes of PVC with sealing rubber “O” rings.
¾ High pressure solution discharge rigid PVC/HDPE pipes with fitting and protecting
enclosures as per requirement.
¾ Vaccume and vent tubing as per requirement.
¾ Cylinder connecting valve with clamp to connect copper coil
¾ Line stop valve.
¾ 18 mm schedule 80 Carbon steel pipes with fitting for Chlorine gas line including
Chlorine pressure regulating valve.
¾ Four nos. isolating valve at tonner and near chlorinator on common header.
¾ Residual Chlorine test kit of range 0.2 PPM to 5.0 PPM to color glass comparator type.
¾ Set of erection and maintenance tools
¾ Manual covering erection and maintenance instruction, spare parts list.
¾ Required length of ‘C’ class GI piping fitting along with brass valves/ NRV/ Strainer
for connecting suction and delivery piping of booster pump to chlorinator and main
piping.
¾ Roller support for chlorine tonner.
¾ The chlorinator should be complete with suitable self priming booster pump sets
directly coupled by flexible coupling of steel pin and rubber boost type to a motor of
suitable HP and mounted on a common base plate. The pump should have SS impellers
and stainless steel shaft with ball bearing at both ends.
¾ Necessary automatic safety devices like gas-off-etc. in case of emergency like failure of
power, water supply, should be incorporated. Further safety devices for back water
entry in chlorinator due to failure of NRV should also be incorporated.
¾ Safety devices such as breathing apparatus /gas mask with rechargeable respirators,
ammonia torch for leak detection, emergency safety shower and eye wash fountain, ton
container repair kit shall be provided.
¾ Each set shall also comprise of all std. accessories, sub assembly that is required for
smooth operation of chlorinator.
¾ Minimum 4 nos. chlorine leak detectors including electric hooter and automatic
chlorine scrubber operation shall be provided in the chlorination equipment room.
Leakage detection shall be at 0.2 to 0.5 ppm level and also at 2 to 5 ppm level.
ITEM NO. 12 : CENTRIFUGE – MECHANCAL DEWATERING SYSTEM

Page 313

The centrifuge shall be suitable for de-watering the sludge of municipal sewage
treatment plant. It shall have capacity of de-watering the liquid sludge of capacity as
specified / as per design and having operational duty of 24 hr/day. Centrifuge shall be
capable of handling sludge consisting of minimum 8% solids by weight. The dewatered cake
shall be based on minimum consistency of 20% by weight dry solids.
Centrifuge shall work on mechanical sedimentation principal. Centrifuge shall have

two phases for liquid and solid separation and removal. Separated solid in the decanter
bowl are continuously removed by means of screw conveyor.
Centrifuge bowl cylinder shall be made of stainless steel. The feed pipe and shaft opening
in the casing shall be fitted with seals. The standard inlet to the hollow axis
of the conveyor body handle most of liquid sludge without risk of choking. The
tips and leading flanks of the flights are hard faced with tungsten carbide alloy. The solid
outlet opening shall be lined with hard metal bushings. Longitudinal strips shall be welded
to the inside of bowl wall retain a thin layer of sediment that acts as an abrasive shield.
Screw conveyor shall be fine pitched and made of stainless steel. Screw conveyor edge shall be
hard faced with tungsten carbide alloy.
The centrifuge shall be solid blow centrifuge of co-current / counter-current designed having
steep cone (20 Deg.) with active baffle disc, so as to achieve maximum solid accumulation /
transportation in the conical (feed) section of the bowel itself. The centrifuge shall have
sufficient clarifying length so that separation of solids is effective. The centrifuge and its
accessories shall be mounted on a common base frame so that entire assembly can be installed
on an elevated structure. However, centrifuge of co-current current design may also be offered
by bidder subject to approval of engineer-in-charge.
Suitable drive with V- belt arrangement and turbo-coupling shall be provided along with
overload protection device. Centrifuge shall be with SS304 wetted parts.
Differential speed and bowl speed should be adjusted by changing the pulleys; differential
speed may be adjustable by use of epicyclical-gear. The bowl shall be protected with flexible
connections so that vibrations are not transmitted to other equipment. The base frame shall be
in epoxy painted steel construction and provided with anti-vibration pads. All steps necessary
to prevent transmission of structure borne noise shall be taken. The drive motor shall be of
1450 rpm. The noise level shall be 85 dB (A) measured at 1m distance under dry run. The
vibration level shall be below 50 micron measured at pillow blocks under dry run condition.
Adequate sound proof shall be carried out for the housing the centrifuges to ensure that the
noise level at 5 m distance from the enclosure is less than 75 dB (A).
BOWL
The centrifuge bowl material shall be centrifugally cast AISI 316 grade. The inlet slurry shall
be fed to the Centrifuge from small (conical) end of the bowl via stationary feed tube. To
protect the wear due to Cake discharge, the bowl shall be fitted with easy replaceable satellite
wear bushes. The bowl shall be fitted with axial ribs/strips from inside. The bowl assembly
shall be independently balanced before assembly as per standards.
Page 314

CONVEYOR
The centrifuge inside conveyor material shall be stainless steel AISI 316 grade. The conveyor
shall be steep cone design with active baffle disc.
The inlet shall be of ‘Esberg’ design to facilitate very smooth distribution and acceleration of
liquid in the pond without turbulence. The conveyor leading flights shall be protected against
wear, by means of flame sprayed tungsten carbide alloy powder having content of
nickel-chromium for higher bonding strength.
GEARBOX
The gearbox shall be of planetary design for compact & high performance operation, to
monitor and control differential speed of the Conveyor.
BACK DRIVE SYSTEM

Eddy current type back drive with automatic differential speed controller shall be
provided to facilitate automatic adjustment of differential speed during the process.
FRAME
Special sub frame fabricated from box section M.S. material shall be provided giving
operational height to the machine. The sub frame shall be such a way designed so as to
mount the flanged motor and eddy current back drive in vertical structure and to achieve
economy of space.
VESSEL/COVER
The vessel and/or collecting cover shall be fabricated from AISI 316 sheet steel. On the cake
discharge side, the vessel shall be protected with wear liner of thick SS 316 sheet. The upper
part of the vessel shall be hinged to the lower part for easy opening and closing of the vessel of
operator. Cover switch shall be provided to indicate cover open alarm in the panel.
DRIVE MOTOR
The drive motor shall be suitably capacity, continuously rated, 415V, 3 phase, TEFC, Class
H insulation with class B temp. rise, squirrel cage induction motor to take care of initial
accelerating torque load of the centrifuge rotating assembly in star-delta starting. The main
drive to be coupled with fixed pulley with belts for easiness in maintenance. The electric drive
shall meet all requirements as specified in electrical specifications and bidder shall adhere to
the same.
CONTROL PANEL
The centrifuge starter panel shall meet all the requirements as per electrical specifications and
shall have suitable interlink for motor overload, motor overheating and cover open condition.
Interlock for stopping feed pump motor incase of alarm condition shall be provided.
Main bearings, conveyor bearings, etc. shall be compact, grease lubricated with proper sealing
arrangement.
TECHNICAL DATA OF CENTRIFUGE AND ITS ACCESSORIES

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Sr. Particular Details
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Page 315

A. Centrifuge
Manufacturer Name
Capacity
Bowl speed
Screw conveyor speed
Differential speed adjustment
Differential speed control device
Inlet sludge consistency required
Guaranteed outlet sludge cake dryness
Poly dosing required
Recommended poly electrolyte
Operating duty
Start up time required
Shut off time required
Life of equipment
Recommended spare parts
C. Poly electrolyte dosing pump

Capacity
Efficiency
Power consumption
Motor HP
Pump make
Motor make
C. Poly dosing tank dimension
D. Total power consumption

Centrifuge main drive
Poly dosing pump
Poly dosing mixture
DOSING / METERING PUMPS-RECIPROCATING TYPE
GENERAL:
Dosing pumps shall be mounted in a bund separate from the storage tanks and shall be fully
accessible for operating and maintenance purposes without personnel having to enter the bund
itself. Where appropriate, the pump bund shall be interconnected with the tank bund at an
intermediate level.
The pumps shall be of the reciprocating mechanically actuated diaphragm type driven by
electric motors. The pump, motor and drive arrangement shall be mounted on a robust
combination base plate. Unless otherwise specified, only one liquid end shall be driven by any
motor.
Pumps shall comply with API standard 675, positive Displacement Pumps-controlled Volume.
Capacity of pump : As per the Centrifuge Manufacturer requirement
Head : As per the Centrifuge Manufacturer requirement
Page 316

PUMP HEAD MATERIALS:
Pump heads and diaphragms shall be manufactured from thermoplastic materials suitable for
the duty conditions.
PUMP STROKE ADJUSTMENT:
Variable stroke mechanisms shall be incorporated in the drive arrangement to allow infinitely
variable adjustment of pump output by means of a micrometer, hand wheel or similar
mechanical device whilst the pump is running.
Where the pump is part of an automatic coagulation control or other process control loop, the
stroke mechanism shall be fitted with a three phase bi-directional motor with torque limiter and
automatic stops at both extremes of travel. A position feedback potentiometer shall be provided
to facilitate control and remote indication of position. The operational range of stroke
adjustment shall be not less than 6:1.
DRIVE ARRANGEMENT:
The pump head shall be driven through a totally enclosed speed reduction gearbox with
integral reciprocating drive or the adjustable crank or mechanical lost motion type. The
gearbox and reciprocating drive shall be oil bath lubricated. The unit shall incorporate filling
and drain plugs for oil and an oil level indicator.
DRIVE MOTOR:
Drive motors shall be of the three phase cage induction type whether for fixed speed or variable
speed operation.
Where variable speed operation is specified, the speed turn-down ratio shall be not less than
5:1.
PUMP PERFOMANCE:
The performance characteristics of the dosing pumps shall be adequate in terms of linearity,
accuracy and reproducibility as designed in API standard 675 to achieve the stated plant
performance guarantee. The deviation from flow linearity of the pump shall not exceed ±3% of
the rated capacity. The steady state accuracy shall not exceed ±1% of the mean delivered flow
under fixed system conditions over the entire turndown range. The flow rate repeatability
expressed as a percent of the rated capacity of the pump shall not exceed ±3% of the rated
capacity.
This item includes the pump, pump motor, SS bellow (with sleeve),
pressure gauge, necessary pipe fitting, pipes etc. inside the pump house. Pump set and
accessories shall be fitted with suction and delivery ball / non return valve inside the building.
ITEM NO.14: SUBMERSIBLE SUMP DRAINAGE PUMPS
Sump pumps shall be of the open-impeller type, vertically-mounted and close coupled to their
fully submersible electric motors.
Page 317

Sump pumps of 1.5 KW and under shall incorporate an integral low/high level detector for auto
start/stop operation of the pump, control and motor starter and shall be powered only with a
suitably-fused three phase or single- phase low-voltage supply and with supply isolated at the
supply point.
Sump pump over 1.5 KW shall be controlled and stated from the supply point. Control shall be
by means of adjustable float level switches mounted near the pump.
Pumps shall be supplied with all necessary pipe work to discharge to surface drainage. Each
pump shall be provided with delivery reflux and isolating valves, and suitable lifting gear for
lowering and
lifting the pump from the sump.
Pumps weighing 40 KG or more shall be lowered in to the sump on guide rails and be located to
their respective discharge pipe work with an angle flange connection and self-locating clamps.
Pump impellers shall be designed to pass solids of the sizes which pass through the inlet ports
of the pump and shall be capable of pumping solids of up to 50 mm diameter.
This item includes the pump, pump motor, SS bellow (with sleeve), pressure gauge, necessary
C.I. fitting, pipes etc. in side the pump house. Pump set and accessories shall be fitted with
delivery knife gate / non return valve in side the pump house.
ITEM NO. 15 : SCREW TYPE PUMPS
Pumps shall be of the type in which a pumping action is generated by a helical rotating
eccentrically within a resilient stator in the form of a double internal helix. The eccentric
motion of the rotor shall maintain a constant seal across the stator as it travels through the pump
to give a uniform positive displacement.
Pumps shall be arranged generally with a single shaft seal at the suction end. Mechanical seals
shall be used. If a flexible shaft is used to accommodate the eccentric motion, a
corrosion-resistant shroud shall be fitted to prevent fiber build-up on the shaft. Enlarged
inspection access holes shall be fitted to the suction chambers of all pumps for periodic
removal of accumulated debris.
The shaft bearings shall be positively isolated from the fluid being pumped.
The rotor material shall be selected for corrosion and abrasion resistance for the fluid being
pumped, and for prolonged service life. Hard chrome or other approved coatings shall be not
less than 100 micron thickness and shall be diffused in to the base material. The rotor shall
generally be single-stage and shall incorporate not less than 360º of twist, but for high-head
applications, it may be necessary to use more than a single-stage.
The stator shall be of a resilient material selected for chemical and abrasion resistance for the
fluid being pumped.
Pump speed shall suit the application, where variable delivery output is needed, the pump shall
be provided with a variable-speed drive. The size and speed range of the pump shall ensure that
the highest expected duty point shall lie within the available speed range.
Page 318

Pumps shall normally be driven by a fixed-speed electric motor through reduction gearing and
the combined drive shall be continuously rated. Pump and motor shall preferably be mounted
in-line on a common base plate. Alternatively, the drive motor may be top-mounted above the
pump to minimize floor area, and shall be connected by external V-belts and pulleys. V-belt
drives shall have full guards of the type that allow the belts to be observed without removal of
the guard. Facilities shall be provided for ready adjustment of belt tension.
Coupling guards shall be provided, which shall be rigid, securely fixed, and designed so that
removal is not necessary during normal operation, routine maintenance and routine
inspections.
All motor enclosures shall be provided with ingress protection to IP55. Motor
anti-condensation heaters shall be provided and shall be suitable for use on a 220V
single-phase, 50Hz supply.
All bearings shall have a B10 design life of not less than 40 000 running hours and shall be
designed for loading 20% in excess of calculated maximum loading.
Pumps shall be fitted with individual dry-running protection to initiate pump trip. Dry-running
protection by ‘under-current’ monitoring or ‘pipeline-intrusive’ device shall not be used.
MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
Pump Housing CI
Rotor SS AISI 410
Shaft SS AISI 410
Stator Nitrite black
Type of drive V belt & Pulleys
Base plate MS fabricated
Seal type Gland packing
This item includes the pump, pump motor, SS bellow (with sleeve), pressure gauge, necessary
C.I. fitting, pipes etc. in side the pump house. Pump set and accessories shall be fitted with
suction and delivery knife gate / non return valve in side the pump house.
ITEM NO. 16 AGITATORS / MIXERS (FOR CHEMICAL TANKS, SLUDGE SUMP,

ETC.)
The mechanical mixing device shall comprise rapidly rotating blades mounted on a vertical
shaft coupled to the gear box shaft through rigid coupling and driven through a suitably rated
four pole, continuous duty, TEFC motor with IP 55 protection (motor shall be as per electrical
specifications) operating through a reduction gear box to ensure uniform dispersal of the
chemical solution / keep the sludge in suspension.
General Specification
- Agitator component shall be designed to fit through agitator opening on tank manhole.
Page 319

- Pressure containing part shall have minimum corrosion allowance of 3 mm.
- Gear unit
x A worm reduction gear shall be provided with a minimum service factor of 1.5 on
the driver rated HP.
x V belt operation is not acceptable.
- Flexible coupling shall be selected with a minimum service factor of 2 and shall be
capable of continuous operation at the max. anticipated misalignment.
- Rigid coupling shall have tapered bores with key in nut arrangement. All rigid coupling
shall be made from cast steel as per IS 1030 grade 2 or forged steel as per IS 2004 Cl. 3
or CI as per IS 1030 Gr 30 in tank rigid coupling in forged steel may be welded to the
shaft.
- Shaft sleeve with harden surface shall be provided at standby barring and in packing
areas.
- The shaft shall be suitable for transmitting full torque available at the driver name plate
rating (starting torque).
- Shaft shall be suitable for jamming conditions considering that impeller is jammed at
0.75 R from centre (R = Radius of impeller).
- Shaft assembly designed with critical speed at least 30% removed from any operating
speed.
- Impeller blade shall be of one piece construction.
- Bearing housing shall be designed with a span suitable for the minimum radial cum
thrust loading used for the design of the shaft.
- It is preferred that the design of the agitator does not incorporate the use of a steady
bearing at the shaft end. However if the use of such bearing is imperative the design
shall be such that the bearing is of set aligning type and his product lubricated.
- The delivery pipe of the dosing pump shall be of SS 304 material.
MECHANICAL DATA:
Agitation provided Agitator : Top entry vertical shaft.

Level gauge : Required
Type of level gauge : Float & board type
Agitator type : Axial pitched turbine/low speed
No. of Agitators : One for each tank
No. of Blades : As per manufacturers design
Impeller dia, mm : As per manufacturers design
Gear box : Worm/worm wheel oil bath type vertical single
reduction
Agitator RPM : 60-100
Material of construction
Reaction Tank : RCC M250 epoxy lined / coated
Agitator : SS 304
Impeller : SS 304
Shaft : SS 304
ITEM NO. 17 : CHLORINE SCRUBBER SYSTEM :
The system consists of Hoods for covering the chlorine tonner where chlorine gas outlet
valves are fitted. The storage tank are fabricated as one piece. Highly efficient centrifugal
Page 320

blowers of suitable size, necessary Hoods and Ductings are provided as per the number
of tonner accounted for service. Centrifugal pumps for caustic solution recirculation is
also a part of the tonner based system.
1 ) FRP HOOD FOR CHLORINE TONNER / CYLINDER – FULL HOOD :

The system consists of a hood covering the complete chlorine tonner / cylinder where
liquid / gas chlorine outlet valves are fitted. Hoodas are provided with 20 mm peripheral
air gap for entry of fresh air during working of system.
2 ) DUCTING :
Required quantity of PVC Ducting of size 150 MM ID is provided for leaked chlorine
gas from Hoods to Centrifugal Blowers and From Blowers to absorption tank.
3 ) BLOWER WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR (1W+1S) :

The system consists of 1 No. of highly efficient centrifugal blower of 1200 M3/Hr at
300 mm WG capacity for suction of leaked chlorine from Hoods to the Absorption Tank.
4 ) DAMPER FOR BLOWER :

01 No. FRP Dampers of size 150 mm ID is provided at discharge line of Blower and
per Hoods 01 No. FRP Dampers of size 150 mm ID is provided at suction line of
Blower to control the flow of Chlo – Air mixture through FRP ducting.
5 ) PRESSURE INDICATOR ON CAUSTIC PUMP DISCHARGE :

01 No. Pressure Indicator is provided on discharge line of Caustic Pump for indication of
caustic line pressure.
6 ) PRESSURE INDICATOR ON BLOWER DISCHARGE :

01 No. Pressure Indicator is provided on discharge line of Blower for indication of
pressure of Blower Discharge Line.
7 ) CAUSTIC SOLUTION TANK (For Toner) :

01 No. Caustic Tank of Capacity 10 M3 made of PP + FRP is provided for storage of 20
% conc. Caustic Solution.
THE CAUSTIC TANK

01 No. – Level Indicator of Glass Tube type for indication of level of caustic solution in
the tank. Various Nozzles for inlet and outlet of caustic solution, Drain Valve with
Drain Line, Overflow Line, Water Supply Inlet Line, Manhole, Vent, Diffuser, High/Low
Level Switch etc.
8 ) CAUSTIC SERVICE PIPING :

Required quantity of UPVC Caustic Service Piping of size 63 mm OD as per ASTM
standard is provided for re-circulation of caustic solution.
11 ) ‘Y’ TYPE STRAINER FOR CAUSTIC SERVICE:

02 No. Polypropylene ‘Y’ Type Strainer of size 2 “ is provided on Caustic Service line
at suction line of Caustic Pump to avoid passage of small particles.
12 ) NON RETURN VALVE FOR CAUSTIC SERVICE:

Page 321

02 No. Polypropylene Non Return Valve of size 2 “ is provided on caustic service line at
discharge of Caustic Pump.
13 ) CAUSTIC RE – CIRCULATING PUMP WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR (1W+1S) :

02 No. Caustic Re-Circulating Pump of capacity 20 M3/Hr at 20 Mtr head along with
suitable motor is provided on caustic solution line to re – circulate the caustic solution in
to the absorption tank.
14 ) WATER SUPPLY PIPING FOR CAUSTIC TANK :

Required quantity of GI water supply pipe of size 1 “ to deliver water into the Caustic
Tank for dilution of Conc. Caustic Solution.
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE :
The lubrication schedule is mainly required for the rotating parts of the Caustic Pumps
and Blowers. The Caustic Pumps and Blowers are required to be lubricated once in
three months time. Caustic Pumps shall be replenished with oil as per SAE – 30 or
equivalent.
CHLORINE GAS ABSORPTION CAPACITY = 1000 KG
LEAKED CHLORINE ABSORPTION SYSTEM :
The system is designed to absorb leakage of chlorine leaking from one filled Toner /
Cylinder in one hour time. The system is designed to absorb the chlorine gas and not
liquid chlorine leaked from the Toner / Cylinder. To stop the leakage of liquid chlorine
from toner is the difficult task as the liquid chlorine expands as soon as it enters into
the atmosphere. Normally as soon as you find the liquid chlorine is leaking from the
valve or body of the toner, you must rotate the toner in 180 degree to convert the liquid
chlorine leakage into gas chlorine leakage. The chances is very less for leakage of liquid
chlorine from cylinders because it is always used in vertical position.
PROCESS DESCRIPTION OF ABSORPTION SYSTEM :
The absorption system is used for absorption of leaked chlorine gas from chlorine ton
container / chlorine cylinder. FRP Hoods are placed to cover the chlorine ton container /
chlorine cylinder. FRP duct is provided through each of the Hoods interconnected to a
common header maintaining the pressure drop uniformly in each of the hood. A common
duct is extended and connected to the Blower inlet which is further extended and
connected from Blower outlet to the Absorption Tank for discharging the chlorine gas.
The Leak Detectors when senses the leaked Chlorine to a set level initiates the Blower
and pump for absorbing the leaked chlorine. The sensors are placed nearest to the Hoods
to sense the leaked chlorine immediately. The system will have sight level gauge for see
the level of caustic solution of absorption tank.
1. CAUSTIC CIRCULATING PUMP
Page 322

1. Type Horizontal Centrifugal Caustic Pump
2. Liquid to be handled 20 % wt caustic solution
3. Specific Gravity 1.2
4. Temperature Ambient
5. Location Outdoor
6. Duty Continuous
7. Rated Capacity 20 M3/Hr
8. Diff. Head in MWC 20 MWC
9. Pump Model SCP SM 25 150 GP
10. BKW duty 1.21 KW
11. Recommended motor 3 HP / 2900 RPM
12. Suction & Discharge 40 mm Suction & 25 mm Discharge
13. Type of Impeller Closed
14. Type of Casing Radially Split
15. Type of shaft sealing Gland Packing
16. Type Of Coupling Flexible
17. MOC Casing : CF 8 M
Shaft : SS 410
Shaft Sleeve : SS 410
Impeller : CF 8 M
Base Fram : MS + Anticorrosive Paint
18. Dia of Impeller 100 mm
19. Noise Level 85 to 90 Decibles
20. Vibration Level 75 Microns
21. Flange Drilling ANSI B 16.5 Class : 150
22. Bearing Lubrication Oil
23. NPSH 1.4 Mtr
24. Shutt of Head 11.2 Mtr
25. Weight Of Pump & 75 Kg
Motor
26. Desing Standard DIN : 24256 & ISO 2858
27. Testing Standard IS 5120
28. Qty 01 No
29. Make Pump : As per approved Vendor List
Motor : As per approved vendor list
2. BLOWER
Type :- Centrifugal
Standard / Code to which blower Design confirmed : IS 4894
Capacity :- 1200 m3 / hr
Pressure head : - 300 mm wc .
Drive : - V Belt Type
Motor : - 7.5 HP / 2880 RPM
Volts / Freq./ Phase :- 415 V / 50 Hz / 3 Phase
Casing Type : Vertical up Blast
Fan Efficiency : 65 %
Page 323

MOC :-
1) Casing :- PP+FRP (Isopthalic)
2) Impellers :- FRP (Isopthalic)
3) Base Frame :- MS + anti corrosive Paint
4) Shaft :- En8 with FRP
Qty. :- 2 No
Motor : Crompton / Equivalent
3. CHLORINE LEAK DETECTOR
1. Range 0 to 10 PPM
2. Input Accept Input From Transmitter 4-20 mA
3. Resolution Point 0.1 PPM
4. Accuracy 0.2 % Max over full scale range of input
5. Loop Open Display Required
6. Sensor Type 3 Wire Transmitter
7. Display 4 Digit 15 mm, 7 segments red LED for process value
4 Digit 15 mm, 7 segments red LED for set value
8. No. Of Set Point 2 Independent set point
9. Setting 4 Feather touch keys inside the display board
10. Set Point Display Parameter/Set point can be seen on display
11. Set Point Adjustment Filled adjustable over the full range
12. Set Point Out Put 1 NO/C/1 NC Potential free contact rated 230 V/ 5 A for each
alarm 1 and alarm 2
13. Fault Out put 1 NO/C/1 NC potential free contact rated 230 V/ 5 A for any
open loop
14. Power Supply 230 V AC +/- 10 % , 50 HZ
15. Construction Weatherproof , IP 55 Enclosure
16. Mounting Wall Mounting
17. Transmitter Supply 24 V DC, 200 mA supply from various process transmitter
18. Qty 02 Nos
4. CAUSTIC TANK (FRP)
1. Application For Chlorine Scrubbing System

2. Type Circular
3. Capacity 10 000 Ltr
4. Shell 5 mm (PP) + 8 mm(FRP- Iso Pthalic Resin)
5. Bottom & Roof 5 mm (PP) + 8 mm(FRP- Iso Pthalic Resin)
6. Height & Diameter 1850 mm (Height) & 2500 mm (ID)
7. Chemical to be used 20 % Wt Caustic solution with chlorine fume
8. Sparger MOC : PP+FRP Pipe
9. MOC Tank PP + FRP (Iso Pthalic Resin)
10. Qty 01 No
5. LEVEL GAUGE (REFLUX TYPE)
Page 324

1. Type Reflex Type
2. MOC SS – 316
3. Isolation Valve 3 Nos, MOC : PP
4. Qty 01 No
6. MS SKID
1. Design & Drawing attached for approval

Engineering
2. Steel Hot Deep Galvanized
3. Qty 01 No
7. FLANGES
All Flanges are of Class 150 rating and as per ANSI B 16.5
1. Flanges
Standard
8. FIRST LOAD CHEMICAL
First Load Chemical Caustic Solution of 20 % wt

Qty 1200 Ltr
9. SPLIT TYPE HOOD FRONTAL HOOD
Reinforcement Material :- FRP (Std. Chopped Material & ISO Pathalic Polyster
Resin )
Size Width X Height X Length :- 1065mm X 1100mm X 900 mm
Handle :- FRP
Nozzle Size :- 150 mm NB
Weight of Hood :- 35 Kg.
Type : Split Type
ITEM NO.18 : RETURN SLUDGE & DIGESTOR SLUDGE MIXING PUMP

HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL TYPE PUMP SET :
SEWAGE PUMP SET COMPLETE WITH NECESSARY C.I.FITTINGS, SPECIALS,

PIPING, MOTOR, WITHIN EACH PUMP-HOUSE ETC.
PART 1 - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. General
Specifications given herein are subject to the General Conditions of Contract. Work
under this Section consists of the supply, installation, testing and handling
over of sewage pump system at the sewage treatment plant, inclusive of pump, TEFC
Page 325

motors, valves and heavy duty cast iron piping, suction sluice valve, suction and delivery
side S.S. bellow (with inner sleeve) non-return valve and delivery sluice valve, C.I.
specials, base plate etc. as shown on data sheets of the pump or drive manufacturer
(contractor) and shall be complete with electric motor drives, intermediate drive-shafts,
couplings, intermediate shaft guards, pump bearings and grease lubrication system.
B. System Description
All the pumps should be switch off when the pre-determined low level will reached in the
wet well. The sensor used for above system shall be only non-contact and ultra sonic
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Shall be submitted in conformance with details showing fabrication, assembly,

foundation and installation details and dimensions, together with detailed specification,
power covering performance and materials of construction, power drive assembly, parts,
devices and other accessories in accordance with the requirements of "Shop Drawings"
and the Supplementary requirements stipulated herein. Data and specifications for the
equipment shall include ,but not be limited to the following --
1. Certified pump performance curves indicating total dynamic head, flow rate, brake
horse power, shut-off head, net positive suction head and efficiency.
2. Motor data including the name of the manufacturer, the guaranteed efficiency
and power factor at full load, 3/4 load 1/2 load, and main duty point, locked rotor
current in amps, full load current in amps., the motor speed in rpm,
and mounting details. Refer to Data Sheet for motors for additional details to be
submitted.
3. Data certifying conformance with Indian Standard 5600-1970 and

any additional requirements specified herein and other more stringent standards.
4. Anchor bolt placement measured from contraction joints in the concrete structure,
and anchor bolt details including projections from concrete.
5. Materials of pump construction including shafts, bearings, impellers, casings, pump

bases, stuffing boxes and shaft guards.
6. Complete details on all ancillary equipment including piping, valves, etc. and
interface requirements for work by others.
7. Details of grease lubrication system including the proper quantity of grease and
frequency of bearing lubrication.
8. Complete details on pump control package including all interface requirements for work
by others.
Page 326

9. Results of shop testing performed in accordance with Paragraph 7 of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pumps provided shall have been manufactured by organisation having previous

experience in manufacturing pumps pf comparable capacities, speeds and other
characteristics and which have been in successful operation for a minimum of 5 years on
sewage projects under similar conditions.
The tenderer is hereby advised that overall unit operating efficiency is of particular
concern to the owner. Accordingly, a preference will be made for systems providing high
overall system operating efficiency. There are a series of schedules at the end of this section
which shall be completed by the tenderer and submitted with his tender. The data shall be
used in tender evaluation resulting in a credit preference for more efficient equipment.
Likewise, however, there is incorporated a liquidated damages provision for failure to achieve
guaranteed efficiencies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PUMPS
A. Pump Type
The sewage pumps shall be non-clog centrifugal,

vertically direct mounted VNC/HNC single stage, dry pit installation driven by sin
gle speed electrical motor. Motor ratings shall be at least 10 percent in excess of power
required by pump at the highest point of pump performance curve and must be
non-overloading at all points on the pump operating curve. Dewatering and sludge filtrate
pump shall be sewage water self priming non-clog and side suction.
For all the pumps motor ratings shall be at least 10 percent in excess of power required by
pump at the highest point of pump performance curve and must be non-overloading at all
points on the pump operating curve
The power rating for motors to drive pumps should be selected as per table furnished in motor
specifications.
B. Rating
The characteristics of the pumping sets required at various pump stations will be given
forwarded by the Contractor. Pump performance shall be stable from zero flow to run out.
C. Reverse Rotation
The pumps shall be designed to operate safely in the reverse direction of rotation, due to
wastewater returning through the pump, from shut-off to maximum
pressure. The weights of the revolving parts of the pumps, including the
unbalanced hydraulic thrusts of the impellers, shall be carried by thrust bearings provided
in each pump assembly.
Page 327

D. Pump Construction
1. Pump Casing
The pump casings suction covers and stuffing box covers shall be of cast iron and
conform to IS: 4771 (with clarifications, where necessary, as given in IS: 3896) and
any additional requirements specified herein, and shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5
times the rated maximum working pressure but not less than 1.5 times the shut-off
head with maximum impeller size. Then stuffing box heads and suction heads shall be
removable from the pump casings. The required reducers/increaser valves both on the suction
and delivery sides shall be furnished by the contractors to match the
corresponding process piping shown on the Drawings. The pump casings shall be
provided with vents, drains, pressure gauge, connections, hand holes, inspection cover and
lifting lugs or eye bolts. The replaceable wearing ring/side plate shall be provided.
2. Impellers
The impellers shall be stainless steel and shall be of the single stage type. They shall be
dynamically balanced and keyed and positively held on the shafts to prevent damage if the
direction of rotation should reverse due to water flowing backward through the pump.
The impellers shall have openings of adequate size to pass a sphere of minimum
diameter of 100 mm for R.S. pump and 40 mm for others centrifugal pumps. The leading
edge of the vanes shall be rounded and cut back to prevent rags, stringy material etc. from
impinging on the impeller vanes. The impellers and the entire rotating elements shall be
removable from the top of the pumps without distributing the
suction and discharge connections or drive units. The impeller weir ring shall be provided.
3. Pump Shafts
The pump shafts shall be manufactured from SS not inferior in quality.
4. Pump Bearings
Pump bearings shall be of the antifriction type mounted in cast iron bearing frames
independent of and alongside the stuffing box cover. The bearings shall be able to
take normal axial thrust loads due to unbalanced hydraulic loads on the impellers
plus the weight of all rotating parts of the pumps. Pump bearings shall be designed with a
minimum B-10 life of 60,000 hours. The bearings shall be grease lubricated and
SKF/FAG/RHP make
5. Couplings and Shafting
Spacer couplings shall be provided with shafting of sufficient length to allow the pump
rotating element to be removed. The shaft shall be so designed to operate without undue
stress or vibration over the entire range of operation.
Page 328

6. Stuffing Box
Pumps shall be provided with deep stuffing boxes with bronze rings. An easily accessible
bronze split gland shall be provided to facilitate adjustment or removal and replacement
of the packing. An arrangement for controlled drainage of the stuffing box leakage shall be
provided.
7. Shop Testing
Pumps shall be shop tested, witnessed by the Engineer-in- Charge or his representative,
according to the requirements specified in Paragraph hereinafter.
8. Pump Supports and Anchor Bolts
Each pump shall be furnished with a cast iron suction fitting cast integral winged feet
and cleanout hand hole, designed to bolt to, and rigidly support the volute and bearing
housing. All shims, base plates, bearing plates, anchor bolts, etc. required for the
installation of the pumping units shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. All anchor
bolts and fasteners shall be of stainless steel.
9. Pump Balance
All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in rotational balance. Excessive
vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit
and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. If any
case, the amplitude of vibration as measured at any point on the pumping unit shall not
exceed the limits set forth in the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. At
any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or
components thereof, shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3.
10. Shaft Guard
Each pump shall be furnished with a shaft guard, complete with all necessary mounting
appurtenances conforming to the safety requirements. All materials shall be galvanized
steel. Screens shall be designed for easy disassembly to facilitate shaft removal. The
guard shall have bolted connections and assembled in sections not exceeding 70 Kilo
gramms.
E. Motor :
It shall be IP-55 protection type and as per details specification mention elsewhere in tender.
The power rating of the motor shall be larger of the following:
¾ 115 % of the maximum power input at any point on entire performance curve of the pump
at rated speed.
F. S.S. bellow (with sleeve) for suction and delivery line.

Page 329

G. Supply, erecting, testing and commissioning of complete lot of heavy duty double flange
cast iron pipe, special fitting including suction bell mouth to delivery line up to the outside
of the dry well. For each pumping station. The above pipe special and fitting etc. should be
comply with IS:1538-1976 in general if possible.
H. Cast Iron non-return Valves100 mm to 350 mm diameter

valves shall be swing cast iron non-return valves of the lever and
spring type, flanged, and shall have cast iron body and cover, renewable bronze seat,
bronze hinge, stainless steel hinge shaft. The valves shall conform to relevant latest IS
and, the valves shall be adjustable for non- slamming closure and shall be
seat tight. An arrow showing direction of flow shall be prominently cast on body
of valve. The water working pressure shall be 10 kg/cm except that the valve shall have
pressure rating same as the piping where the pipe class is higher.
I. Pump Non-return Valves Larger Than 400 mm Diameter All non-return valves larger than
400 mm diameter installed shall be flanged ductile iron body, cover disc, arm and
levers.
IMPORTANT :
The diameter/size of C.I. piping/S.V./NRV etc. will be one (1) size higher than
recommended by the Pump Manufacture Company.
For sludge pumps the minimum size of C.I. piping S.V./NRV etc. should not be less than
150 mm dia.
PART -3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION AND START-UP
The Contractor shall provide the services of factory trained representatives of the
pump manufacturer to inspect the installation, certify in writing to the
Engineer-in-Charge that the installation is correct and in accordance with the pump
manufacture’s recommendations, all equipment is ready for start-up, and supervise the
initial operation of the units. This includes the coupling of the two units and ensuring
that they work smoothly and
efficiently in accordance with these specifications. An appropriate allowance for this
aspect of the supply and installation of the pumps shall be included by the pump manufacturer
in the price of his equipment.
EQUIPMENT TESTING
Shop Testing
1. General
Each major component of the pumping equipment shall be subjected to a complete shop
Page 330

test as specified herein, witnessed by the Engineer-in-charge or his representative. Three
copies of certified test reports shall be submitted to the SMC. All costs for the shop tests
shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in his bid price.
2. Pumps
Each assembled pump shall be shop tested by the manufacturer to determine the
following characteristic within the operating range as specified in the Schedule.
a. Head - Capacity Curve

b. Brake horsepower Curve
c. Efficiency Curve
d. NPSHR Curve
e. Balance
f. Vibration
g. Bearing temperature and alignment.
All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the latest Hydraulic
Institute Standards.
In the event of any pump failing to meet the specified test requirements, it shall be
modified and retested until the requirements are attained.
Each pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings showing

motor voltage and amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head. Such readings
shall be documented for at least three pumping conditions. One test shall be at shut off head.
The motor manufacturer's representative too shall be present at these tests and each power
lead shall be checked for proper current balance.
Bearing temperature shall be determined by a contact type

thermometer. A running time of at least 20 minutes shall be maintained for this test, at
shut-off head if sufficient water is not available for a complete test.
After it has been demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that the
pumping equipment complies with these specifications the Engineer-in-charge shall be
furnished with the Manufacturer's Test Certificate.
Material Test Certificate for impeller shaft, casing, wearing ring shall be submitted by the
manufacturer.
Material of Construction for all pump :
Casing CI IS 210 Gr FG 260 with 1.5% Ni.

Impeller SS ASTM A743 Gr CF8M
Shaft ASTM A276 SS 410
Shaft sleeve ASTM A276 SS 410
Casing ring SS AISI 410
Shaft Seal Gland and staffing box.
Base Plate CI/Epoxy Coated MS
Page 331

Pressure Gauge : Stainless steel 4" size Glycerin filled diaphragm type. )( If required)
All motor should be TEFC, Class F with temperature rise limited to Class B, duty S1 type only.
All pump set should grease lubricated only.
This item includes the pump, pump motor, SS bellow (with sleeve),
pressure gauge, necessary C.I. fitting, pipes etc. in side the pump house. Pump set and
accessories shall be fitted with suction and delivery knief gate / non return valve in side the
pump house.
It should be very clearly noted that duty conditions i.e. discharge and head as specified must be
achieved at the available speed of motor running at full load under specified supply condition
mentioned. No allowance / calculations shall be permitted to compute discharge / head at a
particular speed. The specified discharge and head must be available at site at actual speed of
motor / pump and not to be computed from designed parameter. No relaxation in this regard
permitted.
ITEM NO.19: HOT CRANE :
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Cranes shall be designed and constructed in accordance with BS 2573 and shall comply with
the requirements of BS 466: Class 2 medium-duty operation.
The term ‘crane’ shall be deemed to include gantry rails, platform with handrails for
maintenance use, down-stop conductors, end stops, holding-down bolts and all other items
required for complete installation.
Cranes shall be prominently marked with their SWL on both sides of the crane bridge girders.
Crane hooks shall be fitted with safety catches and the hook block shall incorporate fully
guarded rope sheaves.
The maintenance platform shall be designed to provide safe access to the crane machinery and
all high-level lighting and roof-mounted ventilation plant. Access to the platform shall be by
fixed stairway from a convenient point in the pump hall.
Enough slings, ropes, shackles, lifting beams and the like shall be supplied to handle all the
plant to be served by the crane. They shall be labeled or marked with the safe working load
(SWL) and the purpose for which they are intended.
The crane, and all other lifting equipment supplied shall be tested by the manufacturer at his
works. The tests shall be at 125% of safe working load, and test certificates shall be submitted
by the Contractor.
Page 332

Site tests shall be done by the Contractor who shall supply the necessary materials for the test
loads. The test loads shall be removed from site by the Contractor after successful tests have
been completed.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT:
All movements shall be electrically powered and be suitable for operating with the hook fully
loaded. Motors shall be of the quick-reversing type with electro-mechanical brakes suitable for
the duties specified. Limit switches shall be incorporated to prevent excess travel, or
over-hoisting and over-lowering of the crane hook. Facilities shall be provided for the accurate
location of the hook by means of ‘inching’ all the motions.
Crane operation shall be from ground floor level by bridge-mounted pendant push-button
controls. Controls shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent inadvertent
operation of opposing motions. The pendant shall be supported independently of the electric
cable and shall be arranged for extending for operation when necessary.
Down shop conductors shall be of the fully-insulated shrouded bus bar type. The current
collectors shall have renewable contact pieces. Festoon cables may be used for cross travel.
A crane isolator, lockable in the off position and incorporating a warning lamp, illuminated
when the supply is ‘on’, shall be provided at the bottom of the access ladder. A second isolator
shall be provided at the control cubicle located on the crane platform.
The contractor shall supply all necessary contactors, control, and phase and earth fault and fail
safe protection if the power supply fails.
All electrical equipment shall be fully trivialized. Motors and switch gear shall be provided
with anti-condensation heaters, which shall be energized when the crane is at rest, and suitable
warning notices shall be provided.
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of hand operated traveling crane with singal speed
electrically operated chain pulley block suitable for following pump houses.
Span : As per site requirement.

Total Lift : As per site requirement.
Available head room and available end clearance :- As per site requirement The crane and
traveling trolley should be as per site requirement. All motions except vertical motion are
to be electrically operated through chain, chain wheel and gears. All safety
measures should be taken in to consideration. The crane should comply to I.S. 807 and I.S.
3177. The crane should be complete with bridge girder, with rails (on R.C.C. Crobel Beam),
hand chain, chain wheels, guards, swiveling hook and other accessories. The chain collection
box shall be provided in M.S. material.
The main hoisting hook shall swivel on antifriction bearing and should be fitted with locking
device to prevent motion when desired. (hook should be confirm to I.S. 3815-1969 and load
chain should confirm I.S. 2429-1979).
Page 333

The crane and chain pulley block should be made of Morris /INDEF duly
tested with overload at manufacturer's work as well as at site. It should be properly scraped,
cleaned and painted to prevent corrosion. The crane to be supplied should carry suitable
guarantees.
All this HOT should be made of approved manufacturing company.
ITEM NO.20 : HAND OPERATED CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK ( CPB ) WITH

TRAVELING TROLLEY:
Cranes shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with BS 2573 and shall comply with
the requirements of BS 466 class-2 medium duty.
The crane details and ancillary equipment provided shall conform with applicable parts of the
general requirements specified above for electrically operated over-head cranes, except that the
crane shall be manually operated by conveniently mounted endless chains, arranged for
operation by one man.
Total Lift : As per site requirement.

Available head room and available end clearance :- As per site requirement The crane and
traveling trolley should be as per site requirement. All motions shall be manually operated
through chain, chain wheel and gears. All safety measures should be taken in to
consideration. The crane should comply to I.S. 807 and I.S. 3177. The crane should be complete
with girder, hand chain, chain wheels, guards, swiveling hook and other accessories. The
chain collection box shall be provided in M.S. material.
The main hoisting hook shall swivel on antifriction bearing and should be fitted with locking
device to prevent motion when desired. (hook should be confirm to I.S. 3815-1969 and load
chain should confirm I.S. 2429-1979).
The crane and chain pulley block should be made of Morris /INDEF duly
tested with overload at manufacturer's work as well as at site. It should be properly scraped,
cleaned and painted to prevent corrosion. The crane to be supplied should carry suitable
guarantees.
All this HOT should be made of approved manufacturing company.
ITEM NO.: 21 FABRICATION WORK:
1. MATERIALS
The structural steel work shall conform to M-22 and its latest amendment.
2. WORKMANSHIP: -
2.1 The steel section as specified or required shall be cut, square and correct lengths, as per
design. The cut ends exposed to view shall be finished smooth. No two pieces shall be
welded or otherwise jointed to make up the required length of member, except as
indicated in the drawing or permitted prior to starting of work as directed. All
straightening and shaping to form shall be done by application of pressure and not by
Page 334

hammering .Any bending or cutting shall be carried out in such a manner so as not to
impair the strength of the metal. All operation shall be done in cold state unless
otherwise directed /permitted.
2.2 Welding shall generally be done by electric process. Gas welding shall be restored to,
using oxyacetylene flame with specific prior approval. Gas welding shall not be
permitted for structural steel work.
2.3 The welding work shall conform to I.S.816-1969, and its latest amendment.
2.4 Preparation of surfaces: Surfaces which are to be welded together shall be free form
loose mill scale, rust, paint, grease or other foreign matter. A coating of boiled linseed
Oil shall be permitted.
2.5 Assembly for welding: Before welding is commenced, the plates shall first be brought
together and firmly clamped or spot welded at specified distance. This temporary
connection has to be strong enough to hold the plates accurately in place without
displacement.
2.6 Precaution: All operation connected with welding and cutting equipment shall conform
to safety requirements given in I.S. 1118-1968 and its latest amendment.
The following points shall be borne in mind during the process of welding-
a) Welds shall be made in flat position wherever practicable.
b) Arc length, voltage and amperage shall be suited to the thickness of material type of
groove and other circumstances of the work.
c) The segments of welding shall be such that where possible the members which offer
the greatest resistance to compression are welded first.
2.7 The defective welds, which shall be considered harmful to the structural strength, shall
be cut out and re-welded.
All the members shall be thoroughly cleaned, of rust, scales, dust etc. before fixing them in
position. Testing of welding to be added in the specification.
The complete fabricated structure shall be scraped, cleaned and painted with two coats of epoxy
paint after applying one coat of red oxide primer.
ITEM NO. 22 : DIFFUSED AERATION SYSTEM
Only fine bubble PU membrane diffusers shall be acceptable with minimum membrane
diffuser to floor coverage area of 5%. Diffusers shall be submerged fine bubble / fine pore, high
transfer efficiency, low maintenance, non-buoyant type. Diffusers shall be strip (membrane)
type. Material of construction for (entire under water system including accessories shall be of
non corrosive Complete diffuser as a unit shall be assembled at the manufacturing factory
level. The grid supports shall of adjustable type made of SS 304.
Page 335

Type of diffuser system
A fine bubble diffused aeration system shall be applied to aeration tank for oxygenation. The
number of diffuser elements can be varied by the bidder depending on the manufacturer
selected, subject to the condition that sufficient design calculations are attached along with it
and the manufacturer is a standard one having supplied the diffusers to various waste water
treatment plants of similar nature.
Diffuser Elements
The diffuser elements shall be membrane type and resistant to such ingredients as
hydrocarbons, oil and grease. This shall afford a high oxygen transfer rate coupled with a
minimal pressure drop besides permitting simple erection onto the horizontal air manifold.
They shall have minimal coupling / attachments to the air manifold and shall have self-cleaning
properties while in action. Flat surfaces facing upwards as membrane surfaces shall not be
accepted. The diffuser unit shall be of corrosion resistant material. The membrane diffusers
shall permit connection to the air manifolds of circular or square cross section and the entire lot
of diffusers shall be capable of discharging designed flow of air at an average flow (maximum
of summer and winter requirement) with the nominal air flow per diffuser per element shall not
exceed 70 m3/h/m2 of diffuser surface area when installed in the said aeration tanks.
The diffuser grid shall be of fixed type. The headers onto which the diffusers are fixed shall be
of standard Imported PE/PVC/UPVC pipe sections of suitable inner bore and shape with
custom fixtures of the diffuser elements as directed by the membrane manufacturers.
Alternative pipe materials shall be acceptable provided the same are a mandatory part of the
diffuser supplier and have been in the sub-headers shall have enough counterweight or
alternative arrangement to surmount any buoyancy lift from the floor during air charging.
The diffusers shall be fixed to bioreactor floor, Fine Bubble Diffused Aeration membrane
diffusers with a maximum flux through the diffusers not exceeding 70 m3/m2 membrane area.
The air from the blowers which shall have high temperature and should be cooled suitably to
avoid damaging the diffuser membranes.
The material of diffuser and associated fixtures shall be:
Diffusers Membranes PU Membranes

Diffusers Membranes Support Engineering plastics Non Corrosive material
Under water Air Piping to diffusers UPVC / PE
Air downers to under water pipe UPVC / PE
The in tank diffuser piping shall be sized for a velocity less than 21 m/sec
ITEM NO. 23 : FIXED FILM ACTIVATED SLUDGE SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
The Fixed Film Activated Sludge system shall be designed to encourage attached growth of
biomass on the plastic media and limit the suspended solids in aeration tanks to be below 3200
mg/L. Addition of this system shall increase the biomass inventory in the aeration tank,
through attached growth, and thus logical treatment capacity. It shall ensure sufficient BOD
and TSS removal while encouraging nitrification of ammonia in the aeration tank.
Page 336

The system should be made up of biotextile sheets aligned in metal cages. The fixed film media
needs to be of plastic curtains mounted on SS 304 cages. The plastic shall be 100%
Polypropylene. The clamps and fixing accessories shall be of water resistant PP.
The fixed plastic curtain media should be arranged in the direction of flow. There shall be no
double wrapping of textile on cages. The fixed film system shall use discreet, parallel textile
sheets on the cage.
Rigid media shall not be allowed.
Biotextile sheets shall be knitted fabric with growth surface strips. The specific growth surface
shall be 23 m2/m2 design/specifications.
The systems shall require low maintenance and shall be a high energy efficiency system. It
shall not use any suspended media to avoid media loss. Further, the fixed film system shall be
provided in conjunction with high efficiency fine bubble diffuser mounted on the aeration tank.
The diffusers shall be spread throughout the basin to provide uniform aeration. The fixed film
system requiring coarse bubble aeration shall not be acceptable.
ITEM 24 : DOUBLE MEMBRANE GAS DOME FOR ANAEROBIC DIGESTERS
The scope of work includes dismantling of existing gas dome and disposing off the debris. It
also includes sludge removing from digester and cleaning of digester from inside.
The Membrane Gas Domes shall be Dual Membrane Type. The Membrane cover(s) shall be
stable under design load conditions, including localized static and dynamic loads. The external
membrane shall be designed to maintain a spherical shape that allows the cover(s) to support
the maximum possible applied loading taking into consideration Dead load, Vacuum load,
Wind load and other Static load.
Membrane Gas Domes shall consist of two membranes clamped firmly on top of the Digester.
The internal membrane shall hold the gas evolving in the Digester and shall have a low
permeability to digester gas. The internal membrane shall inflate and deflate with the change in
gas supply and usage. The external membrane shall be constantly inflated by pressurized air
supplied by a blower and distributed uniformly into the annular space between the outer &
inner membrane through an integral air flow channel on the side of the external membrane
which shall regulate and maintain the external membrane at constant pressure. The internal
membrane is protected by an over/under pressure valve that allows the evacuation of the biogas
in case of over pressure & also safe guards against extreme under pressure.
Anchoring of both the external and internal membranes shall be by profiled anchor
members/flanges and seals bolted to the top area of the concrete tank periphery. In case the
Digesters are of metallic construction, the clamping mechanism shall be slightly different &
makes use of a special gasket material in combination with a steel profile which shall seal the
membrane material to the tank. The profiled flange sections shall form a continuous ring to seal
the membrane to the top of the tank wall. The restraining flanges and anchors shall be
fabricated of hot dip galvanised steel or SS304 (as optional) or special fastening devices, as
appropriate.
Page 337

All structural steel for fixing the membrane to the tank shall be hot dip galvanised steel or Type
304 stainless steel (for special applications optional). All steel fabrication and welding shall be
in accordance with latest edition of Structural Welding Code. Sharp projections of cut or
sheared edges of metal shall be ground smooth to avoid damage to the membranes and also for
the safety of installation/operating personnel.
All steel design shall be in accordance with the latest editions of the ISA Manual of Steel
Construction and Uniform Building Code (UBC).
Membrane shall be fabricated using High frequency welding with a 37mm minimum width.
The manufacturing process will include a peeling test on a specimen which enables the
validation of the welding parameters. All welds will be visually inspected. Additionally, all
welds and seams shall be tested mechanically through the use of pressure and tension to ensure
each weld is complete and has developed full strength.
Membranes
Internal Membrane:
The internal or gas membrane shall be fabricated of a polyester fabric coated with polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) and sized to suit the Digester & to accommodate the specified volume of
biogas. Membranes shall have low permeability besides being resistant to digester gas. The
internal membrane fabric shall be designed and fabricated to resist all design loadings without
use of support cables superstructures or other restraining devices and shall meet the prescribed
standards.
The internal membrane shall be welded in such manner as to prevent the diffusion of biogas
through the yarn forming the internal structure of the membrane. The lack of this feature will
not be accepted for the membrane continuously exposed to biogas. During installation of the
Inner Membrane, care shall be taken to provide several strong belt supports across the digester
diameter such that the inner membrane never comes in contact with the sludge or the medium
inside the Digester.
External Membrane:
The external membrane shall be fabricated of a polyester fabric coated with polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) designed for use on air-supported structures and high-stress applications and shall be
resistant to ultraviolet degradation, abrasion, and weathering in an outdoor environment while
meeting the prescribed parameters. A uniform & distributed air flow into the annular space
between the outer and inner membrane shall be ensured through an integral airflow passage
forming a part of the outer membrane. This feature shall be unique to the Double Membrane
Version of Digester Domes.
Membrane cover(s) accessories and appurtenances
The membrane cover(s) shall include the following appurtenances:
Page 338

Two (2) specially designed, energy efficient, low pressure centrifugal fans for air supply to the
annular space between external membrane & inner membrane shall be provided having
adequate power and capacity with explosion proof motor at 415 ± V and 50 C/S.
The blower shall be complete with flexible collectors, air piping, check valve, inflation fan,
electro mechanical level sensor, air relief walls, air pressure transmitter, gas pressure
transmitter and gas detector.
A suitably designed safety valve shall be provided to meet exigencies of over pressure or under
pressure as the case may be & shall be integrated into the Membrane Gas Dome System.
ITEM NO.: 25: SUBMERSIBLE MIXER:
(a) The submersible mixer shall be installed in the specified plant areas, and they shall
be capable of providing a velocity gradient in the range of 500 to 1000 mm/sec.
(b) The mixer shall have a self-cleaning propeller optimized for effective mixing and
vibration free running, and required power shall be as per process design.
(c) The mixer shall be driven by a high efficiency 3 phase motors IP68 Class F. Motor shaft
and rotor shall be dynamically balanced.
(d) Bearings shall be lubricated-for-life with a calculated life of more than 100,000 operating
hours.
(e) The mixers shall have the flexibility to be located at different depths and thereby
avoiding dead zones.
(f) The mixer shall be provided with the following:
(1) Lifting frame with a winch which can be dismantled, fee standing with adjustable
boom length.
(2) Mounting socket for free standing hoist suitable for wall mounting.
(3) Guide for floor fixing components and support brackets for wall mounting.
(4) Stainless steel rope for raising and lowering the mixer.
(5) Rope block for holding the stainless steel rope where the lighting frame is used in
different locations.
(6) Support rope for reliable support and guidance of power supply cable.
(7) Support clamps and hooks to support the power supply cable in such a manner that
it is not under strain.
(g) The propeller, propeller shaft and motor housing, guide pipe, support brackets and all
fasteners shall all be of SS 316.The winch shall be of galvanized steel construction.
Submersible mixers shall be provided for Anaerobic tank.
ITEM NO.: 26 : ARCHIMEDEAN SCREW THICKENER
Scope of work :
This works includes, supply, erection, testing and commissioning of sludge dewatering system,
i.e. considering of Archimedean screw thickener and its accessories with drive motors,
backwash pump and control panel. Inlet sludge consistency shall be @1% and sludge outlet
consistency after dewatering system shall be 5% minimum.
Page 339

Capacity of thickener should be minimum of 55 Cu.mt./hour with following scope of supply
and detailed specifications:
1. Supply of Sludge Thickener, complete with drive Motors, Back Wash Pump, Control
Panel as per following specifications, The unit is complete with:
x One all welded tubular supporting frame work made of AISI 304
x One filtrate collection tank complete with cover, two hinged inspection portholes and
DN 250 PN 10 outlet, all made of AISI 304
x Two thickened sludge outlet back chutes, made of AISI 304
x Two inlet sludge, flanged DN 100 PN 10, made of AISI 304
x Two Archimedean screw filter drums, diameter 600 mm, made of AISI 304, lined with
polyester filtering cloth.
x Two variable speed worm geared motors, fixed to the filter drums, variable speed from
4.5 to 22 RPM, 0.75 kW, 400 V, three phases, 50 Hz, IP55
x Two filter drum washing feed manifolds 1”GM, fitted with polypropylene quick jet
spray nozzles system.
x One control panel assembled with a PRFV panel board, with door interlock canceling
switch, control push buttons, alarm lamps and general alarm flashing lamp. Power
section drives the filtering drums and washing pump motors. On the terminals board is
available one voltage free switching contact to signal if the thickener is running or not,
pumps driven by a two position manual selector. Power section is composed of remote
switches and adjustable circuit breaker with automatic thermal release, electromagnetic
operation.
Power Supply : 400 V, three phases, 50 Hz, IP65
CEI 17 – 13 / 1 – EN60 439/1
x One double impeller centrifuge pumps for belt washing, Max delivery 6 M3/hr. at 5
bar. The pump is complete with Water filter with manometers in glycerin.
2. MOC
x Body : AISI 304a
Filter Cloth contact with sludge : Polyester
ITEM NO.27: DRIVES
A GENERAL
All drive units shall have a rating and service factor suitable for twenty-four (24) hours
per day operation under operating load. Drive unit housings shall be constructed of high grade
cast iron, welded steel or other suitable approved materials. Three thermal rating of each unit
shall exceed the design load or proper cooling devices shall be provided. All drives shall be
designed especially for the service which they are required to perform.
B SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOTORS
SCOPE
This specification covers the design and manufacture of TEFC squirrel cage induction motors
with rating S1. Motors winding shall have class ‘F’ insulation with the permissible temperature
Page 340

rise above the specified ambient temperature shall be limited to class ‘B’. However, for motors
operating with Variable Frequency Drive, winding shall be vacuum impregnated and Class H
insulation only and with forced cooling arrangement. Contents of this specification are integral
part of the contract documents. All the drive motors shall follow the specifications mentioned
below.
REFERENCES
Unless they are at variance with the clauses of this

specification, the squirrel cage induction motors and their components shall comply
with the applicable Indian Standards listed below. Where Indian Standards do not exist, the
relevant British or German (VDE) Standards shall apply.
IS 325 1978 Three phase induction motors.
IS 1231 1974 Dimensions of three phase, foot mounted induction motors.
IS 2223 1971 Dimensions of flange mounted AC induction motors.
IS 2253 1974 Types of Construction of mounting arrangement of rotating

Electrical machines.
IS 4691 1968 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for rotating Electrical

machinery.
IS 4889 1968 Methods of determination of efficiency of rotating Electrical machines.
IS 4772 1968 Methods of determination of efficiency.
IS 4029 1967 Guide for testing 3 phase induction motors.
IS 4729 1968 Rotating electrical machines vibration of, measurement and evaluation
OPERATING CONDITION
Ambient Conditions
Motors shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid and

corrosive atmospheres found in sewage treatment plants. If not specifically mentioned
therein, a maximum ambient temperature of 45 Deg. C and an altitude not exceeding 1000
meters above mean sea level, shall be taken into consideration.
Frequency and Voltage Variation
Motors will be required for continuous, satisfactory operation at rated output under the
following conditions --
A At rated frequency with voltage variations of +/- 10% of nominal value.
Page 341

B At rates voltage with frequency variations of +/- 3% of nominal value.
C With a simultaneous and combined variation in frequency and voltage of

+/- 7.1/2% from the nominal values but with frequency variation not exceeding
+/- 3%. More stringent operating conditions may be required in particular cases.
The power rating for motors to drive pumps/equipment should be selected as per table below:
Required BKW of pump Multiplying factor to arrive at

motor rating
Up to 1.5 KW i.e. Less than 1.5 KW 1.4
1.50KW and up to 3.7 KW 1.3
3.7 KW and up to 7.5 KW 1.25
7.5KW and up to 15 KW 1.2
15KW and up to 75 KW 1.15
75 KW and above 1.10
Starting
Unless otherwise specified motors shall be designed for direct on-line starting across
full line voltage. On request, motors shall be designed for re-start under full load after a
momentary lack of voltage being 100% out of phase with respect to the motor residual
voltage.
The motor shall be designed for continuous operation at against full load torque without
injurious heating of insulated windings.
Direction of Rotation
The motors shall be suitable for operating in both direction of rotation. The direction of
rotation is defined as that looking towards the motor from the non driving end.
Noise
Motors shall have a guaranteed maximum noise level based on the I.S. Performance
a Starting Current: For all 415 Volts squirrel cage motors the starting current
shall be limited to 6 times the full load current.
b Torque Characteristic: For all 415 Volts motors the minimum starting
torque shall be 140% of full load torque, minimum torque during running up 100%
FLT and minimum stalling torque 200% FLT.
MOTOR RPM:
All the motor connected to low RPM mechanism through gear box should be1000 RPM.
REQUIREMENTS AND CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
Page 342

Windings
a Insulation and Bracing
Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be provided with class ‘F insulation as a minimum and
continuous motor rating (S1). In case of motors with class ‘F’ insulation the permissible
temperature rise above the specified ambient temperature shall be limited to class ‘B’.
However, for motors operating with Variable Frequency Drive, winding shall be vacuum
impregnated and Class H insulation only and with forced cooling arrangement.
Windings shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operation.
The winding shall be so treated as to resist the action of corrosive agents or substances
(solids, liquids or gases) as may be present in the atmosphere of sewage treatment plant and
that tend to dissolve the insulation. The winding shall be tropicalised.
The fan motors will be of a three phase totally enclosed outdoor type and shall conform to this
specification.
The ventilating system shall include the flanges for the air intake and the mating flanges for the
discharge ducts. An air flow indicator as described in paragraph shall also be provided.
Rotor
The rotor for squirrel cage motor shall be balanced to provide a low vibration level and a long
life for the bearings.
Shaft Extension
Motors shall be provided with a single, bare-shaft extension with key-way and key as per
requirements.
Lifting Hooks
All motors shall be provided with lifting hooks of adequate capacity.
Earth Terminals
Two earth-terminals shall be provided for each motor. These shall not be located inside the
terminal box. The size of each terminal shall be adequate to accept the lug of an earthing
conductor as specified in the other section. These two terminals shall be diametrically opposite
ends.
Windings shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operating
conditions and in this respect, particular attention is drawn to the starter windings of
direct-on-line squirrel cage motors. Adequate insulation shall be provided between coils of
different phases which lie together.
Page 343

b Terminals, terminal boxes and cable entries
The ends of the windings shall be brought out into a terminal box. For medium voltage e.g.
415 V motors, they shall be terminated by means of terminals mounted on an insulating
base made of non hygroscopic and noninflammable material. 415 V motors shall be
provided with six terminals and suitable links to connect them in delta or in star.
All terminals shall be adequately designed.
Line terminals shall be thoroughly insulated from the frame with materials resistant to tracking.
c Terminal Box
The terminal box shall be located on the right hand side viewed from the shaft end. It shall be
roto table in steps of 90 to allow cable entry from any direction.
If shown on drawing, a second terminal box shall be provided to house the current
transformers employed for differential protection.
The terminal box shall be large enough to facilitate easy connections of the cable. Bolted
terminals, suitable for accepting the lugs of cable as shown on drawing shall be
provided. The terminal box for 415 V motors shall be of C.I. heavy duty construction and
withstand full internal short circuit condition without danger to personnel.
The terminal box for high voltage motors shall be suitable for filling with compound and
shall be provided with compound filling and draining holes with suitable plugs.
Nickel plated brass cable glands shall be provided depending on the type of cable specified.
Tapped entries for the glands shall be provided on the terminal box for the number and size of
the cables shown on drawings.
e Phase Markings
Appropriate phase marketing as per IS: 325-1978 shall be provided inside the terminal
box. The markings shall be non- removable and indelible.
f Motor Casing and Type of Enclosures
Motors for indoor installation shall be dust and vermin proof. For outdoor use, they shall be
weather-protected., type, I.P. 55 enclosure as per I.S. and with canopy at the top. The motor
casings shall be provided with a suitable drain for condensed moisture. External metallic
contact with cooling air, (piping, air supply and discharge conduits, protective grills, air
deflectors, filters and supports) shall be corrosion resistant material or appropriately
treated to resist the corrosive agents which may be of rust proof material or protected
against corrosion. Motors shall be TEFC type only.
g Bearings and Lubrication
Page 344

Motors upto 200 KW shall have grease lubricated ball or roller bearings. Above this rating,
they shall be of manufacturer's standard type. In all cases, the bearing shall be chosen to
provide a minimum operating life of 40,000 hours. Bearings shall be adequate to absorb
axial thrust in either sense from the driven load due to shaft expansion.
h Grease Lubricated Bearings
These shall be capable of grease injection from outside without removal of covers.
The bearing boxes shall be provided with lubricant seals, to prevent loss of grease or
entry of dust or moisture. Where grease nipples are provided, these shall be
associated. Where necessary, with appropriately located relief devices which ensure passage
of grease through the bearing. Pre-lubricated sealed bearings will be considered provided full
guarantee can be given for 4 to 5 years trouble-free service without the necessity of
re-lubrication. All bearing should be of SKF/RHP/FAG make only.
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
Foundation Bolts
Motors shall be supplied with foundation bolts where specified.
Special tools and Spanners
Each rating and frame size of motor shall be provided with 4 sets of any special tools, required
for dismantling and maintenance of the motor.
Tringlar spanners required for explosion proof or increased safety motors are considered as
special tools.
Moisture Trap
A moisture trap drain hole with grab screw should be provided on all TEFC motors.
Name plates
A name plate as required under specification IS: 325:1961 shall be provided on each motor.
PAINTING
Internal and external parts of the casing and all metal parts likely to come in contact with
the surrounding air shall be protected with anti-acid paint that will resist the particular
ambient conditions.
Test and Test Certificates
The motor shall be tested in accordance with IS: 325 and IS: 4029. Type test shall be carried
out on one sample from each HP rating and frame size of motors rated above 40 H.P. Routine
tests shall be carried out on all motors.
Page 345

TYPICAL DATA SHEET TO BE FILLED IN BY SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER
DATA SHEET FOR MOTORS
Type and rating of motor :
Speed torque characteristics :
Pull out torque in % of full load

Torque :
Starting torque in % of full load

Torque :
Full load current in Amp. :
Starting current in Amp. :
Efficiency at 50% load :
Efficiency at 75% load :
Efficiency at full load :
Power factor at 50% load :
Power factor at 75% load :
Power factor at full load :
Full load slip % :
Starting time at 85% voltage :
Safe stall time at 100% voltage :
Temperature rise at full load :
Electrical Motors
All electrical motors supplied under this contract shall conform to all requirements
specified. The contractor's attention is drawn here to the fact that requirements more
rigorous than those stipulated in general therein or the Indian Standard itself may be
stipulated in other Sections of these specifications to meet special
process requirements. The contractor shall, accordingly, co-ordinate the work of all the
different specialties comprising the integral system and the corresponding functional, safety
and code requirements for each installation, in order to comply with these specifications.
Drives shall be non-over-loading at all points on the equipment operating curve.
Page 346

C. V-BELT DRIVE
Where motors are mounted above the driven machine on a pedestal, the belt tensioning
shall be accomplished by four studs which are double nutted to the motor plate to raise
and over the motor plate. Hinges with jacking screw to tension the belts not be acceptable.
One complete set of extra-V-belts must be supplied with the equipment provided with V-belts.
LUBRICATION
Lubrication of equipment shall ensure constant presence of lubricant on all wearing surfaces.
Lubricant filling and draining openings shall be readily accessible. Easy means for checking
the lubricant level shall be provided. Prior to testing and/or operation, the equipment
shall receive the prescribed amount and type of lubricant as required by the equipment
manufacturer.
PART - 3 - EXECUTION
CO-ORDINATION
A The drawings shown in a diagrammatic form the arrangements

desired for the principal apparatus, piping and similar appurtenances and shall be
followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment must be exercised in
carrying out the work to ensure the best possible headroom and space conditions
throughout, to secure a neat arrangement of piping, valves, fixtures, hangers and similar
appurtenances and to overcome local difficulties and obstructions wherever encountered.
B The Contractor shall take all measurements, for his work at the installation sites,
verify all sub-contractor's drawings and be responsible for the proper installations,
within the available space of the apparatus specified and shown on the drawings and
must secure the approval of the Engineer-in-charge for any variations before making any
changes.
PROTECTION:
A. All equipment shall be boxed, created or otherwise enclosed and protected during
transport, handling and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the
elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors, electrical
equipment and other equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in
weather-tight storage facilities such as warehouses.
B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration and

other damage. All painted surface which are damaged prior to acceptance of the
equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
C. Electrical equipment, controls and insulation shall be protected against moisture or

damage from water. All space heaters provided in the equipment shall be connected and
be kept operating at all times until equipment is placed in operation.
Page 347

D. The contractor shall erect and maintain on the site temporary storage facilities
approved by the Engineer-in-charge. At the option and with the Contractor’s approval, the
Contractor shall have access to the storage space off the site. The Engineer-in-charge
shall have access to the off-site storage facilities at any time to
inspect the equipments stored therein
E. All equipments shall be stored from delivery until

installation in storage facilities approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
INSTALLATION CHECK
A. The Contractor shall have an experienced, competent and authorized representative of the
manufacturer or supplier of each major item of equipment visit the site of the work and
inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the
equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is first operated.
The Contractor shall have the equipment supplier's representative revisit the job site as
often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and
operation are to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
B. Each equipment supplier or his accredited representative shall furnish to the

Engineer-in-charge a written report, hereinafter referred to as the Manufacturer's
Test Certificate certifying that the equipment
1 Has been properly installed and lubricated:

2 Is accurately aligned;
3 Is not unduly stressed by connecting piping or anchor bolts, &
4 Has been tested under full load conditions and that it has been tested successfully
and complied with there quirements stipulated in these specifications.
C. Equipment manufacturers shall furnish the services of competent, factory-trained

personnel during the guarantee period specified herein to inspect and repair the equipment
where required. Service requests shall be answered and complied with promptly.
D. All costs for this work shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed in full accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations and good practice. Where specified in other parts of this section,
factory-trained service personnel shall be on site to supervise the installation.
Sufficient notice shall be given to the Engineer-in-charge prior to equipment installations
in order that the Engineer-in-charge or his representative may be present during installation.
In general, the following installation practices shall be followed ---
A. Examine equipment for damage in Transport and handling. The examination shall include
checking for corrosion, poor workmanship, dirt or deleterious substances and poor fits.
B. Level the base plate or bedplate.
Page 348

C. Install equipment
D. Check alignment of couplings by precision level bottle and dial gauge.
E. If grout has been used check alignment and levels after ground has set by precision level
bottle and dial gauge.
F. Check direction of rotation and correct, if necessary, to ensure proper operation.
PLACING IN OPERATION
Prior to being put into operation, the equipment shall be inspected by the
Manufacturer’s factory-trained personnel. All defects discovered during such inspection
shall be corrected prior to initial start-up of equipment. Internal coatings applied at factory shall
be removed, if necessary. Lubricant shall be applied at the appropriate places and levels shall
conform to manufacturer’s recommendations. If necessary, full-load tests shall be
made and results of such tests shall be recorded. Unsatisfactory performances shall be
rectified and tests repeated until the performance complies with the Specifications. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-charge seventy-two (72) hours in advance of the
scheduled initial operation of equipment. During the course of initial operation, the
Contractor shall instruct personnel, nominated by the S.M.C. in the proper operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
All special tools, equipments or accessories required for the installation and maintenance
of plant equipment as well as copies each of instructions manuals necessary for the
proper use of such tools, equipment or accessories shall be provided by the
equipment manufacturer if the
Engineer-in-charge deems such instructions necessary. The Engineer-in-charge’s decision
in this regard shall be final. The equipment manufacturers shall supply with their
equipment all spare parts called for in the respective Sections. The spare parts shall be
identical in all respects to the original parts supplied in the assembly. All spare parts shall
have a metal identification tag. The tag shall include description of the equipment in
which it is to be used replacement
.
Each spare part shall be suitably packaged and preserved to withstand long term storage
in a protected environment without damage. All packaged equipment shall be clearly
marked for easy identification from outside.
PAINTING WORK
A. SHOP PAINTING:
All the component of units, equipment, machineries etc. shall be sand blasted. At the shop all
units, equipment, machineries, electric motors, gear boxes, and other similar self contained and
enclosed components shall be shop primed using zinc chromate primer and finished with a high
grade anti corrosive epoxy coating.
Page 349

All the submerged parts of units, equipment, machineries etc. shall be painted using
bituminised coal tar base epoxy paint with minimum 150 microns thickness and
remaining parts are painted using anti corrosive epoxy paint with minimum 150 microns
thickness approved in writing by the Engineer-in-charge. Surfaces which will be
inaccessible after assembly shall be painted or otherwise protected before assembly by
a method which provides effective protection throughout the expected economic life of
the equipment.
B. SITE PAINTING:
All the equipment, machineries, units, electric motor, gear boxes and other similar self
contained or enclosed components shall be painted with one appropriate coat prior to
commissioning using spray machine or brush as per site requirement.
C. Machined and polished metallic surface which are not to be painted shall be
coated with an approved rust preventive compound.
Galvanizing
Where steel or wrought iron is to be galvanised, it shall be carried out by the hot-dip process
and shall conform in all respects with IS: 2629.
Attention shall be paid to the details of members in accordance with BS: 4479. Adequate
provision for filling, venting and draining shall be made for assemblies fabricated from hollow
section. Vent holes shall be suitably plugged after galvanising.
All surface defects in the steel including cracks, surface lamination, laps and folds shall be
removed in accordance with IS: 6159. All drilling, cutting, welding, forming and final
fabrications of unit members and assemblies shall be complete before the structures are
galvanised. The surface of the steel work to be galvanised shall be free from welding slag,
paint, oil, grease, and similar contaminants. The articles shall be picked in dilute sulfuric or
hydrochloric acid, followed by rinsing in water and pickling in phosphoric acid. They shall be
throughly washed, stoved and dipped in molten zinc and brushed, so that the whole of the metal
shall be less than 610 gramms per square metre of surface galvanised, except in the case of
tubes to BS: 1387 when it shall be 460 gramms per square metre.
On removal from the galvanising bath the resultant coating shall be smooth, continuous, and
free from gross imperfections such as bare spots, lumps, blisters and inclusions of flux ash or
dross. Eges shall be clean and surfaces bright.
Bolts nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanised and subsequently centrifuged in accordance
with IS: 2669. Nuts shall be tapped upto 0.4 mm oversize before galvanising and the threads
oiled to permit the nuts to be finger turned on the bolt for the full depth of nuts.
During off-loading and erection, the use of nylon slings shall be used. Galvanised work which
is to be stored in Works or on Site shall be stacked so as to provide adequate ventilation to all
surfaces to avoid wet storage staining.
Small areas of the galvanised coat damaged in any way shall be restored by:-
Page 350

i. Cleaning the area of any weld slag and thoroughly wire brushing to give a clean surface.
ii. The application of two coats of zinc-rich paint (not less than 90% zinc, dry film), or the
application of a low melting point zinc alloy repair rod or power to the damaged area,
which is heated at 300 Ec.
Fastenings of galvanised steel work shall be hot drip galvanised and subsequently centrifugal
in accordance with IS: 2629. Nuts shall be tapped upto 0.4 mm over size before galvanising
and the threads oiled to permit the nuts to be finger turned on the bolt for the full depth of the
nuts.
Where surfaces of galvanised steel work are to be in contact with aggressive solutions and/or
atmospheres the galvanising shall receive further protection by painting.
Fasteners
Bolts nuts and studs with nominal diameters upto and fasteners including 39 mm required to be
made in carbon steel shall conform to BS 6104 and threaded in accordance with IS: 1363 +
1367. Bright steel washers 3.0 mm in thickness shall conform to BS 4320 and shall be
provided beneath bolt head and nut.
The above items reburied to be supplied in stainless steel shall conform to IS: 1570. These
items together with holding – down bolts and anchor plates required to be supplied in high
tensile steel shall conform to BS – 970 Ref. Symbol T.
Drilled anchor fixings for use on concrete structures shall be of a type Fasteners approved by
the Engineer’s Representative. The Positions of all drilled anchors shall be approved by the
Engineer’s Representative and a Contractor proposing to use such fixings shall be deemed to
have undertaken to supply, mark off, drill and fit. All exposed bolt heads and nuts shall be
hexagonal and the length of all bolts shall be such, that when fitted and tightened down with a
nut and washer, the threaded Portion shall fill the nut and not protrude from the face thereof by
more than a half diameter of the bolt. Rivets shall conform to BS: 641 and tested in accordance
with BS: 1109.
All the fastener like nuts, bolts, washers, anchor bolts, foundation bolts etc. used in submerged
units, equipments, machineries etc. shall be of stainless steel (S.S.316) and remaining will be of
MS galvanised
ITEM NO. : 28 PRESSURE GAUGES:
All pumps, compressors and air/gas blowers shall have stainess steel body PG at their
discharge lines, where pressure transmitter is not provided. Pressure Gauges for process fluids
containing sludge/solids and corrosive chemicals shall be of diaphragm type.
PG dial face shall be marked with pressure element material. Ranges shall be so specified that
the gauge normally operates in the middle third of the scale and shall confirm to IS-3624
standard dials, wherever possible.
Diaphragm seals, filled type or mechanical type shall be furnished where plugging of the
element may occur or where suitable material is not available in highly corrosive services.
When chemical seals are required, they shall be of clean out type with flushing connection.
Page 351

Pressure Gauge Dial Size shall be of minimum 100mm and of white with black engraving,
shall be provided with blow out disc, toughened/safety glass window, bayonet type bezel ring,
case material of SS304, Bourdon Element / Socket of SS316, movement parts of SS, weather
proof to IP-65, offering accuracy of +1% of FSD. Micro-zero adjustment at the pointer, bottom
process connection shall be 1/2” NPT, over-range protection of 130% of FSD.
In case of Diaphragm type Pressure Gauge, Diaphragm / Lower Chamber Wetted Parts shall be
of SS316, Upper Chamber of SS304 / SS316, with silicon oil sealing fluid, 2” ANSI B16.5
flanged process connection
All gauges shall be fitted with a pressure snubber to dampen pressure pulsations.
Labels
The Contractor shall arrange for the supply and fitting of engraved identification labels to all
valves and items of plant. The reference numbers of all valves shall be as indicated on the
schematic diagram to be supplied under the Contract.
All warning labels shall comply with BS: 5378 parts 1, 2 and 3 and screw fixed rigid
construction.
Designation labels shall be of 5 mm traffoly with black lettering on white background.

Embossed materials and techniques shall not be accepted.
The Contractor shall provide 2 nos. enameled iron plates worked “Men Working of Plant”.
The plates shall be 200 mm x 75 mm with red lettering on a white background.
N. B. all identification and warning labels shall be in (“Gujarati Language”) and English.
Guards
Adequate guards shall be supplied and installed throughout the installation to cover drive
mechanisms. All rotating and reciprocating parts, drive belts, etc. shall be securely shrouded to
the satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure the complete safety for both maintenance and
operating personnel. However, whilst all such guards shall be of adequate and substantial
construction, they shall also be readily removable for gaining access to the plant, with out the
need for first removing or displacing any major item of plant. The guards shall be of the open
mesh type except where retention of fluid spray is required.
Suppression of Noise
All plant offered shall be quiet in operation. The noise level within the building shall not be
more than 85 decibels (+5 percent on this over the audible frequency spectrum measured at
mid-bans) “A” scale when measured along a contour 3 meters from any single item of plant
during starting, running and scoping. The noise level outside the building shall not be more
than 60 decibels (+5 % on this over the audible frequency spectrum measured at mid-band) “A”
scales when measured along a contour 3 meters from the external wall. Noise test
measurement shall be made on completion of the installation of the pant at Site to verify that it
Page 352

complies with this Clause. Plant which fails to comply with the noise level limits when tested
which render it liable for rejection unless it is satisfactorily modified at the Contractors expense
by the programmed commissioning date.
ITEM NO.29 KNIFE GATE VALVES
GENERAL:
Knife gate valves shall be suitable for use in waste water and sewage water containing solids
and fibrous wastes etc. These shall be suitable for use at suction and delivery side of pumps as
well as in branch lines in a sludge handling application of treatment plant or a pumping station.
The valve should be provided with gate made of stainless steel and the gate should have
beveled knife edge at the bottom to cut through and easily enter in the solids settled in the
bottom and ensure positive shut-off / closure in sewage environment.
DESIGN:
The valve should preferably be bonneted up to 300 mm size and bonnet-less for higher sizes.
Valves shall be of wafer lug type construction up to 450 mm size and full flanged construction
for higher sizes. The valve shall be provided with flange drilling to suit ANSI 16.5B 150# with
raised face or DIN PN10 or IS 1538 -1993 flange connections in between pipelines.
The valves shall be designed to withstand minimum 10 bar pressure and 4 bar pressure for
above size valves. It should be suitable for uni-directional application and should be able to
withstand small bi-directional pressure.
The valve body should be cast and provided with replaceable type flexible sealing seals to offer
drop tight shut off. The seals should be made of EPDM rubber and should be held in place by
an easily removable type seal retainer ring.
The valve housing should have integral as cast tapered lugs provided for pushing the gate
towards the flexible rubber seal only at the verge of closure with a view to avoid seal wear and
achieve drop tight shut off. The surface of the gate coming in contact with the seal should be
polished & buffed.
Bonneted type valves shall be provided with O-rings based arrangement to seal the rear
opening and reduce the operating torque. Bonnet-less valves shall be provided with sufficient
ply of stuffing seals in the in built stuffing box to seal the rear opening. The seals should be of
non-asbestos PTFE to reduce the friction and offer higher life. Provision shall be made to
enable tighten the stuffing seals. Replacement of stuffing seals should be possible to be carried
out in installed condition of the valve but without there being line pressure.
Page 353

The spindle should be double start threaded and non-rising type for compact & safe operation.
Gate opening indicating arrangement should be provided to find out the extent of gate opening
/closing.
MATERIALS:
The following material of construction shall be offered for the knife gate valves.
Body : Cast Iron FG 260 as per IS 210 or ductile iron

Knife gate : AISI: 304 Gr. ASTM A240
Retainer ring : Stainless steel Gr. CF:8
Inlet Seal : EPDM
Spindle : Stainless steel Gr. ASTM A276 Type 410 / 303
Spindle Nut : Cast Iron Gr. FG 200 as per IS 210 with bronze lined
Stuffing plate : Cast Steel ASTM A216 Gr. WCB
Stuffing seal : Synthetic yarn with PTFE
Support channel : Steel, epoxy painted
PAINTING:
The valve will be provided with following painting specification.

Surface preparation : Blast clean to near white metal finish.
Priming : 2 coats of Epoxy primer.
Finish painting : 2 coat of epoxy paint. Minimum DFT inclusive of
priming 200
Microns.
ITEM NO.29 B KNIFE GATE VALVES ( MOTOR OPERATED )
The specification of valve shall be as per item no 20 , However operation of valve shall be
electrically operated with manual override. The specification of actuator shall be as indicated in
the technical specification.
ITEM NO. : 30 : GENERAL OVERHAULING AND SERVICING OF THE OPEN

CHANNEL / WALL THIMBLE MOUNTED SLUICE / GATES
Overhauling of Open Channel / Wall thimble mounted gates installed at various locations
within STP. The tenderer shall have to dismantle existing gates and overhaul it. Tenderer
shall have to scrap, clean and repaint the entire gate and its sub assembly. The contractor
shall have to supply and erected the new stem nut, pin, pedestal and wall bracket, s.s. stud
etc. While re-erection of open channel gate, proper alignment of gates, stem, brackets, head
stock shall be done so that the undue working of bracket, etc. avoided. All the related civil
work, breaking of wall, RCC and repairing shall be done by tenderer. The leakage from the
gates after re-erection shall be within limit specified in IS.
Apply two coat of Zinc base primer after completion of cleaning, brushing, & scraping of
gates unit and finally it shall be coated with Epilux Coaltar base epoxy paint. After re-erect
gates contractor shall give the test in the presence of Enginner-in-charge.
Page 354

ITEM 31: TROLLEY AND CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
a. The chin pulley block shall be operated on the lower flange of the bridge girder.
b. The load chain shall be made of alloy steel as per IS: 3109. It shall be heat treated to give
ductility and toughness so that it will stretch before breaking. IT shall be of welded
construction with a factor of safety not less than 5.
c. The hand chains for the hoisting and traverse mechanism shall hang well clear of the hook
and both the chains shall be on the same side. The hand chain wheel shall be made from
pressed sheet and shall be provided with roller type guarding to prevent snagging and
fouling of the chain.
d All the gearing shall be totally encased. Proper lubricating arrangements shall be provided
for bearings and pinions. Gears shall be cut form gorges steel Blanks. Pinions shall be of
heat treated alloy steel. Gears shall be as per BS: 436/IS: 4460.
e. The trolley track wheel shall be rim toughened, heat treated carbon steel or low alloy steel or
CI and shall be single flanged and shall have antifriction ball bearings. The wheels shall be
machined on their treads to match the flanges of the track joints.
f. The traveling trolley frame shall be made of rolled sell conforming to IS: 2062. the side
plated of trolley frame shall extend beyond wheel flanges, thus providing bumper
protection for the wheels. The two side plates shall be connected by means of an equalizing
pin.
g. Axles and shafts shall be made of carbon steel and shall be accurately machined and properly
supported.
h. The lifting hooks shall be forged, heat treated alloy or carbon steel of rugged construction.
They shall be of single hook type provided with a standard depressed type safety latch. They
shall swivel and operate on antifriction bearings with hardened races. Locks to prevent
hooks from swiveling shall be provided. Hook shall be as per BS: 2903/IS: 3815.
i. The brake for the lifting gear shall be automatic and always in action. It shall be of screw and
friction disc type self – actuating load pressure brake. Brakes shall offer no resistance during
hoisting.
j. If the offered pumpset weight is more than the craned capacity specified, the contractor shall
offer the crane capacity 2.0 times higher than the weight of the pumpset.
DAMAGED PRODUCTS
A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-charge in the event of any equipment or material
being damaged.
B. Repairs to damaged products shall not be made without prior approval of the
Engineer-in-charge.
ITEM NO.32: AIR COMPRESSOR:
x Design and construction requirements :

x The Air Compressor should be two stage single acting air cooled compressor.
x The air compressor should be self contained, fit to install on bare foundation, receiver
Page 355

mounted, automatically regulated.
x The air compressor shall be base plate mounted.
x The entire unit shall be complete with inter cooling system, squirrel cage induction
motors, tarters etc.
x It should be complete with low oil level switch, silencer. This units shall be complete
with reflux, top and safety valves, auxiliary valves, drain valves, shut off valves,
pressure switches, etc.
x The pressure transmitter shall be provided as front line control and pressure switches
shall act as secondary control.
x In order to reduce discharge temperature of compressed air and to facilitate removal of
water vapor and oil vapor, air compressor should be complete with air dryer, automatic
drain trap etc. Auto drain trap shall be with manual isolation valve also.
x Air compressor as a system is required. System Arrangement shall be as this:
Compressor-Vortex separator-Dryer-Micro Filter- Zero oil Filter
x Each stage mentioned above should have by pass arrangement so that repairing/failure
of any stage does not effect the normal working.
x The capacity of ancillaries shall be decided at the time of detailed engineering.
x Vortex separator should be designed to have effective separation of water and oil and
should be maintenance free. It should have aluminum body construction. It should have
auto drain valve.
x Micro filter and Zero oil filter should be designed for air quality as per ISO 8573-1. It
should carry warranty for elements also. Pressure drop caused should be low.
x A properly designed base plate should be provided for mounting of driver and load
equipment.
x An inlet filter and silencer of adequate capacity should be fitted to the intake of
equipment. The
x filter should be designed to have easy cleaning so that excessive overheating is avoided.
x Since demand of air is small and intermittent, automatic start and stop control system
should be provided.
x TESTING:
Performance test : YES to be witnessed

Visual inspection check : Required
DRAWINGS:
x The manufacturer shall submit the following drawings.

x Preliminary outline dimensional drawings.
x Performance curves
x Data Sheet
x Typical cross sectional drawing showing constructional details with the complete bill of
material and relevant standards along with two years normal working spares.
x Drawing showing Network, piping lay out plan, MOC, size, capacity etc.
ITEM NO.33: STRAINERS, UF AND RO SYSTEM
The specification provided herewith are tentative and for smooth operation of TTP units.
However, the contractor may design system to achieve the desired parameters and
Page 356

characteristics of tertiary treated water - industrial grade water as specified in relavant Chapter
in the tender.
1. STRAINERS
The Contractor shall provide a set of manual backwashing, in-line strainers to remove particles
and debris, such as drill shavings, present in the secondary effluent that could be expected to
score, scratch or otherwise damage the membranes used in the UF process. The screening
properties of the strainer shall be based on the requirements of the UF membrane process. The
Contractor shall ensure that strainers provided can accommodate the total flow required for
continuous operation of the downstream UF system with one strainer out of service for
cleaning in backwash mode or off-line for maintenance. The layout proposed by the Contractor
shall clearly identify all units and associated equipment, including all pipework.
The strainers supplied by the Contractor shall be an in-line type and contain a stationary basket
. The strainer baskets shall be fitted with a stainless steel micro-screen configured as a low
fouling slotted, wedge wire type. The screen openings shall be shaped to allow even flow and
low pressure drop. The screen size will be selected to match the requirements of the UF
membrane system. If the manufacture of the UF membrane does not have a requirement for
screen size, then the Contractor shall provide a screen with maximum perforations of 0.5 mm.
The micro-screen shall be able to be inspected and changed without removing the strainer drum
or wheel assembly. .
The Strainer casing shall be made from a high grade stainless steel, which shall be suitably
passivated to minimise corrosion and pitting.
2. ULTRAFILTRATION SYSTEM
The primary purpose of the UF system is to remove sub-micron particles including bacteria,
large colloids and other suspended solids from the secondary effluent to improve the
performance of the downstream RO process by reducing fouling and minimising the chemical
cleaning requirements. The secondary purpose of the UF System is to serve as one of the
“multiple barriers” to the micro-organisms regulated.
Scope of Supply
The scope of supply for the UF system shall consist of, but not limited, to the following:
Features of the Ultrafiltration System
The Contractor shall provide a complete UF system, which includes, as a minimum, the
following components:
a) Microporous membrane
The UF system shall use a pressurised microporous, hollow fibre membrane from an
organic polymer as ultrafiltration membrane made of Modified / Reinforced PES.
b) Membrane elements
Page 357

Multiple hollow fibre membranes shall be packaged as elements. The nomenclature
adopted by the UF manufacturer for the elements may include sub-modules, modules,
or cassettes. The Contractor shall supply hollow fibre elements that are specifically
designed for municipal wastewater applications.
c) System Configurations
The UF System shall consist of multiple process units. Each process unit shall contain
multiple hollow fibre elements. The process units shall be configured as an array of
pressure vessels housing the membrane elements. For the UF system, the Contractor
shall be fully responsible for the detailed design and layout, and provide all associated
equipment, tanks and controls to provide a fully functional, operating system which
meets the specified performance requirements. Each array system shall be capable of
operation independent from the other arrays. These independent operations shall
include filtering, backwashing and membrane chemical cleaning. Each array shall have
a local control interface with control from the control panel, or from fully integrated
local PLC’s, inlet and outlet connections, stop valves, control valves, actuators,
instrumentation, membrane integrity checking systems, process and filtrate quality
monitoring systems, to provide an independent operating unit which is fully functional.
Each array shall have its own membrane integrity monitoring system, for example, an
off-line pressure test system.
d) Access to Modules
The Contractor shall provide clear space around the arrays that allows for unobstructed
access to the membrane elements as required for installation inspection, integrity
profiling, in-situ maintenance and removal of the elements. The Contractor shall supply
all tools and devices required to safely and efficiently remove the membrane elements.
The Contractor shall submit all catalogues and operation and maintenance details
associated with the tools and devices for review and approval to the SMC prior to
installation of the membrane elements. The Contractor is responsible for the design,
certification, supply and installation of the cranage required to remove membrane from
a array. The Contractor shall submit all calculations, detailed drawings, certifications
which indicate that the cranage is structurally sound and safe to operate for review and
approval to the SMC prior to installation.
Each array, shall have its own on-board process performance monitoring
instrumentation, including, as a minimum, the following:
a) Inlet (Feed): pressure, flow, turbidity(one common for entire ystem), temperature;
b) Recirculation Loop (where utilised): pressure, flow, turbidity(one common for
entire system);
c) Outlet (Filtrate): pressure, flow, membrane flux rate (calculated), turbidity;
d) Transmembrane pressure (TMP);
e) Backwash Water Inlet: pressure;
f) Backwash Water Outlet: pressure, flow;
g) Chemical Cleaning Solution Inlet/Outlet: pH;
h) Total unit run (elapsed) time;
i) Elapsed Time: since last backwash;
Page 358

j) Filtered Water Volume: since last backwash;
k) Elapsed Time: since last membrane chemical cleaning; and
l) Filtered Water Volume: since last membrane chemical cleaning.
The Operator shall be able to adjust process setpoints from the control system operational
stations in the Control Room.
Adjustable setpoints shall be provided for each of the membrane filtration systems and shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
a) Number of process units on-line and off-line;

b) Equalisation tank operating water level range;
c) Filtrate tank water level settings;
d) UF feed pumps start and stop based on flow equalisation tank levels, slow start and
slow stop operation, adjustable pump/motor speed based on UF array flow.
e) Control setpoints for the dosing of sodium hypochlorite to the feedwater and residual
chlorine level
f) Filtrate water quality limits, such as turbidity, particle counts, to initiate backwash or
alarm on poor water quality
g) All setpoints relating to UF backwash initiation, duration, and frequency
h) Backwash water flowrates, including slow start and slow stop modes.
i) Feed water inlet flowrate through each train or flow stream
j) Filtrate tank water levels, and start and stop, and speed of RO Membrane Pressure
Pumps/Motors.
k) Alarm settings
Tools and Devices
The Contractor shall provide handheld/portable instruments for the monitoring of membrane
module integrity, and the checking of individual membrane elements for integrity such as
‘sonic sensing’ equipment. The Contractor shall supply any special tools required for
removing membrane elements.
Membrane Element Life
The Contractor shall define the guaranteed membrane element life in the pro-rated membrane
warranty. The Contractor is advised that the following criteria shall be used for the purposes of
defining membrane module life:
a) Failure to meet the specified filtrate quality criteria;
b) Failure to meet specified integrity test requirements; and,
c) Failure to restore the permeability of the membrane to allow the system to achieve the
specified MC and RC CIP frequency requirements at the design flow using only the
duty membranes.
Page 359

The Contractor shall provide all details of membrane life and pro-rata warranty life as required
in the Technical Particulars required for Process Equipment and the Technical Particulars
required for Equipment Performance Guarantees.
3. REVERSE OSMOSIS (RO) SYSTEM
General
The selection, detailed design, installation, testing and commissioning of the Reverse
Osmosis System (RO System) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall ensure that the complete RO System The layout proposed by the
Contractor shall clearly identify all units and associated equipment, including all
pipework. The contractor may provide low pressure / high pressure RO membraneas
per his own design.
The primary purpose of the RO system is to remove dissolved solids, minerals and
soluble organics from the filtered effluent to produce permeate that can be disinfected
using ultraviolet light and chemically adjusted using sodium hydroxide to meet the
product water quality requirements specified in this tender document.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing an RO System consisting of four (4)
identical, two (2) stage RO trains with design net permeate capacity with maximum
recovery of 75%. The bidder is allowed to blend maximum 25% of UF permeate as a
part of total product water as 40 MLD, to RO permeate to ensure the desired quality
final product water. The Contractor shall provide all process-related equipment, piping,
appurtenances including but not limited to the following;
a) RO Feed chemical conditioning systems consisting of chemical storage, mixing,
dosing, instrumentation and control systems;
b) RO high pressure feed pumps and in-line strainers; c) Membrane elements as
specified in this Specifications, with permeate interconnectors and brine seals;
d) Pressure vessel support frame;
e) Piping and valves for feed, interstage and final concentrate, permeate, permeate
to waste, and membrane cleaning;
f) Membrane Clean-In-Place system;
g) Membrane Flushing system;
h) Sample valves, tubing and sample panel;
i) All required components for installation, including but not limited to, appropriate
anchor bolts, piping supports, hardware, surface preparation, and shop and field
painting; and, j) All required process control and monitoring instrumentation
including all on-line analysers for performance monitoring and verification.
Reverse Osmosis System
General Features
a) The process and instrument diagram for the RO systems shall be submitted by the
bidder.
b) The feed water to the RO shall be ultrafiltered secondary sewage from proposed
STP at Dindoli. The Contractor shall make provisions for the addition of an
Page 360

anti-scalant to condition the RO feed water upstream of the RO high pressure feed
pumps.
c) The chemically adjusted feed water shall be conveyed to the RO trains by high
pressure feed pumps. The Contractor shall supply a dedicated pump for each train
and a redundant feed pump that can be shared between trains. The pumps shall be
fitted with variable speed drive units to permit the control system to maintain a
constant flow to each membrane train regardless of the feed pressure required.
The pumps shall be sized based on the pressure requirements for a five year old
membrane and have sufficient head under these conditions to convey the
permeate to the top of the product water storage tank.
d) The Contractor shall provide Four (4) RO Trains. Each train shall have a
permeate capacity of design flow.
e) Permeate from stage one and two of each train will flow into a common header
that feeds the product water tank after pH correction. The Contractor shall make
allowances for the total permeate flow from any train to be diverted from the
product water tank feed header and returned to the UF filtrate tank. The
Contractor will also make allowances to segregate the permeate from stage one
and stage two of each train so that under any given set of circumstances the
permeate from stage two can be returned to the filtrate tank. The concentrate
water rejected by the membrane trains shall be taken to RO reject treatment units.
f) The reverse osmosis trains will be automatically controlled from the Control
System. The permeate and concentrate flow rates (and thus, recovery) of each
train will be controlled primarily by automatic adjustment of the appropriate feed
pump VFD and concentrate control valve. The concentrate valve shall be a globe
control valve. In each train, a manually-adjusted permeate backpressure throttling
valve shall be installed for Stage 1 for “flux balancing.” The back pressure
throttling valve shall be a globe valve or segmented ball valve designed for
throttling/balancing the flow and designed to prevent cavitation under all design
operating conditions.
f) The reverse osmosis trains shall be designed to be cleaned in place by a dedicated
automatic membrane cleaning system, which is sized to clean stage one and stage
two separately. The RO membranes will be flushed using product water
immediately after cleaning to remove residual surfactants.
g) The reverse osmosis trains shall be designed to incorporate an automatic product
water flush upon train shutdown to prevent inorganic scaling from stagnant
concentrate. The pressure required to effect the product water flush will be
supplied by both a dedicated flush pump and the head of the product water
storage tank. The Contractor shall provide one (1) RO flush water pump, taking
suction from the Product Water Tank and including all controls, instruments,
electrical, pipework, manifolding, valves, actuators, fittings and mountings.
h) The flushing sequence shall be automatically initiated and controlled if an
individual RO train is off- line for a period in excess of 30 minutes without being
restarted. The system shall be configured to flush each train in sequence, if more
than one train is off-line for the predetermined time interval. The Contractor shall
design and install an RO system that incorporates features to eliminate the
potential for damaging the membranes by positive permeate pressure generated
during the cleaning or flush stage. The Contractor shall design the flush system so
that all trains can be flushed within 30 minutes of initiating the flush sequence.
Page 361

a) RO Membrane Elements including following;
The Contractor shall provide low pressure, high rejection, thin film composite, spiral
wound type RO membranes that have reduced fouling tendencies when operated on a
pretreated feedwater produced by the ultrafiltration of clarified secondary sewage from
existing STP at Bhatar. The spiral wound membrane shall have the feed and concentrate
(reject) flow through the element parallel to the longitudinal axis of the permeate
collection tube of the element. The Contractor shall provide all interconnecting tubes
fitted with groves to accommodate o-ring seals or double gasket seals.
RO membranes cast from cellulose acetate or derivatives of cellulose acetate are not
acceptable under the terms of this contract and will not be considered for this
application.
The Contractor shall provide RO membrane elements that are of standard RO industry
dimensions and suitable for installation inside standard RO pressure vessels (pressure
housings).
The Contractor shall furnish complete manufacture’s catalogue information, descriptive

literature and specifications for the RO membrane elements, including projections
developed for the two stage system to the SMC
b) Factory Testing of RO Membrane Elements
The Contractor shall provide RO membranes and elements which have been
individually factory tested, at their point of manufacture, and achieved satisfactory
results including the requirements below. The individual RO elements shall be factory
tested, as a minimum for:
(1) Vacuum hold test (using the ‘San Diego Protocol’, as outlined below);
(2) Sodium chloride solution rejection; and
(3) Element permeate productivity at standard pressure, temperature and salt load.
The ‘San Diego Protocol’ for the vacuum hold test (VHT) is as follows:
(1) Fully wet the individual membrane elements by soaking completely in water;
(2) Drain the water from the element;
(3) Plug and seal the permeate tube on one end;
(4) Attach vacuum pump to the other end of the permeate tube;
(5) Draw a vacuum of at least 20 kPa absolute or 5.9 inches Hg absolute pressure
which corresponds to 24 inch Hg vacuum gauge pressure;
(6) Measure vacuum decay over a one (1) minute period and repeat until two equal
results are obtained.
The vacuum decay in all RO membrane elements shall be less than 10 kPa/minute (2.95
Hg). The salt (Sodium rejection) and the permeate productivity shall as a minimum
comply with the figures stated on the Membrane Data Sheet for the membrane tendered.
These factory tested membranes and elements shall be certified, in accordance with the
industry approved quality control and quality assurance procedures, prior to shipment to
the Dindoli STP site. The Contractor shall provide certified test data, indicating the
factory test results, for each RO membrane element, by serial number, prior to
Page 362

shipment.
After delivery to the Dindoli TTP, and before installation in the RO trains, at least ten
(10) percent of the RO elements shall be randomly selected by the SMC and tested by
the Contractor but witnessed by the SMC using the ‘San Diego’ vacuum hold test
procedure, at the site with equipment provided by the Contractor. RO membrane
elements which pass the factory and site tests shall then be acceptable for installation in
the RO trains.
Membranes elements which do not meet the quality control and quality assurance
procedures, including factory, and/or site tests, shall be replaced with membranes which
meet all the procedures and subsequent repeats of the site tests using another random
selection for the 10% sample size. The batches of membrane elements for which any
membrane fails from which the 10% sample were randomly selected for the field tests
shall be replaced in totality.
Membrane Element Identification
Each membrane element shall have a unique serial number, which shall be used for
identifying the element’s materials, manufacturing history, quality assurance and
performance test results.
The Contractor shall install membrane elements described in positions determined after
review of factory test data (by element serial numbers). The permeate conductivity from
each pressure vessel shall be within plus or minus 20 percent of the average
conductivity of the combined permeate for the stage of the train in which it is installed.
In the event that individual pressure vessel conductivities exceed the average
conductivity of a stage by more than 20% the contractor shall probe each pressure
vessels to detect leaks, repair rolled o-rings or, if necessary, replace leaky membrane
elements.
Ancillary Fixtures and Fitting
The membrane elements provided under this Specification shall be complete and
operable in all respects including, but not limited to, accessories such as permeate
interconnectors and brine seals suitable for installation in the nominal 200 mm (8-inch)
diameter pressure vessels.
c) Reverse Osmosis Feed Pumps
The Contractor shall supply a dedicated high pressure feed pump for each RO train and
a common stand-by feed pump for RO trains. Suitable pumps include horizontal,
multi-stage, split case pumps. The RO feed pumps shall be equipped with variable
speed drives for constant feed at variable pressures.
The Contractor shall ensure that each feed pump is sized to deliver the required feed
flow to an individual RO train rated to produce designed net permeate. In sizing the
pump the Contractor shall make allowances for the feed pressures projected for five
year old membrane elements. The Contractor shall make allowances for the additional
Page 363

feed pressure requirements resulting from the stage one permeate throttling valve.
Finally, the Contractor shall also ensure that the pump is sized to convey the RO
permeate into the top of the Product Water Storage Tank.
d) Membrane Pressure Vessels
The Contractor shall provide RO membrane pressure vessels (pressure vessel)

manufactured
from non-corroding materials with side entry ports and connections to house the RO
membrane
elements. The Contractor may supply the pressure vessels as either single ported side
entry
pressure vessels or multi-ported, side entry pressure vessels.
The Contractor shall supply the vessels complete with end closures, hardware and
membrane element end adapters. All seals in the shell or head of the vessel shall be
visible so as to be directly accessible for replacement without the removal of any other
components.
The shell of the vessel shall be the side port entry type and shall be fabricated of
filament wound fibreglass reinforced plastic using continuous glass roving impregnated
with an elevated temperature cure epoxy resin system. Materials of construction shall be
lot traceable to vessel serial number. All wetted components in continuous contact with
the pressurized process water shall be made from plastic or metal proven to have
long-term resistance to corrosion in the service intended. All other materials of
construction shall be of appropriate strength and corrosion resistance for the operating
conditions.
The vessels shall be designed to allow industry-standard sized membrane elements to be

easily accommodated by changing end connectors (outboard adapters) and spacers (to
prevent movement of the elements within the vessels). The Contractor shall furnish the
appropriate end connectors (outboard adapters) for the membrane elements.
Vessels shall be so designed as to allow membrane elements to be connected to the

permeate port at either end of the vessel so that permeate can be taken from either end.
End closures shall incorporate an approved quick-opening locking mechanism and shall
be so designed as to minimise the force required to install and remove the head. The
locking mechanism shall be so designed that the failure of any one component of the
mechanism will not allow the mechanism to release. The locking mechanism shall
incorporate a safety interlock, which secures the primary locking components and
provides a measure of tamper resistance. The locking mechanism shall be so designed
as to allow easy visual assurance that all components are in serviceable condition, in
place, and fully engaged.
Each vessel shall be fitted with a dedicated permeate sampling valve. The valve shall
provide a direct connection to the permeate stream. The sampling valve shall allow
access for probing to determine the permeate quality at different points down the length
of the pressure vessel. A seal on the permeate sampling valve will stop any permeate
Page 364

from flowing around the probing tube to the outside of the vessel.
e) Pressure Vessel Racks

Each train frame shall be designed and constructed to support all loads, including, but
not
limited to, full-rack quantity of membrane elements and pressure vessel, valves and
piping when filled with water, and panels. The centreline of the bottom pressure vessels
in the framework shall be 750 mm above the platform supporting the vessel racks.
The Contractor shall fabricate the frames, racks, or skids which hold membrane
assemblies, valves, piping, from welded steel. The fabricated racks shall not be used for
supporting of pipes except where specifically allowed for in the design calculations.
The pressure vessel rack will be furnished from structural steel finished to the following
specifications
Surface Preparation:
Remove all weld spatter.
Grind all welds smooth.
Bolt holes, mounting holes, etc., shall be drilled prior to painting.
Shop Prime Painting:

Thoroughly clean all ferrous metal items and give a shop coat of primer and
finish coating Allow paint to dry before shipment of material. Protect painted
surfaces during installation.
Prepare and touchup marred surfaces per paint manufacturer's instructions.
Frame weldments shall be designed to be supported from two bearing points. Frame
weldments shall support each pressure vessel at three locations per pressure vessel
manufacturer's requirements.
The membrane skid framework will be anchored to the vessel rack support and platform
using levelling nuts so that the base is 12.5 mm (½-inch) minimum above the finished
floor. Non-shrink grout and shims shall be packed beneath the skid frame.
f) Feed/Concentrate And Permeate Manifolds
The Contractor shall provide all piping and tubing associated with the feed/concentrate
and
permeate manifolds. The Contractor is responsible for the design and fabrication of the
feed/concentrate and permeate manifolds. The Contractor shall submit all necessary
shop
drawings associated with these manifolds to the SMC prior to the delivery of this
equipment to site. Manifolds supplied by the Contractor shall be inspected by the SMC
upon delivery to site.The SMC will reject any manifolds that do not meet the following
specifications and the
Contractor shall be required to replace those manifolds rejected with new pieces.
Page 365

Rejected
manifolds may not be repaired and resubmitted.
The feed/concentrate manifolds shall be manufactured from fittings utilising Grade

316L stainless steel reducers, elbows and tees manufactured to ASTM A774 with
dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.9. The Contractor shall ensure that the welds on
the manifolds meets the requirements for welding of Austenitic Stainless Steel Tube and
Pipe Systems in Sanitary Applications as specified by the American Welding Society
AWS D18.1. The Contractor shall arrange for the SMC or a nominated representative to
inspect and approve the welding work prior to acceptance.
Manifolds shall be designed with inlets/outlets for each pressure vessel. Individual
feed/concentrate manifolds shall consist of a continuous central pipe modified with a
series of smaller diameter branch connections that are aligned with side entry ports on
the pressure vessels. The Contractor shall ensure that these branch connections are
extruded from the central pipe. The direct welding of a smaller diameter pipe to the
central pipe shall not be accepted. The Contractor shall ensure that all welding shall be
full penetration and continuous, and all gaps shall be fully sealed. The completed work
shall be free from distortions and true to dimensions. All connections shall be welded in
a manner such that the finished connections are neat, smooth in appearance, and all
sharp edges ground and all projections ground smooth suitable for provision of
corrosion protection and aesthetic finishes.
The Contractor shall ensure that all welds and the adjacent plate shall be fully cleaned,
pickled and passivated both internally and externally. Passivation shall be carried out in
the fabricator's works. All welds in contact with water shall be ground and polished
smooth to achieve a smooth surface, free of pits and voids prior to passivating.
After the manifolds have been accepted the Contractor shall arrange for the manifolds to
be electropolished to achieve a highly polished uniform finish. The Contractor shall
ensure that all care is taken when handling the stainless steel before, during and after
fabrication to prevent contamination with mild steel materials, dust, shavings, weld
splatter and the like. Such care is particularly important after passivation and during
transport to site, storage and installation as these small particles rust quickly and
discolour the surface of the stainless steel. This can destroy the protective oxide film
and render it liable to pitting corrosion.
Manifolds will be connected to the pressure vessel ports with 316 stainless steel pipe
spools, each using unpainted galvanized ductile iron 7 connectors with 316 stainless
steel bolts and washers and silicon-bronze nuts. The “unused” manifold parts will be
plugged with removable 316 stainless steel Victaulic caps.
The Contractor shall ensure that all membrane train piping, with the exception of
interconnection piping between adjacent pressure vessels, shall be sized to keep flow
velocities less than 2 meters per second at the maximum design flow rates and
maximum membrane cleaning solution flow rates of 2.5 litres per second per pressure
vessel. The Contractor shall supply three (3) sets of permeate orifice plugs, sized to
simulate the hydraulic design of the membranes (one set for each membrane train).
Page 366

If multi-ported, side entry pressure vessels are supplied, then the Contractor shall ensure
that the feed manifold and concentrate manifold are located on opposite sides of the of
the set of pressure vessels to ensure correct flow balancing. RO Systems configured
using multi-ported, side entry pressure vessels with the feed and concentrate manifolds
connected to the same side of the group of pressure vessels will not be acceptable.
The Contractor shall ensure that the permeate manifolds are designed with inlets for
each pressure vessel. Acceptable materials for the fabrication of the membrane train
permeate manifolds and piping include 316L stainless steel, cPVC and ABS.
The permeate manifold shall be connected to the pressure vessel permeate port using
PVC U-bends fitted to accommodate either unpainted galvanized ductile iron quick
release connectors or PVC unions. Unused manifold parts shall be plugged with
removable 316 stainless steel plugs or caps.
RO Membrane Cleaning System
The contractor shall supply and install separate automatic membrane cleaning sequence to
chemically clean the RO membranes in situ when they become fouled and suffer a loss of
product flow and/or salt rejection greater than a pre-determined value. The system will allow
for membrane cleaning using a variety of chemicals, including acids, bases, biocides,
surfactants, and detergents.
The Contractor shall provide a complete RO Membrane Cleaning System, including all tanks,
pumps, valves, actuators, pipework, fittings, mixers, heaters, control from the CONTROL
PANEL, electrical, supplies, instrumentation and mountings.
The Contractor shall provide a RO Membrane Cleaning System which is easy to use and shall
minimise operator labour requirements.
The Contractor shall provide spent cleaning chemical solution holding tank(s) to accommodate
storage of the used cleaning chemicals for subsequent transfer to a tanker truck for hauling
away.
Each train shall have “hard-piped” cPVC cleaning lines, with stainless steel and cPVC valves
and victaulic-type (removable) cPVC piping spools, as specified herein and/or shown on the
Drawings. The design shall allow cleaning without the need for operation’s staff to insert blind
flanges, manually turn valves, or manually operate other devices above 1.5 meters from floor
level.
All membrane train piping and CIP piping shall be sized to keep flow velocities less than 2.5
meters per second during the CIP process.
ITEM NO. 34 Disc/Cloth Media Fine Filteration System
Page 367

The Disc Filters shall be capable of filtering secondary treated sewagewith daily flow of 60
MLD and achieve the desired treated effluent quality. Each filter shall be installed in a concrete
basin and each filter basin shall be provided with a butterfly drain valve. Each filter basin shall
be fitted with 304 stainless steel mounting brackets to accommodate attachment of the filter
components to inside of the basin. All mounting brackets shall be attached to the inside of basin
wall with 304 stainless steel wedge anchors and hardware. All piping including external &
puddle piping shall be provided by the Contractor. Cloth/frame assemblies shall be constructed
such that each segment is easily removable from the center tube, without special tools, to allow
for removal and replacement of the cloth at the point of installation. Disc with polynet / Cloths
shall having a nominal filtration rating of 5-10 microns. Each filter shall be provide with
isolation valve at upstream. The cloth / polynet depth shall provide storage of captured solids,
reducing backwash volumes while maintaining an operational headloss. The filter system shall
provide for the collection of filtered solids on the outside of the cloth media. Filtered effluent
shall be used for backwashing. The effective filtration area will be considered the actual media
area which will be submerged and available for filtration 100% of the time. Hence framework
and glued surfaces of filter will be considered while calculating the effective filtration area.
Contractor shall submit calculation and sufficient evidences for verifying the effective
filtration surface area. The filtration system shall be complete with the effective backwash
system and minimum usage of backwash water will be preferred.
Design flow, MLD 60 MLD
Wastewater Characteristics
Parameters Influent Desired Quality Effluent
TSS daily average, mg/L 10
TSS maximum, mg/L 15 5 mg/l
Total available effective filtration area- submerged in the water 100% of the time
Maximum effective filter loading rate at average design flow 8 m3/m2/hr,
Maximum effective filter loading rate at peak design flow 16 m3/m2/hr,
Maximum solid loading rate at the maximum design flow and TSS 10 kg TSS/day/m²
concentration
Filter basin Concrete
Filter media rating Nominal 5 microns
Filter media submergence Fully submerged 100% of
the time / as per technology
provider
Filtration mode Outside – in / as per
technology provider
Backwash mode Inside - out / as per
technology provider
The filtration system shall be complete with PLC controlled operation and backwash system as
per the recommendation of technology vendor. Access walkways, handrails and stair case etc
shall be provided as per the tender specifications mentioned elsewhere.
FILTER DISC BASIN
Page 368

Each filter shall be installed in a concrete basin. Determination of the overall footprint will be
dependent on the configuration of the valve and pump room, effluent chamber, influent,
effluent, and overflow channels. Each filter shall be provided with a 3” (75 mm) manually
operated butterfly drain valve. Valve shall be provided with ductile iron body, aluminum
bronze disk, stainless steel shaft and EPDM seat.
BASIN MOUNTING BRACKETS AND HARDWARE

Each filter basin shall be fitted with 304 stainless steel mounting brackets to accommodate
attachment of the filter components to inside of the basin. All mounting brackets shall be
attached to the inside of basin wall with 304 stainless steel wedge anchors and hardware. Each
filter basin shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel influent weir boxes and the 304 stainless
steel effluent weir plate. Manuel influent valve, influent weir box, effluent weir plate, through
the wall spool piping, and all filter external piping shall be provided by the Installing
Contractor. The Installing Contractor shall furnish the means (the flow splitter box or
alternatively the modulating influent valve and the flow meter) to regulate the flow to each
filter unit if the filter doesn’t have its own influent weir when multiple filter units are required.
DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Each filter shall include an adjustable drive assembly with a gearbox, nylon drive sprocket,
acetal drive chain with 304 stainless steel link pins, and a 304 stainless steel chain guard.
To reduce energy demand, the drive assembly shall rotate the disks only during backwash.
Systems requiring constantly rotating disks during filtration will not be acceptable. Belt drive
systems or systems with multiple drive units per filter will not be acceptable.
CENTERTUBE ASSEMBLY
Each centertube assembly shall include a minimum 3/16” (4.76 mm) thick 304 stainless steel
centertube weldment, driven sprocket, wheel assemblies, 304 stainless steel disk segment rods,
and frame and cloth assemblies. Each centertube assembly shall also include a Viton v-ring
effluent port seal. The driven sprocket shall be multi segment made of UHMW polyethylene.
All fasteners shall be stainless steel.
FILTER CLOTH ASSEMBLIES (in case of Cloth Media)

Vertically Mounted Cloth Media Discs featuring automatically operated vacuum
backwash.Each cloth disk assembly shall be comprised of a cloth media sock supported by an
injection molded polypropylene co-polymer frame with corrosion resistant assembly hardware.
Cloth/frame assemblies shall be constructed such that each segment is easily removable from
the centertube, without special tools, to allow for removal and replacement of the cloth at the
point of installation. Systems requiring special tools and/or the return of media segments to the
factory for replacement will not be considered.
Cloths shall be of pile construction having a nominal filtration rating of 5-10 microns. The
cloth media shall have an active filter depth of 3 to 5 mm to provide additional collisions
between solids particles and the media within the media depth, resulting in capture of solids
across a broader particle range. The cloth depth shall also provide storage of captured solids,
reducing backwash volumes while maintaining an operational headloss. Granular media and
screens having structured identical openings shall not be allowed. Woven mesh or microscreen
type media with no filtration depth are not acceptable.
Page 369

During filtration, the filter unit shall operate in a static condition with no moving parts. The
filter system shall provide for the collection of filtered solids on the outside of the cloth media
surface to allow for the direct contact of cleaning systems. Filtered effluent shall be used for
backwashing. The filter flow path shall be from the outside of the disk to the inside. Systems
with flow paths from the inside to the outside of the disk that collect filtered solids and debris
on the interior surfaces of the disk will not be acceptable.
Only media area below the effluent weir elevation will be considered in the effective filtration
area calculation since this is the only area that is submerged and available for filtration 100% of
the time.
Submittal information shall include calculations that verify the effective filtration surface area.
Media surface fused directly to support structure such that water cannot pass through the media
shall not be included in these calculations
BACKWASH SYSTEM
The filtration system shall be complete with the effective backwash system and minimum
usage of backwash water will be preferred.
The backwash function shall incorporate a pump that draws filter effluent through the cloth as
the media rotates past the fixed backwash shoe/system, thereby removing accumulated solids
from the cloth surface. Each disk shall be cleaned by a minimum of two backwash
shoes/system, one on each side.
The backwash shoes/system shall remain in a fixed position. Springs shall be used to maintain
the proper tensioning of the backwash shoe/system against the media surface. Neither the cloth
/ support assemblies nor the backwash shoes/system shall include any gridwork overlays or
other interferences that would prevent direct contact of the backwash shoes/system with the
cloth fibers. The backwash system shall include 304 stainless steel backwash shoe/system
supports with 316 stainless steel springs, UHMW backwash shoes/system, reinforced PVC
flexible hose with stainless steel hose clamps. The backwash shoe shall be in direct contact
with the cloth to ensure effective media cleaning. Systems utilizing media cleaning
mechanisms that do not contact the filter media will not be acceptable.
BACKWASH/WASTE PUMP ASSEMBLIES

Each backwash/waste pump assembly shall include backwash/waste pumps, valves and
gauges. In the external piping shall be backwash and solids waste valves, recirculation ball
valves, for each pump, vacuum gauges, and pressure gauges.
Filtering shall not be interrupted during normal backwashing and solids waste discharge.
VALVES
Each filter shall include electrical backwash valve(s) and solids waste valve. Necessary
manual valves shall be furnished for normal operation of the filter system.
Each filter shall include a solids waste removal system consisting of perforated manifold. The
manifold shall be designed to siphon settled solids for waste discharge through the
backwash/waste pump. The operation of the solids waste removal system shall be automatic
with user adjustable intervals and duration through the operator interface. Filters that are
designed without a solids waste removal system will not be acceptable.
Page 370

INSTRUMENTATION
Each filter unit shall include necessary instruments such as pressure transducer with a
mounting bracket and hardware, a float switch, a vacuum transmitter for proper operation of
the filter unit.
CONTROL
The automatic and manual controls for operation of the filtration system shall be furnished
fully assembled, wired and pre-programmed in a control enclosure with PLC controlled
operation and backwash system. The automatic controls shall be provided in a UL listed,
NEMA Type 4X wall mounted enclosure that provides insulation and protection for electrical
controls and components from highly corrosive environments indoors and outdoors.
Automatic operation of the Filter shall be controlled through a programmable logic controller
(PLC) mounted inside the main control panel. The PLC components shall consist of a base
unit, expansion I/O modules, and memory module. All input and output points supplied
(including unused) shall be wired to terminal blocks. The PLC user memory shall consist of a
minimum of 20K words of program and data. All PLC hardware shall be UL listed and operate
at an ambient temperature of -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C).
The control system shall be equipped with a UL listed operator interface that provides control
display screens. These screens shall be used by the operator to monitor and control filter status,
setpoint and alarm information. The Interface shall allow the Operator access to adjust the
following operating parameters:
x Backwash interval, Backwash duration, Sludge waste interval, Sludge waste duration,
Number of backwashes between sludge wasting
The operator interface shall provide information to assist the Operator in assessing the status of
the filter system. The interface screen shall display, at minimum, the following parameters:
x Water level in the filter, Time since last Backwash, Time since last Sludge withdrawal,
Elapsed time on the Drive Motor, Elapsed time on the Backwash Pump(s), Total
backwash time and cycles, Total sludge withdrawal time and cycles.
The interface shall display the alarm history. The alarm history shall include the time and date
of the most recent 25 alarms along with the description of the alarm. The interface shall also
display current alarms, including the date, time and a description of the alarm. As a diagnostic
aid to the Operator, the interface shall display the time between backwashes for the most recent
40 backwashes.
The operator interface shall be a NEMA Type 12, 13, 4X rated, 6.5” diagonal, color
touchscreen display with Ethernet and serial communications. The interface shall be a liquid
crystal display (LCD). The display type shall be color active matrix thin-film transistor (TFT)
with 640 x 480 pixel resolution. The rated operating temperature shall be 32° to 131° F (0° to
55° C).
Page 371

WARRANTY
The Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty against defects in materials and
workmanship. Manufacturer shall warrant the goods provided by the Manufacturer to be free
from defects in materials and workmanship under normal conditions and use for a period of one
(1) year from the date the goods are put into service, or eighteen (18) months from shipment of
equipment, whichever first shall occur. This warranty shall not apply to any goods or parts
which have been altered, applied, operated or installed contrary to the Manufacturer's
instructions or subject to misuse, chemical attack/degradation, negligence or accident.
The above mentioned specifications are general guideline purpose only. However, the design
and specifications of fine filtration system may vary and shall be considered as per
manufacturer standard / technology provider.
ITEM NO. 35 : VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP
DETAILS/SPECIFICATIONS FOR V.T. PUMPSETS

V.T. Pump sets.
This specification covers the design, performance, manufacturing, construction features,
testing, delivery, installation and commissioning of vertical turbine pumps.
The design, manufacturing, performance of vertical turbine pumps shall comply to all currently
applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be
installed. The equipment shall confirm to IS 1710 or its latest edition (if any).
1. DESIGN FEATURES :-
01. The turbine pump shall be capable of developing the required total head at rated capacity
for its continuous operation. Pump shall be designed for continuous full load duty and
indoor installation.
02. Pumps of a particular category shall be identical and shall be suitable for parallel
operation. All parts of pump within a single similar service group are to be similar and
interchangeable with different pumps
03. The head capacity curve shall be continuously rising towards shut off with the highest at
shut off. The shut off head shall be at least 120 % of the head at the specified capacity.
04. Pump family curve for the VT Pumps should be selected such that impeller of above
pumps has operating range (therefore, impeller diameter) selectable to +10% and - 20 %
head variations. Discharge of pump and all other performance parameters shall remain
un-changed, firm and guaranteed. The exacting of the head shall be done at the time of
detailed engineering. The evaluation of the tender shall be done at the head mentioned in
the data sheet.
05. The characteristic curves, for head, efficiency and power input, for the pumps at
motor rated speed offered must be enclosed with the technical bid without which the
tender shall be liable for rejection. The curve should be from shut off head to zero
delivery head. The pumps shall be suitable for running at shut off condition for at
least 5 minutes.
Page 372

06. The performance curves for head, efficiency, and power input must be drawn for all the
three (max., rated, and min.) sizes of the impeller. Further, the duty point shall be clearly
marked for all the items in respective curves. Also, the scale selected for drawing must
appropriately selected such that efficiency can be read with smallest unit of 1 %.
07. The duty point shall not lie on the maximum or minimum impeller diameter curve for the
selected model of the pump. Diameter of impeller should have minimum margin of 5 % on
maximum and minimum impeller size. It is preferred that the working point should fall on
the left side of the maximum efficiency point.
08. The performance curve selected shall be according to number of pumps running in
parallel, indicated in data sheet. Bidder shall submit the relevant performance
curves, for head, efficiency and power input, with technical bid, otherwise tender
shall not be evaluated and accepted.
09. The impeller adjustment shall be such that the impeller runs free in any installed condition,
despite of extension of line shaft (caused by hydraulic down thrust), the weight of shafting
and weight of impellers.
10. The operating speed of the pump shall not be closer to critical speed to have vibration free
running at operating condition. The margin shall be as per relevant pump standard.
11. The velocity of vibration shall be limited to 4.5 mm/sec. At the thrust bearing. The noise
level shall be limited to 85 dB at a distance of 1 meter. Noise level and amplitude
/frequency of vibration of pump from No Load to Full Load condition shall be within
acceptable limit of the related standard during testing at manufacturer's works as well as
after permanent installation of the pump at site.
12. The corrosion allowance for all Carbon steel/Cast Iron part should be maximum 3 mm.
13. All column pipes (outside and inside) shall be painted with anti-corrosive food grade paint.
Details/specifications shall be got approved before applying the paint.
14. Slow speed testing will not be accepted. Further, pumps must be tested on job motor.
15. It is clarified that efficiencies/losses mentioned in the tender are ceiling on
efficiencies/losses. In case claimed efficiencies are less than the ceiling efficiencies and
losses claimed are more than ceiling on losses, cost loading as elaborated in the tender
shall be levied and no advantage shall be given in case claimed efficiencies are more than
the ceiling efficiency and similarly, no advantage shall be given in case claimed losses are
less than the ceiling on losses.
16. The total head from all causes mentioned in the tender is likely to be varying by +10% and
- 20 % of total head specified. The pump and driving motor should be able to meet this
situation without any trouble. The H-Q curve for the pump offered should not be flat but
steep so that with the variation of head, the discharge does not vary during low head
operation (less than - 20% head) pump should not create problem of cavitations’ / excess
vibration during operation.
17. In case, pumps are offered with coating, testing at manufacturer’s works shall be carried
out “without coating”. No advantage shall be given against rise of efficiency for coating.
18. Lubrication is required; the same shall be fabricated and provided by the contractor free of
cost. An arrangement of pre-lubrication is must, hence appropriate size water tank,
Page 373

plumbing work etc. with each pump must be considered. The lubrication/Pre-Lubrication
must be done as per bearing manufacturer’s recommendations.
DRAWINGS:
The manufacturer shall submit the following drawings.
01. Preliminary outline dimensional drawings showing details of pump, motor, civil
foundation, clearances, minimum submergence etc.
02. Performance curves, with parallel running pumps considered, for capacity V/s head,
efficiency; power input KW requirement shall be furnished. The capacity range shall be
zero flow to shut off flow.
03. Typical cross sectional drawing showing constructional details with the complete bill of
material and relevant standards.
NAME PLATE:
Each pump shall be preferably provided with a name plate, indicting manufacturer’s standard
detail including following details:
1. Rated capacity in M3/ Hr.

2. Total Head in meter.
3. Speed in RPM.
4. Model Number.
5. Serial Number of the machine.
6. Manufacturer’s special number.
7. Weight of equipment.
8. Year of manufacturing.
9. Type of lubricant.
10. Bearing nos.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

Operation and maintenance manual In TRIPLICATE shall be submitted for each pump sets.
DETAILS / SPECIFICATIONS FOR AFFIRMATION OF HEAD BEFORE
MANUFACTURING & AFFIRMATION OF PERFORMANCE OF PUMP & SYSTEM
AT SITE THROUGH ENERGY AUDIT:
a. Once tender is finalized, successful tenderer, at the time of drawing approval, shall call the
pump designer (manufacturer) before the department and re-assess the system resistance
(total Head) requirement. He shall initiate pump designing only after having re-assessment
done at site. So that, pump performs on required efficiency even at site.
b. Also, once pumps are supplied, erected and commissioned, performance testing must be
carried-out by the government authorized energy auditor deployed by contractor to
evaluate the performance at site and ensure that pumps performs as per design criteria and
confirms results of testing done in manufacturer’s test lab set-up. Any deviation must be
Page 374

strictly attended /prevented and ensured that performance testing is also observed
satisfactory and as called for in tender.
REAFFIRMATION OF HEAD REQUIRED AS PER ACTUAL SITE CONDITION.

The Surat Smart City Development Limited is very keen and conscious for energy saving
activities. One of the effort is to have design of pumps actually suiting to site conditions so
that efficiency loss do not occur at site due to differed site conditions. Therefore, it is very
important to pay attention towards selection of duty point right at the design stage.
The head mentioned in the tender is derived from the available data and is “near to require”.
However, it needs to be reaffirmed. Contractor may derive the required head by asking all
system data at his own.
Keeping this view, the job involves the re affirmation of the head required actually at site. The
SITC job involves, therefore, followings (not compulsory but preferred):
1. Pump manufacturer shall depute their experienced R & D personal at site and shall measure
the actual head physically or otherwise.
2. The point of suction and point of delivery are fixed at both end. The bidder is required to
study the site condition and should reassure these points and reach to the physical head
measurement.
3. The manufacturer is expected to study the normal running condition of the pump house,
number of parallel pumps being run in normal condition and other system parameters that
affect the duty point condition directly.
4. Based on this study, he will create the system resistance curve and select the family curve to
derive the Actual head conditions. The discharge need not to vary.
5. The contractor/manufacturer shall communicate this “actual” duty point conditions in
writing to SMC and shall be considered as “actual” guaranteed parameters.
6. The “actual” guaranteed parameters shall be considered as base for the design of
manufacturing pump.
7. Please note that since the head mentioned is “near to” the site requirement, hence abrupt and
unexpected variation than the mentioned head will not occur. Hence, no commercial
implication shall take place. Hence, it is clarified that no commercial implication shall be
considered after award of contract and with “actual” new duty point conditions.
8. The pump manufacturer shall co-ordinate for all further drawing approvals keeping in view
“actual” head conditions.
9. Please note that, besides pump performance, the system performance is expected.
Hence, evaluation/audit shall be done for complete system performance. The bidder is
expected to suggest the system changes, if any, for improving system energy
performance, right at initial stage and correct/ modify it (if any) during the execution
stage so that system efficiency can be maintained as guaranteed.
TO AFFIRM PERFORMANCE OF PUMP AT SITE THROUGH ENERGY AUDIT:
Page 375

(i) It is preferred that, the bidder/manufacturer guarantee this “actual” duty point parameters
and therefore, the testing at works shall be carried out in relation to the “actual” duty point
conditions.
(ii) The “actual” duty point parameters must be guaranteed at site also. For this,
bidder/ manufacturer shall appoint ENERGY AUDITOR APPROVED BY
GOVERNMENT OF GUJARAT. The energy auditor shall be got approved from
SMC also. He shall be entrusted the job after approval at SMC end.
(iii) Energy auditor shall measure the actual energy consumption and actual site condition
parameter, which must match the “actual” guaranteed parameters (System as well as
individual pump). The result declared by Energy Auditor shall be binding to both SMC and
contractor/manufacturer. The actual duty condition may vary, as the pump is meant to
supply water in network. So, guaranteed parameter considered is on any point of defined
range (+10% and - 20 % to duty point Head) on characteristic curve.
(iv) If results are not found to be matching the “actual” guaranteed parameters on defined
range, it will be considered as defect in commissioning as mentioned in the tender and may
be liable to charge necessary penalty/compensation for additional energy consumption as
per the ENERGY LOADING CONDITIONS mentioned in the tender shall be levied from
the bills of the contractor OR SMC may reject the defective pump (in case of more than 10%
less efficiency).
(v)The penalty against the Non fulfilling the guaranteed “actual” Duty Point parameters shall
be maximum 10 % of work done value ( will be treated separately from other penalties)
(vi) If the pump head is not in defined range i.e. +10% and - 20 % of duty point, the
contractor shall modify any part of Bowl assembly or complete replacement of Bowl
assembly as per the required system head to get maximum efficiency without any
extra cost to SMC.
(vii) Other condition(s) regarding delay penalty etc. will separately be dealt with.
(viii) At the time of Pre-Dispatch inspections of Pumps at manufacturing works, in addition
to representatives of SMC and TPI (If Any), the Government Authorized Energy Auditor
shall be arranged by successful contractor to carryout Energy Audit of Pumps under test
before dispatch. For this the Energy Auditor must use his own measuring instruments and
the results shall be binding on the part of manufacturer. These results must match the
designed parameters as detailed in the tender and finalized during drawing approval. Here,
Energy Auditor must not be affiliated to manufacturing company.
(ix) Also, once pumps are supplied, erected and commissioned, performance testing must
be carried-out by the government authorized energy auditor deployed by contractor to
evaluate the performance at site and ensure that pumps perform as per design criteria and
confirms results of testing done in manufacturer’s test lab set-up.
(x)Any deviation from original parameters of Head, Discharge and Efficiencies at various load
etc. must be strictly attended /prevented and ensured that performance testing is also
observed satisfactory results as called for in the tender. If after all possible efforts the
removal of the deviation in parameters is not becoming practical, possible or attainable due
to site condition or any other uncontrollable reason, the results of Energy Audit at the time
of Inspection at manufacturing works may be termed as final. And decision of tender
Page 376

signing authority in this regards shall stand final, however technical reason/proofs for the
site /system constraints shall be furnished by contractor/Manufacturing Co. to consider the
deviation in the matter.
The bidder/manufacturer is requested to understand the gist that “right selection of guaranteed
parameter” and system performance thereby energy saving. Hence, due care/attention right at
tendering stage and during the actual implementation is expected.
GENERAL DATA SHEET FOR VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS,

**** General Data
1 Pump type Vertical Turbine pump
Design Capacity of each
2 Min.------M3/hr.
pump
Total Bowl Head at design
3 ----- Mtr.
capacity
Number of pumps running in
4 As per Design
parallel
5 Total duration of operation Continuous
6 Liquid to be pumped Treated and chlorinated drinking water.
7 Sp. gravity of liquid 1.0
8 Place of installation At floor level of pump house
9 Type of pump required Vertical Turbine, single stage.
10 Speed of the pump Max. 1000 RPM
**** FEATURE OF CONSTRUCTION
1 Type of lubrication Self-water lubricated
2 Internal element To be designed as per requirement
3 Type of coupling Direct-pin bush type
4 Number of stage preferable Single/ As per mfg. design
5 Installation Vertical, directly coupled
6 Pump setting Length As per manufacturer’s design (Refer G.A. Drawing)
7 Column pipe
** Wall Thickness Minimum 8 mm
** Diameter As Per Design
** Qty per pump As per Actual site requirement
** Length of each column pipe 1.50 Mtr. (Max.)
** Head Shaft Must be less than 2.2 Mtr.
SL=LC+OTH
Pump setting length (SL)=
Total Length of Column pipes (LC) plus
Column Assembly (Pump Pump, bowl assembly, distance piece/spool
8
setting length) piece/taper piece, strainer, etc. as per
manufacturer’s standard (OTH).
Exact dimensions can be decided at the time of
detailed engineering.
9 Type of impeller Close
Spider Must be detachable from the column pipe.
10 Spiders
(Fabricated spider in column pipe strictly not
Page 377

allowed.)
415 V +/- 10 %, 50 Hz +/- 5% AC, solid shaft, and
11 Type of drive
squirrel cage motor as per data sheet.
**** Material of construction:
1 Base Plate M.S. IS 226 (M)
C.I IS 210 FG 260 or MS fabricated with suitable
2 Discharge Elbow corrocoat in the internal passage in Fluid glide
coating
3 Column pipe ERW
C.I 1.5 % to 2.0 Nickel (M) or as indicated by the
4 Suction bell
manufacture
C.I 1.5 % to 2.0 Nickel (M) or as indicated by the
5 Impeller Bowl
manufacturer
6 Impeller CF 8 M
7 Impeller Seal Ring S.S AISI 304
8 Line Shaft S.S. 410
9 Impeller Shaft S.S. 410
10 Head Shaft S.S. 410
11 Shaft Coupling S.S -410
12 Line Shaft Bearing Neo Rubber LND BR-2 shell.
Suction Strainer with
13 S.S AISI – 410 Round Bar Type only.
stiffeners
14 Shaft Sleeves S.S AISI – 410 (M)
15 Stuffing Box C.I IS 210 Gr FG 260
16 Gland Bronze
PTFE with synthetic fiber or any advanced material
17 Gland Packing causing least maintenance and least energy
consumption.
18 All Hardware Stainless Steel.
19 Companion flanges MS as per IS 1538 (Chapter No. 5 & 6)
**** ACCESSORIES & SERVICES REQUIRED:
1 Base Plate (Sole Plate) YES
Taper Pieces for leveling of
2 YES
pump
Air valve with isolation
3 YES
valve
4 Foundation Bolts (S.S.) YES
5 Suction Strainer (S.S.) YES
6 Companion Flanges YES
Specific Maintenance Tools
7 YES
(if any)
**** TESTING:
1 Hydrostatic test YES to be witnessed
2 Performance test YES to be witnessed
3 Static balancing test Test certificate required
4 Dynamic balancing test Test certificate required
Page 378

5 Visual inspection check Required
Note:
1. No Advantage shall be given if efficiency is quoted more than ceiling efficiency and
less than ceiling on losses
2. Change in MOC should not be allowed.
3. Expander/Reducer will not be allowed in suction Column/delivery line.
4. For Component (marked-M) material certificates should be furnished
MOC generally employed is indicated. However, various manufacturers may offer better
MOC of particular item as per their standard practice and if so, it must be clearly
indicated in Necessary Documents.
Ceiling on Ceiling on total sThrust
Ceiling on bowl
Details of Pump set motor efficiency bearing loss, line shaft loss
efficiency
etc.) losses.
------ Mtr3/Hr.,
Max. 87 % Max. 96 % Min. 0.6 KW
---- Mtr. Head
Please note that characteristic curve of pumps and motors must invariably and efficiency
indicated in curves by manufacturer will only be considered. Pump & motor rpm shall be
same & overall efficiency will be considered according to motor rpm only.
x All the pump sets must be designed to run either alone or in parallel with one or more
unit depending upon the required discharge.
x Rotating assembly should be dynamically balanced as per manufacture’s standard.
x Characteristics curves from shut off head to full open (i.e. zero deliver head), NPSHr
curve must be enclosed along with detail technical literature for each type of the pump
sets. The operating head range of this pump set shall be same as mentioned above and
tenderer has to submit the detail of safe operating head range of the pump set with
cavitations zone on performance curve.
x The pump shall run smooth without undue noise and vibration at any point of operating
condition.
x Direction of the rotation of all pump set shall be as per site requirement. It must be
checked prior to quote the tender.
x Performance curve of pump Q v/s H, Q v/s NPSHr, Q v/s Power, Q v/s Speed, torque at
variable speed of 50 % of rated speed to + 110 % of rated speed shall be submitted
along with tender. The pump should have non-overloading type characteristics. Family
curve of the pump sets should be submitted for Approval.
x Pump shall be suitable to variable speed application. Curve of speed v/s head, power
consumption, and flow shall be provided.
x Type test of the pump set will be carried out at full load as well as low load condition of
the pump sets.
Page 379

DATA SHEET FOR V.T PUMPS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER AFTER
AWARD OF JOB:
) For: -------- Mtr.3/Hr., ------- Mtr. Head pump
No other calculation for deriving Overall efficiency will be considered.

No Description Details
*** GENERAL
a) V.T. Manufacturer’s name/ maker’s name
Vertical
b) Type of pump
Turbine
c) Length and size of column assembly flanged ended
Single/As per
d) No. of stage preferable
mfg. design
e) Actual speed of pump in RPM
As per mfg.
f) Size of Suction column and delivery branch (mm)
design
g) Shut off head
h) Max. Power input on performance curve (with full column length)
Maximum power requirement of pump at any point of characteristic
i)
curve.
j) H.P of motor recommended.
k) Bowl Head (Mtr) H
l) Bowl Discharge (m3/Hr) Q
m) Bowl Output (Po= HXQ/367.2) KW
n) Guaranteed Bowl Efficiency (Eb)% (at Motor RPM)
o) Bowl Input (Pi=HXQ/367.2*Eb)
p) Thrust bearing loss (TT) KW
q) Line shaft loss (TL) KW
r) Motor Output (Mo=Pi+TT+TL)
s) Guaranteed Motor Efficiency at duty point (Em)
t) Motor Input power at Terminal on duty point. (M i)
Overall Efficiency of pump derived from above (Eo=Po/Mi) % (at
u)
Motor RPM)
DIMENSIONS
v) Pump setting length.
Minimum clearance required from the lowest part of the pump to
w)
the bottom of the sump.
x) Minimum submergence required.
y) Centerline of pump discharge pipe above floor.
Minimum clearance required for removal of pump parts and motor
z)
(including height of sling of lifting tackle used).
ITEM NO. 36 : E.O.T. CRANE WITH ELECTRICALLY OPERATED CHAIN HOIST
Page 380

SCOPE :
This specification covers the design requirements, features of construction, inspection, testing,
painting, delivery, installation and commissioning of E.O.T. crane with electrical chain pulley
block with hardware etc.
CODES AND STANDARDS :
The design and manufacture of the crane shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in
this specification shall relieve the vendor of this responsibility.
GENERAL:
E.O.T. gantry crane with hoisting equipment shall be provided in the pump house of required
capacity for installation, maintenance, repairing works of the pumping machinery, particularly
for handling of pump & motors located in the pump house. The span, lift & other parameters of
the crane shall be closely matching with the requirement and layout of the pump house. The
crane will be required to operate in local climatic condition. All the parts of the crane, hoist and
trolley shall be designed to withstand such atmospheric condition without any deterioration.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. The crane shall be single or double girder medium duty class – II horizontal E.O.T. have
a long travel motion. The crane shall complete with chain wheels, guards, base plate with
fixing bolts, end stoppers, swiveling hooks, and cables for Electrical motor of the Crane.
2. The gantry shall be of single / double girder construction and traveling track (if required)
of the crane shall be of 40 mm MS sq. bar supported on MS base plate of 8 mm. thick at
an interval of 500 mm OR on the RCC bracket provided in the pump house, as applicable.
3. Traveling trolley will run on the lower flange of gantry /span girder and electrically
operated chain pulley block shall be suspended on the trolley,
4. The chain pulley block shall be electrically operated, triple spur gear type with an
automatic load brake switch to prevent self lowering of load.
5. The complete crane shall be scraped, cleaned and painted with one coat of red oxide
primer and two coat of the epoxy paint as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
6. Joint for gantry girder shall be on bracket only.
7. No Joint shall be allowed in Bridge Girder.
8. The crane shall be tested at site after erection in the presence of the Surat Smart City
Development Limited’s representative. Test certificate should be supplied along with the
invoices without which no payment for the crane will be made. Tested quality Steel
should be used for the crane and test certificates thereof should be provided.
9. Chain electric hoist with hand operated geared trolley should be simple, robust, reliable
and capable to give trouble free service for long time. Electric hoist should have capacity
of as mentioned with load chain as per site requirement. The lifting speed of the chain
hoist shall be as per data sheet.
10. Provision should be made to hold an extra manually operated chain pulley block,
whenever required.
11. EOT crane linked End Carriage assembly, Cable carrying system, Shaft, bearing pedestal
– hand chain assembly etc. included in this item.
12. Gantry /span girder trolley are not included in this item. Price of MS Steel like
Gantry/span girder, Square bar should not consider in this item as same is included
in separate item.
Page 381

13. Crane is required to lift the non clog submersible pump set from the bottom of the wet
well. It should lift rated weight from the well bottom (as mentioned in data sheet) in
single stroke to the upper lift of the crane without changing the load chain. Length of the
load chain shall be calculated accordingly. Whatever necessary, required additional
length of chain shall provided as per site requirement.
14. The girders shall be leveled and aligned before grouting. If required, necessary packing
shall be inserted / welded.
15. The availed head room and clearances are as per site requirement.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
Electric hoist should be incorporated as following.
Load Chain:
Load chain wheel should have correct grip of the hoisting chain without undue wear.
Shafts and axles shall have ample strength and rigidity and adequate bearing surfaces for their
duties. Axle and shaft shall be made of carbon steel and accurately machined and properly
supported.
All anti-friction bearings are to be of SKF/FAG make only. Bearings shall have a minimum life
expectancy of 8000 hours and may be ball, roller, or removable bronze- bushing type except
that motor bearings shall be of the ball or roller type.
Wheels:
The long travel bridge wheels shall be rim toughened, heat treated carbon or alloy steel. They
shall be double flanged. The wheels shall have anti friction bearings. The wheels shall be
machined on their treads to match the runway rail section.
Gears
Spur and helical gears (case hardened) should with stand impact loads and high resistance to
wear, provided with construct lubrication.
Alloy steel Spur and helical gears should be totally enclosed and running in oil bath along with
bearing for constant lubrication.
Electric Motor:
Hoist electric motor should be squirrel cage induction motor with high starting torque, with
insulation class- H, TEFC fan cooled, continuously rated for 415 + 10% volts, 3 Phase, 50 +
5% Hz. Motor size and H.P. shall be established by contractor. It should be suitable for
frequent reverse ring and breaking / with overload protection. Hoist motor should not be loaded
beyond 80% of its capacity. Motor should be capable for variable frequency speed drive
operation and should not get heated during continuous operation.
Breaks:
Brake should be disk type spring loaded, fan cooled, for heavy duty operations and should
automatically act when electric supply fails. Breaks should be easily accessible.
Hooks:
Swiveling hook should be of heavy duty steel forged.
Limit Switches:
Page 382

To prevent over lowering and over hoisting limit switches are provided as a safety device.
Electric Control Panel:

It should be as per manufacturer’s standard having overload and short circuit protection for
speed control etc. It shall be suitable to move & control Hoist in all positions. MCB will be
provided for protection.
Pendent Push Button:

The speed variation should be achieved through pendent push button station. Heavy duty
Pendent push button should preferably suitable for operation at 24 Volts. Wire rope should be
provided to prevent pull on cable and it should be suspended from the hoist with the cable
length as per the site requirement.
CLEANING :
Prior to factory inspection, all manufacturing waste such as metal chips, debris and all other
foreign material shall be removed from the interior of the crane. All mill scale, rust, oil, grease,
chalk and all other material shall be removed from the interior and exterior surfaces.
PAINTING :
Crane shall first be given two coats of zinc base primer after completely cleaning the surface
and then it shall be coated with three coats of coal tar epoxy paint. The resulting coating shall
be uniform and smooth and adhere perfectly to the surface.
HAND WHEEL:
A hand wheel shall be provided for normal operation.
DRAWINGS:
The following documents are to be furnished by the contractor after award of the work: -
i) G.A. Drawing of crane with all details from the manufacturer.
ii) Note on erection and testing by the manufacturer.
iii) Test certificate for hook, chain and chain pulley block assembly including overload test
report of the crane as per standard proforma etc. (to be furnished prior to supply of the
crane).
TESTS AND INSPECTION:
Overload test with 150% of rated load shall be carried out for the chain pulley block and trolley
and overload test with 125% of rated load shall be carried out for the entire crane assembly.
Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage)

Surat Smart City Development Ltd.
Page 383

23. SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL WORKS – ELECTRICAL
DESIGN CRITERIA
PART - 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Provisions
1.1.1 Other applicable sections including the General and part of electrical requirements as if
repeated in this Section.
1.2 Work included
1.2.1 The Contractor shall provide all the required labour, project equipment and materials, tools,
construction equipment, safety equipment, transportation, test equipment and satisfactorily
complete all the electrical work included in these Specifications. Provide and install wiring for
equipment that will be furnished and installed by other Sections of these Specifications.
1.2.2 All works shall be executed strictly in accordance with the latest National Electrical Code.
1.3 Regulations
1.3.1 All the electrical equipments and materials including their installation shall conform to the
following applicable latest codes and standards.
i Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
ii The Indian Electricity Act 1910.
iii Fire Insurance Regulations.
iv Regulations laid down by the Electrical Inspector of the Government of Gujarat,
v Regulations laid down by Factory Inspector of Gujarat.
vi Indian Standards Institution's Specifications.
vii Factory Act.
viii Any other Rules & regulations and Condition of Supply laid down by the Local Electric
Supply Company viz. Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Limited (DGVCL) or Torrent
Power-Surat Electricity Co. (TPSECo.)
1.4 Variances
1.4.1 In instances where two codes are at variance, the more restrictive requirements shall apply.
1.5 Contractor's Expense
1.5.1 The contractors shall obtain and pay for the required bonds, insurance, licenses, permits and
inspections, and pay all taxes, fees and utility charges that shall be required for the
electrical construction work. The contractor shall obtain at his own expenses the necessary
certificate for the approval of the total work carried out from the Electrical Inspector. S.M.C.
will pay all the legal fees for obtaining the power from DGVCL / T.P.S.E.Co. No any penalty
shall be paid by SMC.
1.6 Extra work
1.6.1 Work that is not included in the tender documents shall not be performed, except when
Page 384

approved in writing by S.M.C.
1.7 Rates for additions or extras
1.7.1 Any additional item of work over and above those schedules in the tender are to be carried out
at the same basic rates as quoted in the tender for the same type of work.
1.8 Contractor responsible for supply of Equipment and Materials
1.8.1 If during the period of erection, the contractor or his workmen damage or destroy any part of the
building structure or materials, the Contractor shall be completely responsible for the damages
and he will have to make rectification / replacement at his own cost. The decision of the
Engineer-in-charge will be final.
1.8.2 Final options to select any particular make shall rest with S.M.C. No disputes in this regards
shall be entertained at later date.
1.9 Project Drawings
1.9.1 Locations of equipment, inserts, anchors, motors, panels, pull boxes, manholes, conduits,
stub-ups, fittings, lighting fixtures, power and convenience outlets, exterior lighting units and
ground wells are approximate, and the Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of
scaled dimensions on Drawings. No extra charges will be allowed for field adjustments, wiring
changes, conduit rerouting, or additions needed to complete the installation and produce
satisfactory operation of all equipment.
1.9.2 The contractor shall review the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and shall include
the electrical work that shall be required for the installations.
1.9.3 If there shall be a need to deviate from the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, the
Contractor shall submit written details and reasons for all changes to S.M.C. / Consultants for
approval.
1.9.4 In the event of varying interpretation of the tender Documents, the Engineer-in-Charge's
interpretation shall govern.
1.10 Shop Drawings
1.10.1 After the award of the contract, the contractor shall submit, for the Engineer-in-charge's
approval, the required manufacturer's Shop Drawings including complete schematic wiring
diagrams for the electrical equipment as indicated in this Section and on the Drawings, a
complete descriptive materials list that includes all other products intended or required for the
installation, detailed installation drawings for all materials and equipment.
1.10.2 The contractor shall check the Shop Drawings for equipment requirements, dimensions,
weight, and conduit locations. On the drawings, mark any corrections, if required, for approval
before submitting to the Engineer-in-charge.
1.10.3 Submit Shop Drawings and materials lists for approval in 3 copies. It shall be understood that
this requirement specifically requires the submission of Shop Drawings for conduit location
which shall indicate any interferences with other
work, should the contract Drawings make such interference unavoidable.
1.11 Record Drawings

Page 385

1.11.1 The contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate record set of drawings for the electrical
construction work.
1.11.2 Records all work that is installed differently than shown on the Drawings.
1.11.3 Upon completion of the work, transfer all marked changes to a clean set of drawings with red
ink.
Mark the drawings "Record" and submit them to the Engineer-in-charge when the electrical
work is completed in 7 sets.
1.12 Coordination
1.12.1 The contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with the other trades, other contractors,
code authorities, utilities DGVCL / Torrent Power-Surat Electricity Co. and the
Engineer-in-charge.
1.12.2 Where connections shall be made to existing installation, the Contractor shall properly schedule
all the required work, including the power shutdown periods.
1.12.3 When two trades join together in an area, the Contractor shall be certain that no electrical work
is omitted.
1.13 Public Utility
1.13.1 The contractor shall provide the electrical work for power and telephones as indicated in the
tender documents, and according to the service requirements.
1.14 Site Investigations
1.14.1 The Contractor shall visit the project site prior to submitting his bid, carefully inspect all areas,
and become acquainted with the existing conditions.
1.15 Contract Bid
1.15.1 The contractor shall evaluate all job condition that affect the construction work for the project.
1.15.2 The best bid shall include the total cost for all the electrical work required by the tender
documents, site investigations and all other contract expenses.
1.16 Service Manuals
1.16.1 Service manuals shall be furnished with the equipment. One (1) shall be given with the
equipment, and a minimum of seven (7) copies given to the Engineer separately.
Additional copies shall be provided where so stated in the purchases order. Service manuals
shall contain all necessary data for operation and maintenance of the equipment. A
recommended spare parts list shall be furnished with the manual. A complete set of shop
drawings shall be folded and inserted in each manual.
PART -2
2.0 EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS
Page 386

2.1 Contractor shall provide the equipments and materials that are required to complete all the
electrical work outlined in this Section.
2.2 Incidental items, not included in the tender drawings and Specifications, that can legitimately
and reasonably be inferred to belong to the electrical work shall be provided by the Contractor
at no additional cost to the S.M.C. The decision of the Engineer-in-charge in this matter shall be
final.
2.3 All equipments and materials shall be new, of latest design and standard products of established
manufacturers. For uniformity, only one manufacturer shall be accepted for each type of
product.
2.4 Contractor shall provide adequate and protective storage for all equipments and materials
during the construction work. The contractor is responsible for its safe custody for his
materials at site.
2.5 All equipments shall be procured from reputed manufacturers and shall bear ISI Certification
mark wherever applicable. The equipment shall conform to the latest I.S. Standard
Specification. A list of the Preferable Manufacturers is attached along with the Tender.
2.6 The following site tests are to be conducted (over and above the equipment to be tested at
manufacturer's work) on equipment complete job in presence of Surat Smart City Development
Limited's representative prior to commissioning.
A. LT Switch Board:
All site tests as per Indian Standards and high voltage test of busbars after erection and
as per detail specification including site test for relay etc.
B. Earth Resistant test.
2.7 The materials supplied and installed shall be genuine only and as per the specifications. If the
same are not found satisfactory the same shall have to be replaced "Free of Cost".
Manufacturer's certificate towards genuineness of material shall have to be supplied (if required
by the department) otherwise the material shall be rejected. In case of doubt/dispute the Surat
Smart City Development Limited shall ask the contractor to send the material/equipment to the
manufacturer's work for testing genuineness. The decision/report received from the
manufacturer shall be conclusive and binding on both the parties i.e. the Surat Smart City
Development Limited and the contractor. If the material / equipment sent for testing is not
found to be genuine then the whole expenses for testing shall be borne by the contractor and the
contractor shall replace the whole lot of materials/ equipments supplied by him free of cost.
2.8 The entire installation shall be got approved by the Government Electrical Inspector prior to
commissioning. All formalities including preparation and submission of all drawings, getting
approval, arranging visits of Electrical Inspector and obtaining permission to energize the
installation, etc. shall be done by the Contractor for which no extra payment shall be claimed by
the contractor.
2.9 The responsible authorised person of the contractor should be available at site daily when work
is in progress. The Surat Smart City Development Limited shall not be responsible for any
accident or damage done to the workman/staff of the contractor. No compensation of any kind
shall be paid by the Surat Smart City Development Limited. The contractor shall observe Govt.
Rules regarding labour, etc.
Page 387

2.10 L.T. switch gear shall be painted with final coat of paint using spray machine at site before
commissioning without any extra cost, if required.
2.11 All the equipments shall be tested for tests as per latest relevant IS in presence of Surat Smart
City Development Limited's representative prior to dispatch and certificate thereof shall be
supplied.
If required by the Surat Smart City Development Limited, the equipment shall be sent to
recognized test lab for ascertaining the guaranteed parameters. The Contractor should agree to
the same. The test results so obtained shall be binding to the Surat Smart City Development
Limited and to the Contractor.
2.12 All motors should be with duty S1, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled type only. Unless otherwise
specified, motors shall be provided with class ‘F’ insulation as a minimum. In case of motors
with class ‘F’ insulation the permissible temperature rise above the specified ambient
temperature shall be limited to class ‘B’.
However, for motors operating with Variable Frequency Drive, winding shall be vacuum
impregnated and Class H insulation only and with forced cooling arrangement.
2.13 Efficiency of equipment and energy saving is one of the important aspect of consideration of
tender. Hence, SMC hereby reserves its right to decide final selection of make upon the energy
saving aspect. In this regard the decision of SSCDL
will be final and no dispute of the contractors will be entertained at a later date for the
same.
2.14 The successful bidder shall have to submit CPRI test certificate for minimum 2000 Amp.
busbar with 50 KA short circuit capacity for 1 sec. from the L.T. panel vendor selected by him.
Otherwise L.T. panel shall not be accepted.

Signature & Seal of Contractor
Page 388

24. SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS
DETAIL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS FOR DINDOLI SPS:
SR RATING/
DESCRIPTION
NO CAPACITY
General Overhauling, Servicing and change of CT with all
1 required Accessories of Exisitng HT Panel from 66 MLD STP 11 KV
shall be for Dindoli SPS
TRANSFORMER
'Supply, erection, testing & commissioning of plinth mounted
ONAN outdoor type step-down transformer as per tender 11 KV / 0.433
2a
Specifications, Data sheet, IS 1180 and relavent and as per given KV, 500 KVA
description etc.
2b Fixed Capacitor For 630 KVA Transformers As per Req.
3 H.T. CABLE & TERMINATION
Supply,erection, testing & commissioning of 11 KV, XLPE As per Req.
3a
armoured cable
Supply, erection, testing & commissioning of the Heat shrinkable As per Req.
3b type outdoor H.T. cable end terminations suitable for 11 KV,
XLPE armoured cable.
4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
Supply, erection, testing & commissioning of MCC panel as per
4a tender Specifications, Data sheet, IS and as per given description
etc.
Supply, erection, testing & commissioning of 100 KW Star delta
4b Starter with 70 kVAR Fixed Capacitor as per IS, specifications and 100 KW
technical specification & data sheet
Supply, erection, testing & commissioning of 100 kVAR APFC
4c Panel as per IS, specifications and technical specification & data 100 KVAR
sheet
5 L.T. CABLES
Supply, laying, connection, testing and commissioning of heavy
duty, 1.1 KV, PVC insulated, inner & outer PVC sheathed,
stranded AL / Cu. conductor cables as per Specification and IS
7098 Part I. The cable shall be laid underground in excavated
trench when laid outside the building in the method as
specified and shall be laid in prepared trench or cable tray
when laid inside the building.
As per Req.
5.1 XLPE AL conductor armordered-Transformer to SPS PMCC Panel
As per Req.
5.2 XLPE AL conductor armordered-for LT Panel to APFC Panel
Page 389

As per Req.
5.3 XLPE AL conductor armordered-for LT Panel to Pump
XLPE AL conductor armoured-for industrial socket, External As per Req.

5.4
LDB, Instrument panel
6 CABLE TERMINATION
Supply of connection, testing and commissioning of double
compression brass/steel cable glands and crimping type
bimatlic lugs / sockets with necessary tools and equipments as
specified in specifications and IS.
XLPE AL conductor armordered-NEW STP PLANT PCC to SPS As per Req.
6.1
PMCC Panel
As per Req.
6.2 XLPE AL conductor armordered-for LT Panel to APFC Panel
As per Req.
6.3 XLPE AL conductor armordered-for LT Panel to Pump
XLPE AL conductor armoured-for industrial socket, External As per Req.
6.4
LDB, Instrument panel
7 MAINS WIRING
Mains with 1.1 KV grade FRLS PVC insulated ISI marked
stranded Copper conductor wire in following type of pipe to
be erected concealed in /flushed on wall/ceiling, with 1.5 sq.
mm copper conductor FRLS PVC insulated stranded wire of
green colour for earth continuity of following size
Mains with 1.1 KV grade FRLS PVC insulated ISI marked

stranded Copper conductor wire in following type of pipe to be
erected in / on wall / ceiling with 2.5 sq. mm copper conductor
FRLS PVC insulated stranded wire of green colour for earth
continuity of following size
8 POINT WIRING
Point wiring for Light / Bell with 2-1.5 sq.mm & earthwire of
1.5 sq.mm (Green) both are of ISI marked 1.1 KV grade FRLS
PVC insulated multistrand copper wires, in following type of
pipe to be erected concealed in/ on surface on wall/ceiling
complete with 6A Modular type switch / bell push &
8.1
accessories and earth continuity of following type, erected on
PVC / Metallic box, single mounting base frame covered with
textured/metallic front plate modules erected on / in wall /
ceiling as per pipe erected, with necessary Lamp holder/ceiling
rose / H.D.Connector as directed.
Page 390

Point wiring for Individual Plug with & earthwire of 1.5
sq.mm (Green) both are of ISI marked 1.1 KV grade FRLS
PVC insulated multistrand copper wires, in following type of to
be erected concealed in / on surface of wall / ceiling complete
8.2
with Modular type switch & 5 pin Plug erected on PVC /
Metallic box covered with appropriate front plate modules
erected on / in wall / ceiling as per pipe erected with following
type of accessories.
Point wiring for Looped Plug with 6A Modular type switch & 5 pin
socket erected on PVC / Metallic box, single mounting base frame
8.3
covered with textured / metallic front plate modules erected on / in
wall / ceiling with following type accessories
Point wiring for secondary light point with 2-1.5 sq.mm &
earthwire of 1.5 sq.mm (green) both are of ISI marked 1.1 KV
grade FRLS PVC insulated multistrand copper wires, in following
type of pipe to be erected concealed in / flushed on wall/ceiling,
8.4 complete with earth continuity and necessary connection with
primary light with accessories erected on Metal / PVC box
covered with 3 mm thick PC(Polycarbonet) / Acrylic sheet for
open / concealed wiring. with necessary Lamp holder / ceiling rose
/ H.D.Connector as directed.
Point wiring for Two Way Controlled Light Point with 2-1.5
sq.mm & earthwire of 1.5 sq.mm (green) both are of .ISI marked
1.1 KV grade FRLS PVC insulated multistrand copper wires, in
following type of pipe to be erected concealed in / flushed on
wall/ceiling ,complete with 6A Modular type switches and
8.5
following type of accessories erected on PVC / Metallic box, single
mounting base frame covered with textured / metallic front plate
modules erected on / in wall / ceiling as per pipe erected. with
necessary batten/angle holder or ceiling rose or H.D.Connector as
directed.
One industrial metal clad switched socket outlet point controlled

8.6 with MCB with powder coated enclosure & related accessories to As per Req.
complete the work.
UPVC or better material made switch boards with required
8.7 ---
switches
9 LIGHT & FAN FIXTURES
Supply, istallation, connection, testing & commissioning of light
fixture complete with ballast, starters, lamps and other necessary
accessories and mounting down rod / bracket, steel wire, hook.
Page 391

9.1 Supplying and erecting LED Type indoor Tube Light Fitting 1 x 22 W
9.2 Supply, installation ,testing & Commisioning of Ceiling Fan 1200 mm Dia
Supplying and erecting approved make Cabin fan of 230V. A.C.

9.3 50 Cy/s. oscillating type complete erected with lead wires as 400 mm. sweep
directed.
Supplying and erecting approved make Pedestal Air-Circulator fan
9.4 A.C. 230 V. 50 Cy/s. and adjustable height complete with guard, 600 mm sweep
& standard lead flexible wires and plug top.
9.5 SETC of 45 W LED street light fittings 45 W LED
9.6 SETC of 60 W LED Heavy duty flood light 60 W LED
10 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Supply,Installation,Testing and Commissioning of 4 Way (Row)
10.1 4 Way TPN
TPN Lighting Distribution Board
10.1.1 Incomer: 64 A TP MCB (C Curve)
10.1.2 Outgoing: 16 A TP MCB ( C Curve)
10.2 10Way SPN
SPN Lighting Distribution Board.
10.2.2 Outgoing: 10 A SP MCB (C Curve)

10.3 4 Way TPN
SPN Lighting Distribution Board With ELCB

10.3.2 ELCB : 30 mA
10.3.3 Outgoing: 16 A SP MCB ( C Curve)
11 G.I. POLES AND ACCESSORIES
Providing and fixing approved make Octagonal poles. Made from
CR sheet steel. The pole should be made as per IS. and shall be
coated with hot dip galvanizing as per IS 2629/4759. with required
base plate suitable suspend local wind speed to be erected on
existing foundation.
11.1 6 Mtr. Long 70 mm Top X 135 mm bottom dia, 3 mm thickness
Page 392

SETC of cement concrete foundation or for concrete filling in
1:3:6 ratio with 20 to 25 mm stone metal duly plastered with
11.2
necessary curing for pole muffing or any other purpose and with
necessary J Bolts. Size:500x500 & 1200 mm deep
Spike Type earthing for poles with 1 meter long G.I. wire of 3 mm
11.3
thickness
Supply,Installation,Testing and Commissioning of Street Light
11.4 2 Mtr. Long
pole Single Arm Backet Size : 2 Mtr
Supply,Installation,Testing and Commissioning of coil type
2.5 mtr long 8
11.5 counter poise earthing station for external lighting pole and
SWG, Cu wire
junction box.
Providing & erecting approved make street light / wall mounting
junction box compression moulded from DMC (thermoset plastic)
vertical sliding cover having locking with square head stud loop in /
11.6
loop out in built terminal suitable for four core cable, waterproof of
I.P. 54 protected with clamp or bolt nut & earth bolt of following
size.
Providing & laying approved make 50 mm dia Double walled
corrugated pipes (DWC) of polyethylene(conforming to IS 14930
II )with necessary connecting accessories of same material at As per
11.7
required depth for laying of cable. below ground / road surface for Requirement
enclosing cable and back filling the same to make ground as per
original.
12 EARTHING
Pipe in Pipe Earthing For Electrical Installation up to 440V in
12.1 normal soil Length of pipe - 1 Mtr
Back filling compound - 1 Nos Bag of 15 Kg
A ) Supplying & erecting Pipe in pipe earthing for Transformer
and various Equipments of Sewage Pumping Station
12.2
(For Transformer Neutral only Copper Earthing Shall be Used)
Supply & labour charges for interconnecting the earthing stations

12.3 and various equipments in built up trenches, walls/ceiling, buried
in ground.
12.3.1 Cu Strip
12.3.2 GI strip 50 x 6 mm.
12.3.3 GI strip (motors) 25 x 3 mm.
12.3.4 G.I. wire 12 SWG
13 CABLE TRAY
Supply, Installation, laying and connection of G.I. Perforated type
cable tray fabricated from required sheet thk to sustain the weight
of cable with bands, tees and clamps for fixing and with cover and
all the hardwares & accessories as required.
450 x 35 x 2
13.1 450 mm. wide.
mm
Page 393

300 x 35 x 2
13.2 300 mm. wide.
mm
150 x 35 x 2
13.3 150 mm. wide.
mm
13.4 50 mm. wide. 50 x 35 x 2 mm
14 FABRICATION WORK
Supply of necessary materials and M.S. fabrication work (For

14.1 ISMB, Squarebar, flats,Chequered plates,For C channels, angles ---
etc for ladder , grills etc.) with oil paint as per details specification.
15 SAFETY ACCESSORIES
Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of following substation

accessories complete with fixing brackets etc. which shall be
supplied by the tenderers with all necessary accessories, tools etc.
Supply, fixing of portable fire extinguisher with necessary clamps, 4.5 Kg. Co2
15.1
supports and trolley. type
15.2 Supply of ISI marked hand gloves pair suitable to LT. 1.1 KV
25 mm. thick
15.3 Supply & laying of Rubber insulating mat ISI marked.
1000 mm. wide
11 KV & 415
15.4 Supply & laying of Warning signs
V.
15.5 Supply & fixing of First Aid box ---
Supply & laying of First Aid Chart laminated on wooden frame (1
15.6 ---
SET has 2 nos. 1 in Gujarati and 1 in English)
Supply and fixing of fire buckets with floor / wall mounting stand
15.7 ---
and first filling of sand in SPS.
Supply and fixing of self contained emergency light with dry type
15.8 10 W LED
maintenance free battery.
16 LIASONING CHARGES
Liaison fees for prepareing necessary documents and drawings for
getting N.O.C from supply co and Electrical Inspector for charging ----
the installation.( All statutory fees will be paid by SMC ).
17 FURNITURE
17.1 Cup Board ----
17.2 Table ----
17.3 Heavy Duty Office Chair ----
17.4 Safety Helmet ----
17.5 Safety Belt ----
17.6 Safety Shoes Pair ----
Page 394

18 AUTOMATION WORK FOR DINDOLI SPS ----
19 CCTV CAMERA ----
Note:-
Above details is for guidance purpose only and tenderer must make site visit and obtain details
of all units/machineries/plant equipments & accessories before giving his offer. Existing all
units/machineries/plant equipments & accessories are covered under the scope of work. No
dispute of any kind regarding quantity/capacity of equipment/unit at later date shall be
entertained.
Page 395

DETAIL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS FOR DINDOLI STP:
Sr. No. Item Description

SUPPLY OF NEW HT Panel (1 I/C + 2 O/G)
1. As per Req.
2. HT CABLES, From Exisitng HT Panel to New HT Panel As per Req.

Room
3. TRANSFORMER -3500 KVA approx As per Req.
4. MAIN PCC PANEL FOR NEW INSTALLATION 1 No.
5. 250 KVAR FIXED CAPACITOR FOR X'MER 1 No.
6. MCC PANEL FOR INLET AREA 1 No.
7. APFC PANEL FOR INLET) 1 No.
8. MCC PANEL FOR AIR BLOWER ROOM 1 No.
9. APFC PANEL FOR BLOWER ROOM 1 No.
10. MCC PANEL FOR SBR ROOM 1 No.
11. APFC PANEL FOR SBR ROOM 1 No.
12. MCC PANEL FOR CHLORINATION ROOM 1 No.
13. APFC PANEL FOR CHLORINATION ROOM 1 No.
14. MCC PANEL FOR CENTRIFUGE HOUSE 1 No.
15. APFC PANEL FOR CENTRIFUGE ROOM 1 No.
5000 A or As per Requirement , EC Grade, Tinned Copper bus
16. As per Req.
duct - For 2 Transformers
17. PCC - Air Blower Panel, AL. XLPE Armoured Cable As per Req.
18. PCC - Inlet Room, AL. XLPE Armoured Cable As per Req.
19. PCC - Centrifuge House AL. XLPE Armoured Cable As per Req.
20. As per Req.
PCC - SBR PANEL ROOM AL. XLPE Armoured Cable
21. As per Req.
PCC - Chlorination Room AL. XLPE Armoured Cable
22. As per Req.
PCC - GAS ENGINE AL. XLPE Armoured Cable
PCC - Existing STP Blower Room AL. XLPE Armoured As per Req.
23.
Cable
24. 4C X 2.5 sq.mm Copper As per Req.
25. 4C X 4 sq.mm Copper As per Req.
26. HT Terminations - 11 KV As per Req.
27. LT Terminations (DC Gland, Lugs, etc) As per Req.
28. Aluminum Die Cast Push button stations As per Req.
29. Transformer Neutral Earthing - Copper As per Req.
30. Copper strip for neutral earthing As per Req.
31. GI Strip for equipment earthing As per Req.
32. Indoor Lighting -36 W LED with Reflector & Elec. Choke As per Req.
33. Exhaust Fan As per Req.
Page 396

34. High Eff. Ceiling Fan As per Req.
35. Junction Boxes - Polycarbonate IP 66 As per Req.
36. Lighting Distribution Boards - Double Door TPN type As per Req.
37. Point wiring including wires, plug points As per Req.
38. Conduit for Lighting As per Req.
39. Outdoor lighting including all accessories (45 W LED) As per Req.
40. Flood Lighting (120 W LED) As per Req.
41. 36 W LED For Street Light Fixture As per Req.
42. 6 Mtr Long Street Light Pole As per Req.
43. 7 Mtr Long Flood Light Pole As per Req.
44. Street Light Single Arm Bracket - 2 Mtr. As per Req.
45. Street Light Double Arm Bracket - 2 Mtr. As per Req.
46. Street Light Triple Arm Bracket - 2 Mtr. As per Req.
47. PCC - Street Light Pole Power Cable As per Req.
48. SITC of of CCTV camera system in entire plant with capacity Lot
of 1 TB storage
Exisitng DG Set Panel - New STP PCC Room , as per Load
49. Lot
Requirement AL. XLPE Armoured Cable
50. Exisitng DG Set Panel - Dindoli PMCC Room , as per Load Lot
Requirement AL. XLPE Armoured Cable
51. Exisitng DG Set Panel - New 40 MLD TSTP PCC Room , as Lot
per Load Requirement AL. XLPE Armoured Cable
52. Split Air Condition (2 tonne ) capacity for Office , Scada Lot
Room , Laboratory etc.
53. MS Fabrication work for Cable Tray , Panel Base frame etc. Lot
PLC & SCADA SYSTEM FOR SBR PROCESS

Pressure Gauge
Dissolved Oxygen Meter
54 Level Transmitter Lot
VFD for Air Blower
Level Sensor For Decentaer System
Position Sensor for decanter
Note:-
Above details is for guidance purpose only and tenderer must make site visit and obtain details
of all units/machineries/plant equipments & accessories before giving his offer. Existing all
entertained.
Page 397

DETAIL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS FOR UPGRADATION OF
EXISTING 66 MLD DINDOLI STP:
Sr. No. Item Description Unit

SUPPLY OF NEW HT Panel
1 (1 I/C + 5 O/G )(2 - Existing STP,1 - New STP , 1- 40 MLD 1
TSTP , 1 – Dindoli SPS)
MCC Panel for New Blower Room (Supply From New STP PCC
2 1
Panel)
3 MCC PANEL For Pump Room 1
4 APFC panel for New Blower room As per Req.
AL. XLPE Armoured Cable for New PCC - Existing STP Blower
5 As per Req.
Room
6 AL. XLPE Armoured Cable for MCC - Blower As per Req.
Modification of Exisitng Bio Gas Panel including Power Cable up

to each PCC/PMCC panel ( Addition of New Feeder For New Stp
7 As per Req.
+ Dindoli SPS + New TTP etc. with Individual MFM on Each
Feeder )
Note:-
The Tenderer must make site visit and obtain details of all units/machineries/plant equipments
& accessories before giving his offer. Existing all units/machineries/plant equipments &
accessories are covered under the scope of work. No dispute of any kind regarding
quantity/capacity of equipment/unit at later date shall be entertained.
Page 398

DETAIL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS FOR 40 MLD TTP:
SR.
ITEMS QTY.
NO.
1 HT Panel (1 I/C + 2 O/G) 1 No.
2 Transformer - 4000 KVA approx 2 Nos.
3 Fixed Capacitor for 4000 KVA Transformer LOT
4 Main PCC Panel for new installation 1 No.
5 MCC - 1 Panel For RO System 1 No.
6 APFC panel for MCC - 1 1 No.
7 MCC - 2 Panel UF System 1 No.
9 MCC - 3 Panel Backwash , Dosing Pump , Transfer Pump 1 No.
11 MCC - 4 Panel RO Feed Pump 1 No.
13 MCC - 5 Panel RO Feed Pump 1 No.
6300 A or As per requirement, EC Grade, Tinned Copper bus
15 As per req.
duct - For 2 Transformers
16 HT Cable - Existing STP to New TTP XLPE 11 KV As per req.
17 PCC - MCC 1 AL XLPE Armoured Cable As per req.
22 MCC 1 to APFC AL XLPE Armoured Cable As per req.
32 Control Cables 4C X 2.5 sq.mm Copper As per req.
33 Control Cables 4C X 4 sq.mm Copper As per req.
34 HT Terminations - 11 KV As per req.
35 LT Terminations (DC Gland, Lugs, etc) As per req.
36 Aluminum Die Cast Push button stations As per req.
37 Transformer Neutral Earthing - Copper As per req.
38 Equipment Earthing As per req.

39 Copper strip for neutral earthing As per req.
Page 399

40 GI Strip for equipment earthing As per req.
41 Indoor Lighting -Panel Light 36 W As per req.
42 Indoor Lighting - 90 W LED Fitting for shed As per req.
43 Exhaust Fan As per req.
44 High Eff. Ceiling Fan As per req.
45 Junction Boxes - Polycarbonate IP 66 As per req.
46 Lighting Distribution Boards - Double Door TPN type As per req.
47 Point wiring including wires, plug points As per req.

48 Conduit for Lighting As per req.
49 Outdoor lighting including all accessories (45 W LED) As per req.
50 Flood Lighting (120 W LED) As per req.
Split Air condition unit of 2 Tonn Capacity for Laboratory ,
51 As per req.
Admin Building and Scada Room Etc.
Note:-
The Tenderer must make site visit and obtain details of all units/machineries/plant equipments
& accessories before giving his offer. Existing all units/machineries/plant equipments &
quantity/capacity of equipment/unit at later date shall be entertained.
Page 400

The general requirements include design, manufacture, testing at works, supply and delivery at
site, unloading and storing the equipment at site of installation, erection, testing and
commissioning of the equipment at site, etc. as required for complete electrical system for
smooth operation of treatment plant as per the scope under this tender.
ITEM NO.: 1: EXPANSION OF EXISITNG H.T. SWITCHGEAR AS WELL AS

SUPPLY OF NEW H.T. SWITCHGEAR
(A) SUPPLY OF NEW H.T. VCB SWITCHGEAR PANEL FOR
(i) 101 MLD NEW STP ,

(ii) 40 MLD TSTP PLANT
(iii) DINDOLI SPS:
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of cubicle patten compartmentalizes, 11 KV,

350 MVA, panel, extensible, indoor type, floor mounted, manual as well as electrical operated,
dust damp and vermin proof, 11 KV switchgear comprising of :
1 No. : 11 KV, 350 MVA symmetrical at 11000 Volts three phase, symmetrical breaking
capacity shall be breaking capacity shall be 25 KA and making capacity of 46.25 KA at 11000
volts, 800 Amp. Horizontal draw out type vacuum circuit breaker as a incommer complete with
microprocessor based overload and earth protection relays with RS 485/232 communication
port, mechanical interlock, On-Off indicator, 96 mm Sq. dial flush mounted, Digital
Multifunction meter with RS 485/232 communication port, emergency trip, Healthy trip Push
button, mechanical operation counter, red, green and amber LED lamps for On-off and auto
trip indication with heat shrinkable colored sleeve type, insulated 800 Amp. Rated copper
busbars and inter connections, single gland cable box to receiver cable ,as per required size of
aluminum conductor, 11 KV, XLPE (E) Cable, earthing terminals and other required
accessories as per required rating for incommer.
capacity shall be 25 KA and making capacity of 46.25 KA at 11000 volts, 800 Amp. Horizontal
draw out type vacuum circuit breaker as a outgoing complete with microprocessor based
overload and earth protection relays with RS 485/232 communication port, mechanical
interlock, On-Off indicator, 96 mm Sq. dial flush mounted, Digital Multifunction meter with
RS 485/232 communication port, emergency trip, Healthy trip Push button, mechanical
operation counter, red, green and amber LED lamps for On-off and auto trip indication with
heat shrinkable colored sleeve type, insulated 800 Amp. Rated copper busbars and inter
connections, single gland cable box to receiver , 11 KV, XLPE (E) Cable, earthing terminals
and other required accessories as out going feeders to control Distribution transformers as per
required rating.
(B) FOR EXPANSION OF EXISITNG H. T. VCB PANEL OF EXISITING PLANT:
This scope of work include change of Exisitng Incommer VCB as per new Load
Requirement and Addition of Following Outgoing Feeders in Exisitng H.T VCB Panel.
Page 401

and other required accessories as out going feeders to control HT Side of min 4000 KVA or as
per Requirement for 40 MLD TTP.
per Requirement for 101 MLD NEW STP.
per Requirement for DINDOLI SPS.
It should be complete with insulated copper busbars with inter connections. The supporting
insulators, insulated sleeves for bus bar and insulated partitions shall be strictly weather proof
and non-hygroscopic. The alarm & tripping for buchholz and high temperature of transformer
winding & transformer oil etc. should also be provided including control cables. D.C. supply, it
required for relays etc. must be included providing power pack units, if required.
The above panel should incorporate the following accessories/items:
Panel Board:
The cubicle pattern board should be complete with foundations bolts, nuts flush type meters as
specified, indicator lamps, operating handle, trolley for drawing out VCB’s and other required
accessories.
Current transformer:
Page 402

The ratio of the CTs shall be suitable for controlling Suitable size of transformers. The VA
burden of the CTs shall be sufficient to supply the energy required by the relay for normal
operation and tripping of the circuit breaker.
Protection system:
Microprocessor based H.T. relay for 2 O/C and 1 E/F protection scheme.
Specification of the relay:

2 Over current + 1 Earth fault Protection with highest
1A/5A in same relay.
Low burden
Relay should be provided with RS 485 / 232 Computer compatibility Port.
Over current protection relay:

Pick up setting: 20% to 200% in step of 5%
High set: 20% to 2000%
Time setting: Min 0.05 to 1.0 Sec. in step of 0.05 Sec.
Earth fault current protection relay:

Pick up setting: 20% to 200% in step of 5%
High set: 20% to 2000%
Time setting: Min 0.05 to 1.0 Sec. in step of 0.05 Sec.
Original test certificate of the manufacture’s Co. of the new relay must be submitted along with
deliver. After the commissioning work, relay should be calibrated & tested by the
manufacture’s representative/Engineer at site in presence of the Site Engineer.
In any case of the Fault, S.M.C.’s feeder should be tripped first and contractor should set the
relays accordingly.
The secondary wiring supplied for the equipment shall consist of non deteriorating fire proof
superior grade stranded copper PVC wires suitably colored and fitted with numbered ferrules at
both ends. The cross section of the wires shall be 2.5 Sq. mm. for others. Following color codes
shall be used for wiring
C.T.: Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
An operating mimic diagram shall be provided on the front side.

On-off operation of breaker must be done by closing the main door of breaker, for that
necessary arrangement must be done by manufacture.
Breaking and Making Capacity:

The vacuum breaker shall be capable of having rupturing capacity of 350 MVA symmetrical at
11000 Volts three phase. Symmetrical breaking capacity shall be 25 KA and making capacity
of 46.25 KA at 11000 volts.
Space Heater:
Space heater for heating the panel for removal of the moisture should be provided. Each panel
should have individual heater.
Page 403

Mechanical Indication LED Type:
Breaker On, Off, Trip.
Front Panel Indications LED Type:

Breaker On, Off, Trip
General Finish:
Totally enclosed, metal clad, vermin and dust proof suitable for tropical climate.
Treatment & Painting:

All metal parts of panels should treated with shot blasting and zinc spray before final color
coat.
The panel shall be furnished with powered coating of light admiralty Grey paint.
The paint shall not scale off or crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal handling. All
Nut Bolts used in the construction shall be of mild steel hot deep galvanized only.
The manufacturer shall have facilities for assembling vacuum, time and speed measurement
facilities in India. This is to ensure adequate service support for future.
Cable Box:
The breakers shall be provided with suitable and identical cable boxes for connection of 11 KV
XLPE (E) aluminum conductor armoured cable approaching vertical from below at rear side.
The cable boxes shall be so located at convenient height to facilitate easy cable jointing
work.The design of the cable box shall be such that any type of jointing methods such as heat
shrinkable/push on type/cold shrinkable type termination’s can be adopted.
Earthing:
The Breaker Panel shall have special earth bar with a sectional area of not less that 100 Sq. mm
run along the whole of metal enclosed switch structure, each end being connected to the main
earthings system where metal cased are used on instruments these shall be connected to this bar
by conductors of not less than 16 Sq. mm section.
Foundations:
All Foundations bolts, nuts and washer necessary for installation shall be of stainless steel and
supplied by the contactor.
Labels & Name/Rating Plate:
Breaker panels shall be clearly labeled as required indicating where necessary their purpose
and “ON” and “OFF” letters on brass, ivory, enamel iron or other suitable materials. The
complete operating instructions & diagrammatic explanation shall be described on the name
plate, affixed on the panel from the front side with florescent color alphabets.
The Marking / Labeling shall include but not limited to following:
The front shall include clear mimic diagram which indicates the different functions.
The Position indicator shall give true reflection of position of the main contacts; they shall be
clearly visible to Operator.
The lever operating directions shall be clearly indicated in the mimic diagram.
The manufacturer plate shall include the switchboard’s main electrical characteristics and
operating instructions with diagrammatic explanation.
Page 404

The manufacturer plate shall include serial number and year of manufacturing of the
switchgear.
11 KV Danger Board as per relevant IS in English and Gujarati shall be provided on all side of
panel. The board shall be glass enameled white red background and white letterings.
Testing of the Panel:

Complete panel should be tested as per relevant IS, at manufacturer’s workshop in the presence
of Engineer – In – Charge of the S.M.C / TPI.
NOTE :
1. The installation, testing and commissioning of H.T. panel must be done in the
presence of manufacturer’s representative(s).
2. All related work including preparing and approval of drawing, getting
permission to energies the equipment from Govt. Electrical Inspector and
Supply Company shall have to be done by the contractor. The Surat Smart City
Development Limited shall pay all statutory fees but not any penalties directly
to the concern authority.
ITEM NO. 2: DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1. 3500 KVA for 101 MLD NEW STP (2 Nos. - 1W + 1 S)

2. 4000 KVA for 40 MLD TTP (2 Nos. - 1W + 1 S)
3. 500 KVA for Dindoli SPS (2 Nos. - 1W + 1 S)
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning as per necessary rating ( 1 Working + 1

Standby) , 11000/433 volts, 3 ph, 50 c/s., copper wound, oil immersed, naturally cooled
(ONAN), delta/star connected, low losses, percentage impedance as per 1180 & 2026 standard
and it’s latest amendment (with mentioned losses), core type out door, plinth mounting,
step-down continuously rated, distribution transformers suitable for parallel operation with
each other. Each transformer must be complete with oil conservator with drain valve,
dehydrating breather, bidirectional rollers, explosion vent, buchholz relay, filter valve, drain
valve, sampling valve, two nos. tank earthing terminals, rating and diagram plates,
thermometer pocket with 100 mm dial type thermometer with Control contacts, MRP & RSD
complete with capillary tube, lifting lungs, air release and oil filling plug, magnetic oil level
gauge with minimum and maximum level marking, marshalling box, suitable cable box on
H.V. side, multi gland cable box to receive required No. of 3 ½ core Aluminum conductor
XLPE insulated & sheathed armored cable on L.T. side / Suitable Bus Duct Arrangement if
Transformer is above 2000 KVA. Additional externally brought out neutral bushing for
earthing should be provided. +5%, +2 ½%, -2 ½%, -5%, -7 ½%, -10% tapping on H.T. side
with Seven position OFF load tap changing switch with position indicator, locking device with
lock and keys must be included. The transformers should be complete with first filling of
transformer oil. All accessories as per relevant IS standards shall be provided as a minimum
and additional as mentioned in this specifications.
Page 405

The material of constructions should be such that it should give lower core losses, higher
efficiency, better regulation and long years of trouble-free service. The transformer shall have
detachable cable boxes with disconnecting chamber on H.V. and L.V. side if required. The
L.V. cable box if provided should be suitable to receive the required runs of aluminum
conductor, armored, XLPE insulated cable as per the L.V current rating of transformer. The
cable box should have ample space for connecting these cables. The H.V. cable box should
have ample space for terminating the required 11 KV (E) XLPE cable. The transformer shall be
suitable to run in parallel with each other. The temp. rise shall not exceed 45ºC in oil over an
ambient temp. of 50ºC. The contractor shall be required to ascertain the condition along with
approval of drawing and the Surat Smart City Development Limited will confirm the same
with manufacturer prior to approval of drawing.
Oil Temperature Indicator (OTI) with 4 to 20 mA output signal and Winding Temperature
Indicator (WTI) with 4 to 20 mA output signal same shall be connected with SCADA system
with RS 485 Compitability.
Each of the transformers must be tested for routine tests and one transformer shall be tested for
type tests as per latest Indian Standards including heat run test considering overload condition
in presence of Engineer/representative of Surat Smart City Development Limited at
manufacturer’s works prior to dispatch and manufacturer’s certificates thereof must be
supplied. The efficiency and losses of transformers at various loads must be specified.
Item also includes transformer foundation and necessary civil work like chain link,beam,
column, slab, brick wall, etc. as per site requirements.
ITEM NO. 3: 11 KV HT CABLE:
Supplying, laying, testing and commissioning of 11 KV, XLPE (E), as per load requriement
aluminum conductor armoured cable for 101 MLD STP H.T. Panel , 40 MLD TTP H.T. Panel
, Dindoli SPS in open trench / duct or underground. The item includes excavation and refilling
using bricks, sand etc. as per standard practices, breaking of wall and restating the same after
completing the work for which the Surat Smart City Development Limited shall not supply any
material or labor. The cable length may vary depending on site condition and contractor should
take measurement and supply the cable accordingly with prior approval. No straight joint shall
be allowed under any circumstances. Hypo test shall be carried out after lay and before and
after jointing.
ITEM NO. 4: HT CABLE TERMINATION:
The item includes supply, installation, termination, testing and commissioning of heat
shrinkable termination kit for above mention cables. These terminations will be made on
transformer’s H.T. Side, and 11 KV V.C.B. panel. The termination at outgoing of supply
company with incoming of breaker is also in the scope of tenderer. The cable boxes are
included in the items of transformers and HT Switchgear. All HT termination shall be heat
Page 406

shrinkable type only. This item also includes supplying and fixing of Min 06 (Six) Sets or As
per requirement Reusable Flexible bushing for covering the H.T. Terminations for each panel.
All material and labour required for termination shall be in the scope of contractor’s work.
Hypot test shall be carried out before and after end termination /Jointing.
GENERAL ELECTRICLA SPECIFICATION
SCOPE :
This part of design criteria defines the minimum basic requirement for electrical engineering,
design basis for selection of various electrical requipment, equipment specifications and scope
of work for electrical system.
SCOPE OF WORK :
The contractor's scope of work covered in this package shall include the complete design,
system studies, details engineering, testing at manufacturer's work procurement, transportation
to site, supply, storage at site, installation, testing and commissioning and handing over the
entire plant including the electrical system and equipment.
DESIGN BASIS:
Introduction :
This specification, together with the applicable project specification shall govern
the design and engineering of electrical facilities
(i) The design shall be based on the following : - Safety to personnel and equipment during
operation and maintenance.
- Reliability of service
- Ease of maintenance
- Adequate scope for future expansion and modification
- Convenience of operation
- Electrical sypply to electrical equipment and machinery within the design
operating limits
- Maximum interchangeability of equipment – Automatic protection of all electrical
equipment through selective relaying system
- Minimum fire risk
- A fail safe system
(ii) The design basis detailed in this specification shall be followed in accordance with
sound engineering practices.
Codes & Standards :
(i) The design, engineering, supply of equipment, installation, testing and

commissioning shall be in accordance with established codes, sound engineering
practices, and must conform the statutory regularations applicable in India. Other
standards may be allowed in particular cases where appropriate IS/IEC standards are
not available subject to SMCs approval. However, contractor will not be allowed to
form a basis for deviation from IS/IEC just due to country of origin of any equipment.
Page 407

(ii) The main codes and standards, which shall be considered as minimum requirements
are as follows. Latest version of these shall be followed.
- Indian Electricity Act, 1910.
- Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
- The Factory Act, 1948.
- IS 5861 Voltages and frequency transmission and distribution system
- IS 3961 Recommended current ratings for cables
- IS 4146 Application Guide for VT
- IS 4201 Application Guoide for CT
- IS 3043 Code of practice for earthing
- IS 3716 Insulation coordination application Guide
- IS 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation system voltage not
exceeding 650 V.
- IS 2274 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation system voltage exceeding
650 V.
- IS 6665 Code of practice for industrial lights
- IS 3646 Interior illumination Part I and Part II
- IS 1944 Code of practice for lighting of public thorough fares
- IS 1554 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cable for working voltages up to and
including 1100 volts.
- IS 1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General) Electrical
installation Equivalent to IEC/IS specifications shall also be acceptable.
In the event of conflict between this specifi-cations and other document listed, the following
order of priority shall govern.
( i) Design Criteria and data sheets.
( ii) Equipment specification.
(iii)Codes and Standards.
POWER SYSTEM DESIGN :
A. Utilization Voltages and Frequency :

(i) In accordance to IS 585, voltages are classified as follows :
- Upto and including 250 V Low Voltage
- Above 250 V and upto and including 650 V Medium Voltage
(ii) The following voltage levels shall be used to provide electrical power for various
purpose. The rated frequency of supply shall be 50 Hz.
-MV motors 400 +/- 10%, 50 Hz + 5 %
-Normal lighting system 400/240 V +/- 10%, Single Phase 3 wire, 50 Hz.+/- 5 %
-Motor/panel space heaters 240 +/-10% single phase AC.
-Control supply for LV 240 AL
B. Voltage Drops :
The system design shall ensure that the voltage drop at the affected bus does not
exceed 15% in case of startup of the largest motor or re-acceleration of a group of
motors. The voltage available at the motor terminals during startup, must be
sufficient to ensure positive starting or reacceleration of the motor (Even with the
motor fully loaded if required) without causing any damage to the motor.
Page 408

Voltage drop - in supply cable feeding lighting distribution board/panel on
maximum design load shall be limited to 1% and in supply cables feeding, lighting
points with all lighting points connected to a circuit switched on, it shall be limited to
2%.
C. Power Distribution :
Tenderer shall do necessary arrangement for provide 3 phase 4 wire 410 +/- 10% volts
power through 1.1 KV grade 3.5 core cable feeder of suitable rating upto MCC to be
supplied and installed by contractor. All the utilization voltages required shall be
driven from the above supply voltage. All transformers, switchgears and distribution
boards, etc. required for, shall be supplied by the contractor. The transformers are
not in the bidders scope of the work.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM SPECIFICATION :
The equipment shall conform to corresponding IS standard, specifications and particular

specification attached with this document and to Indian/IEC standards and shall be suitable for
installation and satisfactory operation in the service conditions mentioned in
specifications. All equipments shall be tropicalised. All equipment shall also be
withstanding the maximum short circuit fault current at the point of installation for a time
greater than the maximum fault clearing time.
Motors :
Motors upto and including 250 KW shall be suitable for 415 V and motors of rating above
250 KW shall be suitable for 3.3 KV. For heavy duty drives such as compressor
fan/agitator/crusher etc. high starting torque motors (Min. 150% of rates torque) shall be
provided. Motors above 30 KW rating shall have anti-condensation heaters and a seperate
terminal box shall be provided.
Cables and Wires :

All HV and MV cables shall conform to IS Spec. High voltage cables shall be XLPE
insulated, armoured with PVC overall sheathed aluminium conductor cables. The power
cable shall be 3 core armoured cables for motors. Each motor shall have two seperate
earthings.
1.1 KV Grade cables shall be XLPE / PVC insulated sheathed, armoured cable with
aluminium conductor. The control cables shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed armoured
cable with copper conductors. The power and control cables shall have the following
minimum cross-sectional areas :
a. Medium voltage 4 mm2(Aluminium)/2.5 mm2 copper

b. MV control cables 2.5 mm2 (Copper).(See note)
c. Lighting 2.5 mm2 (Copper)
Note : Minimum one spare core shall be provided in each control cable.
The cables shall be sized based on the maximum continuous load current it carries, the voltage
drop, system voltage, system earthing and short circuit withstand criteria. Besides the
derating due to ambient air temperature, ground temperature, grouping and proximity of
Page 409

cables with each other, thermal resistivity of soil etc. shall have to be taken into account. A
derating factor of minimum 0.6 shall be considered for sizing all cables. Contractor shall
consider a lower derating factor, if required.
Control Stations :
Each motor shall be provided with a local control station in the field, and remote control in
control room.
The enclosure shall have suitable protection for site conditions. All control stations shall
have minimum enclosure protection of IP-55.
The control station shall include the following equipment as per individual requirement :
- Start/Stop push button with LED type indicating lamp amd cable glands,
- Digital Ammeter for all motors.
- Suitable cable glands.
Stop push botton shall be lockable and have stay put feature. Ammeter is not required in
local push button station but the same shall be provided with remote/local selector switch in
M.C.C.
Lighting System :
Plant lighting inside plant & outer surfaces of walls of plant, outdoor lighting for
clarifier,filter house and sludge drain chambers House within the battery limits is in
contractor's scope.Street lighting also in the scope of this contract. Lighting system shall
include normal,lighting. Normal lighting shall be on 230 V AC +/- 10%.
Work shall be carried out in accordance with attached Erection specification for Lighting.
Lighting system shall be designed with illumination levels as per good engineering
practices. However, minimum illumi-nation level shall be maintained as listed below. This
system consists of lighting transformers to reduce fault levels, main distribution board,
lighting and power panels, fixtures, junction boxes, 3 pin 5A/15A convenience socket
outlets, cable glands etc. Lighting transformer feeders shall be sized for full transformer
capacity.
All outdoor lighting shall be manually controlled only. Taller structures shall have
aviation obstruction lighting as per statutory regulations.
Lighting and power panels shall be provided with miniature circuit breakers for the control
and protection of circuits. Wherever felt necessary 3-way junction boxes can also be used
for tapping of light-ing circuits. A minimum of 25% of the miniature circuit breaker of
each board shall be left as spares. MCBS shall not be loaded more than 80% of rates
capacity. The maximum load on any individual lighting circuit shall not exceed 1000 W.
Wiring for lighting and convenience outlets shall be carried out with PVC armoured cables
run along the column/platform and structures. The armoured cable will enter lighting
fixture/JB through single compression gland. Minimum illumination level required shall be
as per detailed lighting specifications. The maintenance factor shall not be more than 0.7.
Page 410

Sizing of earth rods and conductors :
This shall be designed to cope with the conditions imposed. The earth conductor shall be
adequately sized to carry the maximum earth fault current resulting in the network, without
undue temperature rise. All joints shall be protected to prevent corrosion.
The following are the guide lines for carrying out the earthing work.
All the electrical equipment operating at the above 250 volts shall have two separate and
distinct connections to earth grids.
GI disconnecting plates shall be installed at various places in the plant. Alternatively,

aluminium disconnecting plates may be used in corrosive areas.
Connections between GI earth electrodes, disconnect-ing plates and various equipments shall
be done by GI earthing strips/G.I. stranded wire rope.
GI strips shall be used for main earthing grid. Following is the minimum sizes of earthing
conductors to be used for various connections.
Equipment Size of GI Earth Conductor

- Main Earth Grid 40 x 5 mm GI strip
- 3.7 KW motor GI wire No. 8 SWG
5.5 to 30 KW 3/8" GI wire rope
Above 30 KW 5/8" GI wire rope
or alternatively suitable G.I. strip shall be provided instead of wire.
- Steel structural columns, 40 x 5 mm strip tanks, loading racks.

- Pipe racks, vessels and 35 mm2 wire rope heat exchangers.
- Lighting, power and 35 mm2 wire rope instrument panels.
- Receptacles and local 8 SWG solid control stations.
- Lighting poles 35 mm2 wire rope
. ERECTION INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING :

Works shall be carried out in accordance with attached :
- Electrical installation equipment-specification for erection, testing and
commissioning specification.
- Electrical installation cabling - General specifica -tion for cabling specification.
- Electrical installation lighting - Genberal specification for lighting
specifications.
- Electrical installation grounding - General specification for Grounding
Specifications.
- Other specifications of this tender documents.
SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS
8.0 PMCC / MCC PANELS:
Following Minimum new PMCC / MCC Panels shall be provided by the tenderer, if
additional MCC panels required as per design, same shall be provided by the tenderer.
Page 411

This detailes given only for guidance to tenderer, actual quntatity shall be decided
during detailed engineering.
8.1 PCC for New 101 MLD STP with Double busbar type which incorporate
necessary rating 2 nos. of in coming, 1 no. of bus coupler , 1 No of D.G incomer
and required nos. of outgoing feeders with ATS for various MCC Panels along
with fix type capacitor for transformer. PCC will receive power from new
transformers.
8.2 PCC for New 40 MLD TTP with Double busbar type which incorporate necessary
rating 2 nos. of in coming, 1 no. of bus coupler , 1 No of D.G incomer and
required nos. of outgoing feeders with ATS for various MCC Panels along with fix
type capacitor for transformer. PCC will receive power from new transformers.
8.2 PMCC for Dindoli SPS with Double busbar type which incorporate necessary
rating 2 nos. of in coming, 1 no. of bus coupler , 1 No of D.G incomer and
required nos. of outgoing feeders with ATS for various MCC Panels along with fix
type capacitor for transformer. PMCC will receive power from new
transformers.
8.3 Addition / Modification in Exisitng PCC for Dindoli STP as per new Load
requirement require for Upgradation Process.
MCC FOR UPGRADATION OF EXISITNG 66 MLD STP :
MCC - Panel for Air Blower units like Air Blower for IFAS Syatem and other spare
feeders etc. which incorporate 1 no. of in coming and required nos. of outgoing feeders
with APFC Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- Existing Air Blower Room)
MCC - Panel for Pump Room for units like Pumps , Lighting System , E.O.T and other
spare feeders etc. which incorporate 1 no. of in coming From New 101 MLD PCC Panel
and required nos. of outgoing feeders with APFC Panel to maintain power factor 1.0.
(Location :- Pump Room)
MCC – Modification / Addition of Outgoing Feeder in Exisitng Bio Gas Power

Generation panel with all required Accessories.
(Location :- BGPP Room)
MCC FOR PROPOSED 101 MLD STP :
MCC-1 - Panel - 1 No. for Inlet Area for units like Multirake Type Fine Screen , Belt
Converyor , Classifier System , Actuator panel for Various Inlet Gates etc. and Others
which incorporate 1 no. of in coming and required nos. of outgoing feeders with APFC
Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- New Primary Panel Room)
MCC-2 - Panel - 1 No. for New Air Blower Room for units like Air Blower for New STP
and Other spare Feeders etc. which incorporate 1 no. of in coming and required nos. of
outgoing feeders with APFC Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- New Air Blower Room)
Page 412

MCC-3 - Panel - 1 No. for SBR System for units like Returns Actiated Sludge Pumps,
Surplus Activated Sluge Pump Sets , Decanter Assembly and Other spare Feeders etc.
which incorporate 1 no. of in coming and required nos. of outgoing feeders with APFC
Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- New Pump House for SBR System)
MCC-4 - Panel - 1 No. for Chlorination System for units like Chlorinator , Chlorine
Booster pumps and Other spare Feeders etc. which incorporate 1 no. of in coming and
required nos. of outgoing feeders with APFC Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- Chlorination Room)
MCC-5 - Panel - 1 No. for Centrifuge System for units like Centrifuge , Poly Dosing
Pump ,Centrifuge Feed Pump , Poly Tank Mixers , Screw Thickner and Other spare
Feeders etc. which incorporate 1 no. of in coming and required nos. of outgoing feeders
with APFC Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- Centrifuge Room)
MCC FOR DINDOLI SPS
MCC- - Panel - 1 No. for Dindoli Sewage Pumping Station for units like Cubical Starter
Panel Non Clog Sewage Submersible Pump Sets , Mechcnial Screen , EOT, Actuator For
Inlet Gates , Lighting System of Sewage Pumping Station and Other spare Feeders etc.
which incorporate 2 no. of in coming from Trasnformers , 1 No. From DG Sets and
required nos. of outgoing feeders with APFC Panel to maintain Power Factor 1.0.
(Location :- SPS Panel Room)
The MCC shall have degree of protection of the enclosure IP-54. The M.C.C. shall be of
drawout and extensible type. The lighting boards shall not be draw-out type. Main PMCC
Panel for STP shall be singalbusbar type.
The MCC shall be free standing,extensible, metal enclosed fixed compartmen-talised, modular
type, dust and vermin proof suitable for indoor installation. The switchgear shall be assembled
out of vertical panels of uniform height not exceeding 2450 mm. The maximum height of the
operating handle/switches shall not exceed 1800 mm and the minimum not below 300 mm.
The switchgear shall be designed to ensure max. safety during operation, inspection,
connection of cables relocation of outgoing circuits and maintenance with the energised bus
system and without taking any special precautions. The switchgear shall permit max.
interchangeability and shall be extensible on either side
The switchboard / MCC shall be sheet steel clad with the frame fabricated out of 14 SWG cold
rolled sheet steel and doors/ covers also of 14 SWG cold rolled sheet steel having integral
base frame for each vertical panel. All hardware shall be corrosion resistant. All joints and
connections of the panel members shall be made of galvanised and passivated or cadmium
plated high quality steel bolts, nuts and washers secured against loosening.
The switchgear shall be suitable for bottom cable entry. Each MCC panel shall have a
separate cable alley of 150 mm minimum width. Motor starter and switchfuse units shall be
in Multitier arrangement in single fixed execution. All auxiliary devices for control,
Page 413

indication, measurement and protection such as push bottons, control and selector
switches, LED type indicating lamps, Digital metering instruments shall be mounted on the
front side of the respective compartment. Components requiring frequent inspection during
operation shall be provided with an anti-corrosive heater rated for 240 AC +/-10% supply
with a switch, fuse and a thermostat.
MCC must incorporate all the feeders required for above mention capacity including spare
feeders as mentioned elsewhere in this tender.All the busbars including main busbars must be
designed as per the rating of conserend/associated switchgear.
Main bus bars shall be of high conductivity having uniform current rating throughout the
length. Horizontal and vertical bus bars shall be sized depending upon the max. expected
current and to limit the max. operating temperature at specified design ambient temperature to
85 deg. C for normal operating condition and the 200 deg. C for short circuit condition
considering installation in poorly ventilated area.
Adequately sized (taking current density 1.5 Amp/Sq.mm.) Electrolytic Tinned Copper ( Cu.)
busbars with heat shrintable coloured sleeve running horizontal in a separate enclosure shall be
provided for space heators, control supply and meter requirements. Necessary tee-off
connections shall be used for distributing auxiliary supply to each vertical panel. All busbars
shall be colour coded and designed to withstand specified short circuit current for one
second.Copper used must be electrolytic tinned copper only.
Copper earth bus shall be adequately sized and provided throughout the length of the
switchboard with provision for interconnection to earthing grid. All non-current carrying
metal parts of the mounted equipment shall be earthed. Doors and moveable parts shall
be earthed using flexible copper connections.All feeders must be seperated using metal
partitions
Inside the switchboard, the wiring for power control, protection and instruments circuits shall
be done with PVC insulated copper conductors having 660/1100 V grade insulation. Min.
size of control wire shall be 1.5 mm2 copper for circuits having MCB’S rating of 10 Amps. or
less. For higher MCB’S rating control circuits, min. 2.5 mm2 copper conductor shall be
used.
'Elemex' type terminals shall be acceptable for wires upto 10 mm2 size and for conductors
larger than 10 mm2 bolted type terminal with crimping lugs shall be provided. Each wire
shall be terminated at a separate terminal.
All motor starter shall be D.O.L. type and upto 7.5 H. P. and star-delta type above 7.5 H.P.
unless otherwise specified as per process reequirement. All the cast resin C.T.'s and energey
meter must be of accurcacy class 0.5.
Switches/MCCB shall be load break, heavy duty, air lock type with 2NO + 2NC the operating
handle mounted on the compartment door complete with necessary interlock and defeat
mechanism. All fuses shall be non-deteriorating HRC cartridge pressure filter, link type the
connector shall be air lock type having AC-3 duty rating.
Page 414

Micro processer Based Motor protection relays with RS 485 and having over load, short
circuit, singal phasing, earth fault, Reverse rotation protection shall be used for motor rating
above 7.5 H.P.
.
All Digital indicating instrument shall be moving iron flush mounting type of 96 x 96 mm sq.
pattern. However 72 x 72 mm instruments may be acceptable for out going feeders in the
MCC. All control/selector switches shall be rotary back connected type having a cam
operated contact mechanism with pistol grip handle for circuit breaker control and knob type
handle for other applications. All motor starter feeders shall have stop push buttons and trip
indication lamps. Incomer to MCC shall have a 415 V MCCB / TPN with primary fuse,
secondary MCB alongwith a voltmeter and a selector switch. The incomer to MCC shall
have Digital KWH meter with protection MCB’s etc. to record energy consumed in the plant
including lighting for the plant. A separate Digital KWH meter may be used the lighting
consumption.Accuracy class of Digital KWH meter and CT's must be 1.0.All CTS used in
pannel must be resin cast type.
All metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned degreased and made free from rust. After
application of the primer, the switchboard shall be spray painted with two coats of final
paint colour shade.
Micro processer Based Motor protection relays with over load, short circuit, singal phasing,
earth fault, Reverse rotation protection shall be used with all motor starters above 7.5 HP
motors.
For all the out going feeder from MCC , MCCB shall be used up to current rating 400 A and
current rating equal to or more than 630 A ACB shall be used as a outgoing feeder.
All MCC panel Shall be consist of atleast following Spare feeders :

2 Nos. of 63 A FP MCCB , 2 Nos. 32 A FP MCCB, 04 Nos. 32 A FP MCB , 06 Nos. of 16 A FP
MCB , 10 Nos. of 10 A DP MCB
A centrally located engraved nameplate shall be provi-ded for the switchboard. Each
module shall have engraved nameplate bearing data as per approved drawings. Nameplate
or polyester adhesive stickers shall be provided for each equipment mounted on the
switchboard. One feeder of each rating must be provided in the switchboard as a spare feeder.
The contractor shall have to submit the G.A.Drawing/and/or single line diagram of MCC
showing the feeder arrangements along with the tecnical bid.
SOFT STARTER:
General:
This specification describes the requirements for a solid-state torque controlled starter
(Controller) used to provide linear ramp starting and stopping of three-phase AC induction
motors. The requirement is for a stand-alone unit that negates the need for further equipment in
terms of protection, viewing and controlling.
A. Electrical ratings
a) 200 – 525 +/- 10% 200-690 +5%/- 10% Volts AC mains

Page 415

b) 50-60 Hz +/- 10%
c) 100-240/380-500 +/- 10% Volts control voltage
B. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “starting” modes:
a) Linear Torque control for Start

b) Quadratic Torque control for Start
c) Pump Control
d) Current Limit Start
e) Voltage ramp Start
f) Voltage ramp with current limit Start
g) Full Voltage DOL Start
h) Remote analogue control
i) Soft Start with Selectable Torque Boost
j) Slow Speed time controlled
k) Slow Speed external controlled
l) Dual Ramp Start
m) Bypass control
C. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “stopping” modes:
a) Linear Torque control for Stop

b) Quadratic Torque control for Stop
c) Pump Control
d) Voltage ramp Stop
e) DOL/Coast to stop
f) Remote analogue control Stop
g) Dynamic DC-Brake and Soft brake (reverse brake)
h) Slow Speed time controlled
i) Slow Speed external controlled
j) DC-Brake at slow speed
k) Dual Ramp Stop
l) Accurate positional stop control
m) Bypass control
D. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “Additional” features
a) Jogging forward and reverse

b) 4 parameter sets
c) Analog output
d) Built in Display
E. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “Operation” features
a) Keyboard
b) Remote
F. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “Protection” features:
Page 416

a) Motor Thermal Overload
b) Soft Start thermal overload
c) PTC input
d) Motor Shaft Torque (Max) machine process protection.
e) Motor Shaft Torque (Min) machine process protection.
f) Phase imbalance
g) Phase reversal
h) Over voltage
i) Under voltage
j) Locked Rotor
k) Excessive Starts per hour for application
l) Phase loss input / output
m) Motor output loss
G. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “Viewing” functions:
a) Three Phase Current

b) Three Phase Voltage
c) Current in L1, L2, L3
d) Voltage between L1-L2, L1-L3, L2-L3
e) Shaft Power in kW / HP (selectable)
f) Motor thermal capacity
g) Motor Energy consumption (kWh)
h) Power factor
i) Run time in hours
j) Torque in Lbs./ft or Nm (selectable)
H. The Controller shall provide as standard, the following “Fault Indication” functions:
a) Line failure
n) Phase imbalance
b) Over temperature – motor
c) Over temperature – Soft Starter
d) Shorted Thyristor
e) Open Thyristior
f) Locked Rotor
g) Motor output loss
h) Overload - Shaft Torque
i) Underload – Shaft Torque
j) Phase imbalance
k) Over voltage
l) Under voltage
m) Excessive Starts
n) Phase reversal
o) Event List of 15 latest fault indications/occurrence
CONSTRUCTION:
a) The Controller shall be of modular construction, consisting of a Power Control Board (PCB)
and Power Structure.
Page 417

b) The PCB shall be compatible the full range of power structures.
c) In the sizes from 17-1400 Amps all phases should be controlled during start/stop.
d) The power structure shall consist of six SCR’s mounted on a heatsink for ratings up to and
including 1400 Amps.
e) The Controller shall be DIN Rail mountable up to 250 A.
f) DIN Rail mountable units should be mountable without space at side.
GENEREAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PCC / PMCC / MCC PANEL

1 SCOPE: .
This scope shall cover design, manufacturer, check test and supply, installation testing and
commissioning of Panel Board as described in bills of quantities. All the Panel Boards will be installed
indoor and is connected through the L.T. XLPE cables.
2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AT SMC SITE :
• Ambient Temperature : Max./Min = 50 deg. C./60 deg. C.

• Design temperature : 55 deg. C.
• Relative Humidity : 95% at 35 deg. C.
• Altitude : 20 M above MSL
• Voltage : 415 +/- 10%
• Frequency : 50 Hz +/- 5%
• Neutral : Solidly/ earthed.
• Fault level : As per Design Fault Level, symmetrical at 415 Volt
Solidly earthed.
3 DOCUMENTATION:
3.1 Vendor shall furnish drawings, data and manuals in three sets along with equipment supplied.
• General arrangement drawing indicating accessories and dimensions.
• S.L.D.s, three phase wiring diagram, control wiring
• Foundation plan and loading
• Termination arrangement with dimensions.
3.2 Documents to be submitted after placement of order

• As per 3.1 above for approval prior to manufacturing.
• Schematic and sectional drawing.
• Bill of quantity as well as make of material with Cat. No. for each item for all the panels.
3.3 Final Documents

• Final as built wiring diagram , Bill of material of the Panel (power and control circuit with
ferrule number) in C.D.s & in 3 hard copies
• Instruction and Maintenance Manuals – three copies.
• Test certificates – three Copies
4.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS :
4.1 All the metal clad totally enclosed, rigid floor(MCC), air insulated, cubical type suitable for
operation for three phase/single phase, 415/240 Volt, 50 Hz, Neutral effectively grounded at
Page 418

transformer. The panel shall be IP54 protection class construction. It should be either “Front
operated and maintained” or “Front operated and back maintained”, as per the site conditions.
The painting of all the metal part shall be as per the painting specification as defined in the
datasheet.
4.2 The panel shall be designed to withstand the heaviest condition at site, with maximum ambient
temperature of 50 deg C., 95% Humidity.
STANDARDS AND CODES :

The panels shall comply with the latest edition of relevant Indian Standards and Indian Electricity rules
and Regulations. The following Indian standards shall be complied with :
IS : 4237 Gereral recruitment for switchgear and control gear for voltages not exceeding
1000 V a.c. or 1200 V d.c..
IS : 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductor.
IS : 22353 Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of conductors and apparatus
Terminals.
IS : 13947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IS : 8197 Terminal marking for electrical measuring instrument and theiraccessories.
IS : 2551 Danger Notice plates.
IS : 10228 Code of practice for selection, Installation and maintenance of switchgear and
control gear.
IS : 8623 Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for
voltage upto and including 1000 V A.C. and 1200 V D.C.
IS : 8828 Miniature Circuit Breakers.
IS : 9224 Low Voltage Fuses
IS : 2705 Current Transformers
IS : 3156 Voltage Transformers
IS : 3231 Electrical Relay for protection
IS : 1248 Indicating Insruments
IS : 722 Integrating Insruments
IS : 6875 Control switches and push buttons
IS : 1822 A.C. motor starters of voltage not exceeding 1000 v0lt
Indian Electricity Act and Rules( AS amended up to date ) and approval of FIA of India. The panel also
requires approval of the department at various stage of manufacturering such as design, selection,
construction, testing, shipping etc.
5.0 CONSTRUCTION:
CUBICAL TYPE Panel:
STRUCTURE
The panels shall be of compartmentalized design so that circuit arc/flash products do not create
secondary fault and be fabricated out of high quality CRCA sheet, suitable for indoor installation,
“Front operated and maintained” or “Front operated and rear maintained” as per site requirement,
extensible and floor mounting type.
All CRCA sheet steel used in the construction of panels shall be 14 SWG thick and shall be folded and
Page 419

braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. The internal partition sheets shall be
at least 16 SWG thick. Joint in any kind of sheet steel shall be seam welded, as welding slag grounded
off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.
The panels shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and degree of protection being
not less than IP : 54. Gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall be provided to
render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers shall be fully gasket with foam rubber and /or rubber
strip and shall be lockable. All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and screwed with the frame and
holds with the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screw should be entered into holes, taped into an
adequate thickness of metal or provided with bolts and nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in
the construction of panels.
A base channel of 75 mm * 50 mm * 6mm thick shall be provided at the bottom of the lower most unit
shall be provided.
The main panel shall be preferably arranged in multi-tier formation. The panel shall be of adequate size
based on outgoing feeders required as shown in the drawing. The size of the panel shall be designed in
such a way that the internal space is sufficient for hot air movement and the electrical components does
not attain temperature more than 50 deg. C. Openings shall be provided for natural ventilation, the said
openings shall be screened with fined G.I. weld mesh. All the electrical component shall be rated for 50
deg. C.
Alternatively the panel shall be provided with removable sheet steel plates at bottom to drill holes for
cable/conduit entry at site. The panel shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection, maintenance and
repair. The panel shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without distortion under normal
and under short circuit conditions. They should be suitably braced for short circuit duty.
Push button and provision for remote control start – stop arrangement shall be done for all motor
starters. Control supply of the each individual feeder shall be taken from the Auxiliary contact of the
MCCB, so by switching the MCCB, control supply of the concerned feeder will be controlled. The main
object of doing this is to cut-off Power as well as control supply from the feeder at the time of
Maintenance / Repairing.
All the individual component shall be with operating handle and panel mounted only. Door mounting of
any power component shall not be allowed. Operating handle of switch gear, control unit for panel shall
not be above 1.8 Mtr. From operating platform. If required MS fabricated stand shall be provided to
ease the bottom entry of cable, The stand shall be fabricated from at least ISMB 75 and shall be remain
at the required height from ground which shall not be less than 450mm & 600mm for panel of/below
400Amp. Rating and above 400 Amp. Rating respectively.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE PANEL:
The panel manufacturer must have CPRI approval for manufacturing panel for the successful
bidder. Contactor has to submit the details of Panel Manufacturer before drawing approval.
PAINTING :
The painting shall be seven-tank process with powder coating and as mentioned in the data sheet.
Page 420

CIRCUIT COMPARTMENTS:
Each circuit breaker and switch fuse unit shall be housed in separate components and shall be enclosed
on all sides. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be duly interlocked with the breaker/ switch fuse unit
in “ON” and “OFF” position. Safety interlocks shall be provided for air circuit breaker to prevent the
breaker from being drawn out when the breaker is in “ON” position. The door shall not form an integral
part of draw out position of the circuit breaker. All instruments and indicating lamp shall be mounted on
the compartment door. Sheet steel barrier should be provided between the tiers in the vertical section.
INSTRUMENT COMPARTMENTS:
Separate adequate compartment shall be provided for accommodating various instruments. These
components shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact
with live parts of the circuit breaker/switch fuse unit, bus bar and connections.
BUS BARS:
The bus bar shall be air insulated and made of high quality, high conductivity high strength electrolytic
copper only with heat shrinkable sleeve of high dielectric strength in different color. The bus bar shall
be of 3 phases and neutral system with separate neutral and earth bar. The bus bar and interconnection
between bus bars and various components shall be of electrolytic Copper only. The bus bar shall be of
rectangular cross section design to withstand full load current for phase bus bar and half rated current
for neutral bus bar in MCC panel and shall be extensible on both the sides. The bus bar size shall be as
per current density 1.5 Amp./sq mm.
The bus bar shall have uniform cross section through the length. The bus bar and interconnections shall
be insulated with epoxy coated bus sleeves and supported on bus insulators on SMC/DMC type at
sufficiently close intervals to prevent busbar sag and shall effectively withstand electromagnetic
stresses in the event of short circuit capacity of 50KA RMS symmetrical for 1 second and a peak short
circuit withstand of 105 KA minimum. The bus bar shall be housed in a separate compartment. The bus
bar shall be isolated to avoid any accidental contact. The bus bar shall be arranged such that minimum
clearances between the bus bar are maintained as below.
Between Phases : 25 mm. minimum
Between Phases and neutral : 25 mm.
Between Phases and earth : 25 mm.
Between neutral and earth : 20 mm. minimum
All bus bar connections shall be done by drilling holes in bus bar and connecting by chromium plate or
tinned plated brass bolts and nuts. Additional cross section of bus bar shall be provided in all panels to
cover up the holes drilled in the bus bar. All connections between bus bars and circuit breakers/ switches
and cable terminal shall be through Copper strips of proper size to carry full rated current. This strips
shall be insulated with insulating tapes. Panel to Panel bus bar entry should be effectively sealed by
electrical and thermal insulation barriers so that products of flash over should not travel from one panel
to another panel creating multiple faults.
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION:

Terminal for both incoming and outgoing cable connections shall be suitable for 1100 V grade,
aluminum / copper conductor XLPE insulated and PVC sheathed, armored cable and shall be suitable
for connection of solder less sockets for the suitable size and type of cable Both control and power
wiring shall be brought out in cable alley for ease of external connections, operation and maintenance.
10% or 2 nos. whichever is higher, spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block, so that not
Page 421

more than one outgoing wire is connected per terminal. Suitable barriers of enclosures shall preferably
separate terminal strips for power and control from each other.
Wiring inside the modules for power, control, protections and instruments etc. shall be done with use of
660/1100 V grade FRLS insulated copper conductor wires conforming to IS : 694 and 8130. Power
wiring inside the starter module shall be rated for full current rating of respective contactor, but not less
than 4.0 sq. mm. cross section area. For current transformer circuit 2.5 sq. mm. copper conductor wire
shall be used. Other control wiring shall be done with 1.5 sq. mm. copper conductor wires. Wires for
connections to the door shall be flexible. All conductors shall be crimped with solder less socket at the
end before connections are made to the terminals.
Control power supply to modules through the control transformers only. Control power
wiring shall have control fuses,(HRC fuse type)/2 Amp. MCB for circuit protection.
All indicating lamps shall be protected by HRC fuses. Identification ferrules shall be fitted to all the
wiring termination for ease of identification and to facilitate checking and testing.
Spring type washer shall be used for all copper and aluminium connections.
TERMINALS:
The outgoing terminals and neutral links shall be brought out to a cable alley suitably lockable and
accessible from the panel front. The current transformer for instruments metering shall be mounted on
the disconnecting type terminals blocks. No direct connection for incoming or outgoing cables to
internal components of the distribution board is permitted; only one conductor may be connected in one
terminal.
WIREWAYS
A horizontal/vertical box type PVC channel wire ways shall be provided to take interconnecting control
wiring between different vertical sections.
CABLE COMPARTMENT
Cable compartment of minimum 450 mm size shall be provided in the Panel for easy termination of all
incoming and outgoing cables entering from top or bottom. Adequate supports shall be provided in the
cable compartment to support cables. All outgoing and incoming feeder terminals shall be brought out
to terminal blocks in the cable compartment.
For Instrument control cables a separate marshalling cabinet shall be provided in each panel to
separate the power and instrument cables. All the feedback and command signals to and from
PLC shall be wired in the marshalling cabinet and from there it shall be internally wired to
respective feeder.
EARTHING:
Cu earth bars of suitable size (25x3 for < 500 Amp, 50x6 for >500Amp. Panel) shall be provided in the
panels for the entire length of the panel Provisions for the connection of this earth bar to the main
earthing station/bar. The frame work of the panel as well as each feeder door earthing shall be connected
to this earth bar. The earth continuity conductor of each incoming and outgoing feeder shall be
connected to this earth bar. The armour shall be properly connected with earthing clamp, and the clamp
shall be ultimately bounded with the earth bar. Each door of the panel should be earthed separately by
Flexible link
LABELS :
Engraved metallic labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeders. Single line circuit
Page 422

diagram showing the arrangement of circuit inside the distribution board shall be pasted on inside of the
panel door and covered with transparent laminated plastic sheet.
NAME PLATE :
A metallic name plate with the panel’s designation with the bold letters shall be fixed at top of the
central panel. A separate name plate giving feeder details shall be provided for each feeder module
door. Inside the feeder compartments, the electrical components, equipments, accessories like
switchgear, control gear, lamps, relays, etc. shall suitably be identified by providing stickers.
DANGER NOTICE PLATES:

The metallic danger notice plate shall be affixed in a permanent manner on operating side of the panel
indicating danger notice in both Hindi and English and with a sign of skull and bones.and shall be of ISI
certification mark.
INTERNAL COMPONENTS:
The panel shall be equipped complete with all types of required number of Air Circuit Breakers, switch
fuse units, contactors relays, energy meters, fuses, meters, instruments, indicating lamps, push buttons,
equipment fittings, bus bars, cable boxes, cable glands etc. and all the necessary internal
connections/wiring as required and as indicated elsewhere. All parts of the Panels carrying current
including the components, connections, joints and instruments shall be capable of carrying their
specified rated current continuously, without temperature rise exceeding the acceptable values of the
relevant specifications at the parts of the panels. All units of the same ratings and specifications shall be
fully interchangeable.
6.0 COMPONENTS :
GENERAL:
The type, size and rating of the components shall be as indicated. While selection of the capacity of the
components resulting from the prevailing conditions like ambient temperature shall be allowed for the
thermal and magnetic trip rating shall be compensated for the ambient temperature. The ratings
indicated on the drawing are ratings anticipated at prevailing site conditions.
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR FUSE UNITS:
The fuse switch units shall be 3 pole, double break type heavy duty suitable for load break duty (AC 3),
quick make and break action. Separate neutral link shall be provided in the switch. All switch fuse units
shall be duly interlocked with operating mechanism so as to prevent opening of the door when the
switch is in ON position and also prevent closing of the switch when the door is not properly secured.
All contacts shall be silver plated and all live parts shall be shrouded. The incoming and outgoing
terminals of the switch shall be adequately sized to receive proper of the cables. High rupturing
capacity(HRC) fuse links shall be provided with switch fuse units and shall be in accordance with IS :
9224-1979 and having rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 415 V. When switch is in “OFF”
position the fuse shall be isolated from both the ends. HRC fuse links shall be provided with visible
indicators to show that they have operated. The switch dis-connector fuse unit shall be manufactured in
accordance with IS : 13947.
CONTACTORS:
It shall be suitable to star delta/DOL/soft starter ampere rating or motor ampere rating, Continuous duty,
440 V, 50 Hz with 2 NO+ 2NC or more (if required) auxiliary contacts & necessary safety features.
Wherever contactors are required for capacitors, it shall be Capacitor Duty contactor and accordingly,
rating shall be selected. Exact rating shall be finalized at the time of detailed engineering. All power
Page 423

contactors shall be AC3 Duty only and as per TYPE – 2 Co-ordination as per the switchgear selection
chart.
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY (μP BASED)

Motor protection relays (MPR) shall be provided for all motors rated equal to and more than 7.5 HP as
per the quantity stated at each Starter. MPR shall be micro computer based with RS 485 and of required
range as per motor rating at site, which bidder shall evaluate on his own at site if required before
submitting his bid, with necessary selectable CTs and communication port for communication with
PLC/SCADA, etc. complete in all respects. Necessary connection with communication network
(Provisional) of PLC shall be carried for monitoring the motor status in real time trends and historical
data.
It shall be
• Computerized 3 phase protective Device
• Suitable range as per motor rating
• Selectable Scrolling time
• Settable and accurate Overload and Under current protection with Annotation
• Selectable Under current time
• Current based single phase loss protection with Annunciation and selectable protection
time
• Locked rotor protection with annulations with settable range 4 to 10 times.
• Earth Fault Protection with Annotation
• Settable earth Fault current
• Current Based phase Reversal protection with Annotation
• It shall be complete man-Machine interface with suitable software calibration facilities
and ease of wiring.
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER:

CONSTRUCTION:
The ACB shall have following features.
• Draw out type Mechanical with suitability of various positions (such as “test” and
“maintenance”) and its indicators.
• Safety shutter of Fiber glass/polycarbonate sheet of 2 mm thickness shall be provided.
1. The ACB shall have trip free mechanism which prevents the operating mechanism from
interfering with the tripping or opening action)
2. ACB shall be provided with mechanical anti-pumping feature.
• Door interlock with defeat features to be provided.
• ACB shall be lockable in isolation position.
• Power circuit breakers shall comply with standards IEC 60947-1&2 or standards derived from
the latest amendments.
• The circuit breakers shall have a 55KA breaking capacity or more if not justified by
calculations taking into account their installation location.
x All the vital accessories like Shunt, Motor, and Under Voltage coils shall be accessible from the
front and should not need removing of the breaker from its panel for the replacement.
x There should be a Mechanical Contact wear indicator to assess the life of contacts and which
shall be mounted directly on the moving contacts to indicate the degree of erosion of the
contacts.
Page 424

x “OK” signal (on breaker front panel) interlocking to ensure the breaker shall get closed only
when vital interlocking are checked & found OK.
SPECIFICATION FOR MICROPROCESSOR BASED OVER CURRENT RELEASES FOR

ACB’S:
If anyone phase is loaded to 20% of the rated current of the current transformer installed it should be
sufficient for the release to operated. The release should offer the following minimum protection
functions:
Overload (L):
Thresholds –Current setting - Ir - 40 % to 100 % of In rating, Time delay - 0.5 seconds to 24 seconds @
6 Ir. It should be True RMS Long time Protection
Selective Short circuit (S):

Pick up Settings –4 to 10 times of Ir. ( Min 9 Thresholds) Time delay at
10 Ir. - 50 ms to 500 ms with I2t ON User may facilitated to bypass the
protection if required.
Instantaneous short circuit (I):

It should be from 1.5 times to 12 *In User may facilitate to bypass the protection if required. Accuracy
of Instantaneous tripping ±10 %
Ground Fault (G):

Since earth-fault is not related to rating of the ACB, therefore the Earth fault protection, if specified,
will have adjustable current setting in absolute values and not in terms of percentage of ACB rating. The
adjustable time delay setting for tripping on earth fault shall be within 100 – 400ms. Also there should
be provision to disable the Earth Fault Protection if required.
Neutral Protection:
Neutral Protection shall be provided for 3P as well as 4P ACB in the release. The Neutral protection
shall be dependent on the phase current and typical protection range shall be either 50% or 100%.
Important Parameters
Sr No Parameters ACB
1 Rated Operating Voltage 500V

2 Rated Insulation Voltage 1000V
3 Rated Impulse Withstand voltage 8kV
Rated ultimate short ckt breaking capacity @ 440 V AC
4 55kA
Rated Short time withstand current for 1sec
5 35kA
Rated short circuit making capacity @ 440VAC (Peak
6 Value) Min 120kA
7 Utilization category B
Mechanical Life operations without Maintenance (2
8 12500
operations in one operation cycle considered)
Mechanical Life operations with Maintenance
9 20000
(2 operations in one operation cycle considered)
Page 425

Electrical Life operations @ 440V without maintenance
10 8000
11 Power Loss @rated current for 3/4 pole
Construction
As per Standard practice
Electrical Auxiliaries
All electrical auxiliaries, shall be installable in a compartment which, under normal operating
conditions, shall not contain any conducting parts capable of entering into electrical contact with the
circuit-breaker poles. It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front of the circuit
breaker.
Mechanical indicators
Mechanical indicators on the front panel of the power circuit breakers shall indicate the following status
conditions:
1. "ON" (main contacts Spring charged

closed)
2. "ON" (main contacts Spring discharged
closed)
3. "OFF" (main contacts Spring charged – circuit breaker ready to close
open)
4. "OFF" (main contacts Spring discharged – circuit breaker not ready to
open) close
5. "OFF" (main contacts Spring discharged
open)
MCCB
1. The MCCB shall be microprocessor based having features of indication and protection for
overload, short circuit, earth fault. MCCB should be confirming to IS 13947 or IEC-947.
2. MCCBs shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of auxiliaries such as voltage
releases (shunt and under voltage releases) and indication switches as follows:
- They shall be separated from power circuits,
- All electrical auxiliaries shall be of the snap-in type and fitted with terminal blocks,
3. The addition of a motor mechanism module or a rotary handle, etc., shall not mask or block
device settings
4. For 4P MCCB, the 4th pole should be 100% rated and protected by release.
5. For Themal Magnetic MCCB, adjustable Overload and Adjustable short circuit required.
Important Parameters
Parameters MCCB
1. Rated Operating Voltage 440 VAC
2. Rated Insulation Voltage 690 V
3. Rated Impulse Withstand voltage 8 kV
4. Rated ultimate short ckt breaking capacity @ 415V 35 kA
5. Rated Short time withstand current for 1sec 7 kA
6. Rated Short time withstand current for 3 Seconds -
Page 426

7. Rated short circuit making capacity @ 440V ac 105kA
8. Protection range for over load and short circuit from 40% to 100%
9. Utilization category A
10. Mechanical Life operations w/out Maintenance 8000
11. Mechanical Life operations with Maintenance 20000
12. Electrical Life operations @ 415VAC without
maintenance 6000
13. Number of poles. (Fully rated fourth pole in 4P MCCB.) 3 or 4 as
applicable.
The MCCB shall be with protections and having suitable setting range with 2NO+2NC auxiliary
contacts.
DIGITAL ENERGY METER

A separate/external energy meter having class: 1 accuracy local display. It must have RS485 modbus
port to enable transmission of minimum following data.
• Current in all phase
• Phase as well as line Voltage
• KW, KVA, KVAR
• Harmonic distortion
• Power Factor
• Frequency It should be installed in the LT Panel’s cubical in such a way that all the settings can
be done without opening of cubical door.
VAF (Voltmeter &, ammeter& Frequency) Meter

They shall be digital flush mounting type. The 3 line LED display VAF meter with auto scrolling
parameter. The meter shall be square in the shape of 96 * 96 mm and suitably ranged.
KWH METER:
KWH meter shall be of suitably ranged, flush mounting, 440 volts 50 c/s, 3 phase 4 cycle, unbalanced
load type with metering class and with suitable CTs.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER:
Where ammeter/KWH meter are called for, cast resin type class 1 and 10VA burden C.T.s shall be
provided for current/energy measurement. Current transformer shall be in accordance with IS:
2705-1992 as amended up to date.
PUSH BUTTONS:
The push button unit shall be comprised of the contact element, a fixing holder and a push button
actuator. The push button shall be momentary contact type. The contacts shall be of silver alloy and
rated at 10 amp. continuous current rating. The actuator shall of standard type and colour as per its usage
for ON, OFF and TRIP.
INDICATOR LAMPS :
Indicator assembly shall be screw type with built in resistor having non fading color lens. LED type
lamps are required with standard color practices. Indication lamp shall be LED type panel mounted, low
power consumption, Min.100000 hrs. of Life, O/L and S/C protected with its holders etc. Suitable for
specified voltage shall be used.
Page 427

SOFT STARTER:
Details are given separately.

CAPACITORS
Applicable Standard IS 13585 (Part- 1), IS 2834

415/440 Volt for LT & HT power connection
Voltage
respectively
Phase/connection 3/Delta
Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5 %
Duty Heavy Duty, Indoor suitable for panel mounting
Ambient Temperature 50 C
Type of cooling Natural
High purity, 6 Micron plain Aluminum foil plus 2 layer
Dielectric use
of P.P (APP) film.
Sealing Hermetic or Specify, if any other type
Insulation Class 3 KV
Peak Inrush current Upto 350x Rated current
Over current Upto 2 x Rated current
Switching Operations per
20000
year
Degree of Protection IP 20
Permissible Losses Preferably Less then 1.5 W/KVAR
Discharge Device Resistor must be included
Capacitor banks shall comprise of identical delta connected three phase units with suitably rated
discharge resistors. They shall be designed to withstand the Electro dynamic and thermal stresses
caused by transient over current during switching.
Capacitor Bank shall be provided with a bus bar chamber.
Besides having above mentioned technical & general specifications, capacitors offered must have
following features:
High Inrush Current withstand Capability
High Over current handling Capacity
High Over voltage withstand Capacity
Internal fuse protection
Eco-friendly Design
Rust & Shock proof
Best suited for indoor applications
Test certificates of manufacturer must be supplied with at the time of delivery of capacitors.
7.0 SHOP DRAWINGS :

Page 428

Prior to fabrication of the panels the supplier / contactor shall submit for consultant’s approval the
shop/vendor drawing consisting of G.A. drawing, sectional elevation, single line diagram, bill of
material etc. and if design calculation indicating type, size, short circuit rating of the electrical
components used, bus bar size, internal wiring size, panels dimensions, colour, mounting details etc. in
6 sets. The contractor shall also submit manufacturer’s catalogues of the electrical components installed
in the panels along with the drawing.
8.0 INSPECTION :
At all reasonable times during production and prior to transport of the panels to site, the
supplier/contractor shall arrange and provide all the facilities at their plant for inspection and routine
test.
9.0 TEST CERTIFICATES:
Testing of panels shall be carried out at factory and at site as specified in Indian Standards in the
presence of engineer incharge /consultant. The test result shall be recorded on a prescribed form. The
test certificate for the test carried out at factory and at site shall be submitted in duplicate.
8.2 Local Push Button Station :
Each motor shall be provided with a pedestial mounted control station in the field near the motor. The
local control station shall have die-cast. Aluminium enclosure of IP-55 protection. The control
station shall include START/STOP push buttons cable gland, etc. Stop push button shall have stay put
features. All push buttons shall be shrouded type rear connected with 2 NO + 2 NC momentary contact
and shall be complete with necessary inscription plates. Outdoor control stations shall have
necessary canopies. Local push button station shall include start/stop push button and glands only.
Ammeter is not required in local push button station but the same shall be provided with
remote/local selector switch in control room. Provision of Ammeter should be made in MCC.
Motor Canopy :
Motor canopies for various size and type of motors for all outdoor motors with necessary
thickness for entire STP shall be provided in FRP. Motor covers (canopies) shall be in one
piece molded from polyester resin + Glass fiber, having good mechanical properties. It shall
have excellent resistance to corrosive atmospheres & aggressive chemicals. The covers shall be
provided with louvers & have enough space on all sides for air circulation. Necessary hardware
etc. required for fixing shall be supplied by the tenderer. The tenderer will have to get prior
approval from Engineer-in-charge prior to supply.
FRP INSULATING MATTING :
For 440 volts grade: 80 Mtr.

For 11000/22000 volts grade: 15 Mtr.
Supplying, erection, testing and commissioning of above mentioned volt grade 1 mtr. width
FRP sheet with I.S.I. mark shall be provided for different Panels of approved make. (Make:
Sintex)
Page 429

Power and Control Cables :
Scope :
This specification covers requirements of XLPE / PVC insula-ted 1.1 KV grade power grade,
and control cables.
Codes and Standards :

The design manufacture and performance of cable shall comply with all currently applicable
statutory regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed.
The equipment shall conform to the latest applicable Indian standards.

(a) IS - 1554 (All parts) : PVC insulated electric cable (Heavy duty)
(b) IS - 694 : PVC insulated electric cable (Light duty)
(c) IS - 3961 : Recommended current rat-ing for cables.
(d) IS - 7098 (Part II) : XLPE cables.
Design Requirements of Cables :

Cables shall be capable of satisfactory performance when laid on trays, in trenches,
conduits, ducts and when directly burried in the ground.
Cables shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under power supply system voltage
variation of +10%, a frequency variation of +5% and a combined voltage and
frequency variation of +/-15%.
Cables shall normally be laid under the following conditions :
(i) In air Ambient temperature of 50 deg.C
(ii) In ground Ground temperature of 40 deg.C
(iii) Depth of laying 900 mm (Approx.) in ground
(iv) Thermal resis- 120 dec. C cm/watt tivity
(v) Conduits Space factor of not more than 60%
(vi) In trays Single layer, touching each other.
Cables for control circuit shall incorporate stranded copper conductors with a minimum size
of 1.5 sq.mm.
Cable shall be supplied in non-returnable drums made of seasoned wood
For control cables having more than 5 Cores, the method of indentification of cores shall be
in numericals (1, 2, 3 etc.)
The contrtactor shall furnish technical data of each type and size of the cable giving the
currnet rating, derating factor, bending radius etc.
Tests :
(i) All routine tests shall be conducted.
(ii) Acceptance tests shall be conducted.
(iii) Test reports shall be furnished.
L.T. CABLE SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A Termination
Page 430

Provide brass or copper indent type connectors or cable lugs
crimping/solder type at both ends of the cable. Aluminium or
ferrous metal connectors are prohibited. Dowell's make conductivity grease to be used
while using crimping type cable lugs/sockets. All motors shall be connected using copper or
brass ring-torwue terminals, brass bolts and nuts. The cable lugs, connectors shall fit the
conductor to which it shall be connected. The compression tool shall be equipped with
attachment, which shall assure proper crimping pressure on the connectors.
Connections shall be made tight and insulated with PVC electrical tape of colour as per I.S.
Termination of cables shall be done by using kits as recommended by

the Engineer in Charge taking due care as specified by the manufacturer.
Provide a double compression type cable glands at each end of the cable. Glands should be
of nickel-plated brass, with PVC shrouds over it. Before applying a PVC shroud, all bare
metal shall be wrapped with pressure-sensitive adhesive PVC tape.
Double compression HW type nickel plated brass cable glands with PVC shroud over it shall
be used for termination of cable at flame proof junction boxes or flameproof P.B. Station
instead of single compression type cable gland.
B Saddles and Clips
Saddles and clips shall be PVC covered or of G.I. Fixing screws shall be round head
brass. Where screws are used nuts shall be of brass, square pressed type.
C. Jointing Sleeves
Jointing sleeves shall be of brass with standard terminations. Solder

type cable connectors/cable sleeves shall be used to joint the cable/conductors. The
solder used shall comply with B.S. 219 type M.
Non corrosive flux only shall be used.
D. Joints in Cables
Joints in cables shall be kept to a minimum and conductors shall be joined using
solder ferrules or siemens make jointing compound. Joints shall be enclosed within
standard adaptable boxes. Siemens make Tropolin type or equivalent
shall be used. For preference, straight through joints shall be enclosed within brass
jointing sleeves where joints are enclosed in other than brass
sleeves and are buried in the ground, bitumen base filling compound,
complying with B.S. 1858, Class II shall be used to completely fill and seal the joint
box after the cover is secured. Where joints are enclosed in brass sleeves and are
burries in the ground, the ends of the sleeves shall be plugged with
plastic filling compound before the glands are screwed into the sleeve.
Joining of 650 Volt cables shall be done by using recommended make cable jointing kits
Page 431

taking due care as specified by the manufacturers.
G.I.PIPES:
The G.I. pipe shall be of class `B' and size of the pipe having length not less than 3 meter.
R.C.C. Pipes:
Supplying and laying of R.C.C. NP3 Class pipe for road crossing and anywhere else as
required at site and directed by Engineer-in-charge. The size of pipes shall be selected as per
directed by Engineer-in-charge.
M.S. FABRICATION WORKS WITH GALVANIZING COATING :
Providing, fabricating and fixing in position works such as ladders, making suitable cable
trays as directed by Engineer-in- charge, screens, etc. as directed by Engineer-in-charge. The
detailed drawing or sketch shall be given by the department as and when required depending on
the site condition. The final drawing as per fabrication done will be supplied by the contractor.
The fabrication shall have to be done using various M.S. steel sections like round, square, flats,
angles, channels or M.S. joists as per site requirement. The complete fabricated structure shall
be scraped, cleaned and galvanizing coating.This item also includes breaking of R.C.C. slab,
beam etc. as per site requirement and make it finish. Sand, cement etc. will be supplied by the
tenderer for the same work.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
Each lot shall incorporate following.
Twelve fire extinguishers shall be supplied, each fire extinguisher shall be of the light alloy
CO2 type (for dealing with electric fires) of not less than 4.6 Kg. capacity, fitted with
squeeze grip, valve, swivel horn. Extinguishers shall have an effective jet strength of at least
2 m, be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures of C and subject to test pressure of
not less than 87 kgs/cm2 and complete with wall mounting bracket.
Six sets comprising of four numbers of fire extinguishing sand filled, red coloured M.S.
buckets with suitable fabricated stand shall be supplied and placed as directed by the Engineer.
The fire extinguishers shall be supplied at time of commissioning the plant.
They shall be fixed in position designated by the Engineer together with a board giving
operating instructions.
All operating instructions shall be of large characters in English and Gujarati Language.
04 sets of first aid kit as per factory act shall be provided.
APFC panel should comprise with following specifications.

(A) APFC Relay :-
Page 432

The automatic power factor controller should be atleast 12 step microprocessor base and having
following features
x Automatic step section depending upon the system power factor and targeted Power Factor.
Relay should sense the capacity of each bank automatically and accordingly only required nos.
of capacitor should be switched on in any case.
x This controller should take phase sensing current and voltage from both incoming of LT panel.
Required Epoxy cast resin C.T.’s for Sensing both L.T. incomer should be supplied by the
contractor. Summation C.T. (if required) should be supplied by the contractor. All necessary
arrangement required for sensing the NO LOAD current of transformer with amplifying circuit.
This APFC panel should operate and maintain the P.F. for load conditions as well as NO LOAD
condition of Transformer.
x Automatic selection of C/K ratio (min. capacitor step size/C.T. ratio)
x Indication of real time P.F. with lagging or leading
x Prevent leading P.F. during low load condition
x Audio (Hooter) and Visual alarm with reset Push button for low P.F. below targeted.
x The APFC relay should have RS-485 communication port to communicate PLC/SCADA
The 12 step P.F. controller should operate capacitor in required step depending upon system power
factor. The capacitor must be disconnected in the event of power supply failure and should be protected
against high in rush current, when power supply restored or at the time of automatic and time delayed
switching of capacitor.
The details of all INCOMERS shall be ACB of atleast 1.6 times to the total capacitor current
AND OUTGOING FEEDERS shall have Contactor with inductor coil to prevent inrush current
of capacitor. Timer for time delay shall be provided in manual mode for each individual feeder.
Required control wiring should be taken from control bus bar. Each control circuit should be
protected by appropriate capacity of MCB. And all the outgoings shall be protected by thermal
MCCBs. Capacitor specification as mention as elsewhere.
Specifications for Medium Voltage Motors :
All medium voltage induction motors shall meet the requirements of enclosed and following
specific requirements in addition to requirements as per latest edition of IS:325
Motors shall be squirrel cage type in standard frame sizes rated for continuous duty and
designed for direct-on-line/star delta starting across full line voltage. Motor's shall be
capable of withstanding occasional bus transfer/reacceleration at a voltage not exceeding
150% of the rated voltage. All motors shall be suitable for starting under specified load
conditions with 75% of the rated voltage at the terminals. Moters rated 30 KW and above
shall be would using dual coated wire with high temprature index as per I.S. 4800 Part-13
and applying Dr.Beck's Epoxy Gelcoat on overhung portion of the winding.
Motors shall be designed to allow three consecutive starts from cold condition, two
consecutive starts from hot condition and four uniformly distributed starts in one hour.
Minimum locked rotor thermal withstand time at rated voltage shall be 10 seconds under
cold conditions and 8 seconds under hot conditions. Motor starting time shall be less
than its hot thermal withstand time.
Page 433

Starting current shall generally be limited to six times the rated current for all motors.
Starting torque, minimum torque and pull out torque shall be compatible with the speed
torque curve of the driven equipment with due regard to pulsating loads with minimum
acceptable values as 110%, 90% and 175% respectively of the rated torque. For heavy
duty motors, high starting torque (min 150%) motors shall be provided with starting time
preferably less than ten seconds.
Motors shall be provided with class "F" only insulation and the permissible temperature rise
above the specified ambient temperature shall be limited to the values applicable for class
"B" insulation. The windings shall be tropicalized and adequately braced. The ends of
the windings shall be brought out in a terminal box with six terminals with suitable links to
connect them in Delta.
The terminal box shall be capable of withstanding the full internal shortcircuit conditions
with the specified system fault level. The fault duration shall be taken as 0.25 secs. for
motors rated 55 KW and above. For motors rated below 55 KW, the fault energy to be
considered shall depend upon the back up fuse rating. The terminal box shall be located on the
right hand side viewed from the driving (coupling) end. It shall be rotatable in steps of 90 deg.
to allow cable entry from any direction. The terminal box shall be of sturdy construction and
large enough to facilitate easy connection of cables. Following sizes of aluminium
conductor, PVC insulated armoured cables shall be applicabloe for design of terminal box
and related accessories.
The power cable shall be 3 core armoured cables for motors. Each motor shall have two
seperate earthings.
Motor rating Size of Size of Earth No. and size of

Conductors conductors (if entry
(mm2) used) (mm2) ET-IS:1653
3.7 KW 4 4 19 MM
5.5 KW 6 6 25.4 MM
7.5 KW -11 KW 10 10 25.4 MM
15 KW 16 16 31.8 MM
18.5 KW 25 16 31.8 MM
22 KW 35 25 31.8 MM
30 KW 50 25 38 MM
37 KW 70 35 38 MM
* WHERE APPLICABLE AS PER DATA SHEET)
Motors shall be suitable for either direction of rotation. Bearing shall be chosen to
provide a minimum operating life of 40,000 hours and shall preferably be capable of grease
injection from outside without removal of covers with motors in running condition.
Prelubricated bearings wherever used must provide 4 to 5 years of trouble-free service
without any replacement or re-lubrication. Motors vibrations shall be within the limits of
IS:4729 unless otherwise required for the driven equipment.
Page 434

Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type minimum degree of protection for
rotor enclosure, terminal box and bearing housing shall IP-55 as per IS : 4691. Vertical
motors shall be provided with fully covering plain canopies. In addition to the two earth
terminals on the motor body, an earth terminal shall be provided inside the terminal box.
All motors rated above 30 KW shall be provided with 220V +/-10% anti-condensation
heater. These heaters leads shall conform to the provisions of applicable standards for
motors installed in hazardous areas. The heater shall be brought out to a separate terminal
box in IP-55 enclosure suitable for two core 4 sq.mm. aluminiumconductor armoured cable.
Generally 1000 RPM and highly effiecency motors shall be preferred. The min. value for
product of efficiency and power factor shall be as per IS:8789. For ratings not covered
in IS:8789, product of efficiency and power factor shall be as agreed between the owner and
vendor.
Internal and external parts of the casing and all metal parts likely to come in contact with the
surrounding air shall be protected with anti-acid paid. All external surface shall be given a
coat of epoxy based paint.
Specification for Lighting Fixtures and Accessories :
Scope :
The specification covers the requirements of lighting fixtures for LED lamp and associated
accessories. Equipmpent shall include lighting distribution boards, lighting fixtures, poles,
switches, receptacles, conduits wires and miscellaneous hardware necessary for complete
lighting work.
Code and Standards :
The design,manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply with all currently
applicable statutory regulations and safety codes in the location where these fittings will be
installed.
The fittings shall conform to the latest applicable Indian Standards, British
Standards or IEC Standards, some of which are listed below :
IS : 1913 General and safety requirements for electric lighting fittings.

IS : 1777 Industrial lighting fittings,with metal reflectors.
IS : 4012 Dust proof electric lighting fittings.
IS : 3528 Water proof electric lighting fittings.
IS : 2149 Luminaries for street lighting.
IS : 1947 Specification for flood light.
IS : 5077 Specification for decorative lighting out-fits.
IS : 1534 Ballasts for use in fluorescent lighting (Part I) fixtures.
IS : 1569 Capacitors for use in fluorescent lighting fixtures.
Page 435

IS : 1950 Vitreous enamel reflectors for discharge lamps.
IS : 1391 Air-conditioners.
IS : 10332 Specification for luminaries
IEC 62384 DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules performance
requirements
IEC/ PAS 62612 Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting services- Performance
requirements
IEC 61347-2-13 Lamp controlgear: particular requirements for DC or AC supplied
electronic control gear for LED modules.
IEC 61000-3-2 Electro Magnetic compatibility (EMC)- Limits for Harmonic
current emission -– (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase.
IEC 60598-1 Luminaries - General requirement and tests
Lighting Fixtures : The fixtures shall be suitable for operation on a nominal supply of
220volts, single phase, 50 Hz +/- 5% a-c with a voltage variation of +/-10% (i.e.228 V to 252
V).
All fixtures shall be designed for continuous operation under atmospheric conditions
specified without reduction in lamp life or deterioration of materials and internal writing.
Ballast : Lighting fixture ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance
with the relevant standards and shall function satisfactorily undersite conditions specified.
The ballasts shall have a long service life and low power loss.
Ballasts shall be mounted using self-locking anti-vibration fixings and shall be easy to
remove without removing the fittings.
The ballasts shall be of the inductive and heavy duty type, filled with polyster or equivalent.
They shall be free from hum and protected from the atmosphere. Ballasts which produce a
humming sound shall be replaced free of cost by the supplier.
For multi lamp fittings, a separate choke shall be provided for each lamp.
Starters : Lighting fixture starters shall be of the safety type (i.e. if the lamps fail to ignite at
the first start, no further starting must be possible without attending to the tube light). Starters
shall have bimetal electrode and high mechanical strength. Starters shall be replaceable
without disturbing the reflextor or lamp and without the use of any tool.
Lighting fixture capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected
across the supply of individual lamp circuits.
Each capacitor shall be suitable for operation at 220 volts + 10 % single phase 50 Hz + 5 %
Page 436

with a suitable value of capacitance so as to correct the power factor of its corresponding
lamp circuit to the extent of 0.98 lag. The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed preferably in
a metal container to prevent seepage of impregnating materials and ingress of moisture.
Reflectors : Lighting fixture reflectors shall generally be manufactured from sheet steel or
aluminium of not less than 20 SWG. They shall be readily removable from the housing
forcleaning and maintenance without disturbing the lamps and without the use of tools. They
shall be securely mounted to the housing by means of positive fastening devices of a captive
type.
General :
(i) Each fixture shall be complete with a four way terminal block for the connection and
looping of incoming and outgoing supply cables. Each terminal shall be able to accept
two 6 mm2 solid aluminium conductors.
(ii) Each lighting fixture shall be provided with a grounding terminal suitable
forconnecting 2.5 mm2 stranded tinned copper grounding conductor.
(iii) All metal or metal enclosed parts of the housing shall be so bended and connected to
the ground terminal so as to ensure satisfactory grounding continuity throughout the
fixture.
(iv) On completion of manufacture, all surfaces of the fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned
and degreased. The fixtures shall be free from scale, rust, sharp edges and burrs.
v) The enamel finish shall have a minimum thickness of 2 Mils foroutside surfaces and 1.5
Mils for inside surfaces. The finish shall be non-porous and free from blemishes,
blisters and fading.
(vi) All light reflecting surfaces shall have optimum light reflecting co-efficent such as to
ensure the overall light output as specified.
(vii) All reflectors and louvers shall be furnished to the same stranded as the fixturehousing.
Tests :
The following routine tests shall be conducted as per the relevant Indian Standards.
(a) Each fixture shall be tested at 1500 volts r.m.s. 50 Hz for one minute and no flash over
or break down shall occur between current carrying parts and ground.
(b) Insulation resistance of each fixture shall be tested at 500 V d-c and the insulation
resistance so measured shall not be less than 2 megohms between all current carrying
parts and ground.
Page 437

(c) Each fixture complete with its proper lamp/lamps shall be shown to operate
satisfactorily at its normal voltage and frequency.
(d) Each fixture shall be examined visually to ensure that it is complete in all respects and
satisfactorily finished.
(e) Type and routine test certificates shall be submitted for tests conducted as per relevant
IS/BS for the fixture and accessories.
Drawings and Data : As part of the proposal, the Bidder shall furnish relevant descriptive and
illustrative literature on lighting fixtures and accessories and following drawings/data for the
respective lighting fixtures :
(i) Dimensional drawings

(ii) Mounting details cable entry facility and weights
(iii) Light distribution diagrams (zonal & isekandera)
(iv) Light absorption and utilisation factors
(v) Lamp output v/s. temp, curves.
Lighting Fixtures and Layout :
General Specification for LED Inddor Lightning :
LED indoor fittings with LEDs of wattage 0.2 Watt to 0.5 Watt assembled on ingle MCPCB,
with housing used as a heat sink shall be made of thick sheet Steel conforming to IS: 13/CRCA
polyester powder coated and high U.V. & corrosion resistance with diffuser and/or
Polycarbonate optics with company mark/name 120 to 300 V,Power Factor more than 0.9,
THD < 10 %, CCT 4000 K to 6500K, Uniformity ratio >0.7, Luminaire efficiency> 85
lumens/watt , LED driver efficiency > 85 % CREE / OSRAM / PHILIPS Lumileds / NICHIA /
SEOUL/Bridgelux(U.S.A.) make LED used for luminaire. (Each fitting required LM-80
Certificates)
General Specification for LED Outdoor Lightning :
LED indoor fittings with LEDs of wattage 0.2 Watt to 0.5 Watt assembled on ingle MCPCB,
with housing used as a heat sink shall be made of thick sheet Steel conforming to IS: 13/CRCA
polyester powder coated and high U.V. & corrosion resistance with diffuser and/or
Polycarbonate optics with company mark/name 120 to 300 V,Power Factor more than 0.9,
THD < 10 %, CCT 4000 K to 6500K, Uniformity ratio >0.7, Luminaire efficiency> 85
lumens/watt , LED driver efficiency > 85 % CREE / OSRAM / PHILIPS Lumileds / NICHIA /
SEOUL/Bridgelux(U.S.A.) make LED used for luminaire. (Each fitting required LM-80
Certificates)
It shall be the responsibility of the tenderer to workout a detailed layout for the lighting fixtures
offered by him, in order to provide the specified levels of illumination. The tenderer shall be
responsible for measuring the levels of illumination after installation and establish compliance
with the specification. The number and types of fixtures offered by him shall be indicated in
Page 438

his tender. The final layout of the lighting fixtures shall be furnished for the approval before
commencement of installation.
As per Ste requirement 1 x 22 watts LED tube light fixtures (indoor type with reflactor)
complete in all respect will be required to be provided for lighting of Existing 66 MLD STP,
New 101 MLD STP, Dinsoli SPS and 40 MLD TTP. Detailed layout shall be finalised at the
time of detailed Engineering.
As per Site Requirement 1 x 45 Watts LED Street light fixtures (outdoor type Street Light
Fixture) complete in all respects will be required to be provided for lighting of Existing 66
MLD STP, New 101 MLD STP, Dinsoli SPS and 40 MLD TTP. Detailed layout shall be
finalised at the time of detailed Engineering.
As per Site requirement 1 x 120 Watts LED Flood light fixtures (outdoor type) complete in all
respects will be required to be provided for lighting of Existing 66 MLD STP, New 101 MLD
STP, Dinsoli SPS and 40 MLD TTP. Detailed layout shall be finalised at the time of detailed
Engineering.
As per requirement Ceiling Fan comp. in all respects will be required to be provided lighting.
Detailed layout shall be finalised at the time of detailed Engineering.
The layout/detailed drawing for the complete plant lighting (inside and outside) must be
prepared and got approved from the Surat Mahangar Seva Sadan.
Lighting fixtures for the pump-bay shall be industrial type LED complete with reflector. Street
lighting shall be carried out with pole mounted sodium vapour lamp fixtures.All other indoor
areas shall be illuminated using flourescent tube fixtures of the industrial / decorative type,
complete with reflectors.
All the luminaries inside the bio gas power plant Building shall be flame proof type only.
All lighting fixtures shall be supplied complete with lamps and all necessary accessories for
their satisfactory operation.
All lighting fixtures Outdoor type as well as indoor type shall be as per approved vendor list
and LED type only.
Lighting fixtures shall be any of the following makes such as Phillips, Crompton, GEC make
and equipped with all components required for their satisfactory performance. All lighting
fixtures shall be complete with necessary mounting accessories.
Receptable units - Lighting Systems : Decorative and industrial type receptacle units of
approved make of 5A, and 15A rating with switches confirming to IS : 3854 and sockets
Page 439

confirming to IS : 1293 shall be supplied and installed. Minimum 10 nos. of each rating shall
be provided.
Plant Wiring: All plant wiring shall be carried out using casing capping made from exclusivaly
entrusion process using special compounded PVC resin having flat surface of casing with
curved arrangement to grip the caping for fitting and holding. Casing can be scresed on
surface by screw easily. No screw will be visible from outside. The wiring shall be done using
copper conductor PVC wire confirming to IS-1554 with concealed plate type switches and
switch boards (Make-M.K./C.P.L./Ellora). The copper conductor PVC insulated earth wire
shall run through-out for light and power points.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to work out a detailed layout for the complete
plant in order to provide the levels of illumination as indicated in the relevant standards.
Emergency Lighting: Emergency Lighting shall be designed such that at all junctions, exit
passages & strategic locations, Lux level shall be maintained above 10 Lux. Emergency light
fitting shall be 240 V self contained 10 W LED type with built in Ni-Cd battery having
charging facility and six hours back-up time.
Lighting cable from Main lighting DB (MLDB) to Lighting panels shall be Al / CU conductor,
XLPE insulated, 1.1KV grade, laid in cable trays otherwise cleated along the wall/ column/
beam.
The provision made under quality control act/order shall be followed.
Each fitting shall be controlled indvidually.
Critical Lighting shall be designed such that at all junctions, exit passages & strategic locations
the Lux level shall be maintained above 10 Lux. Installite fixtures with built in battery backup
shall be Considered.
Specific Requirements :
(i) Illumination Levels :
The illumination levels to be considered for the design of lighting system for various areas shall
be as following. These are the illumination levels achieved at Work plane.
Area Illumination Level (Lux) - Average values
Office rooms 300 Lux

Switchgear rooms 250 Lux
Control rooms 300 Lux
Page 440

Chemical and general stores 150 Lux
Chemical plant room 200 Lux
All other indoor areas 150 Lux
Outdoor platforms and walk ways 50 Lux
Outdoor plant areas 20 Lux
Transformer Area
- General 10 Lux
- On Equipment 30 Lux
Roads 20 Lux
Large tank & reservoir 15 Lux
Process Area 100 Lux
Technical Specification For Energy Efficient Led Based Luminaire: -
This specification is for technical and general requirements design, development,

manufacturing, testing and supply of energy efficient LED luminaire complete with all
accessories, LED lamps with suitable current control driver circuit and required optics
including mounting arrangement for streetlight going to use at the site.
CODES & STANDARDS: -
x IEC 60529 Classification of degree of protections provided by enclosures (IP Codes)

x EN 55015, CISPR15 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance
characteristic of electrical lighting and similar equipment.
x IEC 62031 LED modules for general lighting-Safety requirements
x IEC 61547-EMC Immunity requirement
x IEC 60598-2-1 Fixed general purpose luminaries
x IEC 60598-1 Luminaries - General requirement and tests
x IEC 61000-3-2 Electro Magnetic compatibility (EMC)- Limits for Harmonic current
emission -– (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase.
x IEC 60068-2-38 Environmental Testing: Test Z- AD: composite temperature/ humidity
cyclic test
x IEC 61347-2-13 Lamp controlgear: particular requirements for DC or AC supplied
electronic control gear for LED modules.
x IS 10322 Specification for the luminaries
x IS 4905 Method for random sampling
x LM 79 LED luminaire photometry measurement.
Page 441

x LM 80 Lumen Maintenance
x IEC 62384 DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules performance
requirements
x IEC/ PAS 62612 Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting services- Performance
requirements
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: -
The LED streetlight is to be used at the in city of Surat. It is located in Southern part of Gujarat.
The equipment shall be designed to work in such environmental conditions:
(xi) Maximum ambient air temperature: 50° C
(xii) Minimum ambient air temperature: 5° C
(xiii) Max. Relative humidity: 90%
(xiv) Average Rainfall: 55 inches
(xv) Atmosphere: Dusty and Heavy chemical smoke at times in certain areas.
(xvi) Coastal area: The equipment shall be designed to work in coastal area in humid,
salt laden and corrosive atmosphere.
LUMINAIRE SELECTION CRITERIA: -
ILLUMINATION LEVEL:
The detailed calculation with uniform distribution including the lux distribution curve/ graph/
spatial distribution shall be submitted in support of the dimensions selected and variation
thereof. The luminaries shall be so designed that the illumination level shall be evenly
distributed and shall be free from glare.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
General:
a) Luminaries shall be made of die cast aluminium/ extruded Aluminium body with
powder coated finish having safety.
b) Heat sink used should be aluminium extrusion having high conductivity. Heat sink
should be integrated within luminaries and efforts shall be made to keep the overall
outer dimensions optimum such that it permits sufficient heat dissipation through the
body itself so as to prevent abnormal temperature inside the luminaries and
consequential damage to cover, gasket material, LEDs, lenses and drivers.
c) LED must be mounted on Metal core PCB with suitable large area surface by means of
fins to dissipate the conduct heat. The fins must be exposed to ambient flowing air.
d) All luminaries shall be provided with toughened glass of min. 0.8 mm thickness of
sufficient strength. UV stabilised Poly carbonate material is also acceptable. High
efficiency prismatic diffuser/Lens under the LED chamber to protect the LED and
luminaries shall be provided.
Page 442

e) The minimum IK protection of optic cover shall be IK 05. The test material certificate
shall be provided.
f) Suitable number of LED lamps shall be used in the luminaries. The manufacturer shall
submit the proof of procurement of LEDs from OEMs at the time of testing.
g) Suitable reflector/ lenses may also be provided to increase the illumination uniformity
and distribution.
h) The electrical component of the LED and LED driver must be suitably enclosed in
hermetically sealed unit.
i) The connecting wires used inside the luminaries, shall be low smoke halogen free, fire
retardant e-beam cable and fuse protection shall be provided in input side.
j) Design of the thermal management shall be done in such a way that it shall not affect
the properties of the diffuser.
k) The equipment should be compliant to IEC 60598-1, IEC 62031 and IEC/PAS 62612
depending on the type of luminary.
l) The LED Module(s), Driver gear, etc. shall be designed in such a way so that
temperature of heat sink shall not exceed 70° C.
m) All the material used in the luminaries shall be halogen free and fire retardant
confirming to standard.
n) The infrastructure for Quality Assurance facilities to verify/ test/ prove above
specifications must be available at the manufacturing facility. The compliance shall be
indicated clearly in the tender itself.
o) All fasteners must be of stainless steel.
p) All glands inside/ outside luminaries must be metallic
q) Heat sink must be thermally connected to MCPCB/ LED light source.
High power and high lumen efficient LEDs suitable for following features shall be used:
aa) The working life of the lamp at junction temperature of 85° C (max) at operating
current shall be more than 50,000 working hours of accumulative operation and shall be
suitable for continuous operation of 24 hours per day. These features shall be supported
with datasheet.
bb) Adequate heat sink with proper thermal management shall be provided.
cc) Lumen maintenance report as per LM 80 guidelines shall be produced for the power
LEDs used.
dd) Thermal management shall be in such a way that LED soldering point temperature shall
not go beyond 75° C.
ee) The LED luminaries shall be free of glare.
Page 443

LED DRIVER specification used for streetlight:
a) Current waveform should meet relevant nation and international standard.

b) LED Driver shall withstand, withstand voltage up to level mentioned elsewhere in
tender and restore once normal working when normal voltage is applied.
c) The life of the driver should more than 25000 Hrs.

d) Maximum Temperature rise <= 30º C @ 45º C Tamb. With safety margin of 10º C.
e) The control gear should be compliant to IEC 61347-2-13, IEC 62031 and IEC 62384 as
per the requirements.
f) The driver of the luminaries should have Short Circuit, Over Voltage, over current,
over temperature, Under Voltage, String Open protections.
The electronic components used shall be as follows:-
a) The protective cum adhesive coating used on PCBs should be cleared and transparent
and should not affect colour code of electronic components or the product code of the
company.
b) The construction of PCBs and the assembly for components for PCBs should be as per
IS standards.
DATA SHEET
Sr. No. Parameter Value/Detail

(1) Rated Supply Voltage 230 V ~, 50 Hz
(2) Input supply voltage range 140-270 V
(3) Expected Input Frequency 50 Hz +/- 3%
(4) Working Temperature +5° to +50° C
(5) Working Humidity 10% - 90% RH
(6) Usage hours Dusk to dawn
(7) Power Factor ≥0.90
(8) Index of Protection Level Minimum IP 65 as per IEC 60529.
(9) LED Chip efficacy ≥ 120 lm/ W
(10) Driver Efficiency > 85%
(11) Junction Temperature of < 85° C
(12) Rated Life @ L70 50,000 burning hours at 35° C
(13) Nominal Correlated Colour 5000° K to 6000° K
(14) Dispersion Angle Minimum 120°
(15) Tilting angle Adjustable / Fixed
(16) Maintenance factor of 0.85
(17) Colour Rendering Index ≥65
Page 444

(18) Total Harmonic Distortion < 15 % (EMI/ EMC Certification)
(19) LED MAKE Cree/ Osram/ Nichia/ Philips
Acceptance Tests: -
These tests are carried out by an inspecting authority at the supplier’s premises on sample taken
from a lot for the purpose of acceptance of a lot. Acceptance tests shall not be carried out from
particular size from the lot on which type tests have already been conducted. Recommended
sampling plan is given below.
A. Marking & Dimensions

B. Total Power including Driver
C. Luminaire efficiency & Module efficacy
D. Colour rendering index (CRI)
E. Endurance test
F. Lumen maintenance
G. Degree of protection test
H. Chromaticity coordinates and correlated colour temperature
Specification for Earthing and Lightening Protection :

Scope :
This specification covers requirements of earthing and lightening protection system. The
specification is intended to cover complete sypply, installation, testing and commissioning of
the earthing and lightening systems.
General Information :
The design, supply and performance of the system shall comply with all currently applicable
statutory regulations and safety codes in the locality where the systems will be erected and
commissioned.
The earthing and lightening system shall be installed in conformity with the requirement of
Indian Electricity Act 1910 as amended and the Indian Electricity Rules formed thereunder
Indian Standard code and practice and other statutory regulations, that may be relevant to
the erection.
Unless otherwise specified, the equipments, materials and accessories provided by contractor
shall conform to the latest applicable Indian Standards or IEC Standards some of which are
listed below :
IS : 3043 Code of Practice of earthing.
IS : 2039 Code of practice for protection of building and allied structures against lightening.
Earthing System :
1. Two separate and distinct earth leads shall be used for earthing each
equipment/structures enclosing the power conductor and one earth lead for metallic
Page 445

structure adjacent to electrical installation.
2. Metalic frames of all electrical equipment rated above 250 volts, must be earthed by
two distinct connections with earth system.
3. Earthing cables crossing other metallic structures such as conduits pipe lines etc.,
shall be minimum 300 mm away from such structures.
4. All underground connections and joints in earthing system shall be brassed/welded.
Connections with equipments/structures shall be bolted type.
5. Conducting petroleum jelly shall be applied to contact surfaces of all bolted joints and
joints shall be covered with bituminous compound and taped.
6. When G.I. conductors are connected to aluminium conductors the contact surfaces of
7. G.I. shall be tinned to prevent bimetallic corrosion.
8. Neutral connection shall never be used for the equipment earthing.
9. Earthing conductors shall be protected against mechanical damage.
10. All motors can be connected to the earth grid by providing pads.
11. Earthing conductors running along the structures, wall etc.shall be cleated at every 750
mm interval.
12. Minimum size of earth conductor shall be in accordance with IS:3043. However, sizes
of earth conductors for equipment shall be at least half the size of power conductor,
limited to maximum of 120 mm of aluminium.
13. All earth lead connections shall be as short and direct as possible and shall be without
link
Indoor Equipment Earthing :
1. Each floor of building shall have its own earth bus embedded in concrete.
2. Earthing grid embedded in the floor slab shall have a minimum concrete cover
of 50 mm.
3. Earth buses on different floor and main grid shall be connected by a latest two
conductors of main grid conductor size.
4. Every alternate column (steel or RRC)of the building, housing electrical equipments
shall be connected to main earthing grid.
5. Earthing conductors shall be welded at intervals of 1000 mm along their run of
styee structure and shall be at interval of 750 mm along the wall.
Outdoor Equipment Earthing :

Wherever earthing conductor crosses the trenches, funnels railway, track, etc., it shall be run
below the trench etc.
Equipment structures shall be earthed at two diagrammatically opposite points.
Earthing & Lightening Protection System:
1. Sizes and number of earth leads for earthing various items and other technical
particulars shall be as specified by the contractor.
Page 446

2. Earthing conductors shall be shown diagramatically. Exact location of earthing
conductors, earth electrodes test pits, and earthing connections may be changed to
suit the site conditions.
3. Earthing conductors in the building, running perrallel to walls and columns shall not be
less than 150 mm away from the wall/ columns.
4. Suitable earth risers shall be provided if the equipment is not available while carrying
out earthing connections.
5. However, earthing conductor passes through walls, galvanized iron sleeves shall
beprovided for the passage of earthing conductor. Water stope sleeves shall be
provided. water stops shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the
building from outside.
6. Whenever the Conductors are to be buried, the contractor shall co-ordinate with
other civil contractors to ensure that the conductors are installed before concreting.
7. All connections shall be low resistance, so that contact resistance shall be minimum.
OCTAGONAL TYPE STREET LIGHT POLE
Structure:-
The Octagonal Poles shall be designed to withstand the maximum wind speed of 159
Km/hr. The maximum stress at wind speed of 159 Km/Hr shall not exceed 80% of the strength
of steel. The detail of top loading i.e. the weight and area of top luminaries are worked out
based on this consideration. Maximum deflection of the pole shall meet the requirement of BS
5649: part 6 1982. The pole shall be hot dip galvanized as per IS 2629/IS 2633/IS 4759
standards with minimum coating thickness of 85 micron.
The pole shaft shall have Octagonal cross section and shall be continuously tapered
with single longitudinal welding. There shall not be any circumferential welding. The welding
of pole shaft shall be done by Submerged Arc Welding process using state of the art know how.
All Octagonal Pole shafts shall be provided with the rigid Flange plate of suitable thickness
with provision for fixing four bolts. This base plate shall be fillet welded to pole shaft at two
locations i.e. from inside and outside.
P.C.D. of Base plate must be suitable to Anchor plate which is already casted on bridge.
Item Includes one no of 63 Amp rating terminal plate and 1 No. of SP 2 Amp MCB with DIL
rail (B Series) per luminary shall be provided having rupturing capacity ≥ 10 kA. Terminal
plate made up of Bakelite with appropriate current rating, SP MCB (B Series) and stud type
terminal shall be mounted at the base of the pole. If a particular light fitting has to be manually
operated the same can be done by this MCB provided at the base compartment. The provided
terminal shall be suitable for loop-in-loop-out of max. 4 Core x 25 sq mm armoured cable. 1
No. of SP 2 Amp MCB (B Series) per luminary shall be provided having rupturing capacity 10
kA.
The cable shall be terminated at connector in the pole using ISI Marked PVC 1.1 KV grade
insulating tape roll with appropriate colour code. All items shall be fixed on the Bakelite sheet
of suitable size having 12 mm thickness. There shall also be welded a clit of size 40 x 40 x 4
mm for the purpose of earthing.
The pole shall be adequately strengthened at the location of the door to complete for the
loss in section.
Page 447

Material:-
Octagonal Poles: Steel confirming to St 35 or required grade
Foundation Bolts: As per relevant IS
Base Plate : IS 226/IS 2062 steel
The steel used to manufacture steel poles is as per BSEN 10025 grade S355 Jo. Yield
strength Min. 355N/mm2 and Tensile strength 490 - 630 N/mm2.
Please note that among the various standards mentioned, most stringent will apply.
Door Opening:-
An adequate door opening shall be provided at the base of the pole and the opening shall be
such that it permits clear access to equipment like termination plate, MCB, cables, etc. The
door opening shall be complete with a close fitting, vandal resistant, weather proof hinged type
with mechanical internal lock with special paddle key.
The door shall have required width-having height of minimum 250mm at the elevation of 500
mm from the Base Plate. The door shall be vandal resistance and shall be dust proof to ensure
safety of inside connections. The door shall be flush with exterior surface and shall have
suitable locking arrangement. The door opening shall be carefully designed and reinforced
welded steel section, so that undue buckling of the cut section under heavy wind conditions.
Pole Earthing:
Pipe type Earthing having 150 cms long and 2.5 cms. Dia galvanised iron pipe with coupling
and buch buried in specially prepared earth pit complete with necessary 25 x 3 mm size GI
earthing strip using salt and charcoal / coke as required for pipe type earthing. Earthing pipe will
be connected to pole by GI earthing strip through nut-bolt & washers.
ITEM NO 8 : EARTHING STATION
1. GENERAL :
(i) All the non-current carrying metal parts of the electrical installation and mechanical
equipment shall be earthed properly. The cables armour and sheath, electric panel boards,
lighting fixtures, ceiling and exhaust fan and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded
together and connected by means of specific earthing system. An earth continuity conductor
shall be installed with all the feeders and circuit shall be connected from the earth bar of the
panel boards to the conduit system, earth stud of the switch box, lighting fixtures, earth pin of
the socket outlets and to any metallic wall plates used. All the enclousers of the motors shall be
also connected to the earthing system.
2. SCOPE OF WORK :
The scope of work shall cover supply, laying, installation, connecting, testing and
commissioning of :
Earthing station.
Earthing G.I/Copper strips from earthing station to equipotential bar.
Page 448

Earthing G.I/Copper strips/ wires from equipotential bar to lay feeder mains and circuit to
connect power panels, DBs, switchboards etc.
Bonding of Non-current carrying parts, and metallic parts of the electrical installation.
3. STANDARDS :
The following standards and the rules shall be applicable.
IS; 3043 – 1966 Code of practice for earthing.
Indian Electricity Act and Rules
All codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified otherwise the installation shall
generally follow the Indian Standard Code of Practice or the British Standard Code of Practice
in absence of Indian standards.
4. TYPE OF EARTHING STATION :
PIPE / CHEMICAL TYPE EARTHING :
Supply, Erection, Testing and commissioning of earthing station having ‘ Pipe in Pipe ’ / “Flat
in pipe” (Chemical Type ) technology using Safe Earthing Electrode. The special type back
filling compound having inherent moisture absorption characteristics must be used to make the
earthing station maintenance free and no periodic water pouring should be required. The work
shall include excavation refilling providing manhole cover, chamber etc. the earthing station
shall as per IS 3043:1987 requirements.
Earthing station shall be provided for all Electrical system as per above technology. Earthing
station shall be provided having G.I. electrode 3000 mm long, outer diameter of minimum 50
mm and inner diameter of minimum 25 mm with GI earthing strip or as per
DGVCL/GETCO/Torrent Power Ltd. Standard.
Multiple earth connection shall be taken from suitably located earth plates connected to earth
loop. All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc passivated.
Spring washers shall be used for all earthing connections of equipment. Unless otherwise
specified, earthing connections to individual equipment shall be done in accordance with
standard equipment earthing schedule.
Plant instrument system clean earthing, UPS system clean/safety earth shall be separate from
the electrical earthing system.
Earth connections shall be made through compression type cable lugs / by welded lugs.
All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc passivated.
Spring washers shall be used for all earthing connections and all connections adequately locked
against loosening.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT :
Provision of earthing station complete with excavation, electrode, watering pipe, soil
treatment. Masonry chamber with cast iron cover etc. shall be treated as one unit of
measurement.
Page 449

TEST :
The entire earthing installation shall be tested as per requirements of Indian standard
Specification IS : 3043.
The following earth resistance values shall be measured with an approve earth megger and
recorded.
1. 1. Each earthing station.
2. 2. Earthing system as a whole.
3. 3. Earth continuity conductors
Earth conductor resistance for each earthed equipment shall be measured which shall not
exceed 5 ohm in each case.
Measurements of earth resistance shall be carried out before earth connections are made
between the earth and the object to be earthed.
All tests shall be carried out in presence of the Surat Smart City Development Limited’s
representative.
Recommended Size of Earthing Conductors
Below are the recommended minimum sizes of earth conductors. However, Earthing
Strips/conductors, if required of higher size as per Ground Fault Calculations, should be
laid.
Type of Equipment Earth conductor size
Small equipment and instrument 8 SWG GI solid wire Or through min. 1.5 sqmm earth
conductor of power cable Lighting, Power and Instrument Panels 10mm dia GI wire rope Or 25
x 3 mm GI Strip Push Button Stations (LCS) 8 SWG GI solid wire
ITEM NO 9 :EARTHINGSTRIPS
(a) Copper strip 50 x 6 mm

(b) G.I. strip 25 x 3 mm
(c) 12 S.W.G. G.I. Wire
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of earthing strips for connection between LT
switch gear, motor, starter as well as transformer neutral and earthing stations.
The earthing strips shall be laid underground or in trenches or on the floor of pump house and
hence excavation/ refilling, clamps etc shall be included. The strips shall be finally painted
with green colour. The joints shall either be brazed or bolted after tin plating the ends and using
GI/brass bolt nut and washers as per direction of engineer –In- charge.All equipment earthing
joints must be done using nut-bolts and other must be welded. For measurement purpose over
lapping of joints shall not be considered and payment shall be made as per actual basis. All
necessary excavation, refilling shall be in the scope of the work. Two separate and distinct
earth leads shall be used for earthing each equipment/structures enclosing the power conductor
Page 450

and one earth lead for metallic structure adjacent to electrical installation.
Metalic frames of all electrical equipment rated above 250 volts, must be earthed by two
distinct connections with earth system.
Earthing cables crossing other metallic structures such as conduits pipe lines etc., shall be
minimum 300 mm away from such structures.
All underground connections and joints in earthing system shall be brassed/welded.

Connections with equipments/structures shall be bolted type.
Conducting petroleum jelly shall be applied to contact surfaces of all bolted joints and
joints shall be covered with bituminous compound and taped.
When G.I. conductors are connected to aluminium conductors the contact surfaces of
G.I. shall be tinned to prevent bimetallic corrosion.
Neutral connection shall never be used for the equipment earthing.
Earthing conductors shall be protected against mechanical damage.
All motors can be connected to the earth grid by providing pads.
Earthing conductors running along the structures, wall etc.shall be cleated at every 750
mm interval.
Minimum size of earth conductor shall be in accordance with IS:3043. However, sizes of earth
conductors for equipment shall be at least half the size of power conductor, limited to
maximum of 120 mm of aluminium.
All earth lead connections shall be as short and direct as possible and shall be
without link
Earth Pits and Main Grid :
1 Adequate under of earthing pits and electrodes shall be used in conjection with earthing grid.
The minimum spacing between two adjacent earth pits shall not be less than five (5) meters and
shall be kept sufficiently away from structures to clear footings.
2 The main grid loop for a building shall be installed outside foundation of the building, buried
in back fill. It shall be installed at a minimum depth of 600 mm outside the building wall. The
main earth loops (MEL's) in plant areas shall be generally routed along cables when
equipments are located away MEL's suitable sub-loops may be run upto them for deriving
connections for individual equipment.
LIGHTENING PROTECTION :
Tall structures shall be protected against lightening strokes by suitable lightening
protection system to be fabricated and installed.
Page 451

Down conductor shall not be taped in between for equipment earthing.
Cable sheaths, metal conduits, casing etc. shall not be connected to lightening protection
system.
Down-conductor shall be as short as possible. Each down conductor shall be provided with a
testing point located at a height of about 1000 mm from ground level.
A minimum 2 meter separation shall be maintained between any other electric conductor and
lightening protection system.
Earthing and lightening protection system shall be blended to each other to prevent side flash o
ver, if adequate clearance between two system cannot be maintained.
Indoor Equipment Earthing :
Each floor of building shall have its own earth bus embedded in concrete.
Earthing grid embedded in the floor slab shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50 mm.
Earth buses on different floor and main grid shall be connected by a latest two conductors of
main grid conductor size.
Every alternate column (steel or RRC)of the building, housing electrical equipments shall be
connected to main earthing grid.
Earthing conductors shall be welded at intervals of 1000 mm along their run of styee structure
and shall be at interval of 750 mm along the wall.
Outdoor Equipment Earthing :
Wherever earthing conductor crosses the trenches, funnels railway, track, etc., it shall be run
below the trench etc.
Equipment structures shall be earthed at two diagrammatically opposite points.
Earthing & Lightening Protection System:
1. Sizes and number of earth leads for earthing various items and other technical
particulars shall be as specified by the contractor.
2. Earthing conductors shall be shown diagramatically. Exact location of earthing
conductors, earth electrodes test pits, and earthing connections may be changed to suit
the site conditions.
3. Earthing conductors in the building, running perrallel to walls and columns shall not be
less than 150 mm away from the wall/ columns.
4. Suitable earth risers shall be provided if the equipment is not available while carrying
out earthing connections.
Page 452

5. However, earthing conductor passes through walls, galvanized iron sleeves shall be
provided for the passage of earthing conductor. Water stope sleeves shall be provided.
water stops shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the building from
outside.
6. Whenever the Conductors are to be buried, the contractor shall co-ordinate with other
civil contractors to ensure that the conductors are installed before concreting.
7. All connections shall be low resistance, so that contact resistance shall be minimum.
Testing of Earthing System :
x Surat Smart City Development Limited may ask to carry out earth continuity tests,
earth resistance measurements and other tests in presence of the Engineer-in-charge
which in his opinion are necessary to prove that the system is in accordance with design
specifications, Indian code of practice and Indian Electricity Rules.Contractor shall
have to bear the cost of all such tests. The earth resistance of the sub-station earthing
system shall not exceed 1 ohm.
x The lightening protection vertical air terminations and/or horizontal air termination
conductors shall remain in their installed position even during severe weather
conditions.
x All joints in the down conductors shall be of welded/brazed type. All metallic structures
in the vicinity of down conductors shall be bondedto the down conductors.
x The test joint for down conductors shall be directly connected to the earthing systems.
x The earth resistance shall be checked, recorded and the resistance shall be improved in
case it is higher than acceptable limits.
x The contractor shall carry out all rectifications repairs or adjustment work found
x necessary during testing and commissioning.
Earthing Conductor :
The complete scope for collection of data, design of the system as per relevant
national/international standards, preparation of layout drawings, installation and approval to
the satisfaction of electrical inspector, are in scope of works under this tender specification.
Earthing conductor sizes as given in electrical design criteria are for the purpose of guidance.
Contractor shall satisfy himself for the size of the earth conductor required.
Notes :
x Conductors above ground shall be galvanised Iron to prevent atmospheric corrosion.
x Conductors buried in ground or embeded in concrete shall be mild steel. Fault clearing
time for sizing earthing conductor shall be taken as one (1) second and plant earthing
system shall be designed such that overall earthing resistance is less than One (1) ohm.
x Lightening Protection :
The need for lighting protection for buildings and allied structures shall be assessed as
per IS : 2039 and if found necessary, lighting protection shall be provided as per the
same standard.
ITEM NO : 10 :CCTV & COMPUTER

Page 453

Provide the outside and inside, Day and Night DOME colour indoor camera-: 1/3” super HAD
CCD image censor, greater or equal to 600 TVL, 0.3 Lux, DWDR, DNR Technology,
Varifocal 3-8 mm lens in built, CE/UL certified with all other accessories and power supply, 16
channel digital video recorder with in built 2 TB hard disc, display and recording at 400 FPS,
SATA hard drive support, DVD-RW in built, RG-6 armored video cable, RG-6 video cable
(cable as per site requirement), 6 U, 600 x 600 mm depth rch to put DVR with all basic
accessories plus 10 socket 5/15 amp power strip + 6 hardware tray, 1 KVA online UPS with
battery backup of 1 Hour, with external charger if applicable and laying of cable with necessary
accessories & fittings/ laying of HDPE pipe with all required accessories and mounting/laying
of cable through hard soil digging and refilling/laying of cable through soft soil digging and
refilling/installation, commissioning and testing of all the CCTV system components.
COMPUTER :
The contractor shall provide Desktop computer with following minimum specification
x Processor - dual core 2.4 GHz+ (i5 or i7 series Intel processor)

x RAM - 6 GB
x Hard Drive - 500 GB or larger solid state hard drive
x Graphics Card - any with DisplayPort/HDMI or DVI support - desktop only
x Wireless (for laptops) - 802.11ac (WPA2 support required)
x Monitor - 23" widescreen LCD with DisplayPort/HDMI or DVI support - desktop only
x Operating System - Windows 10 or 7 with Service Pack 1, Home or Professional editions,
x Warranty - 2 year warranty
x Backup Device - External hard drive, USB Flash Drive, and/or DVD+/-RW drive
x USB ports : Front 2x USB3, Rear USB ports: 4x USB 3

Page 454

25. GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ERECTION AND
COMMISSIONING
9.1 In accordance with the specific installation structions, as shown on manufacturer's
drawings or as directed by the Surat Smart City Development Limited's Representative,
the Contractor shall unload, erect, install, site test and place into commercial use all the
electrical equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall be installed in a neat,
workman like manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented.
Tolerances shall be as established in manufacturer's drawings or as stipulated by the Surat
Smart City Development Limited. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to the
foundation or structure until the alignment has been checked and found acceptable to the
Surat Smart City Development Limited.
9.2 The Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour, tools, equipment, rigging materials
and incidental materials, such as bolts, wadges, anchors, concrete inserts etc. required to
completely install, test and adjust the equipment.
9.3 Manufacturer's drawings, instructions and recommendations shall be correctly followed

in handling, setting, testing and commissiong of all equipment.
9.4 The Engineer may engage the manufacturer's erection Engineers to supervise the erection
of the relevant equipment referred to in the Technical Specification. The Contractor shall
erect and commission the equipment as per the instructions of the Erection Engineer(s)
and shall extend full co-operation to him.
9.5 In case of any doubt / misunderstanding as to correct interpretation of a manufacturer's

drawings of instruction, necessary clarifications shall be obtained from the Surat Smart
City Development Limited. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to
the equipment consequent to not following a manufacturer's instruc-tions correctly.
9.6 The Contractor shall move all equipment into the respective building through the regular
doors or floor opening provided specifically for the equip ment. The Contractor shall
move the equipment from the storage site to the crane, attach to the crane hook and install
in final location. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the listing of
equipment.
9.7 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, the Contractor shall make all the
necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the
connections between busbars/ wires. The Contractor shall also carry out the necessary
adjustments /alignments isolators and their operating mechanisms. All insulators and
bushings shall be protected against damage during installa-tion. Insulators or bushings
chipped, cracked or damaged due to negligence or carelessness shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.
Page 455

9.8 The Contractor shall take utmost care in handling instruments, relays and other delicate
machanisms. Wherever the instruments and relays are supplied separately, they shall be
mounted only after the associated control panels/desks have been erected and aligned.
The blocking materials/mechanism employed for the safe transit of the instruments and
relays shall be removed after ensuring that the panels/desks have been completely
installed and no further move-ments of the same would be necessary. Any damage to
relays and instruments shall be immediately reported to the Surat Smart City
Development Limited.

Page 456

26. SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION, TESTING &
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS AND
ACCESSORIES
10.1.1 Scope :
This specification is intended to cover complete instalation, testing and commissioning of

electrical equipments i.e. motor control centres, control panels/ switchgears, motors, push
button stations out door sub -station etc. complete.
10.1.2 Codes and Standards :

i. The installation, testing and commissioning of all electrical equipments shall comply
with all currently applicable statutory regulations, fire insurance and safety codes in the
locality where the work will be carried out. Nothing in this specification shall be construed
to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
ii. Unless otherwise specified, the work, material and accessories shall conform to the latest
applicable Indian, British or IEC Standards, some of which are listed below :
IS : 3072 Installation amd maintenance of switchgear.

IS : 900 Installation and maintenance of Induction motors.
IS : 3106 Selection, installation and maintenance of fuses.
IS : 1886 Installation & maintenance of transformers.
IS : 1180 Distribution Transformers.
IS : 4029 Guide for testing three phase induction motors.
IS : 335 Insulating oil for transformers & Switch-gears.
IS : 5124 Installation & maintenance of A.C.Induction Motor starters upto 1.1 KW.
IS : 226 Specification for structural steel.
IS : 5216 Guide for safety procedure and practices in electric work.
IS : 3202 Climate proofing of electrical equipment.
IS : 2274 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations.
IS : 6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting.
IS : 1866 Code of practice for maintenance of insulating oil.
IS : 1653 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS : 2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
10.1.3 Good workmanship shall be in accordance with best engineering practice to ensure
satisfactory performance and service life.
10.1.4 Detailed Requirement of Installations :

a. Switchgear, Control Panel etc.
All alignment, levelling, grouting, anchoring adjustments shall be carried out in accordance
with manufacturers instructions and/or as directed by the purchaser.
All modules shall be taken out and internals shall be cleaned preferably with vacuum
cleaner.
All connections and fixing of equipments in switch-gear.
Page 457

In some cases, minor modifications may have to be carried out at site in the wiring and
mounting of the equipment to meet the requirements of the desired control scheme and the
contractor shall have to do the same at no extra cost.
b. Motors :
The installation of Motors shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and/or as directed by the purchaser.
Checking and cleaning of bearings and charging/filling of lubricants, wherever necessary.
Cleaning of core the winding,varnishing out the windings and measurement of air gap for
motor assembly at site if demanded.
Motors shall be run on un-coupled condition for few hours before coupling them with the
drive equipment.
Motors shall be coupled with drive,adjusted and shall be tested on load.
c. Miscellaneous Items :
The contractor shall install miscellaneous items such as motor starters, local start/stop push
buttom stations etc.
The equipment will be generally wall,column or stand mounted.
The exact location will be as shown in the final drawings.
All supports or brackets needed for installation shall be fabricated and painted by the
Contractor.
All welding,cutting,chipping and griniding as & when necessary shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
d. Installation of Cables :
Cables shall be laid in accordance wiith layout drawings and cable schedule etc. to be
supplied by Contractor and approved by the SMSS High voltage,medium voltage and
control cables shall be separated from each other by adequate spacing or running through
independent pipes.
and instructions issued by the Surat Smart City Development Limited's representative.
Cables shall be laid directly burried in earth, on cable racks, on cable trays, in conduits, on
walls etc. as per the requirements.
All cables routes shall be carefully measured and cables cut to required lengths, leaving
sufficient length for the final connection of the cable to the terminals of the equipment.
The various cable lengths cut from the cable reels shall be carefully selected to prevent
undue wastage of cables.
Page 458

Cables shall be laid in trenches at requisite depths. Before cables are placed, the trench
bottom shall be filled with a layer of sand. This sand shall be covered with 150 mm of sand,
on top of the largest diameter cables, the sand shall be lightly pressed. A protective
covering of approved type of brick shall be laid. The remainder of the trench shall then be
back filled with soil, rammed and levelled.
As each row of cables is laid in place and before covering with sand every cable shall be
given an insulation test in the presence of Engineer-in-charge. Any cable which proves
defective shall be marked and replaced with a new cable and the end of defective cable
sealed to avoid leakage of water, if it is not feasible to remove the defective cable
altogether.
When cable rises from trenches to motor,push button,lighting panels etc. it shall be taken in
GI pipes for mechanical protection upto a minimum of 150 mm above grade etc. The top of
the pipe shall be filled with PUTTI after pulling of cable for sealing purpose.
Straight through joints if required shall be made by using epoxy resin type torpplain or
M-seal.
Cables shall be neatly arranged and dressed in the trenches in such a manner so that
cris-crossing is avoided and final take off to the motor/switchgear is facilitated.
All cables will be identified close to their termination points by cable numbers as per cable
schedule. Cable numbers will be punched on AL strips [2 mm thick] securely fastened to
the cable wrapped round it.
Each underground cable shall be provided with identifying tags of lead securely fastened
every 20 m of its underground length with atleast one tag at each end before the cable enters
the ground, at each bend or turning and the road crossing.
In unpaved area,cable trenches shall be identified by means of cable marker. These posts
shall be placed at location changes, in the direction of cables and at interval of not more
than 50 m.
A minimum clearance of 300 mm shall be maintained between cable trench and parallel
runs of underground piping.Cables which enter building below ground level shall pass
through the building foundation in G.I. pipes. Space between the cable and pipe shall be
sealed so as to be liquid tight. Sealing compound used shall be impervious to liquids that
may be in the ground.
Following guide shall be used for sizing the pipe size :

a. 1 cable in pipe 53% full
b. 2 cable in pipe 31% full
c. 3 or more cables 43% full
d. Multiple cable 40% full
At road crossing and other places where cables enter pipe sleeves adequate bed of sand
shall be given so that the cables do not slack and get damaged by pipe ends. All cable entry
places to the buildings shall be suitably sealed as instructed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Drum number of each cable from which it is taken shall be recorded along with the cable
number in the cable schedules. As proper register to indicate the drum No., type of cables,
Page 459

size of cable, length cut and laid, the points between which the lengths are laid and
corresponding dates etc. shall be prepared and maintained in consultation with the
Engineer-in -charge.
A similar register for cable termination and jointing work shall also be prepared and
maintained.
e. Tray and Supports for Cables :

Armoured cables which run exposed above ground shall generally be run in cable racks or
cables trays except individual cables or groups of upto two or three running along structures
may be attached directly to the structures. In the cable trenches below the switchgears,cable
racks and trays shall be used for supporting cables.Cable trays shall be ladder type of steel
construction with ladder runs of 450 mm centres or the trays may be perforated type.
Lengths shall preferably be 6 meters [approx. depending on fabrication facilities] in widths
of 150, 300 and 450 mm as per design requirements for greater width, trays may be bolted
togehter.Side heights shall be sufficient to provide mechanical protection for the cables.
Cable trays shall be supported at every 300 mm or less longitudinal run [based on
maximum uniform leading of 35 kg.per meter length for 3 meter span] shall be so fouted
that there is no danger of mechanical damage.
They shall be kept separate as far as possible from major piping and where practicable at
elevation above the top level. Routings shall follow the major structure axes.
Where more than one level of cable trays is required,levels shall have a minimum of 450
mm clear space between top of cable layer and bottom of next higher load tray.Top level
shall also have 450 mm clearance to any overhead construction running immediately over
and parallel to it. This is to allow adequate access to all cables. A 300 mm clearance is
satisfactory for short obstruction of 300 mm or less.
Cable trays and inaccessible portion of supporting steel shall be painted if necessary, before
laying of cables. The painting shall be done with one coat of red lead paint and two coats of
aluminium white paint.
Cable laid in horizontal trays shall be fixed to the tray at intervals not exceeding 1 meter
where cables are run individually or structures strapping intervals shall not exceed 600 mm.
Vertical runs shall have strapping at intervals.
Outdoor cable trays shall be galvanised and the cable fixing straps, bolts, nuts, washers etc.
shall also be galvanised.
f. Cable Termination :
Cable termination shall include the following :
a. Making necessary holes in the bottom/top plates for fixing cable gland/box.
b. Fixing double compress cable gland/box, connecting armour clamp to cable armour.
c. Dressing of cables, pouring compound etc. wherever necessary to make termination
complete.
Page 460

d. Putting cable lugs, crimping them on to cores of cables, taping bare conductors upto lugs,
wherever necessary.
e. Terminating to equipment terminals.
f. Supply and fixing of cable and core identification ferrules.
Wherever purchaser has not provided M.S. plates for fixing cable tray supports, contractor
shall install approved concrete fasteners for fixing cable tray supports.
g. Conduits & Pipes :
Contractor shall supply and install conduits, pipes as specified and as shown in drawings
prepared by him and approved by purchaser. All accessories/fittings required for making
installation complete shall be supplied by contactor.
Flexible metallic conduits shall be used fo termination to equipment which are likely to be
disconnected at periodic intervals.
Conduits or pipes shall run along walls, floors and ceilings on steel supports embedded in
soil, floor, wall or foundation, in accordance with relevant layout drawings. Under ground
position of conduit installation to be embedded in the foundation or structural concrete shall
be installed in close coordination with co-lateral work. Exposed conduit shall be neatly run
and evenly spaced.
Exposed conduit shall be adequately supported by racks, clamps, straps or by other

approved m eans. These fittings shall be of same material as conduits.
Each conduit run shall be marked with its designation as indicated on the
drawings.Identification shall be made where possible
When one or more cables are drawn through a conduit, cables shall fill not more than 50%
of the internal cross sectional area of the conduit.
The entire system of conduit after installation shall be tested for mechanical and electrical
continuity throughout and permanently connected to earth by means of earthing clamp
efficiently fastened to the conduit.
For jointing purpose, contractor shall have available at site, dies for threading, pipe or
conduit. All such threaded ends shall be cleaned after threading and anticorrosive paint
applied.
10.2 Sepecification for Erection, Testing and Commissioning Illumination System :
10.2.1 Scope :
This specification covers complete installation, testing and commiossioning of indoor and
outdoor illumination system.
10.2.2 Code and Standards :
The wiring, installation and commissioning of complete illumination system shall comply
with all currently applicable statutory regulations, fire insurance and safety codes in the
locality where the work will be carried out. Nothing in this specification shall be constued
to relieve contractor of his responsibility.
Page 461

10.2.3. Unless otherwise specified, the work, material and accessories shall confirm to the latest
applicable Indian, British or IEC standards, some of which are listed below :
IS : 2274 & 732 Electrical Wiring installation
IS : 1653 Specification for conduits
IS : 694 PVC insulated [light duty]electric cables for working upto 1100 V
IS : 3961 Part V Recommended current ratings for PVC insulated [light duty] cables
IS : 2208 HRC cartridge fuse links
IS : 1293 3 pin plugs and socket outlets
IS : 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purpose
IS : 5133 part I Steel & cast Iron boxes for the enclosure of electrical
accessories.
IS : 5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work
IS : 6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting
IS : 1913 General safety requirements for electric light fittings.
IS : 3202 Climate proofing of electrical equipments
IS : 3387 Accessories for rigid steel conduits
IS : 3480 Flexible steel conduit for electrical wiring.
IS : 2509 Rigid non-metallic conduits
IS : 3419 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conducts.
IS : 2667-1964 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
10.2.4 Good workmanship will be in accordance with best engineering practices to ensure
satisfactory performance and service life.
10.2.5 General Requirements :
Except as specifically approved by the site office, installation of conduits and lighting
fixtures shall be taken only after allmajor services such as piping,structural work etc. in that
particular area have been completed.
Location of lighting fixtures, stwitches sand receptacles shown on the drawing are
indicative and shall be relocated to suit site condition.
Except as noted mounting height of various lighting equipment from finish floor level shall
be as follows :
i] Lighting Panels 1200 mm

ii] Lighting control switches 1000 mm
iii] Receptacle with switch
a] For indoor 500 mm
b] For outdoor 1000 mm
All cables and conduits from lighting panel upto first lighting fixture shall be identified
with aluminium tags giving circuit reference number.
Lighting panel number shall be indicated when more than one panel for an area is to be
provided.
A number of lighting panels shall be marked separately for supplying power to the space
heaters mounted in the various switchgear panels and motors.
Page 462

Steel surfaces exposed to weather shall be thoroughly cleaned for removal of rust and shall
be given a primary coat of zinc chromate and two finishing coats of paint. All metal parts
not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resistant material.
Cable/Conduit separators shall be provided at an interval of 500 mm for horizontal runs and
750 mm for vertical runs.
Cable/Conduits shall be kept, wherever possible atleast 300 mm away from pipes, heating
devices and other equipments.
For the purpose of calculating connected loads of various circuits a multiplying factor of
1.25 will be assured to account the losses in the control gear.
Contractor shall supply junction boxes, pull boxes,terminal blocks, glands, conduits and
accessories [elbows, tees, bends etc.] and supporting anchoring, materials to make the
installation complete.
Contractor shall work in co-ordination with the civil contractor when opening sleeves are
required in walls and floors. Holes made by contractor shall necessarily be patched in a
good and approved manner.
All types of wiring concealed or unconcealed shall be capable of easy inspection. In all
types of wiring due consideration shall be given for neatness and good appearance.
In hazardous areas, the grounding wire shall run along the conduits throughout the
installation and all conduits and fixtures shall be effectively grounded. Conduits
shall be grounded at the ends adjacent to switch at which they originate.
Wherever specified, Delighting system shall be installed to provided necessary

illumination in case of an emergency. Emergency lighting cables shall run in a separate
conduit system.
A street lighting, steel tubular poles conforming to I.S. complete with fixing brackets shall
be used. These poles shall be coated with bituminous preservative paint on the inside
surface as well as embedded on outside surface.
Exposed outside surface shall be painted as with red lead primer and two coats of
Aluminium paint.
Before a complete installation or an extension to an existing installation is put into service,

installation tests stipulated in I.S.2274 and other codes of practices shall be carried out by
contractor in the presence of Surat Smart City Development Limited's representative.
10.2.6 Working in Conduits :
Individual lighting circuits inside building shall be wired with 250/440 V grade
copper/aluminium conductor of approved make PVC insulated flexible wires/cables. The
circuit wire shall be colour coded as follows :
White - Phase or DC positive wire

Black - Neutral or DC negative wire.
Page 463

Full wires in a conduit shall be drawn simultaneously. No subsequent drawings are
permissible. Necessary pull wires shall be provided by the Contractor.
Wires shall not be pulled through more than two equivalent 90 deg.bends in a single
conduit run.
Wiring shall not be spliced at any place other than junctions boxes with approved type
connectors of terminal strips and for lighting fixtures, connections shall be Tee off through
suitable roundconduit or junction box.
For vertical run of wires in conduit, wires shall be suitably supported by means of wooden
plays at each pull junction boxes.
10.2.7 Outdoor Lighting :
Lighting for all outlying areas shall be carried out using 1.1 KV grade aluminium
conductor, PVC insulated steel wire armoured cables between lighting panel and junction
box near the lighting fixture.
All lighting poles shall be stopped tubular steel poles type ISTP as per IS;2713 and shall be
painted.
Cables for road and out-door lighting shall be directely buried in ground at a depth of 900
mm or routed in available cable trenches.
10.2.8 Earthing :
For outdoor earthing of lighting poles, masts etc. cut G.I. wire shall be used. The wire shall
be run buried in ground at a depth of 900 mm.
Lighting fixtures, receptacles, junction boxes, switches, conduits and hand rails shall be
earthed using G.I.wire of minimum size 12 SWG.
The earthing wire shall run over the entire length.
10.2.9 Testing and Commissioning :
After completion of the work, complete illumination system shall be thoroughly checked
and tested by contractor inpresence of the Surat Smart City Development Limited's
representative as per check list.
The contractor shall provide all tools, materials, labour and supervising personnel for
carrying out the test.
The contractor shall carry out all rectifications, repairs or adjustment work, found
necessary during testing and commissioning.
The contractor shall record the test results on approved peoforms and furnish test
reports/results [4 copies] for approval.
On successful commissioning of the system and carrying out necessary rectification work,
the purchaser will take over the installation either wholly or in parts as the case any be.
Page 464

Page 465

27. SPECIFICATION FOR INTERCONNECTING PIPING
11.1 General :
All pipe work shall be in confirmity with the requirements of the applicable drawings
and this specification. Velocities shall be adeopted asper standard practice and shall
be approved by Engineer-in-chage.
All the pipeline shall be of MS SAW or CI or DI pipes as the latest IS, except specified
hereunder.
All chemical dosing pipes shall be of HDPE material of class III. All water supply and
distribution piping to various utility services shall be GI-Class C.The relevant
applicable standards to be adopted for supply, laying, jointing of various type of pipes,
notation and description are as under :-
S.No. Notation Description Relevant IS code

C.I. Centrifugally cast [spun] iron pipes & IS-1537 & IS-153
fittings for water, gas and sewage
C.I. Code of practice for laying Cast Iron IS-3114
Pipes.
C.I. CastIron Sluice Valves IS-780
G.I. Galavanised iron pipes and fittings IS-1239
H.D.P.E High Density Poly Ethylene Pipes. IS-4984
H.D.P.E HDPE Fittings IS-8008
H.D.P.E Code of Practice for laying HDPE pipes IS-7634
H.D.P.E Testing of HDPE Pipes IS-7634
M.S. Mild Steel hexagonal bolts and nuts. IS-1367
M.S. Steel pipe flanges IS-6392
M.S. M.S. Pipes - Steel for manufacture IS:2062:1992
R.C.C. Supply of Reinforced Cement Concrete IS-458
NP3 Class pipes.
Code of practice for RCC Pipe IS-783
Rubber for flanged joints. IS-638
G.R.P. Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipe IS 14402: 1996
IS 13916 : 1994

Page 466

28. SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA
This section outlines the particular requirements for the Instrumentation System. The Scope of
Instrumentation, Control and Automation works Reparing / Replacement / Modification for
Existing STP system and new Plant under this contract shall comprise of design, manufacture,
programming, configuration, supply, installation and erection, testing and commissioning of
the entire system as per the scope of work. The scope of work also includes the 10 years of
O&M of Instrumentation System for Existing as well as New Plant.
The scope of work under column of New Plant in the table below shall include but not limited
to the items indicated below.
MINIMUM SCOPE OF STP INSTRUMENTATION AND AUTOMATION WORK

Existing Plant New Plant
Sr. No. Description
Qty. Qty.
1 Online pH Analyzer (Sensor + Transmitter) 3 Nos. 2 Nos.
Ultrasonic open channel Flow Transmitter
2 2 No. As per Design Req.
for Inlet Parshall Flume
Ultrasonic Differential Level Transmitter at
3 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
Fine Screen
Insertion Type Ultrasonic Flow Transmitter
4 -- 1 No.
on treated outlet Pipe
5 Ultrasonic Level Transmitters Lot Lot
6 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Lot As per Design Req.
7 Online DO Analyzers (Dual Channel) 3 Nos. 6 Nos.
8 Hydrostatic Type Level Transmitters -- 6 Nos.
9 MLSS Analyzer -- As per Design Req.
10 TSS Analyzer -- As per Design Req.
11 Pressure Transmitter -- Lot
12 Temperature Transmitter -- As per Design Req.
13 Differential Pressure Transmitter 1 No. As per Design Req.
14 Inbuilt VFD with Air Blowers -- 9 Nos.
Inbuilt VFD with Air Blowers for existing
15 5 Nos. --
Plant
16 Magnetic Flow Transmitter 4 Nos. As per Design Req.
17 VFD For Gas Collecting Blower Lot ---
Online Residual Chlorine Analyzer On
18 -- 1 No.
Treated Outlet
19 Chlorine leak Detector 3 Nos. 3 Nos.
20 VFD For Gas Feed Blower 3 Nos. ---
Page 467

21 Auto Sampler 1 No. 1 No.
22 Instrumentation Cables Lot Lot
23 PLC Based SCADA System Set Set
24 Computer System --- 3 Nos.
MINIMUM SCOPE OF TSTP INSTRUMENTATION AND AUTOMATION WORK

SR.
DESCRIPTION LOCATION
NO.
FILTER BEDS
1 ULTRASONIC LOH/ROF FILTER BEDS
2 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS BACKWASH TANK
UF FEED
3 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS
4 ONLINE TURBIDITY ANALYZER
5 ONLINE CONDUCTIVITY METER

UF FEED TANKS
6 ONLINE TOTAL CHLORINE ANALYZER
7 ONLINE ORP ANALYZER
8 ONLINE pH METER
9 DIFF. PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS STRAINERS
10 PT UF FEED HEADER
UF TRAINS
11 MAGNETIC FLOW METER INDIVIDUAL UF TRAIN OUTLET
12 BUTTERFLY TYPE CONTROL VALVE INDIVIDUAL UF TRAIN OUTLET
13 PT UF TRAINS
14 ONLINE TURBIDITY ANALYZER UF TRAIN COMMON HEADER
15 MAGNETIC FLOW METER UF BACKWASH COMMON HEADER
16 MAGNETIC FLOW METER UF REJECT LINE
Page 468

SR.
NO.
17 PT UF BACKWASH COMMON HEADER
18 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES UF AIR INLET
19 ROTAMETERS UF REJECT LINE
20 ROTAMETERS UF CIP INLET LINE
RO FEED
21 ONLINE TURBIDITY ANALYZER
22 ONLINE ORP ANALYZER
23 ONLINE pH ANALYZER
24 ONLINE CONDUCTIVITY ANALYZER RO FEED TANK
26 LEVEL SWITCH
27 ONLINE TOTAL CHLORINE ANALYZER
RO TRAINS
28 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS RO TRAIN PERMEATE
29 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS RO TRAIN REJECT LINE
30 GLOBE TYPE CONTROL VALVE RO TRAIN REJECT LINE
31 ONLINE CONDUCTIVITY METER RO TRAIN PERMEATE
32 PT RO FEED, REJECT
33 ROTAMETERS RO FEED, REJECT
34 ROTAMETERS RO CIP INLET LINE
UTILITY
35 ONLINE pH METER UF CIP CIRCULATION LINE
Page 469

SR.
NO.
36 ONLINE pH METER WASTER WATER TANK
37 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS UF CIP TANK
38 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS WASTE WATER TANK
39 MOV WASTE WATER TANK
40 LEVEL SWITCH RO CIP TANK
41 ON/OFF BUTTERFLY VALVE UF CIP TANK
42 ON/OFF BUTTERFLY VALVE UF CIP TANK
43 ON/OFF BUTTERFLY VALVE UF CIP TANK DRAIN LINE
44 LEVEL SWITCH DEGASSATION TANK
45 MAGNETIC FLOW METER ACF TANKS
46 BUTTERFLY TYPE CONTROL VALVE ACF TANKS
47 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS DIRTY WATER SUMP
48 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS DOSING TANKS
49 VORTEX FLOW METER AIR COMPRESSOR HEADER
50 PRVs AIR COMPRESSOR HEADER
CHEMICAL HOUSE

ALL CHEMICAL TANKS
52 FLOW METER
53 ROTAMETERS UF CIP DOSING LINE
TREATED WATER OUTLET
54 ONLINE pH METER TREATED WATER OUTLET
Page 470

SR.
NO.
55 ONLINE CONDUCTIVITY METER TREATED WATER OUTLET
56 ONLINE TURBIDITY METER TRATED WATER SUPPLY LINE
57 ONLINE CONDUCTIVITY METER TRATED WATER SUPPLY LINE
58 MAGNETIC FLOW METER TRATED WATER SUPPLY LINE
59 AIR RELEASE VALVES AS PER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
UF FEED PUMPS
RO FEED PUMPS
60 VFD SYSTEM
UF BACKWASH PUMPS
ALL DOSING PUMPS
GENERAL TTP PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
61 PLC SYSTEM FULLY AUTO PLANT OPERATION
62 PRESSURE GAUGES AS PER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
63 INSTRUMENATION CABLES LOT
64 INSTRUMENT HARDWARE LOT
GALVENIZED IRON INSTRUMENTATION

65 LOT
CABLE TRAYS
40” LED ANTI GLARE TYPE DISPLAY
66 WITH WIRELESS MOUSE (MAKE :SONY / 1 NO.
SAMSUNG / LG)
OVERHEAD PROJECTOR (MAKE : SONY,
67 1 No.
BENQ, TOSHIBA)
68 LAPTOP 1 No.
Note:-
The above plant operation is envisaged as a fully auto operated plant through PLC based
SCADA system. Tenderer has to consider above details as a minimum instrumentation and
automation work requirement for guidance purpose only. However, tenderer has to provide all
the required instrumentation and automation items for fully auto plant operation through PLC
Page 471

based SCADA system. The tenderer must make site visit and obtain details of all
units/machineries/plant equipments & accessories before giving his offer. Existing all
entertained.
Page 472

SCOPE OF WORK FOR INSTRUMENTATION:
General
A complete instrumentation and control system shall be provided for semi automatic operation
of the Sewage treatment plant as specified. The bidder shall take into consideration the
following aspects:
1) Complete System Integration including Design, Supply and Installation of all field
instruments, PLC system for the complete Process control of the Sewage Treatment
Plant shall be done by one agency. The Bidders shall identify this agency and provide
their credentials in advance.
2) Wherever Civil, Electrical or Mechanical inputs are required, the same can be provided
by the respective disciplines as per the Automation system integrator’s requirement.
3) The Equipment Cabinets, system Cabinets, Panels, Power distribution Cabinets, etc. in
the complete Project shall be sourced from One Approved Enclosure Supplier and shall
be assembled & wired by one Approved Control Panel Vendor thus providing uniform
documentation and uniform Look & Feel for Operation and Maintenance.
4) The bidder to provide documentary evidence of undertaking given by their identified
Automation system integrator for comprehensive support (Warranty) including all
services, spares and consumables for a period of 36 months after taking over the
system.
Reference Standards:
Unless otherwise approved, instrumentation shall comply with relevant quality standards test
procedures and codes of practice collectively referred to as Reference Standards including
those listed below in accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in this specification.
IEC 60381-1:1982 Analogue signals for process control systems. Specification for
direct current signals.
IEC 60947-4-1:2000 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
Contactors and motor starters. Electromechanical contactors and
motor starters.
Contactors and motor-starters. AC semiconductor motor
controllers and starters.
Contactors and motor-starters. AC semiconductor controllers and
contactors for non-motor loads.
IEC 60770-1:1999 Transmitters for use in industrial process control system. Methods
for performance evaluation.
IEO 6817:1997 Measurement of conductive liquid flow in closed conduits.
Method using electromagnetic flow meters.
BS EN 837-1:1998 Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions,
metrology, requirements and testing.
BS EN 60529:1992 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
code).
BS EN 60546-1:1993 Controllers with analogue signals for use in industrial-process
control system. Methods for evaluating performance.
BS EN 60584-2:1993 Thermocouples. Tolerances.
BS EN 60654 : 1998 Operating conditions for industrial –process measurement and
Page 473

control equipment. All relevant parts.
BS EN 61000-6:2001 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards.
Emission standard for industrial environments.
BS 89:1990 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments
and their accessories. All parts.
BS 90:1975 Specification for direct-acting electrical recording instruments and
their accessories.
BS 1042-1.4:1992 Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits. Pressure
differential devices. Guide to the use of devices specified in
sections 1.1 and 1.2.
BS 1041-2.1 :1985 Code for temperature measurement. Expansion thermometers.
Guide to selection and use of liquid-in-glass thermometers.
BS 1041-2.2 :1989 Code for temperature measurement. Expansion thermometers.
Guide to selection and use of dial-type expansion thermometers.
BS 1041-3 :1989 Temperature measurement. Guide to selection and use of industrial
resistance thermometers.
BS 1042-1.4 :1992 Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits. Pressure differential
devices. Guide to the use of devices specified in sections 1.1 and
1.2.
BS 1553-1:1977 Specification for graphical symbols for general engineering.
Piping systems and plant.
BS 1646-1 :1979 Symbolic representation for process measurement control function
and instrumentation. Basic requirements.
BS 1646-2:1983 Symbolic representation for process measurement control
functions and instrumentation. Specification for additional basis
requirements.
BS 1646-3 :1984 Symbolic representation for process measurement control
functions and instrumentation. Specification for detailed symbols
for instrument interconnection diagrams.
BS 1646-4:1984 Symbolic representation for process measurement control
functions and instrumentation. Specification for basis symbols for
process computer, interface and shared display/control functions.
BS 2765:1969 Specification for dimensions of temperature detecting elements
and corresponding pockets.
BS 3680 Measurement of liquid flow in open channels. All relevant parts.
BS 3693:1992 Recommendations for design of scales and indexes on analogue
indicating instruments.
BS 4675-2:1978 Mechanical vibration in rotating machinery. Requirements for
instruments for measuring vibration severity.
BS 4999-142:1987 General requirements for rotating electrical machines.
Specification for mechanical performance vibration.
BS 6739:1986 Code of practice for instrumentation in process control systems
installation design and practice.
Instrument Society of American Standards and Recommended Practices:

S 5.1 Instrumentation symbols and identification.
S 5.4 Instrumentation loop diagrams.
S 7.3 Quality standard for instrument air.
Page 474

RP 16.1 Terminology, dimensions and safety practices for indicating
variable 2, 3 area meters.
RP 16.4 Nomenclature and terminology for extension type variable area
meters (Rota meters)
RP 16.5 Installation, operation, maintenance instructions for glass tube
variable area meters (Rota meters)
RP 16.6 Methods and equipment for calibration of variable area meters
(Rota meters)
RP 18.1 Specifications and guides for the use of general purpose
annunciators.
S 26 Dynamic response testing of process control instrumentation.
S 37.1 Electrical transducer nomenclature and terminology.
S 37.3 Specifications and test for strain gauge pressure transducers.
S 50.1 Compatibility of analog signals for electronic industrial process
instruments.
S 51.1 Process instrumentation terminology.
RP 60.08 Electrical Guide for Control Centers.
DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION ITEMS:
ULTRASONIC TYPE LEVEL TRANSMITTER

ULTRASONIC OPEN CHANNEL FLOW METER
A. GENERAL
1 FUNCTION INDICATING & TRANSMIT
2 TYPE NON-CONTACT TYPE, PROGRAMMABLE
3 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS. SAFE
FLOW MEASURMENT OF RAW SEWAGE AT
4 SERVICE
PARSHALL FLUME
5 OPERATING TEMPERATURE AMBIENT, MAX. 50 0C
B. TRANSMITTER
7 ENCLOSURE - MOC POLYCARBONET/MFR. STD.
PROTECTION CLASS IP-65
8 POWER 24 VDC, 4 WIRE
9 MEASUREMENT RANGE, M 0-20000 M3/HR
10 BLANKING DISTANCE, M 300 MM
11 NO. OF MEAS. CHANNELS ONE
12 ACCURACY + 0.25% OF MAXIMUM RANGE
13 LOCAL DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY
14 OUTPUT - SIGNAL 4-20 MA DC ISOLATED
Page 475

4 NOS. - CONTROL RELAYS, 2 NOS. - ALARM
- CONTACT
RELAYS
15 CABLE ENTRY 3/4" ET BOTTOM TO ENCLOSURE

16 MOUNTING PIPE MOUNTED
17 PROGRAMMER REQUIRED
C. SENSOR
18 MEASURING PRINCIPLE ULTRASONIC TYPE
NO. OF SENSORS PER
19 ONE
INSTRUMENT
20 MOC PVDF COPOLYMER ENCLOSURE AND CSM FACE
21 PROTECTION CLASS IP-68

22 MEASUREMENT RANGE 0-20000 M3/HR
23 PROCESS CONNECTION 1" NPT
24 POWER SUPPLY FROM TRANSMITTER UNIT
25 CABLE LENGTH 10 M MIN.
Flow (Instantaneous & totalized) readings shall be continuously displayed along with real time
and historical trends for last 365 days at PLC HMI in main control room / CSCR, as minimum.
Required control actions shall be furnished during detailed engineering.
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER

A. GENERAL
1 FUNCTION INDICATING & TRANSMIT LEVEL
2 TYPE MICRO PROCESSOR BASED
3 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS. SAFE AREA
LEVEL MEASURMENT OF WATER/SLUDGE AT

4 SERVICE DIFF TANKS/SUMPS
5 OPERATING TEMPERATURE AMBIENT, MAX, 50 OC
B.TRANSMITTER
7 ENCLOSURE - MOC POLYCARBONET MFR. STD.
- PROTECTION CLASS IP-65 MIN.
9 MEASUREMENT RANGE, M 0.3 TO 5M OR 10 M
11 NO. OF MEAS. CHANNELS ONE CHANNEL FOR LEVEL
12 ACCURACY + 0.25% OF MAX RANGE
Page 476

- CONTACT 2 + 1= 3 NOS. RELAYS
15 CABLE ENTRY 1/2" NPT BOTTOM TO ENCLOSURE
17 PROGRAMMING PROVIDED THRU PROGRAMMER
C. SENSOR
NO. OF SENSORS PER
19 INSTRUMENT ONE

0.3 TO 05M OR 10 M OR AS PER SITE
22 MEASUREMENT RANGE REQUIREMENT
23 PROCESS CONNECTION 1" NPT (M)
25 CABLE LENGTH 10 M OR AS PER SITE REQUIREMENT
CABLE GLANDS & CABLE
26 ENTRY PROVIDED & 1/2" NPT
CONTACTS FOR FAULT / ECHO
27 LOSS PROVIDED
28 MAKE AS PER TENDER APPROVED MAKE
29 LOCATION AS PER PROCESS REQUIREMENT
ON-LINE pH ANALYSER (SENSOR + TRANSMITTER):
ONLINE pH ANALYZER
A. GENERAL
MICRO PROCESSOR BASED, INDICATE &
1 FUNCTION TRANSMITE PH
2 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS SAFE
3 SERVICE TO MONITOR PH
B. TRANSMITTER
CAST ALUMINIUM CASE WITH CHEMICALLY
4 ENCLOSURE-MOC RESISTANT COATING. POLY- CARBONATE
FLEXIBLE WINDOW.
PROTECTION CLASS IP66, NEMA 4X
5 POWER SUPPLY 90 TO 264 VAC
6 OUT PUT-SIGNAL 4-20mA, FOR PH WITH SENSOR FAILURE ALARM
4-SPDT RELAY WITH DISPLAY INDICATORS.
CONTACT 100VA,250VAC, 5 AMP
Page 477

7 MOUNTING PIPE/WALL/PANEL
GRAPHIC QUARTER VGA (320 X 240 PIXELS) LCD
WITH LED BACKLIGHT AND
8 LOCAL DISPLAY TOUCHSCREEN.
9 ACCURACY 0.01 PH
10 MEASSURMENT RANGE 0-14 PH
12 LOAD RESISTANCE 600 OHMS.
13 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1/2" Poyamide Glands
C. SENSOR
COMBINE ELECTRODE -- DOUBLE JUNCTION
14 TYPE REF. TYPE
15 MOUNTING INSERSION TYPE
RYTON BODY WITH GLASS FILLING.,POROUS
16 MOC PTFE REFERENCE JUNCTION BOX
17 PROTECTION CLASS IP 68
18 PROCESS CONNECTION 3/4" NPT
19 SENSOR CLEANING AUTO CLEANING / MANUAL
20 CABLE LENGTH 10 MTR
TEMPERATURE
21 COMPENSATION INBUILT WITH PT100 SENSOR AUTOMATIC
23 Location AS PER PROCESS REQUIREMENTS
pH readings shall be continuously displayed along with Low / High pH level alarm and real
time and historical trend shall be available for last 365 days at PLC HMI in main control room
/ CSCR, as a minimum.
FULL BORE ELECTRO MAGNETIC FLOW MEASURING SYSTEM
Generally, the flow meter shall be as follows:
Flow metering System
Each flow metering system shall consist of the primary transducer (Sealed to IP-67/68),
earthing rings, the necessary signal converter and power supply unit and all cabling between
the primary transducer and signal converter and power supply unit. Shall be suitable for
submerged application.
The contractor shall provide sufficient suitable cable to allow for the primary transducers to be
situated up to 10 meters from their signal converters, unless a longer length is specified.
The general specifications for electromagnetic flow meter shall be as under:
Type : Electromagnetic, Microprocessor based

Type of Excitation : Pulsed or Dual Frequency Excitation
End Connection : Flanged
Flange Material : CS
Page 478

Process Connection : As per ANSI 16.5/DIN standards
Meter : Remote (Non-Integral)
Local Display : LCD Type, Flow Rate & Tot. Flow in Engg. Units
Material of
:
Construction
Meas. Tube : Meter size upto 100mm: SS 304 or as per mfr. Std.
Meter size more than 100mm CS or better as per mfr. Std.
:
Liner : Teflon / PFA
Electrodes : SS-316L / Ha-C
Housing : SS 304 or CS or Die Cast Alu. as Mfr. Std.
Grounding Ring : Required, SS316
Meas. Range (Fluid : 0.1 to 10 m/sec
Vel.)
Accuracy : + 0.5% of Flow Rate or better
Supply Voltage : 230V AC or 24V DC
Load Resistance : upto 500 ohms max.
Output : 4-20 mA DC current output
One Pulse Output / Alarm Output
Enclosure IP-67 as a minimum
:
Classification
Vibration Conditions : Conformity with IEC 60068-2-6
Capable of measuring
With Conductivity : Greater than 5 μ Siemens/Cm
Signal Cable Length : Min. 10m
Conduit Entry : ½” NPTF
Transmitter Mtg. : 2” Pipe
Pipe not Full Detection : Required
Flow (Instantaneous and Totalised) readings shall be continuously displayed at ICP (Control
Panel) in main control room on panel mounted indicators/totalizers as well as at HMI.
Flow meter mounting locations shall be such for ease of monitoring and operation of the plant
and also ease of maintenance of instrument and shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendation
and to be finalized during detailed engineering and as directed by engineer-in-charge.
Flow meter shall be mounted above ground level / HFL as far as possible. In case of flow meter
mounted below ground level / HFL shall be provided with suitable water proof chamber
constructed in RCC elevated sufficiently above GL of sufficient size for ease of operation and
maintenance as decided during detailed engineering and provided with brick masonry cabin /
covering arrangement to avoid submergence in water.
Flow meter shall be mounted as per manufacturer’s recommendation and good engineering
practices and each flow meter shall be provided with a bellows at suitable location to enable
ease of removal / insertion of flow meter for maintenance. For flow meter mounted below
ground level, chamber shall be sized suitably to accommodate flow meter and bellows in the
same chamber.
Venturi Tubes and Nozzles.

Page 479

Venture, nozzles etc. shall be designed in accordance with BS 1042 :part 1l
The primary units shall be supplied with flanges in accordance with the relevant General
Mechanical
Specification Requirements relating to pipes, flanges, fittings, etc.
Each primary unit shall be supplied and installed complete with a Viking Johnson flange
coupling or similar approved arrangement to permit removal for repair or inspection.
The sensing lines shall be installed with continuous slope to avoid blocking by condensation or
air locks. Stop cocks shall be provided close to each pressure tapping point.
Case material shall be cast iron to BS 1452 of grade suitable for the application and finish
painted in accordance with Section 15 of the Specification Liners shall be zinc free bronze to
BS 1400.
Orifice Plate Installations
Orifice plates shall be designed in accordance with BS 1042 : part 1 and supplied in carrier
rings incorporating the pressure tapping.
The sensing lines shall be installed with a continuous slope such that condensation will not
collect in the pipe. Stope cocks shall be provided close to the tapping points.
Smart Type Pressure and Temperature Transmitter (with Duplex type, Platinum element,
3-wire RTD, 100 ohms resistance at 0 deg C, Cast aluminum head, WP to IP-65, SS316
Thermowell - drilled bar stock with 1.5” flanged connection of suitable length) also shall be
provided for flow compensation with each air / biogas flowmeter.
Specification for Transmitter (P / DP / T) for / gas flowmeters
Transmitters shall be manufactured from material suitable for use with the process medium and
for the site ambient conditions. Only Smart transmitters of approved make shall be used.
The transmitter housing shall be WP to IP-67, yoke mounting, provided with mounting
arrangements suitable for 2” pipe mounting. Body material shall be of Cast aluminium. The
materials of construction shall be suitable for the climatic conditions described in the
specification and where necessary suitable, heavy duty GRP weather proof enclosure with
viewing windows shall be provided.
Transmitters shall provide 4mA to 20 m A output signals proportional to the measured
conditions. They shall operate on a 2 wire system receiving their power form the residual 4 m A
in the transmission signal.
Transmitter power supply will be 24V DC. They shall be fitted with output meters to give an
approximate indication of transmitter output scaled 0–100%. Output meter shall be fo Digital
LCD type.
Pressure / Differential pressure transmitters, which shall have capacitance or indicative type
Page 480

sensing element of SS 316L, shall be fitted with direct mounted, stainless steel, 3 valve
manifolds. Pressure and transmitters shall be fitted with two valve manifolds. For flow
measurements with DP Transmitter, the transmitter shall be provided with in-built square root
extraction facilty with switch selection.
Pipe work shall be of SS316 steel tube / pipe as appropriate with a minimum gradient of 1 in 12
after an initial rise ( gas ) or fall ( liquid ) or 300 mm.
Transmitter equipment should be supplied and installed complete in all details including tube /
pipe work, stop cocks, drain clocks and any similar ancillary item of equipment.
Process data, calibrated range, output, protection, accuracy and connecting details shall be as
necessary to satisfy the particular specification requirements.
The transmitter shall have non-induction external zero and span adjustment and shall have
facility for an optional external damping adjustment.
Each transmitter shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate, permanently attached,
indicating the transmitter data.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR RECEIVING INDICATORS MOUNTED AT ICP WHERE

SPECIFIED IN ABOVE INSTRUMENT REQUIREMENT:
Supply of Panel mounted indicators / totalizers wherever specifed above along with any
instrument shall be considered forming integral of that instrument and shall be as per below
specifications:
All indicators/controllers shall be electronic (microprocessor based) type programmable

indicator and shall be mounted on the control panel located in the control room. Multiplying
factors, shall be specified on manufacturer’s nameplate, if applicable.
Retransmission of process indicator/totalizer shall not be used for feeding the analog input
signal to PLC.
Specifications, as applicable are as follows:
Process Indicator:
Type : Microprocessor based, programmable
Input : 4-20 mA
Display : 4 ½ Digit, 7 Segment LED display
Display Units : % or Engg. Units, user programmable at site
Alarm Setpoint : Two nos., pot. free relay contact rated at 5A
@230V AC resistive load, adj. over entire range
Transmitter Supply : Required, 24V DC @30mA
Retransmission : Required, 4-20 mA in 600 ohm load
Output
Accuracy : + 0.25% of FSD
Terminals : suitable for up to 2.5 sq.mm. wires
Mounting : panel flush mounting
Page 481

Power : 110/230 V AC, 50 Hz
Flow Indicator cum totaliser shall also have following in addition to above:
Totalising : User Programmable at site

Counts/Hr
Totaliser Display : 6/8 Digit Digital Display with Battery Backup to retain
totalized data in the event of power failure for a
minimum period of 24 hours.
CHLORINE RESIDUAL ANALYSER/TRANSMITTER:
1. General:
• Function: Continuously measure, indicate, and transmit free or total chlorine residual
concentration of sample process stream.
• Type: Amperometric with pH buffering and reagent supply equipment for sample
conditioning.
• Parts: Analyser/transmitter unit, mounting hardware, sample tubing and connectors,
reagent bottle(s), and expendables.
2. Service:
• Measurement Type: Total chlorine residual, unless otherwise specified.
• Sample Flow: 8 litres per minute total flow, 50ml per minute to sample sensor.
• Sample Supply: Continuous.
• Sample Temperature Range: 0 to 52 degrees C.
• Ambient Temperature Range: 5 to 52 degrees C.
3. Performance:
• Range:
a. Field Selectable: 0-0.1, 0-0.2, 0-0.5, 0-1, 0-2, 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 0-50mg/l.
• Sensitivity: 0.001mg/l or 1 percent of full scale, whichever is greater.
• Response Time: 90 seconds, maximum.
• Accuracy: Larger of 0.001mg/l or plus or minus 1 percent of range.
• Stability: Under favourable conditions, plus or minus 1 percent of full-scale for 1 month.
• Operating Range: 100:1 for each measurement range.
4. Features:
• Operators Interface:
a. Display: 3-1/2 digit LCD, 16-character alphanumeric.
b. Touch keypad.
• Three Electrodes: Two platinum and one silver/silver chlorine reference electrode.
• Electrode Cleaning System: Agitated.
• Reagent Storage: 7-day supply bottle(s), minimum.
• Reagent Deliver: Peristaltic pump or gravity feed.
5. Piping Connections, Prepiped: Sample in and overflow drain.
6. Signal Interface: One of the following interfaces as required:
• Profibus PA Digital Communication.
• 4 to 20mA DC into load resistances in the range of 0 to 600ohms without load
adjustments minimum for 24V DC supply.
Page 482

7. Enclosure:
• Electronics: IP66.
• Mounting: Wall, unless otherwise specified.
8. Power Requirements: 230V AC, 50-Hz
9. Expendables:
• Reagent Chemical(s): 16-week supply of the required reagent chemicals, including pH
buffer, for each instrument provided.
CHLORINE LEAK DETECTORS
Leak detection equipment shall comprise detector heads and remote mounted
transmitters/monitors.
The detector heads shall be of the bimetallic amperometric or solid state types designed for
stability
and minimum maintenance. The leak detection system shall operate on a continuous basis with
a maximum response time to low level leaks of 5 seconds. They shall be wall mounted and
reasonably equidistant from potential sources of chlorine.
Each detector head shall be connected electrically to its associated transmitter/monitor. Multi
point “sniffer” type pumped sampling systems will not be acceptable.
The chlorine detector shall not respond to a leakage of any other gases.
The cells shall be suitable for operation in an indoor environment with a temperature
maintained above freezing point (0C)
The monitoring units shall have wall mounting enclosures protected to at least IP 54 or shall be
panel mounted. The units shall not be mounted in the gas hazardous area. They shall
incorporate solid state circuit cards of the plug-in type. The units shall have self-checking
circuitry and detector failure alarm indication, the latter with provision for re-transmission.
The detection systems shall not be susceptible to radio frequency interference.

Leakage alarms shall be adjustable from 5% to 100% of the instrument range to facilitate
setting of the following trip levels:
Chlorine - low level 0.5 mg/l

- high level 1.0 mg/l
The monitors shall have indicator lights for both alarm levels and at least two sets of volt-free
changeover contacts for re-transmission of the alarms and controls through PLC to:-
• Ventilation system control’s, switching of Cl2 supply, switching on scrubber system
and giving external warning
• Remote monitoring system.
Local alarm indication and contact position shall be maintained until an alarm reset button is
activated at the monitor.
Page 483

The monitors shall incorporate a test button to facilitate the checking of satisfactory operation
of the electronic circuits and alarms.
This specifications covers the complete materials, equipment and incidentals required to place
into operation an integrated low voltage variable frequency drive (VFD) system, electrical
machines and covers all components of the engineered system.
Every variable frequency drive system shall consist of all system components required to meet
the performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this specification.
These components may include harmonic filter / power factor correction unit, multi-pulse,
phase shifting input rectifier-grade isolation transformer, VFD converter / DC-link / inverter,
and output filter/
PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEM:
PRESSURE GAUGES:
a. Pressure gauges shall comply with IS 3624/BS 1780. The dial shall be 150 mm size.
b. The internal parts of pressure gauges shall be of stainless steel material. In chlorine
applications the diaphragm shall be silver or tantalum. For other fluids an appropriate
non-corrosive diaphragm materials shall be used.
c. The minimum diameter for round pressure gauges shall be 150 mm unless specified
otherwise or where the gauge forms part of a standard item of equipment.
d. The accuracy of pressure gauges shall be of scale over the operation range. The zero
and span of pressure gauge shall not change by more than 0.1% of the span per C
changes in ambient temperature. The gauges shall be of precision type.
e. Pressure gauges shall be installed at raw sewage inlet to inlet chamber, all pumps
suction and discharge, blower discharge. For pump suction compound gauge or vacuum
gauge in MWC shall be provided. All pressure gauges shall be provided with siphon
loop as required to dampen flow chatter and isolating valve of suitable size.
f. Pressure gauges shall be supplied with a dead weight tester with all accessories such as
pump, standard weights, and tubes. Hoses, Couplers as required for re-calibration of all
pressure gauges.
PRESSURE SWITCH
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRESSURE SWITCH
A. GENERAL
1 Location of Measurement Gauge Pressure at discharge of various

pumps as per specifications
2 Service Sewage / Sewage Sludge / Water or other
Liquid Application
3 Function Detect and On/Off Switching (Flow or No
Flow detection at set point)
4 Type Diaphragm
5 Mounting Bottom
Page 484

6 Operating Temperature Ambient Ambient, 50 °C Max.
7 Operating Pressure Atm., Max. 5 Bar
8 Installation Field / Outdoor / Indoor, as applicable
9 Overall Accuracy + 1% of Span
B. Measuring Unit /
Enclosure
1 Service Sewage / Sewage Sludge / Water or other
Liquid Application
2 Element Type Diaphragm Sealed Piston Actuator or
suitable better technique
3 Element Material Seal SS316
Socket SS316
Wetted Parts SS316
4 Body Material MOC Die Cast Alu. or equi. as per mfr. Std.
suitable for withstanding harsh environment
5 Over range Protection 130% of maximum static pressure
6 Process Connection 1/2" NPTF
7 Connection Location Bottom
8 Calibration Certificate Required
9 Measurement Shall be from 0 to 5 Kg/Cm2, to be finalised
(Calibration) Range during detailed engg.
10 Accuracy + 1% of Span
11 Output - Contacts Nos. & Type Potential free relay contacts, min. 1NO +
1NC, Rating 5 amps
12 Cable Entry 1/2" NPT F
13 Protection:
a Elec. Area Classification Safe
b Enclosure Type & Weatherproof to IP-65 as a minimum
Protection
Class
MOC Cast Alu. or equi. as per mfr. Std. suitable
for withstanding harsh environment
Paint Chemical Resistant / Epoxy Coating
C. Options / Accessories:
1 Mounting Accessories Required
2 Tag Plate Required, SS 304
3 Cable Glands Required, IP-65/66 as a min., Ni-Plated
Brass / Polyamide
4 Plugs for addl. cable Close up Plugs shall be provided for all
entries unused cable entries, Ni-Plated Brass /
Polyamide
Page 485

D. Recommended Spares For 1 Year Bidder to submit recommended spares list
Normal along with part nos., part description and
Operation qty. required for 1 year normal operation
along with their technical bid for
procurement, if required, by client in future.
However, O&M spares shall be separately
include
E. Make As per approved Vendor List

Model Pressure Bidder to Furnish
Switch
F. Quantity of Refer Quantity / Location table below for

Instruments: each Zone (STP/SPS)
G. Approved Vendors Dag Process Instrumetns, Danfos, E+H,

Indfos, N.K. Instruments, Switzer
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
A. GENERAL
1 Location of Measurement Temperature measurement at

a) Air Line for Temperature Compensation
of Air / Gas Flow measurement across
Venturi / Orifice
b) Each Sludge Digester Unit (On mixing /
digester sludge sample pipe)
c) Power Transformer
2 Service Air / Gas / Sewage / Liquid
3 Function Transmit & Indicate
4 Type Smart
5 Mounting Direct or other suitable
Process 150°C Max.
7 Operating Pressure Atm.
8 Installation Field / Outdoor
B. Measuring Unit
1 Service Air / Gas / Sewage / Liquid
2 Element Type 3-Wire RTD, See Specifications for RTD
provided separately or Thermocouple, as
applicable
Page 486

C. Transmitter
1 Type Microprocessor based, User Programmable,
2-Wire, Smart
2 Input User Selectable, RTD / Thermocouple
3 Measurement Suitable for Temperature measurement on
(Calibration) Range Air / Gas / Digester Sludge Line, Max.
150°C
4 Accuracy + 0.2°C (Pt100, 3-wire RTD as per IEC-751,
α=0.00385) or + 0.25% of Cal. Span,
whichever is greater
5 Output 4-20 mA, Two Wire, with protocol
- Load Resistance 600 Ohms max.
6 Tx. Power Supply 24V DC
7 Cable Entry 1/2" NPT F
8 Local Indicator / Display LCD Display
9 Scale Graduation / Engg. Units
Measuring Units
10 Protection:
a Elec. Area Classification Hazardous Area for Digester Application /
Safe Area for rest application
b Intrinsically Safe Required for Hazardous Area with Safety
Barrier
c Enclosure Type & Weatherproof to IP-65 as a minimum
Protection
Class
MOC Cast Alu. or equi. as per mfr. Std. suitable
for withstanding harsh environment
Requirement Ex-Proof as per hazardous area
for Hazardous classification
Area
11 Mounting Direct on Temp. Sensor or through suitable
mounting bracket or other suitable
D. Options / Accessories:
1 Mounting Accessories Required
Brass / Polyamide
Polyamide
5 Canopy for Analyzer / To prevent Required. MOC: FRP - min. 4mm thick /
Transmitter from direct sun G.I. - min. 2mm thick
and rain
E. Consumables Bidder to Specify if required for proper

running of the instrument including
Page 487

Calibration
a)
b)
c)
F. Recommended Spares For 1 Year Bidder to submit recommended spares list

Norma along with part nos., part description and
l qty. required for 1 year normal operation
Operati along with their technical bid for
on procurement, if required, by client in future.
However, O&M spares shall be separately
include
G. Make As per approved Vendor List

Model Transmitter Bidder to Furnish
H. Quantity of Lot
Instruments:
I. Approved Vendors ABB, Emerson, Honeywell, Siemens,

Yokogawa
ORIFICE PLATES & FLANGES
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ORIFICE PLATES & FLANGES (FOR AIR FLOW

MEASUREMENT)
A. GENERAL
1 FUNCTION MEASURING ELEMENT

2 TYPE FLANGED, CONC. SQ. EDGE ORIFICE
PLATE
3 MOUNTING FLANGED
4 LINE SIZE 200MM TO 600MM, AS PER SITE
CONDITION
5 SERVICE FLUID AIR
FLUID GAS
STATE
5 OPERATING AMBIENT AMBIENT, 50 °C MAX.
TEMPERATURE
PROCESS 150°C MAX.
6 OPERATING ATM., MAX. 1 BAR, AS PER SITE
PRESSURE CONDITION (NORMALLY OPERATING
PRESSURE OF AIR BLOWERS SHALL
BE FROM 5000-7000 MMWC)
Page 488

7 INSTALLATION FIELD / OUTDOOR
8 PLATE ONLY OR ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
B. METER
1 DIFF. RANGE, IN MM BIDDER TO FURNISH
H20
2 METER MAXIMUM BIDDER TO FURNISH
C. PLATE
1 TYPE CONC. SQ. EDGE
2 SIZING AS PER ISO-5167
3 MATERIAL SS 316
4 THICKNESS 'W' MM 3MM MIN.
5 BETA = D/D BIDDER TO FURNISH
6 BORE DIA. 'D' MM BIDDER TO FURNISH
7 VENT / DRAIN, DIA. BIDDER TO FURNISH
IN MM.
8 CENTRE DIST. 'R' MM. BIDDER TO FURNISH
D. FLANGES
1 TYPE WNRF
2 TAP TYPE / SIZE FLANGE / 1/2" NPT (M)
3 NO. OF TAPS PER TWO PER FLANGE
FLANGE
4 MATERIAL CS FOR AIR SERVICE / SS 304 OR SS 316
FOR BIO-GAS SERVICE
5 SIZE & RATING BIDDER TO FURNISH / 300#
6 FACING & FINISH RF / BIDDER TO FURNISH
7 LINE SIZE - I.D./O.D., 200MM TO 600MM, AS PER SITE
IN MM. CONDITION
8 LINE - SCHEDULE SHALL BE AS PER SITE CONDITIONS
9 GASKET THICKNESS, BIDDER TO FURNISH
IN MM.
10 GASKET MATERIAL CAF / TEFLON / SS304, SUITABLE FOR
SERVICE - BIDDER TO FURNISH
11 PLATE HOLDER BIDDER TO FURNISH
12 PLATE HOLDER BIDDER TO FURNISH
MATERIAL
13 STUD BOLT A307 GR. B FOR AIR SERVICE /
MATERIAL A193GRB7 FOR BIOGAS SERVICE
14 NUT MATERIAL A307 GR. B FOR AIR SERVICE /
A194GR2H FOR BIOGAS SERVICE
E. OPTIONS /
ACCESSORIES:
1 MOUNTING REQUIRED
ACCESSORIES
Page 489

2 TAG PLATE REQUIRED, SS 304
3 VENT / DRAIN REQUIRED, AS PER APPLICATION
ARRANGEMENT
4 MODIFICATION SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE SCOPE
WORK IN PIPING / OF CONTRACTOR, AS REQUIRED, FOR
SUPPLY OF FLANGES MOUNTING AND PROPER OPERATION
ON PIPING SIDE OF ORIFICE / FLOW METER
(INCLUDES PROVIDING THE
NECESSARY STRAIGHT RUN OF
UPSTREAM/DOWNSTREAM PIPE,
TOTAL 10 MTRS LENGTH MAXIMUM,
WITH NECESSARY FLANGES ON
ORIFICE / PIPE SIDE). MOC OF
STRAIGHT RUN AND FLANGES SHALL
BE EITHER C.I. OR MSEP FOR AIR
APPLICATION. NECESSARY TUBING /
FITTINGS / ISOLATION VALVES IN SS
316 SHALL ALSO BE PROVIDED.
F. MAKE AS PER APPROVED VENDOR LIST

MODEL BIDDER TO FURNISH
G. QUANTITY OF LOT
INSTRUMENTS:
H. APPROVED ADITYA ENGG., BALIGA, DANIEL

VENDORS (USA), FAIRFLOW, GENERAL
INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM,
MICRO-PRECISION PRODUCTS,
PLACKA, STAR MECH, THEMISON
ULTRASONIC TYPE DIFF. LEVEL TRANSMITTER
ULTRASONIC DIFF. LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

A. GENERAL
1 FUNCTION INDICATING & TRANSMIT DIFF. LEVEL
2 TYPE MICRO PROCESSOR BASED
3 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS. SAFE AREA
4 SERVICE DIFF. LEVEL MEASURMENT ACROSS SCREENS
OPERATING
5 TEMPERATURE AMBIENT, MAX, 50 OC
B. TRANSMITTER
7 ENCLOSURE - MOC POLYCARBONET MFR. STD.
- PROTECTION CLASS IP-65 MIN.
Page 490

9 MEASUREMENT RANGE, M 0.3 TO 5M
11 NO. OF MEAS. CHANNELS TWO FOR DIFF. LEVEL
12 ACCURACY + 0.25% OF MAX RANGE
- CONTACT 3 NOS. SPDT RELAYS
15 CABLE ENTRY 1/2" NPT BOTTOM TO ENCLOSURE
17 PROGRAMMING THRU PROGRAMMER
C. SENSOR
NO. OF SENSORS PER
19 INSTRUMENT ONE
22 MEASUREMENT RANGE 0.3 TO 05M
23 PROCESS CONNECTION 1" NPT (M)
25 CABLE LENGTH 10 M
26 CABLE GLANDS REQUIRED
ON-LINE MLSS ANALYZER / MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MLSS (SS) ANALYZER

A. GENERAL
1 Location of Measurement To monitor concentration of mixed
liquor suspended solids (MLSS) at
Aeration Basin in each Tank /
Compartment (through necessary
sampling system)
2 Service Sewage / Sewage Sludge Application
3 Function To measure & indicate the MLSS /
Transmit
Process 40 °C Max.
5 Operating Pressure Atm., Max. 1 Bar
6 Installation Outdoor
B. Electrodes & Electrode

Holder
Page 491

1 Type of Sensor Optical type, transmitted / scattered light
measurement, colour independent
measurement
2 Measurement (Calibration) 0 -6000 mg/l or suitable higher
Range
3 Sensor Design Philosophy Shall offer colour independent
measurement i.e. eliminate effect of
coloring components
4 Sensor Cable Integral Cable or with water tight (IP-68)
connector assembly with necessary cable
5 Measuring Elements:
a Measuring Electrode Probe / Shaft SS 304 / PVC equiv. suitable as per mfr.
MOC Std.
Optical Scratch proof / resistant Glass or
Window Sapphire or equiv. as per mfr. Std.
6 Protection Class IP-68
7 Cable Length Integral or Min. 10 Mtrs. (without junction box or
for Variopin/ after junction box )
equiv. water
tight
connector
8 Process Connection Type Suitable for immersion (open tank /
(Mounting) sump) type mounting with Ball Float
Assembly or In-line pipe mounting type
with retractable sensor assembly.
For Measurement of MLSS at Open Tank /
measurement Sump shall be through suitable
on Open immersion mounting assembly along
Tank / Sump with Ball Float Assembly or with Jet
Cleaning or Wiper Cleaning assembly as
per mfr. std. or in-line type with jet
cleaning or wiper cleaning as per mfr.
Std. All associated civil, mechanical and
other modification work
shall be included in the scope of bidder.
Size 1" NPT or equiv. thread as per mfr. Std.
for immersion mounting.
Flow Required arrangement shall be
Velocity provided by bidder to limit the
maximum flow velocity of
measurement sample as permitted by
sensor specifications for proper
measurement / operation, if required.
9 Mounting Accessories
(Complete with adaptor, O
rings, etc. of suitable MOC as
required) :
Page 492

a Immersion Fitting MOC –Pipe / PP / CPVC / SS304 or suitable equi.
Fittings MOC Pipe mount immersion assembly,
with pipe of required length. Swivel /
Pivot / Pipe Clamp Assembly suitable for
hand rail mounting in SS/equi.
non-corrosive material. Shall be with
Ball Float Assembly.
b Ball Float Assembly (along MOC PP / CPVC / SS or equiv. material
with Immersion Mount
Assembly)
c Sampling system MOC / Size SS304, GI, PP or CPVC / Min. 1" size
/
-Sampling with necessary adaptor for flow
Pipe Fittings assembly.
Isolation / Required no. of SOVs for sample flow
Flow switching between various tanks and
Regulation collecting sample from atleast 3
Valves locations in each tank. Also Min.
2 nos. manually operated valves, at inlet
and outlet of sensor assembly, SS 304
shall be provided on common header.
Sampling Shall be provided of required capacity, as
Pump required as per process / site condition
for collecting flow sample from each
tank as well as from 3 locations in each
tank.
The withdrawn sample shall be suitably
transferred back to same unit or
immediate down stream -shall not be
drained / discharged in open. Pipe /
Fitting associated or grouted with civil
unit / structure shall be in GI / SS only.
10 Cleaning System Bidder may offer Jet cleaning system or
wiper cleaning system in lieu of ball float
assembly
a Jet cleaning System Type Required for electrode cleaning through
PLC, Water or Air/Water Jet combined
type, with necessary solenoid valve and
all other required fittings and
accessories. Periodic (Time Based)
cleaning to be carried out with
programmable wash time and washing
interval or based on diagnosis of Sensor
Scaling input to PLC
Nozzle / SS 304 or better
mounting /
mounting
hardware
MOC
Page 493

Tubing Nylon / equiv. flexible, non-corrosive
and long lasting tubing of min. 10 mtrs.
Length for connection with service water
header/branch line, with quick release
type fittings.
b Wiper Cleaning System Shall be self-cleaning wiper device of
silicon / other suitable MOC and
coupling as per mfr. Std. for long /
reliable life, with programmable
cleaning time intervals
11 Operating Temperature 40 °C Max.
13 Sensor Calibration Kit Required for on-site during O&M period
for periodic calibration of Sensor as per
manufacturer's recommendation. Shall
be included as part of O&M cost.
C. TRANSMITTER
1 Function Transmit and Indicate
2 No. of Inputs Single / Dual
3 Transmitter Type Microprocessor based, User
Programmable, 2-Wire or 4-Wire type as
per mfr. Std.
4 Location Field Mounting
5 MLSS Measurement:
a MLSS Measurement Range 0 -6000 mg/l or higher as per sensor
meas. range, programmable (Normal
measurement range shall be 0 -5000
mg/l)
b Accuracy + 5% of F.S. or better
c Resolution 0.1 mg/l
d Repeatability + 3% of F.S. or better
6 MLSS Calibration Semi Automatic, 1 or 2 point calibration

or as per mfr. Std. using reference /
Manual adjustment to grab sample
7 Output Signal For MLSS, 4 -20 mA analog
One per
Channel
8 Instrument Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC + 10%, 50 Hz + 5% or
24V DC as per mfr. Std.
9 Cable / Conduit Entry 1/2" NPT or M20 or equiv. as per mfr.
Std.
10 Local Indicator / Displa MLSS Backlit LCD Display
y
Measuring Units
Page 494

12 Security Access Code Required, password protected
13 Protection:
b Intrinsically Safe N.A.
c Enclosure Type & Weather Proof to IP-65 as a minimum
Protection
Class
MOC Cast Alu. / Polycarbonate or equiv. as per
mfr. Std. suitable for withstanding harsh
environment
Requirement N.A.
for
Hazardous
Area
14 Mounting Wall mounting / Pipe mounting
15 Operating Temperature 0 to 55 °C
16 Humidity 10 to 90% RH @40 °C
1 Mounting Accessories Required, Universal 2" Pipe and /or Wall
Mounting Kit
3 Cable Glands Required, IP-65/66 as a min.,
Ni-Plated Brass / Polyamide
4 Plugs for addl. cable entries Close up Plugs shall be provided for all
unused cable entries, Ni-Plated Brass /
Polyamide
5 Canopy for / To prevent Required. MOC: FRP -min. 4mm thick
Analyzer from direct sun min. / G.I. - 2mm thick
Transmitter and rain
E. UTILITIES:
1 For Cleaning Mechanism Water or Air/Water Jet

of Sensor
a Water Quality / Flow / Bidder to Specify
Pressure
b Air Quality / Flow / Bidder to Specify

Pressure
2 Any Other (Bidder to Bidder to Specify

Specify)
H. Recommended Spares For 1 Year Bidder to submit recommended spares

Normal list along with part nos., part
Page 495

Operation description and qty. required for 1 year
normal operation along with their
technical bid for procurement, if
required, by client in future. However,
O&M spares shall be separately
included by the bidder as part of
O&M cost as per tender.
I. Make As per approved Vendor List

Model Transm Bidder to Furnish
itter
Sensor Bidder to Furnish
K. Approved Vendors E+H, Emerson, Hach, Polymetron
(Forbes Marshall), Yokogawa
AUTO SAMPLER
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORTABLE AUTO SAMPLER
A. GENERAL
1 Type Portable, Waster Water / Battery / Mains

operated Liquid Sampler,
2 Location of To collect composite sample or at time
Measurement intervals (say, hourly, etc.) of Raw Sewage
(at Inlet Unit of STP), Treated Sewage (at
Treated Outlet Chamber / Channel)

4 Function To collect composite sample or at regular
time intervals
5 Operating Temperature Ambient, 50°C Max.
6 Operating Pressure Atm.
B. Sampling System
1 Sample Drawal Pump Type Positive Displacement peristaltic type pump

MOC Corrosion Resistant, Delrin or other suitable
MOC as per mfr. Std.
2 Suction Height / Lift Min. 7-8m
3 Sampling Tube Size 3/8" ID or other suitable as per mfr. Std.
MOC Silicon / Equi. Suitable
Suction hose
7-8m
length
4 Sample Volume + 5% (Typ.)
Repeatability
Page 496

5 Intake Strainer Required, suitable for Sewage Application,
SS equi. / Construction
6 Intake Line Purging Required
Facility
7 Intake Line Rinsing Required, For future use by client
Facility
8 Manual Sample Facility Required, shall initiate sample collection
independent of program in progress
9 Automatic Shutdown Required, after complete revolution of
distributor arm for multiple bottle mode and
after preset number of samples has been
delivered for composite sample mode
10 Interval between Programmable
Samples
C. CONTROLLER /
SAMPLER
ENCLOSURE
1 Type Portable, Battery Programmable / Mains

operated,
2 Sampling Modes Multiple / Composite Bottle based on time /
quantity proportion / flow
3 Sampling Program Required, Through battery backup internal
Storage lithium /
suitable
4 Sample Container With each 1 x 20 Ltrs. PE Bottle / Jar for Composite
sampler Sample with necessary Distributor Arm /
Accessories, and
With each 24 x 1 Ltrs. PE Bottles for sample at
sampler Programmed Time Intervals with necessary
Distributor Arm / Accessories
5 Power Supply:
a Power Requirement 12V DC (supplied by 12V DC and / or 12V
AC Adaptor), with necessary overload
protection
b Battery Required, Rechargeable, Lead Acid type or
other suitable
c Battery Charger Required, Integral Trickle charge type of
suitable, to maintain battery at full charge,
suitable for 230V AC Mains
d AC Adaptor Suitable for 230V AC Mains
e AC Power Backup Battery/Mains Required, auto changeover to battery on AC
Powered power failure
Only Battery Min. 1 no. of spare battery set shall along
Powered with each sampler be provided
6 Sampler Enclosure MOC High Impact ABS or other suitable for Harsh
Environment
Page 497

7 Cable / Conduit Entry 1/2" NPT or M20 or equi. As per mfr. Std.
8 Local Indicator / Display 24 character or suitable equi. alphanumeric
LCD Display. Backlit Type.
10 Protection:
Protection
Class
MOC High Impact Resistant ABS or other material
as per Mfr. Std. suitable to withstand harsh
environment
Requirement N.A.
for
Hazardous
Area
11 SDI interface Required to connect sonde for programming
the sampler to collect sample on process (pH,
DO, etc.) basis
12 Communication Preferred, RS 232 / equi. suitable for
Interface configuring and / or data transmission
13 Operating Temperature 0 to 45°C (Sampler with 40 °C max. ambient
withstanding temperature may be accepted
subject to provision of suitable weather shed
by contractor to prevent sampler from
exposure to direct sunlight & high fluctuation
in temp.)
2 Cable Glands Required, IP-65/66 as a min., Ni-Plated /
Brass Polyamide
Polyamide
4 Weather Shed / Canopy To prevent Required. MOC: FRP -min. 4mm thick / G.I.
for from - min. 2mm thick
Auto Sampler direct sun and
rain
E. UTILITIES:
1 For Purging / Rinsing Water or Air
Requirement of
Sampling
System
Page 498

a Water Quality / Flow Bidder to Specify
/Pressure
b Air Quality / Flow Bidder to Specify

/Pressure

Specify)
H. Make As per approved Vendor List
Model Bidder to Furnish
Auto samplers shall be utilized to collect necessary samples, composite or time interval based
samples as directed by engineer-in-charge, for necessary laboratory analysis.
ON-LINE TSS ANALYZER / MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TSS ANALYZER
A. GENERAL
1 Location of Measurement To monitor concentration of total suspended
solids (TSS) at following locations /
applications:
a) Inlet Chamber of STP for Raw Sewage
b) Treated Sewage Discharge

3 Function To measure & indicate the TSS / Transmit
Process 40 °C Max.
5 Operating Pressure Max. 2-3 Bar for Pump Discharge Headers /
Max. 1 Bar for Process Units, Gravity Flow,
other applications
B. Electrodes & Electrode
Holder
1 Type of Sensor Optical type, transmitted / scattered light
measurement, colour independent
measurement
2 Measurement Application 1: 0 -10 g/l i.e. 0 -1%
(Calibration) Range Low Sludge
Conc. Meas.
Application 2: 0 -50 g/l i.e. 0 -5%
Med. Sludge
Conc. Meas.
Application 3: 0 -150 g/l i.e. 0 -15%
High Sludge
Conc. Meas.
Page 499

3 Sensor Design Shall offer colour independent
Philosophy measurement i.e. eliminate effect of
coloring components, without requiring
separate calibration for colour change
4 Sensor Cable Integral Cable or with water tight (IP-68)
connector assembly with necessary cable
5 Measuring Elements:
a Measuring Electrode Probe / shaft SS 304 / PVC equi. suitable as per mfr. Std.
MOC
Optical Scratch proof / resistant Glass or Sapphire
Window or equiv. as per mfr. Std.
6 Protection Class IP-68
7 Cable Length Integral or for Min. 10 Mtrs. (without junction box or after
Variopin/ equi. junction box )
water tight
connector
8 Process Connection Type Suitable for in-line (pipe) or immersion
(Mounting) (open tank / sump) type mounting along
with wiper or jet cleaning system with
mounting as under for both this
applications:
-For Measurement of TSS on pipe line shall be
measurement through In-line mounting with retractable
on Pipe sensor assembly. All associated civil,
mechanical and other modification work
Application / Location: TSS measurements
at all locations for Application 2 (Med.
Sludge Conc) & 3 (High Sludge Conc.)
-For Measurement of TSS at Open Tank / Sump
measurement shall be through suitable immersion
on Open Tank / mounting assembly. All associated civil,
Sump mechanical and other modification work
Application / Location: TSS measurements
at all locations for Application 1 (Low
Sludge conc.)
9 Flow Velocity (In-line or Required arrangement shall be provided by
immersion type) bidder to limit the maximum flow velocity
of
measurement sample as permitted by sensor
specifications for proper measurement /
operation, if required.
10 Mounting Accessories
(Complete with adaptor,
O rings, etc. of suitable
MOC as required) :
a Immersion Fitting MOC -Pipe / PP / CPVC / SS304 or suitable equi. MOC
Page 500

Fittings Pipe mount immersion assembly, with pipe
of required length. Swivel / Pivot / Pipe
Clamp Assembly suitable for hand rail
mounting in SS/equi. non-corrosive
material.
b Retractable Assembly for MOC Shall have ball valve and extraction system
In-line mounting on pipe as per mfr. Std. Wetted parts MOC shall be
in SS 304 or better.
11 Cleaning System Bidder shall offer either Jet cleaning system
or wiper cleaning system
a Jet cleaning System Type Required for in-line electrode cleaning
through PLC, Water or Air/Water Jet
combined type, with necessary solenoid
valve and all other required fittings and
accessories. Periodic (Time Based) cleaning
to be carried out with programmable wash
time and washing interval or based on
diagnosis of Sensor Scaling input to PLC
Nozzle / SS 304 or better
mounting
/
mounting
hardware
MOC
Tubing Nylon / equi. Flexible, non-corrosive and
long lasting tubing of min. 10 mtrs. Length
for connection with service water header
/branch line, with quick release type fittings.
b Wiper Cleaning System Shall be self-cleaning wiper device of
silicon / other suitable MOC and coupling
as per mfr. Std. for long / reliable life, with
programmable cleaning time intervals
12 Operating Temperature 40 °C Max.
14 Sensor Calibration Kit Required for on-site during O&M period for
periodic calibration of Sensor as per
manufacturer's recommendation. Shall be
included as part of O&M cost.
C. TRANSMITTER
1 Function Transmit and Indicate
2 No. of Inputs Single / Dual
3 Transmitter Type Microprocessor based, User Programmable,
2-Wire or 4-Wire type as per mfr. Std.
4 Location Field Mounting
5 TSS Measurement:
a TSS Measurement Range Application 1: 0 -10 g/l i.e. 0 -1%, programmable
Low Sludge
conc. Meas.
Page 501

Bidder shall note that the normal meas.
Range for treated sewage shall be 0-50 mg/l
and instrument span shall be programmable
for the same
Application 1: 0 -50 g/l i.e. 0 -5%, programmable
Medium
Sludge
conc. Meas.
Application 1: 0 -150 g/l i.e. 0 -15%, programmable
High Sludge
conc. Meas.
b Accuracy + 5% of F.S. or better
c Resolution 0.1 mg/l
d Repeatability + 3% of F.S. or better
6 TSS Calibration Semi Automatic, 1 or 2 point calibration or
as per mfr. Std. using reference / Manual
adjustment to grab sample
7 Output Signal For TSS, One 4 -20 mA analog
per Channel
8 Instrument Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC + 10%, 50 Hz + 5% or 24V
DC as per mfr. Std.
9 Cable / Conduit Entry 1/2" NPT or M20 or equi. As per mfr. Std.
10 Local Indicator / Display TSS Backlit LCD Display
Measuring Units
13 Protection:
a Elec. Area Classification Safe / In case of hazardous area for Digester
Sludge, the sample shall be drawn through
suitable piping and instrument shall be
located in safe area.

Protection
Class
MOC Cast Alu. / Polycarbonate or equi. as per
mfr.
Std. suitable for withstanding harsh
environment
Requirement for N.A.
Hazardous
Area
14 Mounting Wall mounting / Pipe mounting
15 Operating Temperature 0 to 55 °C
16 Humidity 10 to 90% RH @40 °C
Page 502

1 Mounting Accessories Required, Universal 2" Pipe and / or
Wall
Mounting Kit
Brass / Polyamide
4 Plugs for addl. cable entries Close up Plugs shall be provided for all
unused cable entries, Ni-Plated Brass /
Polyamide
5 Canopy for / To prevent from Required. MOC: FRP -min. 4mm thick /
Analyzer direct sun and GI - min. 2mm thick
Transmitter rain
E. UTILITIES:
1 For Cleaning Mechanism Water or Air/Water Jet
of Sensor
a Water Quality / Flow / Bidder to Specify
Pressure
b Air Quality / Flow / Bidder to Specify

Pressure

Specify)
I. Make As per approved Vendor List
Model Transmitter Bidder to Furnish
Sensor Bidder to Furnish
K. Approved Vendors E+H, Emerson, Hach, Polymetron
(Forbes Marshall), Yokogawa
ON-LINE DO ANALYSER ON-LINE DISSOLVED OXYGEN (DO) ANALYSER

(WITH TWO SENSORS PER TANK)
ONLINE DO ANALYZER
A. GENERAL
1 FUNCTION INDICATE & TRANSMITE DO
2 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS SAFE
3 SERVICE TO MONITOR DO
B. TRANSMITTER
CASE-PLASTIC POLYCARBONATE FLEXIBLE
4 ENCLOSURE-MOC
POLYCARBONATE WINDOW.
PROTECTION CLASS IP65, NEMA 4
5 POWER SUPPLY 230 V AC
6 OUT PUT-SIGNAL 4-20mA, WITH HART PROTOCOL
Page 503

7 MOUNTING PIPE/WALL/PANEL
ANTI-GLARE LCD WITH A TOUCH
SCREEN:BLACK/WHITE(213 X 160) PIXELS
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT AVAILABLE
8 LOCAL DISPLAY ON THE SCREEN
9 ACCURACY + 0.05 mG/L
10 RANGE 0-20 mG/L
12 LOAD RESISTANCE 600 OHMS.
13 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1/2" Poyamide Glands
C. SENSOR
14 TYPE LUMINISCENCE TYPE METHOD
15 NO. OF SENSORS TWO SENSORS PER INSTRUMENT
16 MOUNTING INSERTION TYPE
17 CLEANING JET CLEANING / OTHER SUITABLE
HARD PVC,STAINLESS STEEL
JIS(SUS304),FLIURINATED
ETHYLENEPRO- PYLENE,NITRILE
18 MOC RUBBER,HEAT RESISTANT SOFT PVC
19 PROTECTION CLASS N.A
20 PROCESS CONNECTION DIRECT INSERTION IN TANK
21 CABLE LENGTH 10 MTR
TEMPERATURE
22 COMPENSATION INBUILT WITH PT1000 SENSOR
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
A. GENERAL
1 FUNCTION MEASURE & INDICATE GUAGE PRESSURE
2 TYPE SMART TYPE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
3 CASE HOUSING : ALUMINUM ALLOY
4 MOUNTING 2" PIPE MOUNTING
5 ENCLOSURE IP67
6 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS. SAFE
7 CABLE ENTRY 1/2" NPT (F)
8 ACCURACY BASE ACCURACY 0.075%
ZERO ELEVATION &
9 INBUILT
SUPPRESSION
B. TRANSMITTER
Page 504

10 OUTPUT 2 -WIRE, 4-20MA WITH HART PROTOCOL
11 TX. POWER SUPPLY 24 VDC
C. MEASURING UNIT
12 SERVICE GAUGE PRESSURE
13 ELEMENT TYPE DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM : SS316, HOUSING : ALUMINUM
14 BODY MATERIAL
ALLOY
15 ELEMENT MATERIAL HAST-C
16 OVERRANGE PROTECTION OVER PRESSURE LIMIT OF 210 BAR
17 PROCESS CONNECTION 1/2" NPT (F)
18 CONNECTION LOCATION BOTTOM
D. OPTIONS
19 OUTPUT METER LCD DIGITAL DISPLAY
20 MOUNTING ACCESSORIES 2" PIPE MOUNTING BRACKET
21 CABLE ENTRY 1/2" NPTF
CONDUCTIVITY ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER
1. General:
• Functional: Measure, indicate, and transmit the conductivity of the required process liquid.
• Type: Probe with electrode or electrodeless sensor.
• Parts: Element, transmitter, interconnecting cable, junction box, and expendables.
2.Performance:
• Range: as required.
• Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of measured range. Features:
• Temperature Compensation: Automatic thermocompensator of process liquid temperatures
0 to 200 degrees C.
• Temperature Slope: Adjustable from 0 to 5 percent per degree C.
3.Element:
• Type: With electrode, unless otherwise specified.
• Electrode Material: 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified.
• Other wetted Parts: Nonmetallic synthetic materials; manufacturer to confirm compatibility
with process liquid.
• Probe Constant: As required.
Page 505

• Mounting/Process Connection: As shown on the Drawings.
• Mounting Hardware: As recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application
and/or shown on the Drawings.
4. Transmitter:
• Features:
a. Indicator: LCD or LED digital display.
b. Scale Range: As required.
c. Contact Set Point: Set point adjustable from 0 to 100 percent of full range, initial setting
as required.
• Signal Interface:
a. Output: one of the following interfaces as required:
i. Profibus PA Digital Communication.
ii. 4 to 20mA DC into load resistances in the range of 0 to 600ohms without load adjustments
minimum for 24V DC supply.
b. Contacts: when required, SPST rated 3A continuous at 24V AC, minimum.
• Enclosure:
a. Type: IP 66.
b. Mounting: Wall, unless otherwise specified.
• Power:
a. Four-Wire Unit: Unless otherwise specified ; 230V AC, 50-Hz.
b. Two-Wire Unit: When required; powered from a remote 24V DC power supply.
5. Cable: Length as required to accommodate the device locations.
6. Expendables (for Each Unit Provided): One 500 ml bottle of 2,000 microS/cm conductivity
standardizing solution if appropriate for required range.
ORP ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER:
1. General:
• Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the oxidation-reduction potential (ORP)
of a process fluid.
• Type: Potentiametrically measure ORP without requiring electrolyte flow.
• Parts: Element, transmitter, interconnecting cable, junction box, and expendables.
2. Performance:
• Range: Minus 1,500mV to plus 1,500mV.
• Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.0mV.
3. Element:
• Type: With measuring and reference electrodes.
• Measuring Electrode: Platinum, field replaceable.
• Reference Electrode: Double junction type, field replaceable.
• Liquid Junction: Porous Teflon or ceramic material.
• Features: Integral preamplifier/signal conditioner.
Page 506

• Zero Stability: Plus or minus 1.0mV per month.
• Operating Conditions: Capable of withstanding up to 275kPa at 60 degrees C
minimum.
• Mounting/Process Connection: As shown on the Drawings.
• Mounting Hardware: As recommended by the manufacturer for the specific
application and/or as shown on the Drawings.
• Wetted Parts: Non-metallic synthetic materials; manufacturer to confirm
compatibility with process fluid.
• Connection Between Sensor and Cable: Protection Class IP 68.
4. Transmitter:
• Features:
a. Indicator: LCD or LED digital display.
b. Scale Range: As required.
c. Contact Set Point: When required, set point adjustable from 0 to 100 percent of
full range, initial setting as required.
d. Microprocessor based.
• Signal Interface:
a. Output: One of the following interfaces as required:
i. Profibus PA Digital Communication.
ii. 4 to 20mA DC into load resistances in the range of 0 to 600ohms without load
b. Contacts: When required, SPDT rated 2.5A continuous at 230V AC, minimum.
c. Upgradeable plug-in option for additional outputs for controlling automatic cleaning
system.
• Enclosure:
a. Type: IP 65.
b. Mounting: Wall unless otherwise specified.
• Power:
a. Four-Wire Unit: Unless otherwise specified; 230V AC, 50-Hz.
b. Two-Wire Unit: When required; powered from a remote 24V DC power supply.
5. Cable: Length as required to accommodate the device locations.
6. Junction Box:
• Quantity: For each element when required.
• Type: IP 65 with terminal block, receptacle, cable clamp adapter, and watertight
plug.
7. Expendables (for Each Unit Provided):

• Liquid Junction: One of the type required.
• Electrodes: One double junction reference electrode and one platinum measuring
electrode.
• O-Rings: One complete set of O-rings and one tube of O-ring lubricant.
• Electrolyte Solution: Quantity as required to make one complete changeout of
gel-filledsolution contained in sensor body.
TURBIDITY ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER (LOW RANGE):

Page 507

1. General:
• Function: Continuously measure, indicate and transmit a signal proportional to
turbidity of a sample stream of process fluid.
• Type: Light scatter detection measurement using a 90-degree scatter photocell
detector.
• Parts: Element, transmitter, interconnecting cable, mounting hardware and
expendables.
2. Performance:
• Range: 0-100NTU.
• Resolution: 0.001NTU
• Repeatability: Plus or minus 1.0 percent or plus or minus 0.002NTU, whichever is
greater.
• Response Time: For a full scale step change, 90 percent response in 5 minutes at
500ml/min flow.
• Required Flow: 250-750ml/min.
• Sample Fluid Temperature: 0-50 degrees C.
• Operating Temperature: 0-40 degrees C.
3. Element:
• General: Flow-through body using focused light and a photodetector cell to measure
90-degree scattered light within the fluid.
• Internal bubble trap and vent.
4. Transmitter:
• Features:
a. Indicator Range: 0-100NTU.
b. Four-digit display.
• Signal Interface: One of the following interfaces as required:
a. Profibus PA Digital Communication.
b. 4 to 20mA DC into load resistances in the range of 0 to 600ohms without load
• Enclosure:
a. Type: IP 66
b. Mounting: Wall-mounted.
• Power: 230V AC, 50-Hz.
5. Cable: 6 metre.
6. Expendables:
• Lamp Units: One for each unit provided.
• Formazin Calibration Kit: One for each unit provided.
AMMONIA ANALYSER/TRANSMITTER
1. General
• Function: Continously measure, indicate and transmit ammonia level of the required
process liquid.
• Type: Photometric or colorimetric measuring principle.
• Parts: Analyser/transmitter unit, mounting hardware, sample tubing and connections,
reagent bottle(s) if required and expendables.
Page 508

2. Performance:
• Range: 0.2 to 30 mg/l NH4-N.
• Accuracy: plus/minus 3% of full scale.
• Repeatability: Equal or better than plus/minus 2% of measured value.
• Calibration Interval: less than or equal to 72 hours programmable.
• Cleaning Interval: less than or equal to 72 hours programmable
• Maintenance Requirement: less than 30 mins per week.
• Operating temperature: 5 to 40 deg C.
3. Transmitter:
• Display: 4 digit LED display for measured value alphnumeric LCD display for
configuration.
• Output: 4-20mA galvanic isolation for ammonium measurement for each channel.
• Enclosure:
a. Type: IP43 stainless steel cabinet in 3 separate compartments for electronics, measurement
and reagents (if any).
b. Mounting: Wall or panel mounted.
• Power: 230V AC, 50 Hz
SPECIFICATONS FOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) SYSTEM:
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specifications covers the complete materials, equipment and incidentals required
to place into operation an integrated low voltage variable frequency drive (VFD)
system, electrical machines and covers all components of the engineered system.
1.2 Every variable frequency drive system shall consist of all system components required
to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this
specification. These components may include harmonic filter / power factor correction
unit, multi-pulse, phase shifting input rectifier-grade isolation transformer, VFD
converter / DC-link / inverter, and output filter/
1.3 The VFD system must
x Represent a fully integrated package
x Include all labour and material necessary to interconnect any VFD system elements like
input choke, harmonic filter, output choke, etc., even if shipped separately.
1.4 The VFD system shall have the following protection features:
x IP-54 enclosures shall be formed for a group of motors with incoming MCCB (without
protection elements) to work as isolator and requisite number of outgoing feeders, each
having individual shunt operated MPCB with S/C and O/L protection, E/F (if motor is
rated above 5.5 KW), indications on each compartment for ON/OFF/TRIP/Thermistor
Trip/EF Trip (as applicable).
x Group fault signals and status of each motor shall be annunciated in the automation system
at main control room.
x Any modifications to a standard product required to meet this specification shall be

performed by VFD manufacturer only.
Page 509

x VFD system as defined in 1.2 above shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled and
then tested as a complete package by the VFD manufacturer, to assure a properly
coordinated, fully integrated drive system.
CODES AND STANDARDS
The AC Drive shall comply with latest National and International standards and the
recommendations for electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN, UL, NFC, VDE) of:
x National Electrical Code (NEC)

x Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
x American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
x National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
x Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
x Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
x International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
x Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
x CENELEC
The AC Drive shall be of the most modern design, yet user friendly and be simple to install,
commission and maintain. The AC Drive shall be able to start and control the speed of a
standard squirrel cage induction AC motor. The AC Drives shall be :
CE marked, conforming to European Low Voltage (73/23/CEE and 93/68/CEE) and EMC
(89/336/CEE) Directives,
UL/CSA marked according to UL 508C.
The AC Drives have to be built to comply with the IEC standards.
The materials used in the AC Drive shall be recyclable, non-toxic and flame retardant. The AC
Drive shall comply with the European directive RoHS (Restriction Of Hazardous Substances)
that prohibits the use of materials such as lead, chromium 6...
PERFORMANCE
Operating Envelope
VFD shall meet the following speed and torque requirements:
The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable AC voltage / frequency output to provide
continuous operation over the normal 30-100% speed range. The VFD must be capable of
sustained operation at 1/10th speed to facilitate checkout and maintenance of the driven
equipment. As a commissioning and trouble shooting feature, the VFD power circuit shall be
capable of operating without a motor connected to the VFD output.
Page 510

VFD shall be capable of operating any standard AC motor of equivalent rating (HP and speed)
over the specified speed range.
The VFD shall be capable of momentary overload of 150% for one minute.
The VFD shall be able to produce full rated torque at any speed in the operating range (constant
torque capability).
The AC Drive in general shall be a digitally controlled drive, using, at least, the Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) with flux/sensorless vector control open loop and closed loop, with both
speed and torque control modes, an algorithm to control unbalanced loads (ENA system), and a
safety function (see chapter safety). It shall have IGBT’s in the inverter section of the
throughout the power range.
AVAILABILITY
Firing Signals All internal firing signals and other communications which link operational
controls with power components (such as status or diagnostic signals) must utilize fiber optic
cables.
Power interrupt Ride-Through The VFD system shall be capable of producing full rated torque
in the event of a power loss of 5 cycles or less.
The VFD must be capable of automatically restarting in the event of a momentary loss of
power, or a clearing of a drive trip. The VFD system shall provide the user with the choice of
automatically restarting or not.
Power Sag Ride-Through The VFD system shall be capable of continuous operation with a
30% voltage sag on the input power line.
“Catch-a-Spinning Load” Capability The VFD system must be able to catch and take control of
a spinning load if started while rotating equipment is already spinning. Appropriate safeguards
must be included in this operation to prevent damaging torques, voltages or currents from
impacting any of the equipment. The user shall have the option of employing this feature or
disabling it.
Ground Fault Withstand In the event of a ground fault, the VFD shall be capable of
annunciating the ground fault condition, safely operating and by user selection, either trip or
continue operation. As a result of a ground trip, the VFD shall be capable of being reset and
operating normally. There shall be no risk of fire or electric shock as a result of ground fault.
SERVICEABILITY / MAINTAINABILITY
Front Access
VFD system should be designed for front access only.
Remote Diagnostics
The VFD system shall be provided with the capability for remote diagnostics via modem
communication. The required hardware shall be included in the supply and shall be
Page 511

interconnected with PLC system at main control room.
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
Environmental Requirements VFD system shall be capable of continuous operation in an

average ambient temperature between -10 deg C and 60 deg C at an elevation upto 1000m
above MSL, with necessary derating, as applicable for the design of the VFD. The VFD system
shall also be simultaneously suitable for continuous operation in a maximum humidity between
o and 95% non-condensing.
Heat Dissipation / Cooling System Preferably

VFD system shall be air cooled.
Air-Cooling Requirements Air cooled VFDs shall be provided with 100% redundant fans and
automatic switchover in the event of a fan failure for enhanced reliability. If a blower fails, the
system must automatically switch to the alternate blower and generate necessary alarm at main
control room. Necessary air flow detection switches shall be provided for this purpose.
VFD system manufacturer shall provide heat dissipation data necessary to design all auxiliary
HVAC systems.
Enclosure All VFD system components including transformer shall be mounted and wired by
the VFD system manufacturer in a grounded enclosure meeting the following requirements
without exception:
Input filters, transformer, power conversion, output filters and auxiliary equipment enclosure
shall be NEMA-12 design. Air cooled units shall be NEMA-12 ventilated, IP-32 or better
degree of protection, with gasketed doors. Air cooled units hsall have cleanable filter media
covering all air inlets. Inlet air filters shall be 100% washable, front replaceable with VFD in
operation. The Medium Voltage VFD cabinet shall be 631 shade of IS:5.
STANDARD EQUIPMENT OF THE ENCLOSURE
Protection by Switch and Super Fast Fuses The Programming terminal of the AC Drive shall
be accessible for programming and controls with the main door closed. The whole assembly
shall be implemented with a strict consideration of the EMC Compatibility and Regulations as
described further in this specification. Total harmonics distortion shall comply with IEC
61800-3-12. Harmonic reduction shall be carried out with a 3% inductance or equivalent
Cables shall be handled by mechanical fixation Air output shall not be located in on the front of
the enclosure
Main power bus shall be tin plated, high conductivity copper, appropriately sized.
Refer specifications of LT Panels elsewhere in conjunction with this for further applicable
detailed specifications including those for fabrication.
VFD will be preferably kept in electrical control room with necessary provisions as per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES / DIAGNOSTICS

Page 512

Power Component Protection
VFD system shall include distribution class surge arrestors to protect input transformer and
VFD against voltage surges. These shall be integral with the drive panel cabinet.
Protective Features and Circuits
Main Protections : Over current, short circuit between phase, short circuit between phase and
ground, impendent short circuit, input phase loss, output phase loss, motor overload, over
voltage, under voltage, over speed, IGBT over temperature, heat sink over temperature, other
internal faults.
The VFD shall include a customer selectable automatic restart feature. When enabled, the VFD
shall automatically attempt to re-start after a trip condition resulting from over current, over
voltage, under voltage, or over temperature. For safety, the drive shall shut down and require a
manual reset and restart if the automatic reset/restart function is not successful within a
maximum of three attempts within a customer programmable time period. Auto-restart shall be
programmable to allow for individual fault selection. If required to provide this function, the
VFD system manufacturer must supply and mount within the VFD a separate programmable
logic controller of approve make to provide this feature.
DATA DISPLAYS / PROGRAMMING TERMINAL
A door mounted LCD display shall be furnished, capable of displaying the VFD operational
status and drive parameters. The digital display must present all diagnostic message and
parameter values in English engineering units when accessed, without the use of codes.
As a minimum the following door mounted digital indications shall be supplied: Speed demand
in % Output current in Amps. Output frequency in Hz Input Voltage Output Voltage Total
3-phase KW output Kilowatt hour meter (Digital Energy meter) Elapsed time running meter
Using a shuttle button shall carry out the navigation in the menu and the parameter setting.
Parameter setting shall be easily accessible and user friendly with actual text messages and
actual setting range.
Visibility and protection shall be selected for each parameter. Password protection shall be
provided to avoid unauthorized tampering with the set parameters.
The programming terminal shall offer the possibility of memorizing and downloading 2-4
configurations of the AC drives to save time during the commissioning and to avoid mistakes.
Preferably 4 programmable function keys shall be available for short cuts, application
functions
The AC Drive shall have self-diagnostic properties to display faults and warnings as they
occur. The fault memory shall be accessible by the programming terminal.
A FAULT LOG and HISTORY LOG for each VFD system shall be logged in HMI at main
control room. To provide necessary communication/interconnection between VFD system and
PLC system.
Page 513

Further it shall be suitable to following / have the following minimum specifications:
Operating conditions:
Rated Input Voltage : 380V -15% 480V +10%, three-phase
Rated Input Frequency : 50Hz –5% to 60Hz +5%
Fundamental Power Factor : 0.97 or better at nominal load
Efficiency : ≥ 98 % at nominal load
Output Voltage : 0 - UN, three-phase
Output Frequency Range : 0 to 1000 Hz up to 37kW (50HP), adjustable
: 0 to 500 Hz above 37kW (50HP), adjustable
Accel/Decel Time : 0.01 – 6000 s, adjustable, linear, with S,with U or
customised shapes
Operating ambient Temperature : See elsewhere of this specifications and alsoNote-1
below
Maximum operating altitude : 1000 m without derating
Max. Relative Humidity : 95 %, without condensation and drippingwater. (IEC
60068-2-3)
Max. Corrosion Level of the Cooling Air: IEC 721-3-3, class 3C1.
Chemical Gases : Coating shall be requested to comply with
IEC 721-3-3 Class 3C2.
Solid Particles : IEC 721-3-3, class 3S2
Max. Vibration Level (IEC 60068-2-6)
2 to 13 Hz : 1.5 mm, peak to peak
13 to 200 Hz : 1 m/s2
Shock Level : according to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Max. Ambient Pollution degree
according to EN 50178 : Degree 2, up to 15 kW (20 HP)
according to UL 508C : Degree 3, above 15 kW (20HP)
Control supply : could be internal so provided by the AC
Drive itself, or provided by an external 24V DC
supply
Note-1: The AC Drive shall be able to give a 100 % output current continuously in the above
specified conditions. In order to ensure that the drive can provide the required output
current in the specified ambient conditions, the Manufacturer shall inform the required
derating, if the ambient temperature given in the project-specific specification is higher
than 50 °C or if the installation altitude is more than 1000 m above the sea level. The
derating factor shall be specified so that neither the lifetime of the AC Drive nor the
unit’s performance, overload capability included, nor the reliability of the AC Drive
shall suffer.
Quality assurance
Every AC Drive has to be tested functionally. The inverter part of the AC Drive or each
inverter module at least has to be tested by running it with a motor at full nominal load. A test
report of the tests made shall be delivered by the Frequency Converter Manufacturer on
engineer’s request.
Page 514

Application programming
The AC Drive shall be designed for both simple and the most complicated applications, yet it
shall be user friendly. The AC Drive shall have built-in application macros available in the
Simply Start menu, to allow selection of the range of pre-programmed control configurations
and further, the AC Drive shall be able to store at least two customer modified
macro-configuration, to suit the specific application. It shall be possible to reset the parameter
settings back to the original macro settings through the keypad. The parameter readouts shall
be in text format and not coded.
Digital Flow indicator & Flow integrator:
Digital flow indicator and flow integrator shall be modular in design. It shall consist of two
separate dedicated backlit LCD/LED displays for flow rate indication and total flow indication.
It shall accept 4-20 mA DC input from flow transmitters. It shall have a battery back up for
flow totalizer. The flow indicator and flow totalizer shall have a facility on PCB for changing
the multiplying factor.
Digital Panel Meters:
Digital panel meters (DPM) shall be microprocessor based and modular in design. They shall
accept 4-20 mA DC signals from transmitters. The DPM’s shall provide an output of 4-20 mA
DCproportional to input signal for re-transmitting. The DPMs shall have back – lit LCD/LED
display. Digital panel meters shall provide excitation voltage to the respective transmitters.
Cabinets for Field Instruments:
A cabinet shall be provided for enclosing instrument and associated accessories which are
mounted outside the control panel such as transmitter, SPDs, Terminal blocks etc. at all
measurement locations. The cabinets for electronic indication instruments like transmitters,
flow computing units etc. mounted outdoors shall be provided with proper sunshades. It shall
be fabricated from cold rolled steel with powder sheet of standard gauge and shall be suitable
for wall mounting or pedestal mounting as required. The cabinet shall be properly painted from
inside by white paint and from outside by paint shade RAL 7032.
The cabinet shall conform to IP-65 protection and shall have built in locking facility. The
cabinet shall be earthed properly. A steel plate/pipe, as per the requirement, shall be provided
in the cabinet for mounting the instrument and accessories.
Instrument Power Supply Cables and Instrumentation Signal Cables:

Cables for Digital Signals (D.C.) and D.C. power supply to instruments:
660/1100 V grade multicore cables, multistranded high conductivity annealed 1.0 sq.mm
stranded tinned copper conductor, extruded PVC insulated, overall shielded with aluminium
mylar tape, ATC drain wire run continuously in contact with aluminium tape, inner sheathed
with extruded PVC, Armoured with galvanized steel wire overall sheathed with extruded PVC
conforming to IS: 1554 & IEC: 189 Part II.
Cables for analog signals:
Page 515

660/1100 V grade annealed, tinned, high conductivity 1.0 sq.mm stranded copper conductor,
extruded PVC insulated two/three core twisted into pair/triad, laid up collectively, individual
pair shielded and overall shielded with aluminium mylar tape, ATC drain wire run
continuously in contact with aluminium side of the tape, inner sheathed with extruded PVC,
Armoured with galvanized steel wire overall sheathed with extruded PVC conforming to IS:
1554 & IEC: 189 Part II.
Laying of Cables:
I. A distance of minimum 300 mm shall be maintained between the cables carrying low
voltage AC and DC signals and a distance of minimum 600 mm shall be maintained
between cables carrying HT and LT signals. Each instrumentation and power supply
cable shall be terminated to individual panel/Terminal box. Identification of each cable
shall be by proper ferrules at each junction as per cable schedule to be prepared by
Contractor.
II. Cables shall be laid in accordance with layout drawings and cable schedule which shall
be prepared by Contractor and submitted for Project Manager’s approval.
III. All cable routes shall be carefully measured and cable cut to the required lengths,
leaving sufficient amount for the final connection of the cable to the terminals on either
end. A loop of 1 metre shall be left near each field instrument before terminating the
cable.
IV. Cables shall be complete uncut lengths from one termination to the other.
V. All cables shall be identified close to their termination point by cable numbers as per
cable nter-connection schedules. Identification tags shall be securely fastened to the
cable at both the ends.
VI. Cable shall be rigidly supported on structural steel and masonry, using individually cast
or malleable iron galvanized clips, multiple cable supports or cable trays.
VII. The Contractor shall take the actual measurement of the cables and the measurement of
the cables and the associated accessories.
PLC - SCADA SYSTEM
Bidder to design PLC system with SCADA
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS:
CODES AND STANDARDS:

The design material, construction features, manufacture, inspection and testing of
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes. The PLC shall comply with the latest applicable standards and
codes. If any such standards are not applicable then the same shall comply with the available
recommendations of professional institutes like NEMA, IEC, ANSI, ISA, IEEE, DIN and VDE
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

a) This shall comprise of programmable systems based on operational logic for safe and semi
automatic operation of the treatment plant to produce required quality of Effluent as per the
specified parameters. PLC shall be provided as a Redundant controller with Remote io
connectivity should be a ring network to perform combinational and sequential logic functions,
status monitoring and reporting functions with counter and timer facilities, for each station.
Page 516

b) PLC shall comprise of necessary processors, Input /Output (I/O) modules, communication
interface modules and man-machine interface required to perform the desired functions.
c) PLC shall have the following attributes as a Redundant controller:

• It shall carry out sequential start/stop logic implementation for operation of the filters.
• It shall carry out computation and interfacing for data acquisition, data storage and retrieval.
• It shall accept downloaded program from a programmer.
• It shall have different functional modules to perform the desired functions.
• It shall scan the inputs in time cycles and update the status of inputs/outputs.
• To avoid spurious output because of output module failure, all commands shall be associated
with release signals. Release signals shall include information on healthiness of the hardware,
software and power supply modules.
• It shall have relays, counter/timer functions, internal registers/ flags, watch dog timer,
• set/reset facilities, up-down counter etc.
• It shall have provision for spare input and output modules.
d) The PLC system shall be expandable and shall be modular in construction so as to carry out
the future expansion without any hardware modifications.
e) The PLCs shall have analog and digital signal monitoring capability for checking the
healthiness of the signals. In case of detection of any unhealthy signal "PLC trouble" alarm
shall be generated. In case of failure of a PLC, the status of all the outputs of the PLC shall be
stay put.
f) PLC shall be 32 bit microprocessor based with state of the art technology. System
components shall be carefully chosen so that the reliability of the PLC shall be high. PLC shall
use open standard bus protocols and structures for all communication within and outside the
system.
g) The PLC used shall have a proven record in the type of application concerned and in the
prevailing environmental conditions.
h) It shall be possible to perform the simulation functions and testing the program by changing
the status of contacts and monitoring the output.
i) The PLC system shall support ‘hot swapping’ of I/O modules i.e., removal and insertion of
I/O modules under power on condition.
j) The design of system configuration and development of PLC software shall be undertaken by
the PLC manufacturer or System Integrator authorized by the PLC manufacturer.
k) The PLC system shall support rack mounted I/O modules i.e., removal and insertion of I/O
modules under power on condition.
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNITS:
a) The Central Processing Unit (CPU) shall be high performance processor with modular
configuration suitable for real time process. High inherent reliability, self checking,
error-recovery and trouble-shooting features shall be source of the features of CPU.
b) Communication between CPU and peripherals shall be by an I/O bus. The individual device,
interfaces shall be capable of being plugged into the I/O bus.
c) CPU shall have a real time clock capability to accept a time synchronization pulse from
external communication system and adjust its internal clock with the pulse.
Page 517

d) CPU shall have extensive self diagnostic facilities and watch dog timers to identify faults at
card levels. Web server for CPU Protocols setup, diagnostic and monitoring
e) Automatic restart of the system on resumption of power shall be provided.
● CPU and IO scanner module shall support Extended Temperature or higher (-25°C -
+68°C) & Conformal coating for Harsh environment.
● CPU shall support Advanced TCP/IP networking functions: NTP client, FTP client or
server, HTTP server, SOAP/XML, communication server, SNMP agent, SMTP client.
● CPU shall support multiple client connections up to 4 client connections
simultaneously with dedicated event buffer for each client.
● CPU shall have Events queue stored in RAM memory up to 100,000 events for all
clients
● CPU Shall support various modem connections
● Serial and radio modems
● GSM and PSTN modems
● IP modems (GPRS, ADSL)
● CPU shall support following Protocol Features

● Time synchronization through protocol facility or NTP
● Data synchronization on demand of the SCADA
● Balanced and unbalanced transmission mode
● Events management with time stamping - Sequence of Events (SOE)
● Events data backfill to SCADA application via protocol facility
● Report by exception data exchanges
● Unsolicited messaging data exchanges
● Protocol setup via Web page
● The controller shall support all five IEC 61131-3 programming languages:
● Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
● Functional Block Diagram (FBD)
● Ladder Diagram (LD)
● Structured Text (ST)
● Instruction List (IL)
● CPU Shall support DNP3 over UDP & TCP protocols
● CPU shall support local or remote downloading of operating system firmware
● CPU Shall support upstream communications with SCADA master stations for polling
interrogation of data,
● backfilling of time stamped event data, receiving master commands
● CPU Shall support remote diagnostic and monitoring with a built-in Web server
● CPU shall support remote programming and downloading of control program with
software through Ethernet or modem connections
MEMORY UNIT:
Page 518

a) Memory unit shall comprise of highly reliable memory chips which are industry standard,
proven design with fast random access and suitable for operation in process environments.
Main memory shall be modular and facility shall be provided for up gradation and expansion of
memory to meet future demands.
b) Sufficient program memory and data memory space shall be provided. At least 50% extra
memory space shall be provided over the actual requirements. System initialization and
application software shall be stored in EEPROM or EPROM with necessary hardware.
Running data shall be stored in a RAM with internal battery back-up. The battery back-up
provided shall last for at least one month with life of battery a minimum of 3 years. Appropriate
programs for application software modification shall be provided.
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES:
a) Standard rack mounted I/O modules with plug-in cards shall be provided. Field wiring shall
be terminated in screwed terminal blocks and interconnected to the processor I/O system with
pre-fabricated cables and plug in card type connectors.
b) 20% extra I/Os of installed capacity for each type shall be provided as spares and shall be
wired to the terminal block of the control panel. Provision shall be made for future expansion
of extra I/O modules of the installed capacity.
c) Some of the common features of the I/O modules shall be as follows:
i. All inputs shall be terminated with input protective network and necessary isolating barriers.
ii. Filters for noise rejection.
iii. Provision for isolation of faulty channels.
iv. Input /output status shall be indicated by LEDs.
v. Test points and fault indication LEDs shall be provided to carry out
vi. All the modules shall be of addressable type.
vii. Protection for continuous overload upto 20% of all input ranges.
viii. All outputs shall be provided with fuse protection and fuse failure detection. The fuses
may be mounted externally from the output module.
ix. All the modules shall be of addressable type.
x. The I/O modules shall have diagnostic features i.e., in case of failure of any I/O channel an
alarm "PLC trouble" shall be generated automatically.
xi. Internal battery back up.
d) Analog input modules
They shall consist of an input isolation unit, signal conditioning unit and an analog to digital
converter (ADC). In addition, the following features shall be provided:
i. Cross talk attenuation.
ii. Provision for monitoring of the ADC for overflow detection.
iii. Gain amplifier with high common mode rejection ratio.
iv. Accuracy for analog signals shall be minimum + 0.5%.
v. Screwed terminals with fuse and LED for indication of ‘fuse blown’ shall be provided for
each analog input.
e) Digital input modules
The following design features shall be provided.
i. Contact bounce protection.
ii. Choice of type of contacts.
iii. Screwed terminals with fuse and LED for indication of ‘fuse blown’ shall be provided for
each digital input.
● I/O Modules shall be hot swappable
Page 519

● LED indication to indicate status of field signals, card healthiness and communication
healthiness shall be provided.
● Isolation of DI with internal circuit shall be preferably 1.5KV A.C / 500V DC
● Insulation resistance should be > 10Mohms
f) Digital output modules

The digital output module shall provide contact closure output by driving relays. The features
to be provided are as follows:
i. Contact bounce protection.
ii. Relay output to operate pump motors and motorized valve actuators.
iii. Fail safe position in case of output module failure and fault indication.
● The modules shall be individually protected against continuous over-current and short
circuit
● The module shall be capable of verifying the state of each output
● Fall back state of the channel shall be configurable.
G) Analog Inputs:
● Shall be rack based and hot swappable
● Isolation of +/-300 VDC channel to channel, 1400 VDC channel to Bus and 1400 VDC
Channel to ground shall be provided.
● Suitable for 4-20mA/ 0-10V DC software configurable.
● Shall have 16 bit resolution and Measurement error shall be within 0.15% of full scale
● LED indication to indicate status of field signals, card healthiness and communication
healthiness shall be provided.
● Broken wire diagnostics shall be provided
● Software filtering shall be supported
DEFAULT VALUES:
Every operator selectable parameter shall be provided with a default value held in EPROM or
EEPROM in the relevant PLC.
The default value shall be used if no other value has been entered through the local PLC or if
the value entered through the local PLC has been lost. The default values shall be made
available for interrogation by the local PLC at all times. Sensible and logical default values
shall be inserted prior to the start of system tests. The default values at the time of handing over
the plant shall be those found operationally suitable during commissioning. The PLCs shall
make available for interrogation by the local PLC for bits corresponding to the following PLC
faults:
(a) Failure of PLC as indicated by the PLC watchdog relay;
(b) Failure of each I/O card;
(c) Failure of communication link
(d) Status of 24 V DC power supply for I&C system.
SCADA System requirement for plant :
Sr To be filled
by
Description Unit Particulars
Bidd
er
Page 520

A GENERAL
1 Description Supervisory control and Data
Acquisition System
(SCADA)
2 Make As per Approved
3 Quantity 1 Set
4 Model/Version PI. Furnish
5 Type Run time , Control &
Development
6. Computer Latest Version processor
available in the not less than 3
months older at the time of
approval, RAM Min.4 GB and
Hard disk 500 GB, 17 ENCH
LCD SCREEN WITH Keyboard,
Mouse, 4 Hour capacity of UPS,
Industrial Class Housing of
reputed make only like IBM, LG,
SUMSUNG, SIMENS, ZENITH,
WIPRO, DELL,HP
7. Platform Microsoft Windows, latest

version Windows NT or better.
B SOFTWARE
FEATURES
1 Tags Suitable for running system
successfully with necessary
reports
2 Graphics Easy to configure with support of
library, Suitable to any
resolution.
3 Animation links Animation link facility for
analog, discrete, string value, etc.
with editing facility.
4 Library Frequently used wizards/icons
with facility for conversion
AUTOCAD drawings.
5 Drivers Connectivity for network
protocols, and third party
developer (commonly used).
6 Trends Built module for Real time &
historical treand with stamping of
Tag name, min, max, avg. value,
zooming/scrolling of scale &
time, Export data facility to
excel, text. Multiple trend pages
facility, comparison facility
between actual &
predicated/Ideal values.
Page 521

7 Alarm and Events Analog/discrete type alarms,
Alarm & Event display, logging
& printing. Alarm stamping
Time, Value, status of alarm, ack.
Time, security level, interlinks,
etc. Group facility
Pop up messages, Flash
8 Messaging messages with conditions &
action to be taken details
Password protection for all
9 Password facilities. Separate levels for
Engg, Operators, Incharge
Built in report formats for daily,
10 Reports shift, weekly, efficiency, etc.
format in sheet format.
Support of Condition script
11 Condition Editor
editor for operator use
Facility to Control strategy as per
12 Control Strategy
attachment.
Minimum of 60 days for any kind
13 Storage Capacity of Date of form such as trending, reports,
etc.
C SUPPORTS
1 Hardware Pl. Furnish
2 Platform Software Pl. Furnish
Pl. Furnish
3 Laser Printer (HP/SAMSUNG/CANON
ONLY)
4 Communication TCP/IP
*Note : Data Given for Guideline Purpose & Design Purpose only
Human Machine Interface ( HMI ) Software
HMI SCADA Software shall be of Server-Client architecture and One full development
Runtime License is required.
The operator interface software, herein described as the HMI (Human Machine Interface) shall
be common for engineering and as operator works station. - an integrated package for
developing and running automation applications and also to be just running the automation
application.
The HMI shall be designed for use in Microsoft Windows NT /WINDOWS 2000/WINDOW
XP and shall use OLE, ODBC, DDE, OPC and ActiveX technologies for optimal performance
and integration with other software systems.
The HMI shall have several Methods for collecting data from programmable controllers. One
method shall rely on DDE servers. Another method shall rely on OPC servers. And still another
shall use a C-API interface through direct device tags.
Page 522

The tag database shall be organized in a hierarchy, each level represented by a folder that can
be expanded or collapsed.
The HMI shall have the ability for the current value of a tag to be updated from the device it is
connect to and stored in RAM so it is immediately accessible to all parts of the HMI.
The tag database shall provide the ability to generate tag names of up to 40 characters long. The
tag names shall be able to contain the following characteristics: A through Z, 0 through 9
underscore (_) and dash (- ).
The HMI shall have the ability to create a tag whose value is the result of an expression. The
expression can be made up of mathematical operations, tag values, if-then-else logic and other
special functions. The current value of the derived tag shall be stored in an analog, digital or
string tag in a value table.
The HMI shall provide a Macro capability that will execute system commands, user defined
commands and other macros.
The alarm system shall have the ability to monitor any analog or digital tag for alarms, up to a
maximum of 10,000 tags.
The alarm system shall have the ability to define up to eight different severity classes to
visually and audibly distinguish alarms.
The alarm system shall have the ability to use system default messages or create unique
messages to describe an alarm log messages to a file, to a printer or to both suppress alarms for
maintenance and tuning purposes and set up global alarm monitoring.
The alarm system shall provide a means of displaying up to 1000 tags that are in alarm. This
alarm summary display shall be fully configurable.
The alarm system shall have the ability to create alarm log files periodically, at specified times
and on event. This alarm log system shall have the ability to automatically purge old files after
a specified time.
The HMI shall have the ability to trigger actions based on an event that has an expression
applied to it. An expression is an equation containing tag values, mathematical operations,
if-then-else logic, or other functions. An action shall have the ability to produce a variety of
functions including, but not limited to, initiating a snapshot of tag values, displaying an error
screen and changing a tag value.
The HMI shall have the ability to allow certain users or groups of users to access only certain
parts of the system. The security shall be based on a series of codes. Each code shall allow the
users, or groups of users, with security privileges for that code to access the HMI commands
allowed by that code. Users shall be allowed to be assigned combinations of security codes,
allowing for each user to access a different set of features.
Page 523

The security system shall assign each person a user account with a login name, password, and
any desired macros. The HMI shall have a minimum of 17 different security codes.
The HMI shall provide a graphics display editor for creating displays using graphic objects.
The graphics display editor shall have the ability to drag and drop objects from a
pre-configured graphics library, paste objects that are copied to the clipboard from another
Windows application, and insert objects created by another Windows application using OLE.
The graphic display editor shall allow the user to create libraries of graphic objects.
The graphic display editor shall have the ability to attach, as a minimum, the following control
to objects: blinking colors, visibility, rotation, horizontal and vertical movement, resizing
(width and height), fill and touch.
Additional requirements
The HMI package shall be able to specifically provide the following features:
• Display status of Plant in a graphical and tabular format (i.e. running, stopped, fault etc.)
• Display Analog values on the appropriate graphic screen.
• Display status and values at other down stream pumping station as required.
• Annunciator alarms associated with the area of the plant concerned including details of the
time the alarm occurred
The HMI package shall provide following facilities for the operator Station
• Adjust process set points

• Select process modes
• Acknowledge alarms
• View a journal of unacknowledged alarms
• View a journal of the last 200 alarms acknowledged and unacknowledged.
• Display process set points
• Provide real time and historic trending of local analogue values
• Provide data archiving of all local analogue values
• Prepare daily and weekly reports (providing details of daily and weekly throughputs
against numbers of pump running hours and power usage)
• Display a total running hour’s log of local transmission pump drives.
• Any additional features required to assist in the effective and efficient operation of the STP.
• Power monitoring/management using various analogue / digital inputs provided from the
HT switchgear breakers, PMCC / MCC breakers & feeders, VFDs, etc for STP.
Graphic screens shall be provided as follows but not limited to this:
• Main and subsystem menus

• Plant / Process overview (i.e. providing details of Nos. of pumps / blowers / equipment
running, Flow, totalized flow, levels, process parameters / power supply status, etc.)
• Overview of power monitoring system
• Overview of control system
• Screens to permit viewing of process set points
Page 524

• Tabular screen of Pumping Plant status and values
• Running hours log for Pumping Station and process pumps.
The screens shall display data commensurate with their size and the area of and number of
Plant items covered. In addition to the specific screen requirements stated above, any
additional screens to ensure comprehensive coverage of the Works needs to be provided.
A comprehensive screen navigation system shall be provided giving access to all screens via a
system of menus and short cuts (i.e. it shall be possible to follow the process from one screen to
another by clicking the mouse cursor on screen ‘hotspots’ to effect the move from one screen to
another).
The sample rates required for the displaying of trends shall typically be one sample every 15
seconds for flow values and one sample every 30 seconds for levels. The system shall be
capable of storing real time data for one day and historic data for 60 days.
The sample rates for archiving shall be the same as for trending. The archives shall be stored in
daily files. The system shall provide capacity to store archives for 60 days. A warning alarm
shall be provided to the operator to advise that archiving to disk should take place or archived
data will be overwritten.
The data derived from archiving to the MMI and the archived data viewed using the trend
facility. The HMI shall have the ability to record specific tag values under certain conditions
.Several models shall define these conditions. This data that is collected shall be stored in .dbf
(dBase IV) format for displaying in trends, archiving for future processing or analysis, and/or
using with third-party software, such as FoxPro, Crystal Reports, and Microsoft Excel, for
display or analysis .It shall be possible to log historical data directly to an ODBC compliant
database
The Contractor shall provide a disc drive with the MMI in order to download archive data or to
upload previously stored archive data onto electronic storage media.
Contractor shall provide minimum of 3 sets of as-built control panel wiring drawings, PLC
logic write-up, I/O Schedule/assignment, ladder diagram and other relvant documents in hard
copy format and 3 sets in soft copy form on CDs. Soft copy format shall be in editable form to
enable incorporating any changes in future. 3 sets of application program as back-up shall also
be provided in soft form on CDs
LAPTOP CONFIGURATION :
Latest Version processor available in the not less than 3 months older at the time of
approval, RAM Min.6 GB and Hard disk 1 TB, 17 INCH LCD SCREEN WITH Keyboard,
Mouse, 4 Hour Battery Backup, Industrial Class Housing of reputed make only like IBM,
SUMSUNG, DELL,HP
LT / INSTRUMENT POWER CABLES
All power & control cables for use on medium / low voltage shall be heavy duty type,
Page 525

aluminum / copper conductor. PVC (XLPE may also be accepted) insulated, inner sheathed,
armored and overall PVC sheathed as described below.
The Power and Control cables shall have the following minimum overall cross sectional areas:
.a. Medium Voltage Power 6 sqmm (Aluminium) / 1.5 sqmm (Copper)
.b. Control Cables 1.5 / 2.5 sqmm (Copper)
Cables shall be sized based on the maximum continuous load current and the voltage drop. The
derating due to ambient air temperature, ground temperature, grouping and proximity of cables
with each other etc. shall be taken into account.
Below grade cables in paved areas shall be in concrete lined trenches with concrete covers
having proper slope and suitable drainage arrangement to avoid water collection. In unpaved
areas cables shall be in lined trenches or directly buries in ground. In hazardous areas and
transformer bays, trenches shall be completely filled up with sand. Concrete lined cable
trenches shall be sealed against ingress of liquids or gases wherever the trenches leave a
hazardous area or enter control room or substation. The cable trenches shall be sized depending
upon the number and voltage grade of cables. Where underground cables cross roadways, pipe
sleepers at grade, etc., they shall be protected by being drawn through PVC sleeves/ducts or
suitable RCC Pipes to provide a permanent crossing. Pipes laid for mechanical protection shall
be sealed at both ends.
High voltage, medium/low voltage, control and signal cables shall be separated from each
other by adequate spacing or running through independent pipes, trenches or cable trays as
applicable. Cable trays, racks and trenches shall be sized to allow for 20% future cables. Cable
installation shall provide minimum cable bending radii as recommended by cable
manufacturer.
Cable route markers shall be installed at every 30m interval all along the routes of directly
buried cable trench and also at locations where the direction of cable trench changes.
All power and control cables shall be of continuous lengths without intermediate joints. Where
joints are unavoidable, these shall be provided with the permission of Engineer-in-charge. All
cables shall carry tag numbers for easy identification. In case of control cables all cores shall be
identified at both sides by their terminal numbers using PVC ferrules as per interconnection
diagrams.
Sequential marking of the length of the cable in meters shall be provided on the outer sheath at
every one meter. The embossing/engraving shall be legible and indelible.
Control cables having 6 cores and above shall be identified with prominent and indelible
Arabic numerals on the outer surface of the insulation. Colour of the numbers shall contrast
with the colour of insulation with a spacing of maximum 50mm between two consecutive
numbers. Colour coding for cables up to 5 cores shall be as per IS.
A. Specifications for PVC Insulated Power Cables (LT / Instrument Supply)
Cables of 660V/1100V grade, multi-core cables, multi-stranded high conductivity

Page 526

annealed 1.5 / 2.5 sq.mm or higher size as specified, stranded, tinned copper conductor,
PVC insulated, PVC inner sheath, armoured with galvanised steel wire overall sheathed
with PVC, conforming to IS:1554 & IEC:189 Part I & II shall be used for instrument
power supply. (Higher diameter aluminium conductor where specified shall be of solid
conductor)
The conductors of nominal area less than 25 sq.mm shall be circular and above that it
may be circular or sector shaped.
The inner sheath shall be of vulcanized rubber proofed or plastic tap shall not be harder
than PVC used for insulation. This shall conform to requirements of type ST-1 of
IS:5831.
Armouring shall be applied over inner sheath, where specified and shall be of
galvanized steel strip as per IS 3975. The armour shall be applied as closely as possible
with left hand direction of lay. For cables having diameter over the inner sheath less
than 13 mm, the armour shall be of galvanized round steel wires or galvanised steel
strips. The dimension and resistance of armour shall be as per IS 1554 Part 1.
The outer sheath of the cable shall be applied by extrusion and shall be of black colour
PVC compound conforming to requirements of type ST-1 compound of IS. 5831. The
thickness of outer PVC sheath and its tolerance shall be as per IS 1554 (Part – I). To
protect the cable against rodent and termite attack, suitable chemicals may be added
into the PVC Compound of the outer sheath.
B Cable Accessories
All accessories like cable glands, lugs and terminal markings etc. shall be used
conforming to relevant standards / as specified. For 650/1100 V grade cables, Ni-Plated
Brass Double Compression type glands WP to IP-65 as a minimum and tinned copper
crimping type lugs shall be used.
Cable Laying
HV, MV / LV, control and signal/communication cables shall be separated from each
other by adequate spacing or by running through independent pipes, trenches or cable
trays.
Cable Laying and termination shall be such that chances of cable getting damaged are
remote.
LT cable shall be laid in cable tunnel or tray racks or buried underground with
appropriate protection. Black shall indicate the neutral, while red, yellow and blue for
three different phases. All LT cables when laid on the cable racks shall be properly
dressed and clamped as required without crisscrossing and unnecessary overlapping.
Cables shall be properly dressed and clamped.
Laying of HT and LT under ground cables.

Minimum depth of cable trench shall be 750mm for LT cables and 900mm for HT
Page 527

cables. The cables shall be protected by filling trench bottom with a layer of sand after
clearing the bottom from all rocks, stones and sharp objects, before the cables are
placed. This sand shall be leveled and cables laid over it. These cables shall be covered
with 150mm of sand on top of the largest diameter cable and sand shall be lightly
compacted. A flat protective cover of 75mm thick second class red bricks shall then be
laid and compacted and then remainder of the trench shall then be backfilled withy soil,
rammed and leveled.
In routing, necessary barriers and spacing shall be maintained for cables of different
voltages in case they lie side by side. Telephone cables shall cross the power cables
only at about right angles and these two shall not run in close proximity.
LT cables shall be bent in radius not less than 12 times their individual overall
diameters, while HT cable shall have bends not less than 15 times their individual
overall diameter.
Cable routing between cable trench and equipment/motors shall be taken through GI
pipe sleeves of adequate size. Pipe sleeves shall be laid at an angle of maximum 45 Deg
to the trench wall. Bending radii of pipes shall not be less than 8D. It is ensured that
both ends of the GI pipe sleeves shall be sealed with approved WP sealing plastic
compound after cabling. In places where it is not possible, cables shall be laid on
smaller branch trays.
All cable shall be identified close to their termination point by cable tag numbers as per
cable schedule. Cable tags shall be punched on aluminium straps (2mm thick, 20mm
wide of enough length) securely fastened to the cable and wrapped around it.
Routes of these cables shall be arrived at on the basis of the relevant drawings and after
consulting the Engineer in charge.
A distance of minimum 300 mm shall be maintained between the cables carrying low
voltage AC & DC signals and a distance of minimum 600 mm shall be maintained
between cables carrying HT & LT cables.
Identification of each cable shall be by proper ferrules at each junction as per cable
schedule to be prepared by contractor. All cables shall be identified close to their
termination point by cable numbers as per cable interconnection schedule.
Identification tags shall be securely fastened to the cables at both ends.
E Drawings and Schedules
Size of cables shall be given in singe line power diagrams. A cable schedule shall be
prepared on the basis of relevant drawings. All cables and wires shall be adequately
sized to carry continuously the normal currents expected on the relative circuits. All
trenches for electrical cables shall be separate from water or sewage pipe line trenches.
Page 528

F Splicing and Termination
Straight through joints shall be avoided. In case, these are absolutely necessary they
shall be made at convenient locations suitably protected as approved and sanctioned by
the Engineer in charge but in no case within the conduit pipes or ducts. Branch circuit
wiring shall be spliced only in switch boxes, panel switch socket outlet boxes light
fixtures outlets and circular junction boxes. They shall be made only with approved
porcelain connectors.
Cables shall be tested in accordance with IS : 1554 / 7098
Note: The cables shall be supplied, laid (below ground or above ground in trays) and provided
with necessary accessories like cable glands, lugs, etc. and terminated (at instrument, junction
box, panel, etc. as applicable) in accordance with above specifications and price quoted by
bidder shall be inclusive of all complete in all respects.
APPROVED VENDORS: CCI, Finolex, Fort Gloster, Havells, Torrent, Universal,

Associated Cables, Associated Flexibles & Wires, Brooks
Cables
Unit of Measurement: Length in Meteres (RM)
LT / Instrument Power cable including Supply, laying ( buried in Ground / Over head cable in
Cable tray), termination, etc. complete in all respects as per above specification for the
specified size of Cable.
LT / INSTRUMENT CONTROL (DIGITAL SIGNALS) CABLES
Specific requirement / specifications for control cables shall be as under:
A Specifications for Cables for digital signals:

Cables of 660V/1100V grade, multi-core cables, multi-stranded, high conductivity,
annealed, 1.5 sq.mm stranded, tinned copper conductor, PVC insulated, overall
shielded
with aluminium mylar tape, PVC inner sheath, armoured with galvanised steel wire
overall sheathed with PVC, conforming to IS:1554 & IEC:189 Part II shall be used for
digital signals.
Rest all specifications (except for Specifications for PVC Insulated Power Cables for LT /
Instrument Supply) including for supply, laying, accessories and termination shall be as
mentioned above for “LT / INSTRUMENT POWER CABLES”.
APPROVED VENDORS: CCI, Finolex, Fort Gloster, Havells, Torrent, Universal,

Associated Cables, Assocaited Flexibles & Wires, Brooks
Cables
Page 529

Control (Digital Signal) cable including Supply, laying ( buried in Ground / Over head cable
in Cable tray), termination, etc. complete in all respects as per above specification for the
specified size of Cable.
CABLES FOR ANALOG SIGNALS
Specific requirement / specifications for analog (signal) cables shall be as under:
A Cables for analog signals:

Cables shall be of 660V/1100V grade, single or multi-pair cables, annealed, tinned,
high conductivity 1.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated two cores
twisted into pair, laid up collectively, individual pair shielded and overall shielded with
aluminium mylar tape, ATC drain wire running continuously in contact with
aluminium side of the tape, PVC inner sheath, armoured with galvanised steel wire
overall sheathed with PVC, conforming to IS:1554 & IEC:189 Part II shall be used for
analog signals. Multi pair cables shall be of 6 pair or 12 pair.
Rest all specifications (except for Specifications for PVC Insulated Power Cables for LT /
mentioned above for “LT / INSTRUMENT POWER CABLES”.
APPROVED VENDORS: Associated Cables, Associated Flexibles & Wires, Brooks

Cables, Delton, Havells, Uday Pyro
Analog Signal cable including Supply, laying ( buried in Ground / Over head cable in Cable
tray), termination, etc. complete in all respects as per above specification for the specified size
of Cable.
COMMUNICATION CABLES
Communication cables suitable for supporting communication over Profibus, Serial (Modbus
Protocol), Ethernet, etc. as per the communication option selected by bidder for various
proposed analysers, instruments, VFDs, power analysers, relays and instrument, as applicable
(existing instrument / equipment where applicable shall normally be without communication
port or if available shall be with Modbus, Profibus or Ethernet communication).
Communication cables shall be shielded and shall be laid in PVC ducts of minimum 1” size
(for buried cables) / on ducts / trays (for in air / overhead cables). Bidder shall offer the price for
various communication cable options as specified in the price bid and in case bidder is opting
for any other communication option not mentioned there in, he shall quote the price in “Other
Communication” option providing all necessary details in the technical bid. However, bidder
shall note that selection of communication option other than those specified in the price bid are
subject to review of client / consultant and client reserves to reject the proposal without
Page 530

assigning any reason there of in which case bidder shall offer instrument / equipment with
communication options mentioned in the bid (Profibus, Modbus, Ethernet,). Necessary
repeaters, couplers, termination kits, converters, connectors / plugs, etc. as applicable for
connecting with necessary instrument / equipment shall be included appropriately by bidder
based on the quantity (BOM) furnished for all instrument / equipment for proposed as well as
existing instrument / equipment for necessary connection to communication network and
communicate with PLC/SCADA system
In general, cables for Ethernet shall be twisted pair with RJ45 connector, for Modbus it shall be
twisted pair, shielded cable with terminators, for Profibus-DP it shall be shielded twisted-pair
line or a fiber optic cable (with transmission standard EIA RS485).
Rest all requirements (except for Specifications for PVC Insulated Power Cables for LT /
mentioned above for “LT / INSTRUMENT POWER CABLES” as applicable.
APPROVED VENDORS: D-Link, Delton, Finolex, Lapp Cable, Molex
Communication Cable including Supply, laying ( buried in Ground / Over head cable in Cable
tray), termination, etc. complete in all respects as per above specification for the specified type
of communication.
CAST ALUMINIUM JUNCTION BOXES
Junction Box material shall be Cast Aluminium (LM-6) only and shall be weather proof to
IP-65. Flame proof junction boxes shall be supplied with Ex(d) certification in addition.
The boxes shall have terminals suitable for a minimum of 4 mm2 cable termination mounted on
rails. 20% spare terminals shall be supplied in junction boxes.
Each junction box shall have 10% or minimum 2nos., whichever is higher, spare entries of each
size. Spare entries shall be provided with plugs. Junction box shall have necessary provision /
lugs for earthing and shall have suitable tag plate.
APPROVED VENDORS: Ex-protecta, CEAG, Sudhir, Baliga
Cast Aluminium Junction Boxes along with structural support, etc. complete in all respects as
per above specification, having 20 Terminals.
Cast Aluminium Junction Boxes along with structural support, etc. complete in all respects as
per above specification, having 30 Terminals.
EARTHING PIT / STATION
Supply, Erection, Testing and commissioning of earthing station having ‘ Pipe in Pipe ’
technology using Safe Earthing Electrode. The special type back filling compound having
inherent moisture absorption characteristics must be used to make the earthing station
Page 531

maintenance free and no periodic water pouring should be required. The work shall include
excavation refilling providing manhole cover, chamber etc. the earthing station shall as per IS
3043:1987 requirements.
Earthing station shall be provided for Instrumentation / PLC / SCADA system as per above
technology. Earthing station shall be provided having G.I. electrode 3000 mm long, outer
diameter of minimum 50 mm and inner diameter of minimum 25 mm with GI earthing strip.
Multiple earth connection shall be taken from suitably located earth plates connected to earth
loop. All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc passivated.
Spring washers shall be used for all earthing connections of equipment. Unless otherwise
specified, earthing connections to individual equipment shall be done in accordance with
standard equipment earthing schedule.
Plant instrument system clean earthing, UPS system clean/safety earth shall be separate from
the electrical earthing system.
Earth connections shall be made through compression type cable lugs / by welded lugs.
All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc passivated.
Spring washers shall be used for all earthing connections and all connections adequately locked
against loosening.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT :
Provision of earthing station complete with excavation, electrode, watering pipe, soil
treatment. Masonry chamber with cast iron cover etc. shall be treated as one unit of
measurement.
TEST :
The entire earthing installation shall be tested as per requirements of Indian standard
Specification IS : 3043.
The following earth resistance values shall be measured with an approve earth megger and
recorded.
4. 1. Each earthing station.
5. 2. Earthing system as a whole.
6. 3. Earth continuity conductors
Earth conductor resistance for each earthed equipment shall be measured which shall not
exceed 5 ohm in each case.
Measurements of earth resistance shall be carried out before earth connections are made
between the earth and the object to be earthed.
All tests shall be carried out in presence of the Surat Smart City Development Limited’s
representative.
Page 532

Recommended Size of Earthing Conductors
Below are the recommended minimum sizes of earth conductors. However, Earthing
Strips/conductors, if required of higher size as per Ground Fault Calculations, should be
laid.
Type of Equipment Earth conductor size (See Note-1)
Small equipment and instrument 8 SWG GI solid wire Or through min. 1.5 sqmm earth
conductor of power cable Lighting, Power and Instrument Panels 10mm dia GI wire
rope Or 25 x 3 mm GI Strip Push Button Stations (LCS) 8 SWG GI solid wire

Page 533

29. OPERATION & MAINTANANCE (O&M)
DETAIL SPECIFICATION:
The scope of work of Operation and Maintenance work for a period of 10 years broadly covers
for the following major items of works.
[A] O & M of augmented 39 MLD SPS with PLC/SCADA.

[B] O & M of augmented 167 MLD STP with PLC/SCADA & existing Bio-Gas based Power
Generation Plant.
[C] O & M of new 40 MLD net output capacity TSTP with PLC/SCADA.
The contractor shall be responsible for smooth and satisfactory operation and maintenance of
the augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented167 MLD Sewage treatment plant and 40 MLD net
output capapcity TSTP at Dindoli on round the clock basis for a period of 10 (Ten) years from
the date of completion of trial run and commissioning of augmented 39 MLD SPS,
augmented167 MLD Sewage treatment plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP. The
contractor will also operate and maintain exisiting 2 nos. 400 KWe capacity Bio Gas Power
Generation Plant as per scope of present contract & PLC-SCADA System of the existing plant
and the proposed plant.
More specifically, the contractor shall be responsible for the following:-
1. To operate and maintain the augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented167 MLD Sewage
treatment plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP and 2 nos. 400 KWe biogas based
Power Generation Plant in accordance with the aim and purpose of treatment. The plant &
equipments covered under the above contract will be totally attended to, by the contractor
including any "Trouble shooting" to ensure smooth and trouble free operation. The scope
also includes all minor and major spares, chemical and consumables.
2. The contractor shall monitor the performance of the SPS, STP, TSTP and biogas based
power plant, conduct the analysis of the influent as well as effluent quality after treatment
and bio gas. Contractor shall initiate and take adequate actions to ensure smooth and
satisfactory performance/ running of the plants on a 24 hours/round the clock basis.
3. The contractor shall prepare and implement an effective plant maintenance programme in
consultation with Surat Smart City Development Limited. Surat Smart City Development
Limited will not provide any skilled or unskilled work force. It is an absolutely contractor's
responsibility to look after all sorts of maintenance whether preventive or break-down.
4. The contractor shall determine operating parameters for all chemical dosing as well as
chlorine dosing and generally optimize the process, and working of the sewage treatment
plant and power generation plant.
5. For the smooth running of the plant all the required equipment, machineries, units,
accessories, major and minor spares consumables for augmented 39 MLD SPS,
augmented167 MLD Sewage treatment plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP and
2 nos. 400 KWe Biogas based power plant with PLC-SCADA system including chemicals,
Page 534

consumables, all minor, major gas engine spares and engine lube oil, grease, lubricating
oils, cleaning agents, packing, rubber sheet, all hardware (S.S. stud, hot deep galvanised
nut bolt, fuel for D.G. set, rewinding works, required quantity of white wash, oil paint
colour, all types of epoxy paint, material required for housekeeping and cleaning etc. are to
be brought by the contractor. The quality of all consumable and spare (i.e. technical
requirement as per manufacture recommendation) shall remain unchanged.
6. During Operation & Maintenance tenure, all the repair and replacement related to civil
components and Roads as well as interconnecting piping shall be carried out by the
contractor without any financial implication to SMC
7. The contractor shall have to frequently / regularly clean the existing pumping and treatment
unit by manual cleaning as well as desiltitng of wet wells / sumps / tanks as a part of
preventive maintenance.
8. If the interconnecting under ground piping required to be replace as a whole (for existing
pipeline only), SMC will supply pipes only. All remaining accessories / materials and
erection / laying shall be done by the tenderer without any extra cost. However any reparing
of break down and part replacement of piprline will be contractor's responsibility.
9. The O & M scope of work also includes supply of all spares, consumables, chemicals &
standards for calibration etc. and routine as well as periodic maintenance. The successful
bidder has to maintain all the existing instruments in good working condition and also
ensure the periodic replacement of sensors / spares / consumables of all the analyzers, as
applicable.
10. The bidder shall visit the site prior to participation in the tender for proper
understanding of existing units and equipments alongwith instrumentation to quote
the tender. The SMC shall not be responsible for non-working of any equipment at
later stage and in such cases, the contractor has to bear all the necessary modification
/ reparing charges for 100% smooth running of augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented
167 MLD Sewage treatment plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP and 2 nos.
400 KWe biogas based power plant on automated system.
The details provided in this tender for existing STP facility is indicative only. The
tenderer shall have to verify the same at site and may carry out necessary
modification / repairing / alteration / upgradation for 100% smooth running of
complete augmented STP and new TSTP and biogas based power plant. The tenderer
shall have to quote their bid accordingly.
Further, the details provided in this tender is for guidance purpose only, not exhaustive and
tenderer must make site visit and obtain details of all units/machineries/plant equipments &
accessories before submitting his offer. Existing all units/machineries/plant equipments &
quantity/capacity of equipment/unit at later date shall be entertained. Further, wherever
replacement / modification / alteration / upgradation / repairing suggested in Scope of
work, the same shall have to be replaced / repaired / altered / modified and maintained.
Page 535

11. The contractor shall be responsible for keeping up-to-date record of documents including
History Card for equipments and maintaining every day log book relating to various
analysis performed. The contractor shall maintain and update logbook, in which details of
operational parameters are recorded in every shift and at regular interval say hourly or as
decided mutually. The Contractor shall maintain separate check list register for daily,
weekly, fortnightly, monthly, quarter yearly, half yearly and a yearly. Also during checking
if any abnormalities found it must be rectified by the contractor.
12. The contractor shall prepare and submit a daily report for the performance of plant and shall
assist the Surat Smart City Development Limited in preparing the necessary documents for
their purpose and records.
13. The contractor shall be responsible to carry out day to day as well as periodic maintenance,
repairs and replacements, necessary to ensure smooth and efficient performance/running of
all equipments/instruments comprising the sewage treatment plant and biogas power plant
including providing required consumables and chemicals and maintaining the record of the
same.
14. The contractor shall have to provide identity card with photograph and uniform to all staff
at STP during operation and maintenance as per factory act.
.
15. The contractor shall employ minimum following staff for operation and maintenance for
this plants which also include relievers as required.
Designation Nos. Nos. Qualification Experience

during After
augment augment
Plant Incharge 1 1 B.E.(Electrical) Min.-2 year experience in
this field
Instrumentation 0 3 B.E. (Instrumentation Min.-2 year experience in
Engineer /Electronics) this field
Supervisor 1 2 DME / DEE Min.-2 year experience in
this field
Chemist 1 3 B.Sc./ PGD in Min.-2 year experience in
Chemistry / this field
Environment / B.E.
Chemical
Fitter-cum-plant 3 6 ITI fitter Min.-2 year experience in
operator this field
Electrical 3 9 ITI Electrician Min.-2 year experience in
Technician this field
Operators 6 15 SSC pass Min.-2 year experience in
this field
Beldar 6 15 STD VII Health, Knowledge of
swimming
Safety cum 1 1 Diploma in Safety Min.-2 year experience in
Security Engineer or this field
Supervisor Equivalent
Security Guard / 9 9 STD VII and Min.-2 year experience in
Page 536

Watch man Physically Scout this field.
Garden Mali / 1 1 STD V Min.-2 year experience in
Gardener this field.
The security of the entire plant is rest with the contractor. Any unauthorized entry of
person or animal is prohibited and if found so all the liabilities of the same shall rest with
contractor.
16. Relaxation in qualification and number of staff shall not be allowed. The above staff shall
be distributed in three shifts as per mutual agreement between contractor and SMC. As per
agreement the No. of staff in each shift should always remain present otherwise penalty
towards absence of any staff shall be levied and recovered from the contractor. The relives
are included in above staff members. The arrangement of reliever for weekly off/holiday
etc. shall be made by the contractor. Absence on any ground like weekly off or holiday
shall not be considered except plant in charge and supervisor. The presence of staff in each
shift should be marked in muster to be maintained at office of shift in charge at Dindoli
Sewage Treatment Plant which shall be considered as final. The contractor's staff must
mark their presence in this muster. The contractor may maintain a separate register for his
own purpose.
17. The staff of contractor shall always remain in contact with the Assistance
Engineer/Supervisor In charge of the Surat Smart City Development Limited and follow
their instructions.
18. All the existing as well as new plantation in the campus of STP, including lawn, trees,
shrubs, plants etc. shall have to be maintained by the contractor during the Operation and
Maintenance period of ten years.
19. Unsatisfactory and inefficient running of the plant supported by the reasons which are
under control of contractor will be highly objected. In such cases SSCDL decision will be
final and binding to the contractor.
20. A technical expert of the contractor shall visit the plant on every fortnight and will suggest
if required, to improve the efficiency and working of the plant. The visit must be recorded
at SMC's document and out come of the visit/minutes of meeting should be got signed by
SMC's authorized representative without which the visit shall not be considered.
21. Contractor shall comply with all safety rules and regulations and all inter disciplinary
measures as followed by the SMC. All the necessary safety equipments, materials shall be
brought by the contractor.
22. The SMC shall not be responsible for any accident/injury to the staff of the contractor. It is
contractor's responsibility to take insurance of his employee, medical facility, work
compensation etc. as per workman compensation act and all other relevant laws. Further
the SMC will not provide any insurance, medical facility, workman compensation, etc. to
the staff of contractor.
23. All the consumables including the fuel for DG sets shall be in the scope of contractor.
Page 537

24. The contractor shall have to follow all the safety norms and procedure as per relevant
prevailing rules, code, acts etc. All the necessary safety equipments and materials shall
have to be provided to all the workers. Moreover, contractor has to follow all safety norms
and procedures as per factory acts and shall provide all the safety equipments likes Safety
Shoes, Hand Gloves, Helmets, Safety belts, SCABA (minimum 3 nos. – 30 mins. Capacity)
/ SBA sets etc. to all his staffs. Also regular safety training will be given by contractor to all
his staff through government authorized safety auditor/agency and report of same shall be
submitted to SMC. The safety audit from Authosrised Safety Auditor shall be carried out at
least once in a year and shall be subitted to SMC. On site and Off site emergency plan as per
factory act shall be prepared by contractor and shall be got approved from competent
authority during and after augmentation and shall be implemented accordingly.
25. Safety auditing shall be carried out as per prevailing government norms, by the contractor
through government certified safety auditors during construction as well as operation –
maintenance period.
26. The contractor shall have to carry out the energy audit at every three years post
commissioning of all the equipment compulsorily and whatever remedial measures
suggested by auditors shall have to carried out at free of cost.
27. Power consumption mentioned in tender data sheet shall be verified annually and if power
consumption observed more than the specified in the technical bid by contractor, SMC
shall deduct the additional power consumed at the rate and condition specified in the tender
from the RA bills of contractor.
28. Electrical and Factory license shall be obtained and renewed time to time as per the
prevailing norms, rules, code and act and all the formalities required to be completed to
obtain / to renew such license shall be carried out by contractor. The legal fees shall be paid
by SMC.
29. Once the possession of the premises is handed over to the contractor, all the responsibility
for the supervision is rest with the contractor till the plant is handed over to SMC after
expiry of period of O&M. SMC staff shall not be expected to visit the plant on day to day
basis and may monitor all the activity from Central SCADA Control Room (CSCR),
Drainage Office, Tadwadi, Rander Road, Suart and SMC Shall not be responsible for any
mishap / accident. However, SMC reserves the right to visit any time and contractor is
obliged to facilitate the same. Any suggestions / comments made during the visit shall be
dealt diligently by the Contractor.
30. Due to strike by the contractor's employees, the operation and maintenance of plant must
not be affected and the property of SMC should not be damaged. In such case any
dispute/discrepancy occur the decision of SSCDL will be final and will be binding to the
contractor. Also if any expense will be made by SMC, it will be deducted from Contractor's
bill/SD.
31. All Central/State Government/Semi-Government/Local Body's Rules and Regulations

pertaining to this contract shall be strictly followed and observed by the contractor without
any extra cost to the Surat Smart City Development Limited.
Page 538

32. Accommodation/guest house/transportation facility shall not be provided by the Surat
Smart City Development Limited to the contractor.
33. The duration of the contract shall be for 10 years after completion of the trail run and
commissioning of treatment plant. However Surat Smart City Development Limited
reserves the right to terminate the contract at any time by giving 3 months notice to the
contractor.
34. The contractor shall employ all the staff and start operation and maintenance of
exising STP till commissioning of augmented STP and new TSTP, within 3 months of
award of contract otherwise payment shall not be made. In such case period for
payment shall be reckoned from the date of employment of full nos. of staff. Furhter,
the penalty shall be also levied for non-starting the operation and maintenance and
non-deployment of necessary staff for operation-maintenance of exising STP till
commissioning of augmented STP and new TSTP. On successful trial run and
commissioning of augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented167 MLD Sewage treatment
plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP, the 10 years O&M contract will be
inforce.
35. The contractor shall provide the necessary all type of tools and tackles for plant operation
and maintenance etc.
36. The plant shall be handed over to contractor in working and good condition. The contractor
shall have to handed over the same in working and good condition to SMC. If any dispute
arise the decision of Additional City Engineer will be final and bind to contractor.
37. The scope of work also includes cleaning of complete plant complex including floor, roads,
railing, door, windows, light fixtures and ceiling etc.
38. This work is inclusive of but not limited to operation, maintenance, house keeping,
cleaning, removal of screen and grit along with dewatered sludge cake at Khajod disposal
site, preparing data, recording, correspondence work with SMC and the Government
Departments, etc. All these works shall be done as per standard practices and by following
labour, factory, electrical, GPCB, and all other old and new law and order, Indian standards
etc. as applied by Local, State and Central Govt. of India.
39. To operate and maintain the instrumentation / automation and PLC / SCADA facilities at
STP in accordance with the aim and purpose of treatment / intended process logic. The
plant & equipments covered under the above contract will be totally attended to, by the
contractor including any "Trouble shooting" to ensure smooth and trouble free operation.
40. The contractor shall monitor the operation / performance of the sewage treatment plant and
biogas based power plant at STP SCADA terminal / control room at STP campus including,
keep a vigil on alarms and attend the instrument / equipment if the alarm is pertaining to the
same (like instrument fault, need for calibration, warning on sensor life, etc.) and in case of
process related alarms shall intimate the engineer-in-charge as well as the engineer of the
contractor looking at O&M of that particular site to enable them take necessary corrective
actions. Maintenance Contractor shall initiate and take adequate actions to ensure smooth
and satisfactory performance/ running of the plants on a 24 hours/round the clock basis.
Page 539

41. The following process for collection and analysis of samples shall be followed.
The guaranteed effluent quality (For STP) shall be measured on
(i) Complete analysis of composite samples collected on 24 hour basis.
(ii) Analysis of grab samples collected at every 4 hours (except BOD5 test).
(iii) IS:2488 (methods of sampling and test for individual effluent).
The contractor shall do analysis of samples at his own cost
42. The contractor shall prepare and implement an effective plant maintenance program in
consultation with Surat Smart City Development Limited. Surat Smart City Development
Limited will not provide any skilled or unskilled work force. It is absolutely contractor's
responsibility to look after all sorts of maintenance whether preventive or break-down or
for instrument calibration.
Further, contractor shall also determine operating parameters for various process
equipment like air blower and re-circulation pumps for aeration process, sludge feed
control to mechanical dewatering device, etc. where VFDs are deployed in order to achieve
the purpose of power saving through process optimization or to ensure the smooth
operation of the process.
43. For the smooth running of the plant, all the required instruments / items, accessories, major
and minor spares, calibration kits, consumables including chemicals, grease, lubricating
oils, cleaning agents, packing, rubber sheet, all hardware (S.S. stud, hot deep galvanised
nut bolt, etc.), required quantity of oil / epoxy paint if required, material required for house
keeping and cleaning etc. are to be brought by the contractor. The quality of all consumable
and spare (i.e. technical requirement as per manufacture recommendation) shall remain
unchanged.
The fuel for DG set is included in the scope of supply of contractor.
In order to attend instrument break down, contractor shall supply / stock the spares as
mentioned in below in this section which shall be included in the cost of O&M and shall be
the property of SMC and handed over to SMC on completion of O&M period. These spares
shall be maintained in their possession and contractor shall be responsible for the
replacement of any spare used from the same within a reasonable time frame and in no case
exceeding 3 months from the date of consumption. Contractor shall procure genuine spares
only from the authorized supplier / manufacturer.
In case of any break down in instrument / equipment requiring spare which is not available
in stock, contractor shall be responsible to procure the required spare within a maximum of
7 days from the date of intimation of break down.
It shall be the duty of contractor to inform engineer-in-charge about any break down
occurring at site within 24 hours from the time of occurring of break down. The same shall
be mentioned in the site log book as well.
44. Routine / preventive / break-down maintenance of plants which includes the attending of
routine calibration checks, pump/sampling/utility line leakages, sensor life assessment /
checks, minor and major spare replacement or repairs, sensor / instrument replacement,
utility / sampling equipment maintenance, and other process of the works under present
Page 540

contract or jobs of similar nature are included in the scope of Contract. Maintenance of
instruments / automation / equipment / PLC & SCADA etc. covered under this contract,
and replacement of damaged parts or repairs of damaged parts are also included in the
scope of work. The required material for Maintenance work of will be provided by
Contractor at his own cost.
45. PAINTING:
This work is also inclusive of painting of plants as per following schedule and paint shall be of
the same specification as described in respective unit/mechanism specification.
_________________________________________________________________
Sr. No. Item Duration
__________________________________________________________________
1 Civil Work Every 4 year
2 Doors & Windows Every 4 year
3 Shutters, grills, Collapsible gate Every 1 year
4 All Process Equipment with its
accessories, and G.I. railings
etc. except pump sets. Every 1 1/2 year
5 Street/Flood light pole Every 1 year
6 All H.T./L.T. Panels Every 2 1/2 year
7 Pump sets, valves, C.I. fittings,
Sluice gate, etc. Every 2 1/2 year
____________________________________________________________________
NOTE :-
However, if any unit/mechanism will found to have some defect in paint work at any time, the
Contractor has to repaint the same under the instruction of Dy. General Manager.
46. Guilty person or indiscipline person shall not be employed by the contractor.
47. The contractor shall have to take prior permission, from S.M.C. to employ or to terminate
his personals. However, right is reserved by the SMC to instruct the contractor regarding
suspension, dismissing, termination of any person employed by him.
48. Watch & ward, safety, insurance, security, storage, housing accommodation etc. shall not
be provided by SMC. These will be responsibility of contractor.
49. Nothing is to be provided by SMC excluding sewage and electricity. All the necessary
correspondence with all the government authorities, i.e. factory inspector, electrical
inspector, GPCB, etc. for having NOC, consent, Hazard waste concern, getting
certificate/license, approval etc. shall be done by the contractor. However, necessary legal
fees (excluding penalty) to all government authorities will be borne by SMC.
50. Contractor shall have to make all the facilities for carrying out all the test of influent /
effluent at his own cost. The same shall be randomly verified and checked by SMC
whenever required.
Page 541

51. The successful bidder shall have to enter into a contract agreement for O&M along with the
contract execution agreement and shall have to deposit an amount equal to 2% of total order
value for O&M contract in form of D.D/FDR in name of Surat Smart City Development
Limited, on completion of 1 months satisfactory trial run and commissioning.
52. The quoted rate shall remain firm and valid for 10 years. However, the price escalation
shall be paid as per the formula given elsewhere in this tender.
53. The payment of O&M charges will be made every month.
54. The final bill of Capital Works shall be prepared on successful commissioning of the
Treatment Plant and its ancillary works. For the Operation and Maintenance works, the
final bill shall be prepared at the end of 3rd, 6th and 10th year of O&M. However, the
Security Deposits retained for Operation Maintenance Contract shall be released only after
the complete contract period, i.e. after 10 years.
55. The defect liability period in the tender is 12 months from the date of commissioning.
However, if SMC fails to provide sewage or electricity for 24 months after the date of issue
of partial completion certificate (for completing the whole work in the plant in all respects
except trial run/performance and commissioning), the SMC shall release the security
deposit towards the capital work. In such cases, the contractor shall have to provide safety
and security of the plant as well as the contractor shall have to deploy necessary staff for
routine maintenance, cleaning etc. The contractor shall be paid at the rate of 50% of the cost
quoted under head of the fixed cost of STP & TSTP O&M, for the first year, till the sewage
is supplied. Escalation shall be applicable, if SMC is unable to supply sewage beyond 1st
year and 1st year of Operation and maintenance shall be reckoned from supply of sewage.
However, the base year shall remain 2016-17 (financial year) for calculation of price
escalation. This charges shall be payable for general and routine maintenance,
housekeeping, safety and security of STP & TSTP.
56. The Contractor shall produce valid labour license & any other relevant license from
statutory bodies as required for this type of contract within a period of 10 days from the
date of award of the contract.
57. Successful bidder will have to follow all the provisions of P.F. Act, E.S.I. Act, etc. & have
to incorporate changes made if any during contract period also.
58. Contractor will have to strictly follow the provisions of Factory Act 1947, wages Payment
Act1936, Bonus Act 1965, Employees Provident Fund & Miscellaneous Provisions Act
1952 & other Industrial & Labour Laws with latest amendments related to this Operation &
Maintenance Work & will have to inform accordingly to the Dy. General Manager and Ex.
Engr. (Drainage). Contractor will not be given any relaxation regarding these provisions.
59. Routine / preventive / break-down maintenance of plants which includes the attending of
pump gland leakages, valve gland leakages and other process of the plant or jobs of similar
nature are included in the scope of Contract. Maintenance of pumps, motors, gearbox,
electrical control gears etc, and replacement of damaged parts or repairs of damaged parts
are also included in the scope of work. The required material for Maintenance work of will
be provided by Contractor at his own cost.
Page 542

60. All types of transportation inside and outside of plants shall be carried out by contractor
without any extra cost. Dewatered sludge, Grit, Screening material shall be disposed at
Khajod land fill site by the contractor.
61. Dose of chlorination must be maintained continuously as per site requirement and
suggested by Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage). The chlorination tonner
(with chlorine) shall be provided by Contractor & all other formality required to be
complete in this connection should be completed by the contractor.
62. In the event of major breakdown maintenance required, the fault /failure analysis report
(FAR) shall be submitted to Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage), SMC within
five days by the Contractor.
63. The service provider bills towards communication for SCADA operation shall be borne by
the SMC.
64. Unsatisfactory and inefficient running of the plant supported by the reasons, which are
under control of the contractor, will be highly objected. In such case Municipal Chairman,
SSCDL or his authorized officer’s decision will be final and binding to bidder
65. There must be one shut-down without affecting the operation of plant (i.e. using minimum
stand by capacity) of the entire plant per year which shall not be more than 2 weeks. The
Contractor has to do overhauling, cleaning, repairing etc. of all units /machineries
/equipments during shutdown. The contractor shall submit the list of activities to be done
during shutdown writing to Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage) before one
month of proposed shutdown. The contractor shall have to submit the detailed shutdown
report in writing to Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage) within a week after the
completion of shutdown procedure. In case if any dispute arises during shutdown, the
decision of Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage) will be final.
66. The contractor in co-ordination with SMC lab staff shall monitor the performance of the
STP / STP conduct the analysis of the influent as well as effluent quality after treatment.
Contractor shall initiate and take adequate actions to ensure smooth and satisfactory
performance/ running of the plants on a 24 hours/round the clock basis.
67. The Surat Smart City Development Limited shall not be responsible for any
death/accident/injury to the staff of the contractor; it is contractor’s responsibility to take
insurance of his employees, medical facility work compensation etc. as per workman
compensation act and all other relevant laws. Further the Surat Smart City Development
Limited will not provide any insurance/medical facility, workman compensation etc. to the
staff of contractor.
68. Due to strike by the contractor’s employees, the operation and maintenance of plant must
not be affected and the property of SMC should not be damaged. In such case any
dispute/discrepancies occur the decision of head of Dy. General Manager will be final and
will be binding to the contractor. Also if any expense will be made by SMC, It will be
deducted from contractor’s bill/SD
Page 543

69. All central/state government/semi government /local body’s rules and regulations
pertaining to this contract shall be strictly followed and observed by the contractor without
any extra cost to the Surat Smart City Development Limited.
70. This work is inclusive of but not limited to operation, maintenance, housekeeping,
cleaning, preparing data, recording, correspondence work with SMC and the government
departments etc. All these work shall be done as per standard practices and by following
labour, factory, electrical, GPCB and all other old and new law and order, Indian standards
etc. as applied by local, state and central government of India.
71. Bidders will have to submit Electrical license in the tender, then after only Surat Smart City
Development Limited will issue work order to the successful bidder as he will have to
maintain all the electrical equipments of the plant also. For that he may have his own firm’s
electrical contractor’s license or he may have tie up with other licensed electrical
contractor. But in that case he will have to submit the valid registered agreement of tie up
along with tender.
72. All the required electrical/mechanical major & minor spares will be provided by contractor
at his own cost.
73. Person below the age of 18 years shall not be employed for the work. Proof of age must be
submitted to this office before engaging any personnel for the work. The workers engaged
for these works must possess physical fitness.
74. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any compensation to his workmen
payable under the Workmen's Compensation Act 1923 (VIII of 1923) or any statutory
modification thereof for injuries caused to their workmen during working hour.
75. All the personals employed by the contractor for the execution of the work should be
covered under full insurance against any accident/injury. Contractor shall have to produce
all such documents before starting the work.
76. Under this contract, the contractor shall have to employ the minimum staff for daily
supervision and maintenance. Various register and records required under the law shall be
properly maintained. Contractor shall have to keep all the readings/results, records and
registers ready at the checking of SMC officials.
77. Contractor will have to employ persons having age above 18 years only. Contractor will
have to appoint another persons with same qualification in case of any employee resigns.
Contractor will have to issue identity cards to all his employees without it the concerned
person will be treated absent on duty.
78. Successful bidders will have to contribute/deduct applicable E.S.I., P.F. etc. contribution of
all the employee engaged & deposits it with his own contribution if any to the competent
authority as per law. He has to invariably follow the laws of E.S.I., P.F., & other govt.
provisions implemented/updated time.
Page 544

79. All stationary items like logbook/sheet, Check list register, Visit book register, History card
transparent /brown tap, paper weight, etc are provided by the contractor at his own cost as
directed by plant in charge.
80. The contractor shall have to submit the Initial S.D. at the rate of 2% of total contract value
for O&M work to SMC, on completion of one month trial run of the plant.
The retention money shall be deducted as per capital works clause under memorandum for
O&M work also.
All security Deposits of O & M shall be released on successful completion of O&M period
of 10 years.
81. The other terms and condition described in this complete tender documents, wherever
applicable shall remain unchanged.
82. The contractor shall have to take care of civil structures while replacing or repairing the
membranes or any other electro-mechanical items. No damage shall be done to the civil
structures. If any damage is occurred, the same shall have to be repaired by the contractor at
his own cost and SMC shall not pay any extra cost for the same.
83. PENALTY:
ii. If at any time except weekly off, plant in charge/supervisor is found absent, penalty
will be charged at following rate.
a. For the first 5 days - Rs.300.00 per day per person.

b. For the next 5 days - Rs.600.00 per day per person.
c. For the next 5 days - Rs.1000.00 per day per person.
If Plant in-charge/supervisor will remain absent for more than 15 days and if
contractor fails to make an alternate arrangement for Plant In charge/Supervisor
then necessary action shall be taken by S.M.C. and it shall be binding to the
Contractor.
iii. If, at any time present staff excluding plant in charge/supervisor is less than minimum
required staff mentioned in this tender, contractor shall be panelized at the rate of
Rs.200/- per person per day upto no limit.
iv. No equipment, shall remain ideal/un repaired or damaged for the period of 7 days. If
any equipment is not repaired, rectified and or replaced within 7 days, the contractor
shall be panelized with no limit at the rate of minimum Rs.1000/- per day (excluding
equipment of Bio-gas plant) for delay per each individual equipment of the plant.
However for long delivery spares it can be relaxed .The contractor shall have to get
sanction for such delivery period of spares in advance from engineer in charge.
v. It is considered that the biogas based power plant should be operated for minimum of
5400 Hrs. per year, which includes all types of major – minor shutdown /
maintenance schedules / repairs / replacements etc. If biogas power plant run /
Page 545

operated for less than 5400 hrs. and 1750000 KWH per year, than the contractor shall
be penalized at the rate of Rs. 500/- Per hr. or /and Rupees 4.00 per KWH of
non-operation of biogas power plant, respectively. Penalty will be levied for failure of
gauranted utilization either for hours or in terms of KWH, which ever is higher.
Penalty related to electricity generation / minimum working hours for bio gas based
power plant shall not be applicable on O&M, till commissioning of complete 167
MLD capacity augmented sewage treatment plant.
During 10 years of O&M period, there may be major scheduled maintenance/ repairs
/ replacement after specific duration / operating hours of biogas power plant, as per
manufacturers recommendation. The waiwer in the expected power generation shall
be allowed up to 90% - i.e. minimum operation of 4860 hours per year and minimum
electricity generation of 1575000 KWH per year, for that particular year, once in the
O&M period of 10 year.
vi. Contractor shall always maintain electric power factor between 0.95 PF to 1.0 PF
otherwise penalty will be deducted in contractor bills as charged by electric power
supplier company for that necessary capacitor bank shall be provided by the
contractor.
vii. Monitoring shall be done as per guideline given by Engineer-in- charge. Contractor
has to run the plant so as to maintain all the parameter of effluent within stipulated
limit, otherwise he shall be panelized for not maintaining the parameters given by
GPCB or any such government agencies and SMC. All expenditure incurred for the
same like, court fee, case fee, or the penalty as decided by Dy. General Manager,
SMC and penalty charged by GPCB will be charged to contractor and deducted from
his pending bills or S.D.
viii. Monitoring shall be done as per guideline given by Engineer-in- charge. Contractor
has to run the plant so as to maintain all the parameter of effluent within stipulated
limit and as per the operation logic / guide lines furnished by client during detailed
engineering. Predictive maintenance shall be carried out by contractor as per the
predictive maintenance program fed in the SCADA system which shall automatically
highlight / display the need of such maintenance at programmed periodicity. Non
conformance of any treatment parameter as per Technical Specifications shall be Rs. 5
per MLD per parameter non-compliance as per tender technical specification
requirements.
ix. Contractor shall have to produce the industrial grade water – tertiary treated water as
defined in the chapter 17 on process description. If he fails to supply the industrial
grade water of desired quality or quantity, due to his own reasons, he shall be
penalized at the rate of water production cost of SMC for the non supply of desired
grade quality and quantity of water.
The contractor at his own cost shall have to install, maintain and calibrate a water
meter on the transmission line in the premises of Bamroli TTP. Total output of the
TTP on yearly basis, for minimum of 330 days of operation, shall be 40 MLD
average, failing which, a penalty for the deficit quantity for that month shall be levied
Page 546

at the rate of cost of production and transmission of potable quality of SMC for that
specified month.
So far as quality is concerned, the required quantity of balance SMC water, to achieve
desired TDS for the qualityand quantity of tertiary treated water – industrial grade
water, shall be calculated theoretically, on the monthly basis, on the basis of water
mass balance for the penalty purpose and the rate of required SMC potable water, as
specified in the above para shall be applicable for recovery.
The rate of water production and transmission for first year of O & M shall be
considered as Rs.6/- per kL. The same shall be excalated on basis of Wholesale price
index as of 31st March of year revision is being made, compared to the Wholesale
price index as on 31stMarch of the year of commissioning.
Based on the past experience, it is observed that industrial effluent gets mixed with
the raw sewage and hence there may be presence of toxic material apart from the
higher organic matters. In this case, bidder shall have to consider spare UF and RO
membranes accordingly. SMC shall not pay any extra amount towards replacement of
UF and RO membranes and also for use of additional chemicals due to ingress of
industrial effluent.
x. Regarding the energy consumption, the excess consumption over and above as
specified by the contractor in this tender shall be deducted from his payment towards
O&M at actual.
84. Replacement of spares for gas engine shall be done as per the recommendation schedule of
the engine manufacturer on time to time basis.
85. Schedule of operation of the gas engine shall be decided in consultation with the engineer
in charge of SMC.
86. The SMC will only pay electricity charges and all rest of items like chemicals, spares,
consumable, manpower etc. will be born by contractor. The all taxes, duties and service tax
will be included by contractor in his quoted price.
87. The present Operation and Maintenance work is included for a period of 10 years in the
scope of work. However, SMC, may insist Bidder to carry out the O&M for a further
period after expiry of contract on mutually agreed rates and terms and conditions. For this
purpose, the Bidder may consider the cost of total / partial replacement of any of the item
looking to the prevailing conditions.
The Bidder will visit the site and check the conditions of all civil, electro-mechanical items
of the plant and consider in his O&M cost the items which needs the partial/full
replacement. On award of work, the claim by the contractor regarding non-operational of
any of the items/units will not be entertained.
Page 547

Signature of Contractor Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage)
Page 548

30. VENDOR LIST
Vendor’s List- Electrical Items
Vendor’s List- Electrical Items
SR.
PRODUCT VENDOR
NO.
(1) H.T VCB PANEL CGL, ABB, JYOTI, SIEMENS, AREVA,
SCHEINDER, BICCO LAWRIE, L & T
(2) AIR BREAK SWITCH ATLAS, PACTIL, NATIONAL, POWER SYSTEM
GUJARAT, DANKE
(3) LIGHTING ARRESTOR CGL, LAMCO, OBLUM, NATIONAL, POWER
SYSTEM GUJARAT, ATLAS
(4) D.O.FUSE ASSEMBLY ATLAS, PACTIL, NATIONAL, POWER SYSTEM
WITH FUSE GUJARAT, DANKE
(5) PIN, POST INSULATOR ATLAS, PACTIL, NATIONAL, POWER SYSTEM
GUJARAT DANKE, JAYSHREE
(6) TRANSFORMER AREVA, CROMPTON GREAVES, SIEMENS,
VOLTAMP, ABB
(7) HT PROTECTIVE L & T, SIEMENS, AREVA, ABB, ESSUN RAY
RELAYS RULL, SCHNEIDER
(8) L.T POWER CABLE CCI, UNIVERSAL, FINOLEX, INCAB,
TORRENT, HAVELLS, BHARATCAB,
GLOSTER, KEI
(9) H.T POWER CABLE CCI, UNIVERSAL, FINOLEX, INCAB,
TORRENT, HAVELLS, GLOSTER, KEI
(10) H.T, LT JOINTING KITS RAYCHEM, XICON, M-SEAL
(11) AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER L&T, SIEMENS, SCHNIDER, ABB, CONTROL &
SWITCH GEAR
(12) MCCB L&T, SIEMENS, SCHNIDER, ABB, CONTROL &
SWITCH GEAR
(13) MCB, ELCB SIEMENS, MDS, L& T, MG, INDOKOPP,
SCHNEIDER, HAGER, HAVELLS, ABB, C & S,
LAGRAND
(14) LT SWITCHGEARS L&T, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER,
TELEMECHANIQUE, ABB, CONTROL &
SWITCH GEAR
(15) SOFT STARTERS EMOTRON, SIEMENS, AB, ABB, SCHNEIDER, L
&T
(16) A.C. DRIVES SIEMENS, AB, ABB, SCHNEIDER, YASKAWA,
YOKOGAVA, DENFOSS, HITACHI
(17) ELECTRONIC TIMERS, GEC, HAGER, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER, ABB,
TIME SWITCH LEGRAND
(18) MANUAL CHANGE L & T, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER, ABB, HPL
OVER SWITCH
Page 549

SR.
PRODUCT VENDOR
NO.
(19) FUSES L&T, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER, ABB, BUSSMAN
(20) LED INDICTORS ESBEE (L & T), SIEMENS, SCHNEDIER, ABB,
RAAS CONTROL, TEKNIK, VAISHNO, BINAY
(21) PUSH BUTTON L & T, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER, ABB, RAAS
CONTROL, BINAY
(22) SELECTOR SWITCH KEYCEE, SALZER, SIEMENS
(23) EPOXY CAST RESIN C.T L & T, PACTIL, ASHMOR, KAPPA, C & S,
SILKANA, GILBERT, PRECISE
(24) ELECTRONIC MOTOR SCHNEDIER, L & T, SIEMENS, C & S, ABB,
PROTECTION DEVICE SOFTHARD
(25) CABLE TERMINATION DOVELLS, JENSON, HEX, 3D, HMI
KIT (LUGS & GLANDS)
(26) DIGITAL METERS SECURE, L & T, ABB, CONSERV, SOCOMEC,
SIEMENS, TRINITY
(27) ANALOG METERS MECO, RISHLINE, IMP, AE, RISHABH (L & T)
(28) APFC RELAYS EPCOS, KBR, L & T, DUCATII, BELLUK,
TRINITY, SCHNEIDER, ABB
(29) CAPACITOR EPCOS, SCHNEIDER, DUCATII, CROMPTON, L
& T, YESHA, KHATAU, SUBODHAN, ASIAN,
ABB.
(30) TERMINAL CONNECTWELL, WAGO, PHOENIX, ELEMAX
CONNECTOR
(31) ON LINE UPS TATA LIBERT, MERLIN GERIN, SOCOMAC,
APC
(32) SMF BATTERY PANASONIC, EXIDE, BASE, PRESTOLITE,
ROCKET, AMRON, TATA-GREEN
(33) ENGINE OF D.G. SET GREAVES, CUMMINS, LEYLAND, KIRLOKAR,
CATERPILLAR
(34) ALTERNATOR OF CROMPTON, KEC, STAMFORD
D.G.SET
(35) TOOLS & TACKELS TAPARIA
(36) TEST EQUIPMENT KUSUM, RISHABH, WACO, FLUKE,
MOTWANE
(37) PANEL BOARD CPRI &FIA APPROVED (to be got approved prior
MANUFACTURER to supply)
(38) CRIMPING TOOLS JAISON, ISMAL
(39) H.T CONNECTORS NUTAN, POWER SYSTEM GUJARAT
(40) CABLE TRAYS INDIANA, SHARDA, B.M.ENGINEERING,
TUSHARTECH, SUPERFAB, BVK ENTERPRISE
(41) COPPER / ALUMINUM DOWELS / JENSON / HEX
LUGS
(42) STREET LIGHT POLE AS PER IS
Page 550

SR.
PRODUCT VENDOR
NO.
(43) LUMINARIES PHILIPS / BAJAJ / CROMPTON / GE/SURYA
(44) SONT LAMP PHILIPS / BAJAJ / CROMPTON / GE/SURYA
(45) FLUORESCENT LIGHT PHILIPS / BAJAJ / CROMPTON / GE/SURYA
FIXTURE ETC
(46) ELECTRONICS PHILIPS / BAJAJ / CROMPTON /
BALLAST GE/OPAL/INNOVA
(47) TIME SWITCH HAGER / SIEMENS / LEGRAND / GE / ABB /
SCHNEIDER
(48) ACCESSORIES OF GEWISS / LEGRAND / MG / LK / PRECISION /
WIRING ABB / ANCHOR / JAINEX / CLIPSEL / OR
EQUIVALENT
(49) EXHAUST FAN GEC / CROMPTON / BAJAJ / ORIENT/ KHETAN
/ORTEM
(50) CEILING FAN GEC / CROMPTON / BAJAJ / ORIENT/ KHETAN /
ORTEM
** INSTRUMETATION
(51) PROGRAMMABLE ABB, HONEYWELL, ROCKWELL (ALLEN
LOGIC CONTROLLERS BRADELY), SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS
(PLC)
(52) AUXILIARY CONTROL OEN, PLA, OMRON, PHOENIX, ABB
RELAYS
(53) SIGNAL (ANALOG) ASSOCIATED CABLES, ASSOCITED
CABLES FLEXIBLES & WIRES, BROOKS CABLES,
DELTON, LAPP, FINOLEX, MOLEX, LEGRAND,
HAVELLS, UDAY PYRO, RR KABEL
(54) COMMUNICATION LAPP, D-LINK, DELTON, FINOLEX, MOLEX,
CABLES UDAY PYRO
(55) DC POWER SOURCE PHONIX, INTEX, MICROTEX, SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS, ALLEN BRADELY, OMRON, APLAB,
IFM
(56) ULTRASONIC TYPE ABB, E + H, KROHNE, SIEMENS, VEGA,
LEVEL / DIFF. LEVEL / EMERSON (ROSEMOUNT), HONEYWELL,
LOH & ROF / OPEN YOKOGAWA, WIKA
CHANNEL FLOW
TRANSMITTER
(57) RESISTANCE ABB, ALTOP, DETRIV, GENERAL
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM (GIC), WIKA
DETECTOR
(58) PRESSURE SWITCH INDFOSS
/TELEMECHANIC/WAREE/SWITZER/ABB/SIE
MENS/DENFOSS
(59) FLOAT LEVEL SWITCH ATMI, E+H, NIVELCO, P+F
(60) SMOKE DETECTOR GE, HONEYWELL, INVENSYS
Page 551

SR.
PRODUCT VENDOR
NO.
(61) CCTV STSTEM & DVR BOSCH, PELCO, SENSORMATIC, ZICOM,
SONY
(62) DIFFERENTIAL ABB / SIEMENS / YOKOGAVA / EMERSON /
PRESSURE / PRESSURE FUJI / DENFOSS
/TEMPERATURE
TRANSMITTER
(63) TEMPERATURE MASIBUS, LECTROTEK, INTAKE, ABB, FUJI
SCANNER
(64) DIFFRENTIAL ABB, E+H, KROHNE, SIEMENS, VEGA
ULTRASONIC LEVEL
TRANSMITTER
(65) ELECTROMAGNETIC SIEMENS, ABB, KROHNE MARSHALL, E+H
FLOWMETER (FULL
BORE)
(66) WATER METER ELSTER, ITRON(ACTRIS), ZENER, SAPPLE
(67) ULTRARSONIC SIEMENS, ABB, KROHNE MARSHALL, E+H,
FLOWMETER ULTRAFLUX
(68) ULTRASONIC DYNASONICS, GE PANAMETRIC (GE
PORTABLE FLOW SENSING), KROHNE (FORBES MARSHALL),
METERS (FOR PIPE POLYSONICS (THERMO ELECTRON),
LINE) SIEMENS, YOKOGAWA
(69) SCADA SOFTWARE WIN CC / WONDER WARE / RS VIEW / MONITOR
PRO / INTTELUTION / VIJEO CITECT
(70) OPERATOR SCREEN ABB / SIEMENS / SCHNEIDER MODICON / ALLEN
– BRADLEY / PRO-FACE
(71) PROCESS
SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER
INSTRUMENTS
(72) ORIFICE PLATE
BALIGA / MICRO-PRECISION / PLACKA / STAR
MECH / DANIEL
(73) FLOAT / BUOYANCY
P+F / WAAREE (IMPORTED)
SWITCH
(74) ULTRASONIC LEVEL MILITRONICS / ENDRESS HAUSER/ VEGA/KAB
TRANSMITTER / OPEN INST/BELLS CONTROLS
CHANNEL FLOW METER LTD./ELECTRONET/ISHCO
(75) PRESSURE GAUGE BELLS / H.GURU / WAREE
** LABORATORY
INSTRUMENTS
(76) PH / D.O. / RESIDUAL ABB, YOKOGAVA, FORBES MARSHALL,
CHLORINE EMERSON, E + H, HACH
ANALYSERS
Page 552

SR.
PRODUCT VENDOR
NO.
(77) POCKET HACH, ORION, YSI, RADIOMETER, DENVER,
COLORIMETER, THERMO SCIENTIFIC, WTW
PORTABLE OR
DESKTOP PH /
TURBIDITY / DO / TDS
/CONDUCTIVITY
METERS, DATA
LOGGING
PRE-PROGRAMMED
SPECTROPHOTOMETE
R, ANALYTICAL
BALANCE
(78) WATER QUALITY HACH, DKK-TOA, WTW, GLI, RADIOMETER
ANALYSERS
(TURBIDITY, FREE
RESIDUAL CHLORINE,
ETC.)
(79) TOC ANALYSER HACH, DKK-TOA, SHIDMATZU, TRL,
CHEMITEC, WTW
(80) RECORDER ABB, HONEYWELL, YOKOGAWA
(81) JAR TEST, HACH, ORBIT, LAB HOSP
AUTOCLAVE,
LABORATORY
OVEN,
BACTERIOLOGICAL
INCUBATOR, WATER
STILL
(82) AUTO SAMPLER HACH / E + H
(83) COMPUTER SYSTEM WIPRO / DELL / ACER / LENOVO / HP-COMPAQ
/IBM
Vendor’s List- Mechanical Items
SR
Product Vendor
NO.
** PUMPS
(1) NON CLOG GRUNDFOSS, AQUA, KIRLOSKAR, KISHOR,
SUBMERSIBLE WORTHINGTON (WPIL), KSB, PULLEN,ABS
PUMPS WITH GUIDE
RAIL, AUTO
COUPLING ETC.
(2) HORIZONTAL NON KSB, M&P, BEACON WEIR, KIRLOSKAR, WPIL,
CLOG PUMPS GRUNDFOSS
(3) VERTICAL NON KSB, M&P, BEACON WEIR, KIRLOSKAR, WPIL,
CLOG PUMPS GRUNDFOSS
Page 553

SR
Product Vendor
NO.
(4) VERTICAL TURBINE JYOTI, KIRLOSKAR, WORTHINGTON (WPIL),
PUMPS MATHER & PLATT, FLOW MORE.
(5) HORIZONTAL JYOTI, KIRLOSKAR, WORTHINGTON (WPIL),
SPLITCASE PUMPS MATHER & PLATT, FLOW MORE, BEACON.
(6) SUBMERSIBLE PUMP KSB, KISHORE, AQUA, GRUNDFOSS,
KIRLOSKAR, ABS, XYLEM
(7) SCREW/POSITIVE ROTO, NETZEH, TUSHACO, SEEPEX
DISPLACEMENT
TYPE PUMP
(8) SAMPLING PUMPS MAIMOON MACHINE TOOLS, TULLU,
KIRLOSKAR, CROMPTON
(9) DOSING PUMPS SWALLORE, V.K.PUMPS, SHAPOTOOLS,
SEEPEX
(10) TUBE INSTALLED XYLEM, ABS SULZER, KSB
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
** MOTORS
(11) TEFC MOTOR FOR ALSTOM, SIEMENS, ABB, NGEF, KIRLOSKAR,
MECHANICAL BHARAT BIJLEE, WEG, AEG, LOREYSOMER,
SCREEN BONFIGLOLI
(12) MOTOR KEC, JYOTI, CROMPTON, ABB, MARATHON, BB,
SIEMENS, NGEF, BHEL, HAVELLS
** VALVES, GATES ETC
(13) KNIFE EDGE GATE JASH, DEZURIK, KSB, IVC, FOURESS, ORBINOX,
VALVE BRAY
(14) NON RETURN VALVE KIRLOSKAR, IVC, IVI, SR, FOURESS, CALSENS,
AVISHKAR, UPADHYA, M & P, BRAY
(15) NON RETURN VALVE KIRLOSKAR, IVC, FOURESS, IVI, NORMAX,
(BALL TYPE) KISHOR, BRAY
(16) SLUICE VALVE &AIR KIRLOSKAR, IVC, IVI, SR, FOURESS, CALSENS,
VALVES AVISHKAR, UPADHYA, BRAY
(17) BUTTERFLY VALVE KIRLOSKAR, IVC, IVI, FOURESS, INTERVALVE,
AUDCO, BRAY
(18) DUAL PLATE CHECK ADVANCE, FLOVEL, KIRLOSKAR, IVC
VALVE
(19) METALLIC D. WREN, PRECISE ENGR. (VEDANTA), PROCO,
EXPANSION BELOFLEX
BELLOWS
(20) SLUICE GATE JASH, I.V.C., YASHWANT, IVI, BRAY
(21) ELECTRICAL BEACON ROTORK, AUMA, LIMITORK, MARSH,

ACTUATOR BRAY
(22) S.S. ELBOW PROCO, DHRUV, BELOFLEX, DWREN
(23) C.I. FITTINGS KESORAM, ELECTROSTEEL, KEJRIWAL, TISCO,

UPADHYA NEW JANTA.
** LIFTING
EQUIPMENTS
Page 554

SR
Product Vendor
NO.
(24) ELECTRIC HOIST & INDEF, MORRIS
CHAIN PULLEY
BLOCK
(25) E.O.T. CRANE ACME MFG, MUKAND, EDDY CRANES,
MORRIS, INDEF, SAYAJI, W.H.BRADY,
BATLIBOI, MEEKA MACHINARY
** PNEUMATIC
SYSTEM
(26) AIR COMPRESSOR INGERSOL RAND, KIRLOSKAR / ATLAS COPCO
(27) AIR FILTER GEM, NORGEN, ULTRA / ATLAS COPCO
(28) AIR FILTER ABB, DIVYA, JANATICS, PLACKA, SHAVO

REGULATOR NORGREN / ATLAS COPCO
(29) PPRC TUBES VECTUS, FUSION, LEGRIS
(30) PNEMATIC SCHRADDER, FESTO, SMC, NUCON

CYLINDERS
(31) SOLENOID VALVE JANATICS, SCHRADER ROTEX, ASCO
(32) LIMIT SWITCHES TATA HONEYWELL, SIEMENS, BCH
** CHLORINATORS
(33) CHLORINATOR PENNWALT, ADVANCE, CHLOROTECH, JASCO,

METITO, F & P
(34) CHLORINE PRESSURE WIKA, H. GURU, WAREE, GLUCK
GUAGE
(35) VACUUM GUAGE WIKA, H. GURU, WAREE, GLUCK
(36) CHLORINE BOOSTER GRUNDFOSS, ABS, EBARA, FLYGT, KSB,

PUMP KIRLOSKAR, WILO
(37) NRV/DIAPHRAM DPP, PARCH
VALVE
(38) INTERCONNECTING ASTRAL, SUPREME, PRINCE
PIPES
** PIPES
(39) PPRC PIPES VECTUS OR EQUIVALENT
(40) SS PIPES REMI / RATNAMANI
(41) MS / G.I.PIPES GST, AMBICA, TATA OR ANY MAKE BEARING

ISI MARK / JINDAL / ASIAN
(42) HDPE PIPES PIL, MANEKYA, DURALINE, JAIN IRRIGATION,
RIL, SANGHIR
(43) GRP PIPES GRAPHITE / EPP / CPP
Page 555

SR
Product Vendor
NO.
(44) AIR DIFFUSER OTT / EDI / OVIVO
(45) FRP PIPES & SINTEX / SUMIP /DAKLE / RANI & CO. / GANDHI
ACCESSORIES & ASSOCIATES / CPE / CHLOROTECH
(46) PVC SHEETS FINOLEX, TAINWALA / RANI & CO.
(47) PAINT ASIAN PAINTS / BERGER / SHALIMAR / DULUX
** OTHER PRODUCTS
(48) CPVC / UPVC PIPES ASTRAL / SUPREME / PRINCE
(49) AUTOMATIC JASH, HUBER-CLIMBMAX,

MECHANICAL DEGREMONT-CLIMBER, JOHNSON, VOLTAS,
COURSE BAR HYDRODYNE, BRACKETTI-GREEN, SERECO
SCREEN SRL
(50) GEAR BOX FOR MASTERGEAR, EMTROK, TRANSPOWER,
MECHANICAL MARSH, PERFECT, SUPRIYA, ELECON,
SCREEN & FOR GREAVES, CPEC, NUTEK, ESSENPRO, SANTHI,
ACTUATOR BONFIGLOLI
(51) PROCESS EMCO KCP, HINDUSTAN DORR-OLIVER,
EQUIPMENTS VOLTAS, HYDRAULIC & GENERAL
ENGINEERS, DEGREMOUNT, OVIVO, SHIVPAD
ENGINEERS PVT. LTD., HUBER, TEKNOFANGHI
/ EKOTON
(52) FINE SCREEN / MULTI JASH ENGINEERING, EGNER UMWELLTECH
RAKE BAR SCREEN NOLOGIE GMBH, SPAANS BAB COCK BV.,
VOLTAS, HUBER, JHONSON
(53) CENTRIFUGE / BELT ALFA LAVAL, HUMBOLDT WEDAG,
FILTER PRESS FLOTTWEG / GEA WESTFALIA SEPARATORS /
TEKNOFANGHI / EKOTON
(54) ASPRIRATOR WATER MATRIX, AIRE-O2, CIRCUIT SA,
AERATORS HITACHI
(55) ARCHIMEDIAN TEKNOFANGHI, ANDRITZ, SERNAGIOTTO,
SCREW THICKENER HUBER
(56) SURFACE AERATORS VOLTAS, TRIVENI, BATLIBOI
(57) BEARINGS SKF, FAG, RHP, ABC.
(58) AIR BLOWERS – SCREW GARDNER DENVER – ROBUSCHI, INGERSOLL

TYPE RAND, KAESER
(59) CENTRIFUGAL / SIEMENS / TURBO MAX / DAEHA ENGG. /
TURBO TYPE AIR KOREA FLUID MACHINERY / ATLAS COPCO
BLOWER
(60) AGITATORS / REMI, SCHURTEK GANSONS LTD., STD. ENGG.,
STIRRER / MIXER MIXRITE FIBRE & FIBRE.
(61) SUBMERSIBLE XYLEM, ABS, KBS, AIR O2-USA
MIXERS FOR
Page 556

SR
Product Vendor
NO.
ANAEROBIC /
ANOXIC REACTORS
(62) GEAR BOX RADICON, ELECON, NUTEK, SAFEX, GREAVES,
SHANTHI
(63) PRESSURE GAUGE H. GURU, BELLS, AIR MASTER, PRECISION.
(64) FRP CHEQUERED SINTEX / TRANS POWER / TRIVANI FIBER

PLATE / GRATINGS
(65) FABRICATION STEEL TATA, SAIL, ESSAR, JINDAL, RASHTRIYA ISPAT
PLATES
(66) FIXED FILM BIO BRENTWOOD-USA / OVIVO /
MEDIA NORDDEUTSCHE-GMBH
(67) RO MEMBRANE TORAY / HYDRANUATICS / OVIVO
(68) UF MEMBRANE INGE / OVIVO /KOCH / HYFLUX / TORAY /

HYDRANUATICS
(69) DISK / CLOTH MEDIA SIEMENS / AQUA AEROBIC / NORDIC / SFC /
FILTER ENVICO
(70) FILTER NOZZELS OVIVO / DEGREMONT / ECAIPL
(71) TUBE SETTLER BRENTWOOD-USA / SIEMENS / MM AQUA
(72) MANUAL STRAINER AMIAD / GOPANI / ECAIPL / ANSYS
(73) CARTRIDGE FILTER GOPANI / ANSYS / HY PRICESION OR

EQUIVALENT
(74) ACTIVATED CARBON SPINE CODE / SUNSHIL / ECAIPL
FILTER
(75) DEGASSER UNIT SPINE CODE / ECAIPL
(76) DEGASSER BLOWER LAXMI PROJECT OR EQUIVALENT
** MISCELLANEOUS
ITEMS
(77) FASTENERS PRECISION TAPS, FIT TIGHT,
F.E.DARUKHANAWALA, GKW, ECHJAY,
SUNDARAM FASTENERS, AEP& CO., TATA,
V.CHUNILAL & CO., STEEL & ALLIED,
PRECISION ENGG., .
(78) FLOAT TYPE FLOW S.B.ELECTRONICS, NIVO CONTROL (P) LTD.,
INDICATOR DG CONTROLS, IMPERIAL FLOATS
(79) REFRIGERATOR VOLTAS, GODREJ, WHIRLPOOL, VIDEOCON.
(80) AIR-CONDITIONERS VOLTAS, BLUESTAR, SAMSUNG, LG, HITACHI,

LLOYDS, CARRIER
(81) HOTAIR BLOWER WOLF, ARVY
(82) MEMBRANE GAS MEMBRANE SYSTEM EUROPE, THE

DOME / HOLDER NETHERLANDS / ECO MEMBRANE, ITALY
Page 557

Note: 1. The contractor shall distinctly understand that efficiency of equipment and energy saving is
one of the important aspect of consideration of tender. Hence, SMC hereby reserves its
right to decide final selection of make of each equipment/machineries upon the energy
saving aspect. Final options to select any particular make shall rest with S.M.C. In this
regard the decision of Divisional head of the Department will be final and no dispute of the
contractors will be entertained at a later date for the same.

Signature of Contractor
Page 558

31. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE GUIDELLINES
Centralized Preventive Maintenance Guidelines

Mechanical Item
Sr. No Items Mechanical Frequency

Preventive Maintenance Required
1. Crankcase Oil Level
2. Drain air receiver Weekly
3. Check Noise (Normal/Abnormal)
1. Operate safety Valve
2. Check Belt wear and tension
3. Blow off cylinder fins
4. Blow off intercooler fins
1 Compressor Monthly
5. Clean or replace air filter elements
6. Clean and lubricate electric motor
7. Pressure Switch Operation
8. Pressure Gauge Operation
1. Check and clean compressor valve
2. Change crankcase oil (If required) Quarterly
3. Check and tighten bolts
1. Oil Level and Grease. If required replaced
2. Check Vibration & Noise
3. Condition & Tightness of V-belts
4. Oil leakage
5. Discharge Pressure weekly
6. Cleaning of Air Filter and Air silencer
2 Blower 7. Current drawn by Motor
8. In case the environment is dusty check the filter
element
1. Functioning of Safety Valve
2. Check the filter element
Quarterly
3. Check tightening of fasteners.
4. Change of Oil
1. Lubrication in bearing / gear reducer etc.
2. Check Oil Level and Oil leakages through gear
box oil seals.
3. Stuffing Box. Monthly
4. Coupling bushes / v-belts
3 Flash Mixer 5. Check Vibrations
6. Check Shaft alignment
1. Change the Oil Six Monthly
1. Check bearing noise and replace if necessary.
2. Replace stuffing box packing / any mechanical Yearly
seal worn out component if necessary.
Page 559

3. Replace V-belts / coupling bushes, if
necessary.
1. Lubrication in bearing / gear reducer etc.
box oil seals.
3. Stuffing Box. Monthly
4. Coupling bushes / v-belts
5. Check Vibrations
4 Agitator 6. Check Shaft alignment
1. Change the Oil Six Monthly
1. Check bearing noise and replace if necessary.
2. Replace stuffing box packing / any mechanical
seal worn out component if necessary. Yearly
3. Replace V-belts / coupling bushes, if
necessary.
1. Check Oil level & all vent holes. Weekly
1. Replace Oil Six Monthly
1. Check condition of gears, oil seals & bearings
Clariflocculator/Thickner for any damage and replaced, if required.
5 / 2. Check underwater parts for adjustment and
Clarifier detoriation. Yearly
3. Protective painting/coating apply to all steel
surfaces.
4. Check tightening of all fasteners.
1. Leakage through Stuffing Box/Gland.
2. Noise/Vibrations while Opening or Closing Weekly
the valve.
1. Lubricatin of Exposed Moving Parts Six Monthly
6 Sluice Valve
1. Condition of Body Seat Ring/Wedge Seat Ring
faces-scratches, dent marks, intactness Every Three
Years
2. Condition of Spindle & Spindle nut/Yoke During O/H
sleeve threads
1. Leakage through DE/NDE ends
2. Noise/Vibrations while Opening or Closing Weekly
the valve.
7 Butterfly Valve 1. Lubricatin of Exposed Moving Parts Six Monthly
1. Condition of resilient Disc Seal-for cuts,
Every Three
deformation & resilience
Years
2. Condition of Shaft Seals-for cuts, deformation
During O/H
& resilience
1. Leakage through Valve Seat.
Weekly
2. Noise/Vibrations while Opening or Closing
8 NRV 1. Condition of Door Face/Body Ring Every Three
faces-scratches, dent marks, intactness. Years
2. Condition of Hinge Pin During O/H
Page 560

1. Leakage through gasket for small orifice nipple
2. Leakage through Rubber Seal in Low Pressure
Chamber
3. Continuous leakage through the Low Pressure
(Large) Orifice/High Pressure (Small) Weekly
9 Air Valve Orifice
4. Eventual passage of air through vent in small
orifice plug (for High Pressure Chamber)
1. Condition of Float Balls,Rubber Seal in Low
Yearly
pressure chamber.
1. Operate the gate at least once in a …… Quarterly
1. Cleaning & greasing of stem & nuts Six Monthly
10 Open Channel Gate 1. Lubricate thurst bearing & head stock
2. Overhauling of the gate Yearly
3. Painting of the gate
1. Smooth operation of the gate
2. Noise/Vibrations while Opening or Closing
Weekly
the valve.
3. Lubrication of Exposed Moving Parts
1. Condition of Spindle & Spindle nut/Yoke
sleeve threads
2. Condition of spindle guide & guide support Monthly
11 Sluice Gate 3. Check head stock foundation
4. Check and Tightening of all Fasteners
1. Check the setting & tightening of wedges Six Monthly
1. Condition of Frame Seat Ring/Gate Seat
Ring faces-scratches, dent marks, intactness
Yearly
2. Complete Overhauling of the Gate
3. Painting of the gate
box oil seals.
Weekly
2. Check tightening & alignment of Belt
3. Cleaning of Belt Conveyor
1. Lubricate all moving parts
2. Replenish oil in Gear Box, If required.
12 Belt Conveyor 3. Check tightening of Drive Chain Monthly
4. Check Belt alignment mechanism
5. Check the setting of scraper assembly
1. Replace Oil in Gear Box
2. Complete overhauling of the system
Yearly
surfaces.
A. Hydraulic Power Pack
13 Belt Filter Press Unit
1. Check Oil Level Daily
Page 561

2. Check Suction & return line filter clogging
indicators
3. Check unusual noise, vibration and rotation of
motor shaft
4. Check correct actuator/control sequence
1. Check condition of return line filter on
gauge panel
2. Check the clogging of High pressure filter Weekly
3. Check the oil condition for water
contamination
1. Check oil condition. If found not satisfactory,
Yearly
Replace the same
B. Belt Press Unit
1. Check correct rotation of drive
2. Check Hydraulic system
3. Check belt wash & belt tracking system Daily
4. Check doctor blade assembly
5. Check belt tension
1. Clean up the entire unit
2. Check oil level & leakage in Gear Box
3. Check Leakage in hydraulic system
4. Check Belt,Wash nozzle & Strainer
Weekly
5. Check pressure of belt wash system
6. Check belt condition, if found damage, repair
it, if repairable
7. Setting of doctro blade assembly
1. Check lubrication of all bearings, if required,
replenished
2. Check Operation of Roto valve Monthly
3. Check functions of hydraulic cylinders
4. Check functions of belt tracking system
1. Change Oil of gear box
2. Complete overhauling of the system
Yearly
surfaces.
1. Checking alignment of actuator with its equipment
2. Check Noise & Vibrations
Weekly
3. Check limit switch & torque switch settings
4. General cleaning of Actuator
14 Actuator 1. Check manual function of actuator
2. Check tightening of fasteners
Monthly
3. Check moisture in control section
4. Check tightening of wire terminals
1. Lubrication of actuator Yearly
Page 562

2. Painting of actuator & adaptation kit.
1. Air leakage,
2. Working of Solenoid Valve, Connectors, Piping
15 Pneumatic System (PU), Niddle valve, Air Dryer, Limit switch, Air
Cylinder of valve etc.
3. Compressor air line for its leakage / corrosion
A. Progressive Cavity Pump Set
1. Gland packing check Monthly
2. Grease lubrication of Bearings Quarterly
3.Inspection of the pumping elements
for wear & tear Yearly
B.VNC/HNC Pump Set

1. Check pressure Gauge Reading
2. Check Bearing Temperature
3. Check leakage through stuffing box Daily
4. Check noise and vibration
5. Check voltage and current
1. Check alignment of pump set
2. Check of Delivery pressure
Quarterly
3. Check Flow
4. Replenish Grease / oil to Bearing
1. Over haling (every 5000 Working Hrs.) Yearly
C. Self priming pump set
16 Pump Sets 1. Check priming time
2. Check pump noise
Monthly
3. Check All pipe connections
4. Check suction- strainer (if any)
1. Open the pump. check & clean interior parts Six Monthly
1. Check impeller
2. Check clearance between impeller and wearing
plate (Range:0,25 & 0.35 mm)
Yearly
3. Check shaft sleeve.Replace if wearied out
4. Replace Gland potting
5. Replace wear plates, if worn out
D. Submersible Pump Set
1. Check delivery pressure, current and voltage
Daily
2. Check Noise and vibrations
1. Check the oil in the chamber once every 1000
Quarterly
operating hours.
1. Check the condition of the Mechanical seals Six Monthly
1. Check clearance between Impeller and setting
Yearly
plate
Page 563

1. Over Hauling (This work is to be done by Every Three
Autho. personnel only. Years
E. VT Pump Set
1. Check Grease in thrust bearing housing (If
applicable)
2. Check oil level in lub oil tank
3. Check pressure Gauge Reading
4. Check Bearing Temperature Daily
5. Check leakage through stuffing box
6. Check noise and vibration
7. Check water level, voltage and current
1. Change of Grease in thrust bearing housing (If
applicable) Quarterly
2. Change of Gland packing
1. Change of Oil in thrust bearing housing Six Monthly
1. Over haling (every 8000 Working Hrs.) Every Three
Years
1. Check push bottom operations
Monthly
2. Check limit switch
1. Lubricate load chain wheel and load chain
2. Check brake operations
Quarterly
3. Check smooth movement of hook
4. Check oil
17 EOT/HOT Crane 1. Check oil by replaced by new
2. Check Clearance between trolley and runway
beam flange
(range : 5 to 10 mm) Yearly
3. Check wearing in chain
4. Seeking safety license / certificate from
consultant
1. Check normal function
2. Check abnormal sound from the motor or
hydraulic pump if any
3. Check leakage of oil from power pack or Daily
hydraulic connections. Tighten the
connection if necessary
4. Check nut tightening of inductive proximity
18 Step type Fine Screen switch
1. Clean up screen with pressurised water Jet.
2. Clean the hydraulic unit and conduits
3. Tighten all fasteners
4. Check the oil level in the hydraulic power Monthly
pack. Replenish if required
5. Lubricate the longitudinal slide bars of plastic
inside the slide rail
Page 564

6. Check accumulation of sand / sediments
behind the protection / guide plate and
remove the same
1. Clean up the mechanism and rest of the part. If
any part found abnormal wear, replace it.
2. Lubricate the bottom flange of the slide rails
and the wheel assembly with oil.
3. Apply white grease in between the wedges and
flap of mechanism Yearly
4. Change Hydraulic oil
5. Check leakage from piston ends of cylinder.if
leakage observed replace the seals
6. Clean thoroughly power pack unit including
tank both as well as outside
1. Observe and Check abnormal vibration in
operating condition
2. Check smooth movement of rake. if any
misalignment found, informs it concerned
authority.
3. Check the bar assembly and rack tines for Daily
waste collection. If found malfunctions,
inform to concerned authority
4. Check Home position limit switch
5. Cleaning of operating chain (if regained)
1. Check lubrication of chains. (If not well
lubricated, lubricate with oil or special
Deep water coarse Bar VISCOTAKE lubricant.
19 2. Check the motor temperature (if abnormal,
screen
inform to concern authority.) Weekly
3. Check torque switch and limit switch by
pressing for there function
4. Check trapped waste material on screen. If
found, clean it.
1. Check tightening of all fasteners
2. Check tension of chains
3. Check chain link and lock condition
4. Check the play in rack roller, bearing upper & Monthly
lower chain sprocket etc.
5. Check oil level of gear bar
6. Check brake's function of motor
1. Check oil level in gear box if required, topping
up the same.
2. Check Bearing temperature
20 Fix type Aerator 3. Check vibrating of the unit Weekly
4. Check oil leakage from oil seals
5. Check couplings
Page 565

1. Check tightening of fasteners Monthly
1. Change Gear Box lubricant oil 6 Monthly
1. Aerator cone and drive tube should be
provided with necessary surface protection
Yearly
2. Check fasteners. if corroded may be replace the
same
1. Check lubricating grase of Bearing
2. Check temperature of main rotor bearing Daily
3. Check vibrating of the unit
1. Check V-belt Tension
2. Check return duct for removing of clogging Weekly
21 Centrifuge 3. Check Control instruments
1. Check solids deposit inside of the housing Monthly
1. Check oil of fluide coupling
2. Check wearing of screw flights Six Monthly
3. Check alignment of fluide coupling
1. Cleaning of Cyclo Gear Yearly
1. Check leakage from Engine fuel system,
cooling system & lubrication seals
2. Check the altornator for obstruction in the
cooling air ventilation screen
3. Check the alternator & control box heavy
accumulation of dust & dirt Daily
4. Check fuel level &coolent level
5. Check for any abnormal noise, vibration &
high temperature
6. Check the control panel functions
1. Check the air filter
2. Check the condition of fan & alternator belt &
their tension
22 DG Set 3. Check all hose connection & hose conditions Weekly
4. Check the engine oil level
5. Check battery terminals
6. Check the battery electrolyte level
1. Cleaning of alternator
Monthly
2. Greasing of bearings of alternator
1. Check all functions of the DG sets
2. Clean battery cap vents
3. Check all functions of the instrument& control
panel Six Monthly
4. Tighting of all fasterners of DG set & control
panels
5. Change the air filter if required
Chlorinator (Vacuum 1. Check all the joints by Ammonia for any
23 Weekly
feed) leakage
Page 566

2. All the valves on gas line must be operated
irrespective of the function
3. Cleaning of the chlorinator
Note : While replacing the chlorine tonner always
use new lead gasket
1. Check all the probes on the system Quaterly
1. Paintings of pole:- Scrapping, cleaning and
coating with red oxide and two coat of aluminum Yearly
paint
Street Light Pole and
24 2. Luminaire:- Cleaning and checking for its
Luminaire Yearly
illumination level
3. Foundation of street light pole:- White wash with
Yearly
necessary civil repairing
1. Cleaning of air filters
2. General cleaning with air blower
25 Air Conditioner Yearly
3. Thermostat Checking
4. Compressor checking
1. Analyse waste oil
2. Change Oil [Oil Sump & Cooler]
3. Change Oil Filters
4. Clean Oil centrifuge filter if necessary
5. Clean metallic sponge of Oil Purifier
6. Measure crank case pressure
7. Adjust Air/Fuel ratio
Every 700
8. Adjustment of Rocker Arm and valve lifters
Hours
Measure valve height & check valve guide
clearances
9. Inspection of cylinders with Endoscope
10. Change Spark Plugs
26 Biogas Engine 11. Inspect, Clean & change(As appropriate) the
Main Air Filters
12. Check Battery acid level
13. Check Battery & Starter Connections
1. Change filter cartridge on crank case gas
circulation system.Clean Recirculation
system.
2. Measure cylinder compression
3. Verify Ignition Timing Every 2100
4. Check High Voltage wires and change if Hours
necessary
5. Check safety device and connections;
Temperature& Pressure Switches
6. Check damper Temperature
Page 567

1. Change Main & safety air filters
2. Check gaskets in rocker Arm cover & change
if necessary
3. Dis assemble,clean and adjust all speed & Every 4200
Ignition pick ups. Hours
4. ensure exhaust back pressure
5. Change coolant
1. Recondition cylinder heads
2. Check & change if necessary, valve driving
system,valve lifters, rocker arms, push
rods,ball joints, roller rocker arms and cams
3. Measure cylinder liner wear
4. Change High Voltage wires
5. Recondition turbo chargers
6. Clean the intake circuit from Air filter outlet to
Inter cooler
7. Clean Oil sump.
8. Check & clean cooling system,clean pipe
bundles,change gaskets on heat exchangers
and coolers.
9. Check general condition of water pump,
change defective parts, if any,change the seal
10. Change Oil thermostat [Only V engine] Every 8400
Hours
11. Test Thermostat of coolant circuit and change
if necessary
12. Test control and safety device, Temperatures
and pressure switches
13. Check the Butterfly valve bearings & change
if necessary.
14. Grease and check for clearance in ball joints
of speed control linkage & change if
necessary
15. Inspect flexible coupling condition and change
if necessary
16. Inspection of elastic suspension and alignment
17. Check up of electric or pneumatic starting
motor,Battery charging alternator etc.
18. Analyse the inside damper silicon
19. Change Hoses & clamps, if necessary
1. Change Pistons
2. Change Piston Rings Every 25200
Hours
3. Change Cylinder Liners
Page 568

4. Change cylinder Head Springs
5. Verify the Oil Circuitsafety and regulation
valves
6. Inspect Oil pump bushings and change if
necessary
7. Check connecting rods and change if
necessary
8. Change Con Rod bearings
9. Change connecting rod bolts(Max. of three
Retightening).Mark number of Retightening
on Bolt.
10. Change Thermostat of coolant circuit
11. Recondition water pumps of coolant circuit.
1. Engine Overhaul including its major
components and systems
2. Inspection of Cylinder Blocks
3. Crank Shaft and if necessary, Grinding of
Crank Shaft
4. Inspection of crank shaft and bushings
5. Inspection of Timing Gears and change Ball
Bearings Every 50400
6. Inspection of Oil Pump, Check gears and Hours
change Bushings
7. Change the counterweight Fixing screws.
8. Change Damper
9. Overall Inspection of coolant, Oil, Gas, intake
air, exhaust gas, automation systems, wiring
etc, Change if necessary
10. Change Turbo Chargers
Sr. Electrical & Instrumentation

Item Frequency
No. Preventive Maintenance Required
Tighten if found loose
Complete Circuit Clean with Air blower & clean the
1
breaker accessible parts by dry lint free cloth.
HT Panel (Breaker)
Remove cause and replace the part

Clean with Air blower
1 Operating --- Once in Year
2
Mechanism Apply PTFE grease or its equivalent
Apply PTFE grease or its equivalent
Do Mechanical setting & replace if req.
3 Vacuum Interrupter Vacuum Interrupter should be replaced,
if resistance is not OK
Page 569

Item Frequency
Vacuum Interrupter should be replaced,
if vacuum is not OK or when counter
reaches 20,000 operation
Re-tighten if found loose
4 Auxiliary Switch
Replace if found damaged
Check contacts and joints. Apply
5 Main Power Circuit
petroleum jelly, if required
Check circuit and operation of micro
switches and auxiliary switch
6 Control Circuit Replace if required.
Replace fuse if required
Blow dust by Air blower
7 Panel cubical
Replace if required.
Measurement of Clean with Air blower & clean the
8
Insulation resitance accessible parts by dry lint free cloth.
Clean the relay
9 Protection Relay
If not found OK , replace it.
SF6 Gas Medium
10 Replace Interputer, if required
Interputer
Top up the oil level
Oil medium
11 Sealing of oil leakage
Interputer
Filter the oil & replace if required.
Take suitable action if earth resistance is
high
12 Earth resistance
If found damage, replace/repair the earth
strip.
Clean with air blower & clean the
accessible parts by dry lint free cloth.
Apply PTFE grease, Beacon Q2 grease
LT / Starter Panel
1 Air Circuit Breaker or its equivalent Once in Year

Take necessary action if not found OK
2 Take necessary action if not found OK
2 MCCB Once in Year
3 Soft-Starter & its Tighten if found loose Monthly
Page 570

Item Frequency
cubical Take necessary action if not found OK
Clean the contact by using smooth
Emery paper or CRC spray
4 Contactor Take necessary action if not found OK
If megger value not achieved, placed for
heating &revarnishing if req.
5 Auto-Transformer Filter the oil & replace if required. Yearly
Replace if not found OK
6 Capacitor Replace if not found OK
Take necessary action if not found OK Monthly
7 Panel cubical
high
8 Earth resistance Yearly
strip.
Clean the bushing & replace if found
damage
1 Bushing Sealing the oil leakage
Re-tighten if found loose Half Yearly
If not found OK replace it.
2 Tap changer Switch
Sealing the oil leakage
3 Transformer Oil Filter the oil & replace if required. Yearly
Transformer
4 Gasket joint Sealing the oil leakage

3 Replace if found damage
Breahter& Silica
5 The old silicagel may be reactivated. If
gel Half Yearly
silicagel is pink replace it by new.
If not found OK, do filtration or
6 Winding reinsulating/revarnishing the winding
Replace fuse/connector if required Yearly
high
7 Earth resistance Yearly
strip.
Page 571

Item Frequency
Clean with compressed air & clean
1 Terminal Box theaccessible parts by dry lint free cloth.
Motor
4 Monthly
If megger value not achieved, placed for
2 Winding
heating &revarnishing if req.
3 Earthing Strip Replace if not found OK
4 Heater
1 Terminal Tighten if found loose
LT / HT Cable
2 Cable Insulation Take necessary action if not found OK

5 Once in Year
3 Earthing Strip
1 Terminal/ Jumper Tighten if found loose
Clean with dry lint free cloth.
2 Insulator
Replace, if damage found
Outdoor Yard

3 GOD switch
6 Take necessary action if not found OK Once in Year
4 Drop out Fuse Take necessary action if not found OK
5 Earthing Strip high
strip.
1. Physical cleaning,
2. Physical condition of sensor,
7 Flowmeter Bi-monthly
3. Display checking of Indicator
4. Gland and cable connection checking
8 LOH / ROF meters Monthly
3. Display checking of Indicator,
4. Cable connection checking
9 Level Indicator Monthly
10 Pressure Transmitter Monthly
Page 572

Item Frequency
1. Physical cleaning of panel, JB panel
2. Indicating lamps checking,
3. Communication failure checking
11 SCADA Panel Bi-monthly
through display,
4. UPS checking ensuring its online
connectivity.
1. General Cleaning
2. Cable Lugs Tightening
3. Contactors
4. Fuse Unit
12 MCC Panel Monthly
5. Bus bars
6. Meters
7. ON/OFF Switch
8. Check of Earthing
1. General Cleaning
3. Contactors
4. Fuse Unit
5. Bus bars
13 APFC Panel 15 days
6. Meters
7. ON/OFF Switch
9. Relay operation checking in
automode
1. General Cleaning
3. Bypass Contactor operation checking
4. Fuse Unit
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) /
14 5. Bus bars 15 days
Soft Starter
6. Meters
7. ON/OFF Switch
9. Parameter setting
1. General Cleaning
3. DO Fuse Unit
15 GOAB switch structure 4. GOAB Switch alignment Monthly
6. Lightening arrestor checking
7. CTPT terminal testing
Lab Instruments
(Major)
1. General Cleaning
2. Display & Reading Error Checking
16 1 pH meter against measurement range Monthly
3. Calibration with 4.0 and 7.0 Standard
(Buffer solution)
Page 573

Item Frequency
1. General Cleaning
2 TDS meter against measurement range Monthly
3. Calibration with 500 ppm NaCl
Standard
1. General Cleaning
3 Turbidity meter against measurement range Monthly
3. Calibration with <0.1 NTU, 20 NTU,
100 NTU solution (Cal. Standard)
1. General Cleaning
against measurement range
4 Spectrophotometer 3. Lamp Intensity through system self Monthly
calibration check
4. Filter assembly alignment through
system self calibration check
1. General Cleaning
5 DO meter Monthly
3. Calibration (Air calibration)
1. General Cleaning
6 Pocket Colorimeter Monthly
3. Calibration with ampules
1. General Cleaning
7 COD reactor Monthly
1. General Cleaning
8 BOD incubator Monthly
3. Relay checking and setting
4. Compressor checking
1. General Cleaning
9 Water Still Monthly
3. Cleaning of heating coil for removal
of scale / deposit
1. General Cleaning
2. Reading Error Checking against
10 Online pH meter measurement range Monthly
3. Calibration with 4.0 and 7.0 Standard
(Buffer solution)
1. General Cleaning
11 Online TDS meter measurement range Monthly
3. Calibration with 500 ppm NaCl
Standard
Page 574

Item Frequency
1. General Cleaning of sensor
12 Online DO meter Monthly
measurement range
3. Calibration (Air calibration)
1. General Cleaning
Online Turbidity
13 against measurement range Monthly
meter
3. Calibration with <0.1 NTU, 20 NTU,
100 NTU solution (Cal. Standard)
Page 575

32. DIRECTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR PRICE-BID
1.1 S.M.C.proposes following works at existing sewage treatment plant at Dindoli.
Design , Construction , Erection , Testing and commissioning of (i) Augmentation of
existing Sewage Pumping Station, (ii) Augmentation of existing 66 MLD up to 167
MLD Capacity STP (iii) 40 MLD net Output TSTP to generate Industrial grade
Water including operation and maintenance of all the above (i), (ii) and (iii) for 10
Years Period, Under SMART CITY , Surat
1.2 The general scope of work for the proposed augmentation of existing Sewage Treatment
Plant under present tender notice includes Design, Construction, Erection, Testing and
Commissioning for the augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD Sewage
treatment plant with Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP
including the cost of all the labour, materials, equipments, instruments, tools required for
civil, electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, piping etc. & all other types of works for
the total completion of the project on turn-key basis. The detailed scope of work,
specifications etc. are described in the Chapter 18 & 19 of Technical Bid of the tender.
The Contract for the work is a complete one for labour, material and workmanship with
contractor's overhead and profit including all temporary works and the provision and use
of all construction equipments, tools, tackles, etc. The contractor shall make his own
arrangements for all the materials and equipments required for the due performance of the
contract. Cost of all types of materials/ equipments/ machineries/ tools/ items including
cement, steel (reinforcement as well as structural) all types of pipes etc. & all types of
labor required for the completion of the project shall be included in the Lumpsum. Tender
Amount for the proposed work. Their purchase as per approved vender list given in the
tender, their "Testing & Inspection" prior to procurement at site and then construction/
erection/ installation/ laying will be in the contractor's scope.
The lump sum price quoted by the contractor for the turnkey project of the proposed
augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD Sewage treatment plant with Biogas
based power plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP shall be deemed to have
included all the statutory levies / taxes / duties etc. and any other local taxes, sales tax &
VAT etc. prevaling for all the goods, items, raw materials, finished goods, machineries,
equipments, valves, pipes, instruments, cables or any other materials to be used for the
proposed work. If any new taxes / service tax is levied by the Central or State
Governmnet during the period of implementation of complete project / contract, it shall
be reimbursed at actual to the successful contractor on submission of proof for the same.
The service tax on O&M contract only shall be paid separately to the contractors at the
prevailing rate during the O&:M period, if applicable at the time of contract.
The Terminal Points of Scope of Work for the tun-key project of proposed augmented 39
MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD Sewage treatment plant with Biogas based power plant
and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP are described in Technical Bid of tender. The
tenderer shall acquaint himself with the access to site, other site conditions, availability
of local facilities such as transport, materials, labour and shall quote his tender
accordingly. The tenderer's lumpsum price shall take into account all the above in this
regard for the entire period of the contract.
Page 576

1.3 The drawing enclosed with this tender shows the layout and hydraulics of existing 66
MLD capacity STP. The bidder shall submit the layout plan & flow diagram as per the
treatment process / design requirements.
The sucessful tenderer shall have to prepare and submit all the details, design & drawings
for proposed augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD Sewage treatment plant
with Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP, after evaluation
of tender. Before starting of any construction activities including excavation etc., layout
plan, hydraulic flow diagram, P&I diagram & G.A. drawings of all the units of the plant
with design calculations shall have to be prepared and submitted by the contractor for
approval to S.M.C. After getting the approval for the same from S.M.C., the contractor
shall submit structural (RCC/steel) drawings with design calculations for approval to
S.M.C.
1.4 NOTE: THE BIDDERS ARE ADVISED TO READ THIS CLAUSE CAREFULLY
BEFORE QUOTING THE PRICE FOR THIS TENDER.
Turn-key price of the tender is asked for the augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167
MLD Sewage treatment plant with Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output
capapcity TSTP. The bidder is required to go through the details of the given treatment
process in the Chpater 16 and 17 of the Technical Bid and then looking to the given raw
sewage data and required secondary treated sewage parameters as per the tender
requirements the tenderer has to submit the tender along with the “PART-B:
TECHNICAL BID” with supporting drawings/details etc. For this option, the bidder is
required to quote his Lump-sum price in the online Price-Bid.
1.5 The general scope of work for the proposed augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167
MLD Sewage treatment plant with Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output
capapcity TSTP under present tender includes Design, Construction, Erection, Testing
and Commissioning including the cost of all the labour, materials, chemicals,
equipments, instruments, tools required for civil, electrical, mechanical, instrumentation,
piping etc. & all other types of works for the total completion of the project on turn-key
basis. The detailed scope of work, specifications etc. are described in this tender in
Technical Bid.
Cost of all types of materials/ equipments/ machineries/ tools/ items including cement,
steel (reinforcement as well as structural) all types of pipes etc. & all types of labor
required for the completion of the project to be included in the tendered amount for the
proposed work. Their purchase as per approved vender list given in the tender and
construction/ erection/ installation/ laying will be in the contractor's scope.
Further, detailed scope of work includes Operation & Maintenance Contract for
the augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD Sewage treatment plant with
Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity TSTP for a period of
10 (Ten) years from the date of commissioning of the plant.
In the Operation & Maintenance Contract of ten years for the augmented 39 MLD SPS,
augmented 167 MLD Sewage treatment plant with Biogas based power plant and 40
MLD net output capapcity TSTP, only electricity as per the requirement will be supplied
Page 577

from Surat Smart City Development Limited. Rest all the expenses pertaining to the
treatment as per the specified parameters described in Chapter 17 of Technical Bid of
tender, operation & maintenance of the proposed plants as described in detail in
Chapter-29 of Technical Bid, including cost of chemicals, consumables, major and minor
spares, repairing, modification and replacement etc. as per the given specifications &
required quantity during the period of ten years shall be borne by the contractor.
The tenderer shall have to quote his lumpsum price for the proposed work at the
specified places in this volume of the tender (i.e. Price-Bid). The prices quoted must be
fixed & firm for the total project period and they should be inclusive of all taxes, excise
duty, work contract tax, octroi, VAT and service tax etc. If any taxes is levied by the
Central or State Governmnet during the period of implementation of complete project, it
shall be reimbursed at actual to the successful contractor on submission of proof for the
same. The service tax on O&M contract only shall be paid separately to the contractors at
the prevailing rate during the O&:M period.
1.6 No `D' or `C' from will be issued by the Surat Smart City Development Limited and
hence as such Sales Tax for all the materials/ items required as per the tender must be
included in the prices quoted by the bidder.
1.7 GUIDELINES TO BIDDER :
1.8.1.The selected bidder will furnish the payment breakup for individual items of works for
milestone payment towards monthly RA bill, for the approval of SMC.
1.8.2.The payment for R.A.Bills of civil structures shall be made only as per the terms of
payment.
1.8.3.For Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation, SCADA, online equipments & Piping

works, the bidders shall have to submit the detailed break-up alongwith the price-bid
offer for facility of varifications of materials / equipments received in piece meal and for
payment of R.A.Bills. Total amount for all these items should individually match with the
prices quoted in the Price Schedule by the bidder.
1.8.4.The drawings attached with the tender documents are tentative and only for the general
guidance of the bidder. The bidder shall submit the layout plan & hydraulic flow diagram,
as per the treatment process / design suggested by him with the Technical-Bid of the
tender.
1.8.5.The successful tenderer shall have to submit all drawings pertaining to civil, mechanical,
electrical, instrumentation, interconnecting piping, etc. with respect to tender
specification for approval. In case of descripency between approved drawing and tender
specification, tender specification will be superceded. Moreover if the Engineer-in-
charge desires any modification required to be done for smooth and efficient running of
the plant and considering engineering point of view in overall planning in the system, the
contractor is bound to do the same without any extra compensation.
1.8.6.The rates shall be quoted only at the specified places in Price-bid.
Page 578

1.8 EVALUATION OF TENDER (PLEASE READ CAREFULLY):
1.9.1. SMC will first open the qualification bids of all the tenderer those are able to submit the
tender in time as per the time schedule, in the presence of the bidders or their authorized
representatives who choose to attend on the prescribed place, date and time in the
tender for tender opening. After opening of the qualification bid, SMC will evaluate the
various tenderers for the qualification requirement provided in the tender.
1.9.2. Technical Bid will only be opened by Surat Smart City Development Limited after
evaluation of Qualification-bids submitted by the bidders. The technical bid of those
tenderers will be opened who are qualified for the proposed work as per the
qualification criteria provided in the tender. The Technical Bid and Price bid of the
tenderers who are not qualified for the job, will not be opened and returned to the
tenderer on award of the contract.
1.9.3. Price-Bid will not be opened by Surat Smart City Development Limited until
evaluation of Technical-bids submitted by the bidders is completed and any conclusion
is made. In the evaluation of Technical-bid, all the drawings, details etc., submitted by
the bidders will be scrutinized before opening of price bid.
In the process of evaluation of Technical-bid, if there are be some queries regarding the
details, data, drawings etc., submitted by the bidders with their Technical-bid then the
same will be raised to the bidders and the bidders will have to give the answers / submit
more details etc. accordingly. Surat Smart City Development Limited may appoint a
consultant or expert in the field for the evaluation of details, data & drawings etc.
submitted by the bidders with their Technical-bids. After complete evaluation of
Technical-bids submitted by all the bidders and after any conclusion is made by Surat
Smart City Development Limited to its' own discretion, Price-bids will be opened. If
required, after evaluation of Technical-bids and before opening of original Price-bids,
revised Price-bid may be invited by Surat Smart City Development Limited from any /
all the bidders in view of changes/amendments suggested / required during the course
of evaluation of Technical-Bids / Drawings / Treatment Process etc.
1.9.4. The tenderer shall have to quote, the prices as per the Price Schedule given, considering
the all tender terms,conditions, specification etc. and no deviation of any kind will be
entertained and hence contractor must quote the prices strickly in line with tender
stipulations, specification etc. Deviation offered alongwith tender documents will
become "Cause of Tender's outright rejection”, which must be specifically noted by the
bidders.
1.9.5. Evaluation of tenders will be purely on the basis of Total of Lump sum Prices
quoted for (I) Capital Cost quoted for Sewage Pumping Station, Sewage
Treatment Plant and Tertiary Sewage Treatment Plant on turn-key basis and (II)
10 Years Operation and Maintence Cost for the proposed works, as quoted by the
bidder in the Price Schedules and (III) Energy Cost based on the enegy
consumption data excluding Biogas Power Plant energy data as submitted in the
technical data sheets and will be solely at the discretion of Surat Smart City
Development Limited, without assigning any reasons thereof by tenderer.
Page 579

1.9.6. The tenderer shall have to quote price, at the specified places in Price Schedule of
the tender, for fixed and variable cost of O&M contract for the base year, i.e. 1st
year of O&M only.
The contractor shall be paid price escallaiton for the O&M contract based on RBI
price index (prevailing at particular time during O&M contract). The price
escalation formula for O&M contract is provided in this tender hereunder.
Landuse for the proposed STP project shall not be considered for bid evaluation
purpose.
Price Escalation Formula for Operation and Maintenance work

After successful commissioning of the entire TTP project under this tender, the
operation & maintenance contract will start. As instructed above, the tenderer shall
have to quote the price for all the 10 (ten) year period of O&M contract considering the
base year as 1st year of O&M (1st year). However, the payment of O&M after 1st year
shall be subjecte d to an annual indexation to reflect the annual increase in the O&M.
Such indexation will become applicable and coincide with 31st March every year,
following the first financial year post commissioning as per the formula mentioned
below.
Pn = Pv x (WPIn/WPI1) + Pf x (CPIn/CPI1)
Where,
Pn = Total Price of O&M at nth year of contract.
P1 = O&M Price of the 1st year, which shall be quoted by the tenderer without
considering any escalation, i.e. as per the base year – 1st year
Pv = Rates quoted under variable price for the nth year against the total O&M
price of nth year
Pf = Rates quoted under fixed price for the nth year against the total O&M price
of nth year
WPIn = Wholesale price index as of 31st march of the year the revision is
being made
WPI1 = Wholesale price index as on 31st march of the year of commissioning
CPIn = Consumer price index as of 31st march of the year the revision is
being made
CPI1 = Consumer price index as on 31st march of the year of commissioning
The same formula shall also be applicable for the escalation on spares replacement
during operation and maintenance for the prices quoted under Point 3 in the price bid.
For Spares replacement, consumer price index shall be referred for escalation
Star Rate formula for US dollar rate difference for Membrane Replacement
during O&M
The amount payable to the contractor for the work done shall be adjusted for increase or
decrease in the rates US dollar as under :
Page 580

Price variation for Membrane Replacement by the contractor
This clause shall be applicable only if the UF and RO membranes are imported. The
contractor shall hve to submit an authentic proof of delivery of membrane at any Indian
port. In case, if bidder received / procured the membrane through indian agent / dealer
of membrane vendor, then necessary documentary evidence shall be produce towards
import of membrane. The star rates for UF and RO Membrane to be brought by the
contractor shall be considered as
UF Membrane Rs. 167400/- per nos.
RO Membrane Rs. 52500/- per nos.
The fluctuations in rates of US dollar shall be adjusted in the bills payable to the
contractors as under:
A = B x ($n/$0 – 1) x C
A = Amount payable or recoverable

B = Basic rate of UF / RO membrane as mentioned in the tender.
$n = Closing Rate of US $ declared by RBI, as on previous day of delivery
of Membrane at any Indian Port.
$0 = Closing Rate of US $ declared by RBI, as on previous day of tender
submission.
C = Quantity of UF / RO membrane actually brought by the contractor on
site of work for bonafied use.
The above formula shall be applicable for variation in US dollar rates for UF and
RO Membranes only.
1. No ceiling for escalation for difference of UF and RO Membrane will be applicable.

2. This clause shall be operative from the date of issue of work order and up to the
expiry of original and extended time limit.
3. This formula shall be used individually for individual item for UF and RO
Membrane only for calculating adjustment.
4. If at the time of completion of contract, it is noticed that any membrane brought at
site is in excess of requirement (actual Consumption, then amount of escalation if
paid earlier on such excess quantity of membrane shall be recovered on the basis of
cost indices as applied at the time of payment of escalation or as prevailing at the
time of effecting recovery, whichever is higher.
5. If such materials are not found as per the tender specification, the same shall be
removed by the contractor for which no claim shall be entertained.
1.9.7. Regarding the energy cost, it is to clarify that the electricity will be supplied free
of cost to the contractor for trial run and commissioning and for O&M part only.
However, the tenderer shall have to submit the energy consumption details and
charts for each equipment for augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD
Sewage treatment plant with Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output
capapcity TSTP. The details submitted on energy consumption will be used while
bid evalution and it will used to verify the same during actual operation. The
electricity rate shall be used as Rs. 6/- per kWH for tender evaluation. The excess
Page 581

consumption over and above as specified by the contractor in this tender shall be
deducted from his payment towards O&M at actual.
1.9.8. The operation – maintanance cost also includes the cost of operation and
maintenance of the augmented 39 MLD SPS, augmented 167 MLD Sewage
treatment plant with Biogas based power plant and 40 MLD net output capapcity
TSTP, PLC/SCADA system.
1.9.9. Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of

bids and recommandations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to
tenderers or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until the
award to successful tenderer has been announced. Any effort by a tenderer to influence
the SMC’s processing of tenders or award decisions may result in the rejection of his
tender.
1.9.10. The Surat Smart City Development Limited reserves right to select any offer or to reject
any or all offers without assigning any reasons thereof. Surat Smart City Development
Limited does not bind itself to accept the lowest offer.
Signature Of The Contractor. Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage)
Page 582

33. PRICE SCHEDULE
DESIGN , CONSTRUCTION , ERECTION , TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
(i) Augmentation of existing Sewage Pumping Station, (ii) Augmentation of existing 66
MLD up to 167 MLD Capacity STP (III) 40 MLD NET OUTPUT TSTP TO
GENERATE INDUSTRIAL GRADE WATER INCLUDING OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF ALL THE ABOVE (I), (II) AND (III) FOR 10 YEARS PERIOD,
UNDER SMART CITY , SURAT
SUMMARY
1. Project Cost (Including Capital and O & M Work)
Package Project Description Amount (Rs. )
A CAPITAL WORKS
A-1 Augmentation of existing Dindoli Sewage Pumping Station
including SITC of new pumps and associated
Electrical-Mechanical Works as described under Technical
Bid
A-2 Augmentation of existing Sewage Treatment Plant up to
167 MLD with BNR level treatment and Biogas Based
Power Plant including modification in Civil units and SITC
of new associated Electrical-Mechanical Works as
described under Technical Bid
A-3 New Tertiary Sewage Treatment Plant with 40 MLD net
output capacity
Total - Capital Work:
B Operation and Maintenance of upgraded Sewage
Pumping Station , Sewage Treatment Plant, Bio gas
based power plant and Tertiary Sewage Treatment
Plant including all Civil, Mechanical, Electrical,
Instrumentation and Piping.
B-1.1 Fixed Cost towards Operation and Maintenance upgraded
Sewage Pumping Station, Sewage Treatment Plant, Biogas
Power Plant and Tertiary Sewage Treatment Plant per
month for 1st Year of O&M including manpower, all
major – minor spares with necessary repair and replacement
including UF/RO system etc.*
B-1.2 Fixed Cost towards Operation and Maintenance upgraded
Sewage Pumping Station, Sewage Treatment Plant, Biogas
Power Plant and Tertiary Sewage Treatment Plant per
month for 2nd year and subsequent year (i.e. up to 10th
year) of O&M including manpower, all major – minor
spares with necessary repair and replacement including
UF/RO system etc.*
B-1.3 Variable Cost per MLD towards Operation and
Maintenance of augmented SPS and STP for 167 MLD
flow pattern – per MLD.
B-1.4 Variable Cost per unit (kwh) generated by Operation and
Page 583

Package Project Description Amount (Rs. )
Maintenance of Biogas based power generation plant
including all Civil, Mechanical, Electrical, and
Instrumentation
B-1.5 Variable Cost per MLD towards Operation and
Maintenance of TSTP for 40 MLD net output flow pattern
– per MLD.
* If Biogas power plant is not operated, Rs. 5000/- per day shall be deducted from fixed cost quoted in Point
B-1.1 and B-1.2 above. The variable cost towards Biogas Power Plant shall not be paid.
2. O & M Cost of existing STP till commissioning of augmented SPS and STP
Project Description Amount (Rs. )
Operation and Maintenance of Existing SPS and STP facility with
PLC/SCADA/Instrumentation till commissioning of the augmented
SPS and STP – per Month**
** if Biogas power plant is operated during O&M period, the variable cost as quoted under B-1.4 shall be
paid additionlay to rate quoted under Point 2 above.
Note:
1. Please not that whenever ‘1’ is payable, ‘2’ shall not be payable.
3. Additional Costs**
a. Alkalinity removal for every mg/l of Alkalinity per MLD
b. Apperant Color removal for every Pt.Co. of Color per MLD
c. TDS removal for every mg/l of TDS per MLD
** The parameters under a, b and c above shall be measured at the inlet chamber of TSTP
4. Scheduled Spares for Biogas Based Power Plant, Fixed Film Media and Air Diffusers
Project Description Amount (Rs. )**
st
(i) Biogas Engine Spares for 1 Year* (Not to be quoted as it is to be
covered under Defect liability period) N.A.
(ii) Biogas Engine Spares for 2nd Year*
(iii) Biogas Engine Spares for 3rd Year*
(iv) Biogas Engine Spares for 4th Year*
(v) Biogas Engine Spares for 5th Year*
(vi) Biogas Engine Spares for 6th Year*
(vii) Biogas Engine Spares for 7th Year*
(viii) Biogas Engine Spares for 8th Year*
(ix) Biogas Engine Spares for 9th Year*
(x) Biogas Engine Spares for 10th Year*
(xi) Air Diffuser Spares
(xii) Fixed Film Media replacement
* The contractor shall have to submit the detail break up of price of spares for bio gas engine
and its accessories for each year of O&M contract, before commencement of O&M contract of
10 years, which shall be taken in to consideration for making payment. The contractor shall be
paid only for the spares replaced as per manufacturer’s recommendations. The spare
replacement shall be done in the presence of manufacturer or his local technical representative
Page 584

and the certificate of manufacturer or his local technical representative for satisfactory
replacement of original spares shall be submitted to SMC.
** The tenderer shall have to quote price for the spares, at the specified places in the above
schedule of the tender, for all the 10 years period of O&M contract considering the base year as
1st year of O&M (1st year may be taken as year 2019-20). The tenderer shall ensure that while
quoting Spares price for each year, no price escalation shall be included in the price for that
year. The contractor shall be paid price escalation at actual for the spares supplied based on
RBI price index. The price escalation formula for the spares is same as of O&M contract as
provided in the tender. Prior to working out price escalation for the above spares, for imported
spares, the US dollar / Euro deviation as compared to the date of replacement and date of
bidding will be worked out and accordingly, revised price for the spares for respective year will
be worked out and then price escalation formula will be applied to that rate for necessary
payment.
Signature Of The Contractor. Dy. General Manager and Ex. Engr. (Drainage)
Page 585

34. COST BREAK-UP FOR CAPITAL WORKS
(A-1) Augmentation of existing Dindoli Sewage Pumping Station including SITC of new
pumps and associated Electrical-Mechanical Works as described under Technical
Bid.
% break up of quoted
Break up of (A-1)
capital cost
Mechanical Works 36%
Electrical Works, Instrumentation / PLC/ SCADA 23%
Rising Main 41%
Total: 100%
(A-2) Augmentation of existing Sewage Treatment Plant up to 167 MLD with BNR level
treatment and Biogas Based Power Plant including modification in Civil units and
SITC of new associated Electrical-Mechanical Works as described under
Technical Bid.
Break up of (A-2)
capital cost
Civil Works (New and Modification / repairing / alteration / 32%
upgradation in existing STP)
Mechanical Works (New and Modification) 58%
Electrical Works, Instrumentation / PLC/ SCADA (New and 6%
Modification)
Inteconnecting Piping (New and Modification) 4%
Total: 100%
(A-3) New Tertiary Sewage Treatment Plant with 40 MLD net output capacity.
Break up of (A-3)
capital cost
Civil Works 12%
Piping Works 7%
Mechanical Works 65%
Electrical Works 7%
Instrumentation / PLC/ SCADA 9%
Total: 100%
Payment terms for the proposed capital works (Turn-key job) shall be as follows:
[a] Civil works:

(i) 100% to be paid for respective civil works completed.
[b] Mechanical/electrical/instrumentation/piping work:
(i) 15% to be paid on equipment / instrumentation / pipe purchase order.
(ii) 70% to be paid as and when the complete plant / equipment (alongwith specified
spares) is received at site.
(iii) 10% to be paid as the plant/equipment is installed.
(iv) 5% to be paid after one month satisfactory trial run of the plant.
[c] In all above payments vide Runnig Bills for [a] and [b] above, 2% S.D. and 5%
Retention money shall be retained and released as described under Memorendum
Page 586

Note:-
[1] The contractor shall specifiy in his offer the details of civil, mechanical, electrical,
instrumentation, Online equipments, interconnecting piping works together with the
cost of break-up for facility of verification of materials received in piece meal.
Itemwise breakup of online equipments shall be given separately by contractor with
Price-Bid.
[2] Planning for the procurement of materials / equipments must be done in consultation
with Surat Surat Smart City Development Limited for which barchart must be got
approved and manufacturer/suppliers must be intimated accordingly. Testing &
Commissioning of all the materials / eqipments / pipes / valves etc. prior to delivery at
site shall be carried out as described in Technical Bid.
[3] Erection and commissioning of the equipment must be done in presence of

manufacturer's representative. Manufacturer's drawing etc. must be got approved prior
to supply/erection.

Page 587

35. TENDERER'S/CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE
I / We hereby declare that I/We have examined the site condition alongwith existing
infrastructure facilities like road transport facility and other utilities available etc. and persued
in detail & examined closely the specifications and intents and contents of the tender
documents, including all enclosed drawings, annecures, reports, datas etc.
I/ We have examined the conditions of the existing STP facility including all civil, mechanical,
electrical, PLC/SCADA, instrumentations system and accordingly, I / We have quoted the
price for smooth running of the plant to achieve the desired results as provided in the tender.
I/We agree to be bound by and comply with all tender specifications, terms, conditions,
stipulation etc. and confirm that offer given in this tender is strickly in line with the scope of
work, specifications & Terms & Conditions of the tender.
I/We certify that I/We have inspected the location of the proposed work before quoting my/our
rates. I/We have also inspected the quarries and borrow areas and satisfied myself/ ourselves
regarding the quality, quantity, availability and transport facilities for construction materials
such as earth, stone, sand, cement, steel, plants and equipments etc. through the network of
available roads and path ways required for the work.
Further, in the event of any deviation, I understand that my/our offer will be summarly rejected.
I/We also confirm that in the event of order, I/We will furnish all required technical details,
layout, hydraulic flow diagram as per the requirement of Surat Smart City Development
Limited.
Signature & seal of Tenderer/Contractor

Name :-
Address :-
Page 588

Date :-
Page 589

36. FORMAT FOR BANK GUARANTEE
To,
Chairman,
Surat Smart City Development Limited,
Surat – 395003.
Dear Sir,
GUARANTEE NO._______________________________
AMOUNT OF GUARANTEE:__________________________
GUARANTEE COVER FROM:- ________________to ____________.
LAST DATE FOR LOGEMENT OF CLAIM:- ______________.
This deed to guarantee executed by the Bank of ______________________________,

(hereinafter referred to as “The Bank”) in favour of Surat Smart City Development Limited, Surat.
(hereinafter referred to as “The Beneficiary”) for an amount not exceeding
Rs.________________(Rupees ______________________) at the request
of_________________________ (name of Bidder),
____________________________________ (address) (hereinafter referred to as “The
Bidder”). This guarantee is issued subject to the condition that the liability of the Bank under
this Guarantee is limited to a maximum of Rs. __________________
(Rupees_______________________). The Guarantee shall remain in full force up to under this
Guarantee served on the Bank on or before ______________ SUBJECT TO AS AFORSAID,
Surat Smart City Development Limited, Surat.
Whereas, (Bidder) ________________________ (hereinafter called “The Bidder”) has

submitted his bid Dtd.___________ for the Work of
_________________________________________ against Tender Notice no.. GM (Drainage
& SWM)/SSCDL/ABD(6B & 7)/1/2016-2017. (hereinafter call “The Bid”).
KNOW ALL MEN by these present that we, Bank of ________________, ___________
(hereinafter called “The Bank”) are bound unto Surat Smart City Development Limited, Surat,
(hereinafter called “The Employer”) in the sum of Rs.____________
(Rupees_______________________) for which payment well and truly to be made to the said
Employer, the Bank binds, himself, his successors and assigns by these presents sealed with the
common seal of the said Bank this (Date)______________.
Page 590

THE CONDITIONS OF obligations are:
1. If the Bidder withdraws his Bid during the period of bid validity.
2. If the Bidder, having been notified of the acceptance of his bid by the Employer
during the period of bid validity.
a) Fails or refuse to execute the Contract Agreement in accordance with tender

documents, if required; or
b) Fails or refuse to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with
tender documents;
We undertake to pay to the Employer up to above upon receipt of his first written demand,
without the Employer having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the
Employer will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him owing to the occurrence of
one or both of two conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions.
This guarantee will remain in full force up to …………, or as it may be extended by the
Employer, notice of which extension (s) to the Bank is hereby waived. Any demand in respect
thereof should reach the Bank not later than the above date.
Notwithstanding anything-contained hereinabove our liability under this guarantee is restricted

to Rs. ___________ (Rupees______________________). Our guarantee shall remain in full
force until ………….. Unless a demand or claim under the guarantee is received by us in
writing on or before …………… all your rights under the said guarantee shall be forfeited and
we shall be relived and discharged from all liabilities there under.
Date:___________________.
Signature of the Witness
Name of Witness
Address of Witness
Seal of the Bank
Authorised Signatory of Bank
Page 591

37. DRAWINGS
Page 592

Technical Bid Dindoli r3 Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Bid Dindoli r3 Part 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Bid Dindoli r3 Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The direction of travel of the actuator may be reversed without first stopping the unit; this

facility being available in either the “Local” or “Remote” mode.

JAMMED VALVE PROTECTION:

ESD (EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN):

ANTI HAMMER PROTECTION:

TESTS AND INSPECTION:

The following drawing shall be submitted approved during detail engineering.

FOLLOWING TO BE SUPPLIED/SUBMITTED AFTER THE AWRD OF

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

ITEM NO.7 : AIR BLOWERS FOR DIFFUSED AERATION SYSTEM

SCREW TYPE AIR BLOWER

Air blower shall consist of the following accessories:

¾ Screw Blower with special coating screws.

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

Material of construction of various part of the air blower shall be as under:

Casing Cast Iron UNI-EN 1651 G250

Detailed Technical Specification:

5) Lubrication System: Splash Lubrication system to be used in Bowers. Should simple,

6) Inlet and Discharge Silencers :

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

Possibility of RS485 Modbus communication of Data

TURBO AIR BLOWER

Air blower shall consist of the following accessories:

¾ Single / Multi stage Centrifugal Turbo Blower

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

Detailed Technical Specification:

A. Each blower should come with enclosure.

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

1.03 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL (LCP)

1.04 SURFACE PREPERATION AND SHOP PAINTING

1.05 FACTORY PERFORMANCE TESTING

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

1. System Description: For the purposes of determining overall power consumption

ITEM NO.8 : SUBMERSIBLE TYPE PUMPS

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

The pump parameters of the submersible pump shall be as follows

The materials of construction for submersible pumps shall be as follows:

Material test certificates shall be furnished by the contractor

a Induction Motor (Submersible Pump)

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

The power rating of the motor shall be larger of the following:

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

ITEM NO. : 9 : C.I. FITTINGS & SPECIALS

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

ITEM NO. : 10 CAST IRON ADJUSTABLE DISMANTLING JOINT

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

ITEM NO .: 11 : DOUBLE ACTING KINETIC AIR VALVE WITH ISOLATION

ITEM NO.: 12 : CHLORINATION SYSTEM

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

Each Chlorinator should consist of:

¾ Remote Vaccume regulator

ITEM NO. 12 : CENTRIFUGE – MECHANCAL DEWATERING SYSTEM

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

Centrifuge shall work on mechanical sedimentation principal. Centrifuge shall have

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

BACK DRIVE SYSTEM

TECHNICAL DATA OF CENTRIFUGE AND ITS ACCESSORIES

SURAT SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT LIMITED

C. Poly electrolyte dosing pump

C. Poly dosing tank dimension